GPS Hemisphere GNSS Technical Reference Guide V1.09

User Manual:

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 586

DownloadGPS-Hemisphere GNSS Technical Reference Guide V1.09
Open PDF In BrowserView PDF
Hemisphere GNSS
Technical Reference
Manual
Current Version: v1.09

January 8, 2018

Table of Contents

SBAS Automatic Tracking ................................................................................................ 10
SBAS Performance .......................................................................................................... 11
WAAS .............................................................................................................................. 11
WAAS DGPS ................................................................................................................... 12
WAAS Signal Information ................................................................................................. 14
WAAS Reception ............................................................................................................. 15
WAAS Coverage .............................................................................................................. 16
Radiobeacon Overview .................................................................................................... 20
Radiobeacon Range......................................................................................................... 21
Radiobeacon Reception ................................................................................................... 22
Radiobeacon Antenna Location ....................................................................................... 22
Radiobeacon Coverage.................................................................................................... 23
Atlas Overview ................................................................................................................. 24
Atlas Signal Information ................................................................................................... 25
Atlas Reception ................................................................................................................ 26
Atlas Automatic Tracking .................................................................................................. 27
Atlas Receiver Performance ............................................................................................. 28
Crescent Base Station Overview ...................................................................................... 29
Crescent Base Station Startup ......................................................................................... 30
Crescent Base Station Calibration .................................................................................... 31
Crescent Base Station Performance ................................................................................ 32
About Firmware ................................................................................................................ 53
Using RightARM to Load Firmware .................................................................................. 54
Subscribing to an Application ........................................................................................... 59
Interpreting the $JK 'Date'/Subscription Codes................................................................. 61
Understanding Additive Codes ......................................................................................... 62
Comparing the JI and JK Responses ............................................................................... 64
Eclipse II Subscription Codes ........................................................................................... 65
Determining the Receiver Type and Current Application .................................................. 72
'THIS' Port and the 'OTHER' Port ..................................................................................... 74
Enabling Database Mode ................................................................................................. 77
Performance in Database Mode ....................................................................................... 77
Available Production Configuration Settings ..................................................................... 77
Enabling and Disabling Ethernet ...................................................................................... 78
Enabling Ethernet Services .............................................................................................. 78
Message Structure ......................................................................................................... 101
Messages....................................................................................................................... 101
JASC Command Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 115

JASC,CMR Command ....................................................................................................................................................... 116
JASC,D1 Command ........................................................................................................................................................... 117
JASC,DFX Command ........................................................................................................................................................ 119
JASC,GL Command .......................................................................................................................................................... 120
JASC,GA Command .......................................................................................................................................................... 122
JASC,GQ Command .......................................................................................................................................................... 124
JASC,GN Command .......................................................................................................................................................... 126
JASC,GP Command .......................................................................................................................................................... 127
JASC,INTLT Command ..................................................................................................................................................... 129
JASC,PASHR Command ................................................................................................................................................... 130
JASC,PSAT,ATTSTAT Command ..................................................................................................................................... 132
JASC,PSAT,BLV Command .............................................................................................................................................. 133
JASC,PSAT,FVI Command ............................................................................................................................................... 134
JASC,PSAT,RTKPROG Command ................................................................................................................................... 135
JASC,PSAT,RTKSTAT Command..................................................................................................................................... 137
JASC,PSAT,VCT Command .............................................................................................................................................. 138
JASC,PTSS1 Command .................................................................................................................................................... 139
JASC,ROX Command ........................................................................................................................................................ 141
JASC,RTCM Command ..................................................................................................................................................... 142
JASC,RTCM3 Command ................................................................................................................................................... 143
JASC,VIRTUAL Command ................................................................................................................................................ 145
JATT ................................................................................................................................................................................... 146
JATT Command Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 146
JATT,COGTAU Command................................................................................................................................................. 147
JATT,CSEP Command ...................................................................................................................................................... 148
JATT,EXACT Command .................................................................................................................................................... 149
JATT,FLIPBRD Command................................................................................................................................................. 150
JATT,GYROAID Command ............................................................................................................................................... 151
JATT,HBIAS Command ..................................................................................................................................................... 153
JATT,HELP Command ...................................................................................................................................................... 154
JATT,HIGHMP Command .................................................................................................................................................. 155
JATT,HRTAU Command.................................................................................................................................................... 156
JATT,HTAU Command ...................................................................................................................................................... 158
JATT,LEVEL Command..................................................................................................................................................... 159
JATT,MOVEBASE Command ............................................................................................................................................ 160
JATT,MSEP Command ...................................................................................................................................................... 161
JATT,NEGTILT Command ................................................................................................................................................. 162
JATT,NMEAHE Command................................................................................................................................................. 163
JATT,PBIAS Command ..................................................................................................................................................... 164

JATT,PTAU Command ...................................................................................................................................................... 165
JATT,ROLL Command ...................................................................................................................................................... 166
JATT,SEARCH Command ................................................................................................................................................. 167
JATT,SPDTAU Command ................................................................................................................................................. 168
JATT,SUMMARY Command .............................................................................................................................................. 169
JATT,TILTAID Command .................................................................................................................................................. 171
JATT,TILTCAL Command ................................................................................................................................................. 172
JBAUD Command.............................................................................................................................................................. 173
JBIN Command.................................................................................................................................................................. 175
JBOOT ................................................................................................................................................................................ 178
JBOOT Command.............................................................................................................................................................. 178
JBOOT,LBAND Command ................................................................................................................................................ 179
JCONN Command ............................................................................................................................................................. 180
JDIFF .................................................................................................................................................................................. 181
JDIFF Command ................................................................................................................................................................ 181
JDIFF,AVAILABLE Command ........................................................................................................................................... 183
JDIFFX,EXCLUDE Command ............................................................................................................................................ 184
JDIFFX,GNSSOUT Command ........................................................................................................................................... 185
JDIFFX,INCLUDE Command ............................................................................................................................................. 187
JDIFFX,SOURCE Command.............................................................................................................................................. 189
JDIFFX,TYPE Command ................................................................................................................................................... 190
JEPHOUT,PERIODSEC Command ................................................................................................................................... 192
JETHERNET ....................................................................................................................................................................... 193
JETHERNET Command Overview .................................................................................................................................... 193
JETHERNET,MODE ........................................................................................................................................................... 194
JETHERNET,PORTI ........................................................................................................................................................... 195
JFLASH .............................................................................................................................................................................. 196
JFLASH Command Overview ........................................................................................................................................... 196
JFLASH,DIR Command ..................................................................................................................................................... 197
JFLASH,FILE,CLOSE Command ...................................................................................................................................... 198
JFLASH,FILE,NAME Command ........................................................................................................................................ 199
JFLASH,FILE,OPEN Command ........................................................................................................................................ 201
JFLASH,FREESPACE Command...................................................................................................................................... 202
JFLASH,NOTIFY,CONNECT Command ............................................................................................................................ 203
JFLASH,QUERYCONNECT Command ............................................................................................................................. 204
JFREQ Command .............................................................................................................................................................. 205
JATLAS,LIMIT Command .................................................................................................................................................. 206
JFORCEAPP Command .................................................................................................................................................... 209
JGEO Command ................................................................................................................................................................ 209

JI Command ....................................................................................................................................................................... 211
JK Command ..................................................................................................................................................................... 212
JLBEAM Command ........................................................................................................................................................... 216
JLIMIT Command .............................................................................................................................................................. 218
JLXBEAM Command ......................................................................................................................................................... 219
JMASK Command ............................................................................................................................................................. 221
JMODE ............................................................................................................................................................................... 222
JMODE Overview ............................................................................................................................................................... 222
JMODE Command ............................................................................................................................................................. 223
JMODE,BASE Command .................................................................................................................................................. 224
JMODE,BDSOFF Command .............................................................................................................................................. 225
JMODE,FIXLOC Command ............................................................................................................................................... 226
JMODE,FOREST Command .............................................................................................................................................. 227
JMODE,GLOFIX ................................................................................................................................................................. 228
JMODE,GLOOFF Command.............................................................................................................................................. 229
JMODE,GPSOFF Command .............................................................................................................................................. 230
JMODE,GPSONLY Command ........................................................................................................................................... 231
JMODE,L1ONLY Command .............................................................................................................................................. 232
JMODE,MIXED Command ................................................................................................................................................. 233
JMODE,NULLNMEA Command ........................................................................................................................................ 234
JMODE,SBASNORTK Command ...................................................................................................................................... 236
JMODE,SBASR Command ................................................................................................................................................ 237
JMODE,STRICTRTK Command ........................................................................................................................................ 238
JMODE,SURETRACK Command ...................................................................................................................................... 239
JMODE,SURVEY Command .............................................................................................................................................. 240
JMODE,TIMEKEEP Command .......................................................................................................................................... 241
JMODE,TUNNEL Command .............................................................................................................................................. 242
JMSG99 Command ............................................................................................................................................................ 243
JNMEA ............................................................................................................................................................................... 244
JNMEA,GGAALLGNSS Command.................................................................................................................................... 244
JNMEA,PRECISION Command ......................................................................................................................................... 245
JNP Command ................................................................................................................................................................... 246
JOFF ................................................................................................................................................................................... 247
JOFF Command................................................................................................................................................................. 247
JOFF,ALL Command ......................................................................................................................................................... 248
JPOS Command ................................................................................................................................................................ 249
JPRN,EXCLUDE Command............................................................................................................................................... 254
JQUERY ............................................................................................................................................................................. 257
JQUERY,GUIDE Command ............................................................................................................................................... 257

JQUERY,RTKPROG Command......................................................................................................................................... 256
JQUERY,RTKSTAT Command .......................................................................................................................................... 258
JQUERY,TEMPERATURE Command ............................................................................................................................... 261
JRAD Command Overview ............................................................................................................................................... 262
JRAD,1 Command ............................................................................................................................................................. 263
JRAD,1,LAT,LON,HEIGHT Command ............................................................................................................................... 264
JRAD,1,P Command .......................................................................................................................................................... 265
JRAD,2 Command ............................................................................................................................................................. 266
JRAD,3 Command ............................................................................................................................................................. 267
JRAD,7 Command ............................................................................................................................................................. 268
JRAD,9 Command ............................................................................................................................................................. 269
JRAD,10 Command ........................................................................................................................................................... 270
JRTCM3,ANTNAME Command ......................................................................................................................................... 277
JRTCM3,EXCLUDE ............................................................................................................................................................ 278
JRTCM3,INCLUDE Command ........................................................................................................................................... 279
JRTCM3,NULLANT Command .......................................................................................................................................... 280
JRTK................................................................................................................................................................................... 281
JRTK Command Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 281
JRTK,1 Command.............................................................................................................................................................. 282
JRTK,1,LAT,LON,HEIGHT Command ............................................................................................................................... 283
JRTK,1,P Command .......................................................................................................................................................... 284
JRTK,5 Command.............................................................................................................................................................. 285
JRTK,5,Transmit Command .............................................................................................................................................. 286
JRTK,6 Command.............................................................................................................................................................. 287
JRTK,12 Command............................................................................................................................................................ 288
JRTK,17 Command............................................................................................................................................................ 289
JRTK,18 Command............................................................................................................................................................ 290
JRTK,18,BEARING Command .......................................................................................................................................... 291
JRTK,18,NEU Command ................................................................................................................................................... 292
JRTK,28 Command............................................................................................................................................................ 293
JSHOW Command ............................................................................................................................................................. 295
JSHOW,ASC Command .................................................................................................................................................... 297
JSHOW,BIN Command ...................................................................................................................................................... 300
JSHOW,CONF Command .................................................................................................................................................. 301
JSHOW,GP Command ....................................................................................................................................................... 303
JSHOW,THISPORT Command .......................................................................................................................................... 304
JSIGNAL Command .......................................................................................................................................................... 305
JTAU Command Overview ................................................................................................................................................ 311
JTAU,COG Command ....................................................................................................................................................... 312

JTAU,SPEED Command.................................................................................................................................................... 314
PCSI,1 Command (Status Line A, Channel 0 command)................................................................................................. 319
PCSI,1,1 Command (Beacon Status command) .............................................................................................................. 321
PCSI,2 Command (Status Line B, Channel 1 command)................................................................................................. 323
PCSI,3,1 Command (Receiver Search Dump command) ................................................................................................ 325
PCSI,3,2 Command (Ten Closest Stations command) .................................................................................................... 328
PCSI,3,3 Command (Station Database command) .......................................................................................................... 330
PCSI,5 Command (Set Baud Rates command) ................................................................................................................ 333
PCSI,6 Command (Reboot command).............................................................................................................................. 334
PCSI,7 Command (Swap Modes command) .................................................................................................................... 335
Bin1 Message .................................................................................................................................................................... 366
Bin2 Message .................................................................................................................................................................... 369
Bin3 Message .................................................................................................................................................................... 371
Bin5 Message .................................................................................................................................................................... 376
Bin16 Message .................................................................................................................................................................. 380
Bin19 Message .................................................................................................................................................................. 386
Bin35 Message .................................................................................................................................................................. 391
Bin36 Message .................................................................................................................................................................. 394
Bin44 Message .................................................................................................................................................................. 396
Bin45 Message .................................................................................................................................................................. 400
Bin62 Message .................................................................................................................................................................. 402
Bin65 Message .................................................................................................................................................................. 404
Bin66 Message .................................................................................................................................................................. 402
Bin69 Message .................................................................................................................................................................. 404
Bin76 Message .................................................................................................................................................................. 406
Bin80 Message .................................................................................................................................................................. 411
Bin89 Message .................................................................................................................................................................. 413
Bin93 Message .................................................................................................................................................................. 415
Bin122 Message ................................................................................................................................................................ 431

Introduction
The purpose of the GNSS Technical Reference Manual is to serve as a resource for software engineers and system
integrators engaged in the configuration of GNSS receivers. It may also be of use to persons with knowledge of the
installation and operation of GNSS navigation systems.
This reference covers features, commands, logs, and operating modes for a variety of Hemisphere GNSS products: not
all aspects described apply to all products.
Information is provided as follows:
•

Quick Start provides basic information to get you started using your Hemisphere GNSS receiver

•
•
•

GNSS Technology and Platforms provides information on the GNSS engine, GNSS solutions, and GNSS platforms
Receiver Operation introduces general operational features of the receiver, receiver operation modes, and default
operation parameters
Commands and Messages are grouped by their type (General, GNSS, e-Dif, Data, RAIM, etc.) and for each type
the commands or messages are initially listed in a table with a brief description. Each command and message is
then described in detail in separate topics.

•
•

Resources provides resources for additional information
Change History provides a list of all topics updated in a release and a short description of each change

•

Troubleshooting provides troubleshooting advice

Copyright Notice
Hemisphere GNSS Applications
Copyright © Hemisphere GNSS (2018). All rights reserved.
No part of this manual may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system or translated into
any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, magnetic, optical,
chemical, manual or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Hemisphere GNSS.

Topic Last Updated: v1.08 June 21, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 1

Quick Start
This topic provides basic information to get you started using your Hemisphere GNSS receiver.
•

What is my receiver type? Send the JT command.

•

How do I load firmware onto my receiver and why would I do this?
Use RightARM. Loading firmware allows you to run application specific capabilities.

•

What is my current receiver configuration? Send the JSHOW query.
For Vector products send the JATT,SUMMARY query.

•

What commands are supported by my receiver?
Find out what GNSS engine is in your receiver (issue JT command) then go to the Overview topic for
commands supported by that GNSS engine.

•

How do I send a command to my receiver?
Connect receiver to a PC and use a terminal program (such as HyperTerminal) or Hemisphere GNSS'
PocketMax or SLXMon. For more information refer to the User Guide for your product.

•

How do I turn on data messages (such as GPGGA) for a receiver? See Configuring the Data Message Output.

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 2

GNSS Technology and Platforms
GNSS Engine
GNSS Engine Overview
The GNSS engine is always operating regardless of the DGNSS mode of operation. The following sections describe
the general operation of the receiver.

•

Satellite Tracking

•

Positioning Accuracy

•

Update Rates

Both the GNSS and SBAS operation of the receiver module features automatic operational algorithms. When powered
for the first time, the receiver system performs a "cold start," which involves acquiring the available GNSS satellites in
view and the SBAS differential service. To do this, the receiver needs a compatible GNSS antenna connected that offers
a relatively clear, unobstructed view of the sky. While you can often achieve this indoors with an antenna placed against
a window, you may need to place the antenna outside, for example on a roof or a short distance away from the building.
If SBAS is not available in a particular area, an external source of RTCM SC-104 differential correction may be used. If
an external source of correction data is needed, the external source needs to support an eight data bit, no parity and
one stop bit configuration (8-N-1). See also SBAS Overview.

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 3

GNSS Technology and Platforms

Satellite Tracking
The receiver automatically searches for GNSS satellites, acquires the signal, and manages the associated navigation
information required for positioning and tracking. This is a hands-free mode of operation. Satellite acquisition quality is
described as a signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) and the higher the SNR, the better the signal reception quality. SNR
information is provided by the receiver through the use of NMEA 0183 data messages available via its multiple serial
ports.

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 4

GNSS Technology and Platforms

Positioning Accuracy
The receiver is a sub-meter product with 95% horizontal accuracy under ideal conditions.
To determine the positioning performance of the receiver, Hemisphere GNSS gathers a 24-hour data set of positions in
order to log the diurnal environmental effects and full GPS constellation changes. Data sets shorter than 24 hours tend to
provide more optimistic results.
The horizontal performance specification of 95% accuracy is, as stated above, based on ideal conditions. In reality,
obstruction of satellites, multipath signals from reflective objects, and operating with poor corrections will detract from the
receiver’s ability to provide accurate and reliable positions. Differential performance can also be compromised if the
receiver module is used in a region without sufficient ionospheric coverage.
Further, if external corrections are used, the baseline separation between the remote base station antennas can affect
performance.
Since the receiver will be used in the real world, blockage of the line of sight to SBAS satellites is often inevitable. The
COAST function provides solace from obstruction of any differential correction source (SBAS, Beacon, RTCM, Atlas,
RTK, e-Dif) for 30 to 40 minutes depending on the amount of tolerable performance drift. In fact, our receivers will
COAST when differential correction is lost no matter what the differential source is: SBAS, Beacon, RTCM, Atlas,
RTK, or e-Dif.
The estimated positioning precision is accessible through the use of NMEA 0183 command responses as described
Commands and Messages.
Because the receiver cannot determine accuracy with respect to a known location in real time (so is traditionally
performed in post-mission analyses), the precision numbers are relative in nature and are only approximates.

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 5

GNSS Technology and Platforms

Update Rates
The update rate of each NMEA 0183 and binary message of the receiver can be set independently with a maximum that
is dependant upon the message type. For example, some messages have a 1 Hz maximum while other messages have
a 20 Hz maximum. The higher update rates, such as 20 Hz, are an option and can be obtained at an additional cost.
Higher update rates are valuable for applications where:

•
•
•
•
•

Higher speeds are present such as in aviation
You have manual navigational tasks such as in agricultural guidance
You have an automated or autonomous navigational task such as in robotics or machine control Keep the following
in mind regarding message rates:
Some messages can only be OFF or ON (0 or 1Hz) Example: $JASC,RTCM3,1
Some messages can only be 0 or 1 Hz, but will come out once first, then only if they change Example:
$JASC,BIN95,1

•
•

Messages that are available at other rates can be set to rates SLOWER than 1 Hz (see Note 1 below)
Example: $JASC,GPGGA,0.1

•
•

If the receiver is subscribed to 10 or 20Hz, the receiver can log at rates FASTER than 1 Hz (see Note 2 below)
Example: $JASC,GPGGA,5

Note 1: Slower than 1 Hz.
Use the following guidelines:
To log once
every
seconds

Use
JASC,xxxx,

2
3

0.5
0.3333

4

0.25

5

.2

6

0.1667

7

0.1429

8

0.125

9

0.1111

10

0.1

15

0.0667

20

0.05

25

0.04

40

0.025

50

0.02

100

0.01

120

0.0083

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 6

GNSS Technology and Platforms

Rates not listed above may be possible but may not log on integer seconds. Users should test to see if the results are
acceptable for their application.
Note 2: Faster than 1Hz, if subscribed.
Acceptable rates are 1, 2, 4, 5, 10 or 20 Hz. Using rates other than those listed will result in data appearing in a rate
similar to the rate requested, but the data times will be quantized to 0.05 second resolution. This is due to the receiver’s
internal computing rate of 20 Hz. Time resolution is 0.05 seconds even if the receiver is only subscribed for 10 Hz data.
Quantizing may result in a slightly different number of messages per minute than expected. For example, 3 Hz data
produces approximately 172 messages per minute due to quantizing, instead of the expected 180 messages.
Using rates other than a factor of 20 Hz may result in quantized data. Regardless, the data in the message is referenced
to the time of the message. For example, 3 Hz data may appear at a time of 0.30 seconds; the data is referenced to 0.3
seconds, not 0.333333 seconds.

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 7

GNSS Technology and Platforms

DGNSS Solutions
COAST Technology
Crescent and Eclipse OEM boards feature Hemisphere GNSS’ exclusive COAST technology that enables Hemisphere
GNSS Crescent and Eclipse receivers to utilize old DGPS correction data for 40 minutes or more without significantly
affecting positioning quality.
Note: Crescent refers to Crescent, Crescent Vector

When using COAST, these receivers are less likely to be affected by differential signal outages due to signal blockages,
weak signals, or interference.
Note: To obtain a full set of SBAS corrections, the COAST technology provides the following benefits:

•
•
•
•

Accurate and minimal position drift during temporary loss of differential signal corrections
Sub-meter accuracy up to 40 minutes after differential signal loss
Outstanding performance in environments where maintaining a consistent differential link is difficult
It is standard with Crescent and Eclipse GPS receiver technology

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 8

GNSS Technology and Platforms

SBAS
SBAS Overview
The following topics describe the general operation and performance monitoring of the Space-Based Augmentation
System (SBAS) demodulator within the receiver module:

•

Automatic tracking

•

Performance

•

WAAS

•

WAAS DGPS

•

WAAS Signal Information

•

WAAS Reception

•

WAAS Coverage

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 9

GNSS Technology and Platforms
SBAS Automatic Tracking
The SBAS demodulator featured within the receiver automatically scans and tracks multiple SBAS satellite signals, as
specified by the JWAASPRN command (defaulted to WAAS PRN 135 and 138, suitable for use in North America).
If the default satellites become disabled, the receiver automatically tracks different satellites. This automatic tracking
enables you to focus on other aspects of your application rather than ensuring the receiver is tracking SBAS correctly.
The SBAS demodulator features two-channel tracking that enhances the ability to maintain acquisition on an SBAS signal
satellite in regions where more than one satellite is in view.
This redundant tracking approach results in more consistent signal acquisition in areas where signal blockage of either
satellite is possible.

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 10

GNSS Technology and Platforms

SBAS Performance
SBAS performance is described in terms of bit error rate (BER). The SBAS receiver requires a line of sight to the SBAS
satellite to acquire a signal.
The BER number indicates the number of unsuccessfully decoded symbols in a moving window of 2048 symbols. Due
to the use of forward error correction algorithms, one symbol is composed of two bits. The BER value for both SBAS
receiver channels is available in the RD1 message.
A lower BER indicates data is being successfully decoded with fewer errors, providing more consistent throughput. The
BER has a default no-lock of 500 or more. As the receiver begins to successfully acquire a signal, a lower BER results.
For best operation, this value should be less than 150 and ideally less than 20.
SBAS broadcasts an ionospheric map on a periodic basis and it can take up to five minutes to receive the map on
startup. Until it downloads the SBAS map the receiver uses the broadcast ionosphere model, which can result in a lower
performance compared to when the map has been downloaded. This is the case for any GNSS product supporting SBAS
services.
WARNING: When the map has been downloaded, you may observe a position jump due to the potentialdifference between
the GPS ionospheric model and the ionosphere SBAS map. To minimize the impact of this issue on the use of the receive
wait up to five minutes before using the receiver or issue the JQUERY,GUIDE command to 'ask' the receiver if it feels the
performance will be sufficient for operation.

Topic Last Updated: v11.07 / February 16, 2017

WAAS
The US Federal Aviation Administration developed the Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS) to provide accurate
positioning to the aviation industry. In addition to providing a high quality and accurate service for this industry, the
service is available free of charge to civilians and markets in North America.
Other government agencies have developed similar WAAS-compatible systems for their respective geographic regions.

•
•
•

Europe - the European Space Agency, the European Commission and EUROCONTROL jointly developed the European
Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS)
Japan - the MTSAT Satellite-based Augmentation System (MSAS) was developed by the Japan Civil Aviation Bureau (JCAB)
India - the Airport Authority of India and the Indian Space Research Organization (ISRO) are deploying the GPS Aided Geo
Augmented Navigation system (GAGAN)

These compatible augmentation systems fall into a broader category often referred to as Space Based Augmentation
System (SBAS). The receiver is capable of receiving correction data from all WAAS- compatible SBAS.

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 11

GNSS Technology and Platforms
WAAS DGPS
WAAS differential, and other compatible SBAS, use a state-based approach in their software architecture. These services
take in reference data from a network of base stations and endeavor to model the sources of error directly, rather than
computing the sum impact of errors upon observed ranges. The advantage of this approach is that the error source can be
more specifically accounted for during the correction process.
Specifically, WAAS calculates separate errors for the following:

•
•
•

Ionospheric error
GPS satellite timing errors
GPS satellite orbit errors

Provided that a GNSS satellite is available to the WAAS reference station network for tracking purposes, orbit and timing
error corrections will be available for that satellite. Ionospheric corrections for that satellite are only available if the signal
passes through the ionospheric map provided by WAAS, which covers most of North America.
To improve the ionospheric map provided by WAAS, the receiver extrapolates information from the broadcast ionospheric
coverage map, extending its effective coverage. This allows the receiver to be used successfully in regions that
competitive products may not. This is especially important in Canada for regions north of approximately 54° N latitude and
for outer regions of the Caribbean.
The process of estimating ionospheric corrections beyond the WAAS broadcast map is not as good as having an
extended WAAS map and accuracy degradation may occur.
The map links below depict the broadcast WAAS ionospheric map coverage and the Hemisphere GNSS extrapolated
version, respectively. As the two maps show, the Hemisphere GNSS extrapolated version’s coverage is greater in all
directions, enhancing usable coverage.

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 12

GNSS Technology and Platforms
•

Broadcast WAAS ionospheric correction map

•

Extrapolated WAAS ionospheric correction map

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 13

GNSS Technology and Platforms
WAAS Signal Information
WAAS and other SBAS systems transmit correction data on the same frequency as GPS, allowing the use of the same
receiver equipment used for GPS. Another advantage of having WAAS transmit on the same frequency as GPS is that
only one antenna element is required.

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 14

GNSS Technology and Platforms
WAAS Reception
Since WAAS broadcasts on the same frequency as GPS, the signal requires a line of site in the same manner as
GPS to maintain signal acquisition.
Because of their locations, SBAS satellites may appear lower on the horizon than GPS satellites—it depends on the
geographic position on land. When using WAAS correction data, the receiver can provide the azimuth and elevation of
all satellites to aid in determining their position with respect to the antenna.

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 15

GNSS Technology and Platforms
WAAS Coverage
The figure below depicts the current WAAS coverage provided by the geostationary satellites.

The WAAS satellites are identified by their pseudorange number (PRN). In some areas, two or more satellites
may be visible.
Note: Signal coverage may be present in some areas without either sufficient ionospheric map coverage or
satellites with valid orbit and clock corrections. In such cases performance may be degraded compared to
areas fully covered by the WAAS ionospheric coverage.

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 16

GNSS Technology and Platforms

EGNOS
The European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS) uses multiple geostationary satellites and a
network of ground stations to transmit differential correction data for public use. EGNOS is currently located over the
Atlantic Ocean and Africa.
Because of their location over the equator, these satellites may appear lower over the horizon as compared to GPS
satellites - it depends on the geographic position on the land. In regions where the satellites appear lower on the
horizon, they may be more susceptible to being masked by terrain, foliage, buildings or other objects, resulting in signal
loss. Increased distance from the equator and the satellite's longitude cause the satellite to appear lower on the horizon.
Hemisphere GNSS's COAST technology helps alleviate this problem by maintaining system performance when EGNOS
signal loss occurs for extended periods of time. More information on COAST technology is provided later in this chapter.
The figure below shows approximate EGNOS coverage provided by the satellites. Virtually all of Europe, part of
Northern Africa, and part of the Middle East is covered with at least one signal. Most of Europe is covered by three
signals.

Note: Increased distance from the equator and the satellite’s longitude cause the
satellite to appear lower on the horizon. Although a good amount of signal coverage
is shown in northern latitudes for EGNOS, it may not be usable because of its low
elevation angle and the potential for it to be obstructed. Testing of the system in the
area of its use is recommended to ensure that the signal is sufficiently available.

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 17

GNSS Technology and Platforms

MSAS
The MTSAT Satellite-based Augmentation System (MSAS) is currently run by the Japan Meteorological Agency (JMA).
MSAS provides GPS augmentation information to aircraft through MTSAT (Multi-functional Transport Satellite) located
approximately 36000 km above the equator (geostationary earth orbit).
MSAS generates GPS augmentation information by analyzing signals from GPS satellites received by monitor
stations on the ground. This augmentation information consists of GPS-like ranging signal and correction information
on GPS errors caused by the satellites themselves or by the ionosphere.
The MSAS signal provides accurate, stable, and reliable GPS position solutions to aircraft, resulting in a considerable
improvement in the safety and reliability of GPS positioning. This enables aviation users who are under very strict safety
regulations to use GPS positioning as a primary navigation system.
Visit http://www.jma.go.jp/jma/jma-eng/satellite/ for more information on MSAS and MTSAT.

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 18

GNSS Technology and Platforms

GAGAN
The GPS Aided Geo Augmented Navigation system (GAGAN) is currently under deployment by the Indian government
and is anticipated to be operational by 2011. It operates similarly to the other SBAS regions described previously and will
broadcast on one geostationary satellite (PRN 127) over the Western portion of the Indian Ocean. GAGAN should be
visible in India at elevation angles in excess of 50º above the horizon. This will provide an excellent correction source in
virtually all areas of the subcontinent.

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 19

GNSS Technology and Platforms

Radiobeacon
Radiobeacon Overview
Many marine authorities, such as Coast Guards, have installed networks of radiobeacons that broadcast DGPS
corrections to their users. With increasing use of these networks for terrestrial applications, there is increasing
densification of these networks inland.

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 20

GNSS Technology and Platforms

Radiobeacon Range
The broadcasting range of a 300 kHz beacon depends on a number of factors, including:

•
•
•
•
•
•

Transmission power
Free space loss
Ionospheric state
Surface conductivity
Ambient noise
Atmospheric losses

Signal strength decreases with distance from the transmitting station, mostly due to spreading loss. This loss is a result of
the signal’s power being distributed over an increasing surface area as the signal radiates away from the transmitting
antenna.
The expected broadcast range also depends on the conductivity of the surface over which it travels. A signal will
propagate further over a surface area with high conductivity than over a surface with low conductivity.
Lower conductivity surfaces, such as dry, infertile soil, absorb the power of the transmission more than higher
conductivity surfaces, such as sea water or arable land.
A radio beacon transmission has three components:
1.

Direct line-of-sight wave
The line-of-sight wave is insignificant beyond visual range of the transmitting tower and does not have a
substantial impact upon signal reception.

2.

Ground wave
The ground wave portion of the signal propagates along the surface of the earth, losing strength due to
spreading loss, atmospheric refraction and diffraction, and attenuation by the surface over which it travels
(dependent upon conductivity).

3.

Sky wave
Depending on its reflectance, this skyward portion of the beacon signal may bounce off the ionosphere and
back to Earth, causing reception of the ground wave to fade. Fading—which may cause reception to fade in
and out—occurs when the ground and sky waves interfere with each other. This problem usually occurs in the
evening when the ionosphere becomes more reflective and usually on the edge of coverage areas. Fading is
not usually an issue with overlapping coverage areas of beacons and their large overall range.

Atmospheric attenuation plays a minor part in signal transmission range because it absorbs and scatters the signal. This
type of loss is the least significant of those described.

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 21

GNSS Technology and Platforms
Radiobeacon Reception
Various noise sources affect beacon reception and include:

•
•
•
•
•

Engine noise
Alternator noise
Noise from power lines
DC to AC inverting equipment
Electric devices such as CRTs, electric motors, and solenoids

Noise generated by these types of equipment can mask the beacon signal, reducing or impairing reception.

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

Radiobeacon Antenna Location
When using the internal beacon receiver as the correction source, antenna location will influence the performance of the
internal beacon receiver.
A good location will:

•
•
•
•

Have a clear view of the sky (important for GNSS, WAAS, and Atlas signal reception)
Be at least three feet away from all forms of transmitting antennas, communications, and electrical equipment, to
reduce the amount of noise present at the antenna
Be the best for the application, such as the center line of the vehicle or vessel (the position calculated by the
beacon receiver is measured to the center of the antenna)
Not be in areas that exceed specified environmental conditions

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 1, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 22

GNSS Technology and Platforms

Radiobeacon Coverage
The figure below shows the approximate radiobeacon coverage throughout the world. Light shaded regions denote current
coverage, with beacon stations shown as white circles. The world beacon networks continue to expand. For more current
coverage, visit the Hemisphere GNSS web site at www.hemispheregnss.com.

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 23

GNSS Technology and Platforms

Atlas
Atlas Overview
Atlas services provides correction data to subscribers of the system with the use of a geostationary transponder.
The Atlas service is based on a network of reference stations, located around the world, that communicate GNSS raw
observation data to control centers. At the control centers the GNSS correction data is decoded, processed, and
packaged into a proprietary format for transmission to a geostationary Atlas communications satellite. The satellite
broadcasts the correction information back to earth over a large signal footprint. The signal can be demodulated by any
Atlas enabled receivers.
The Atlas service does not provide RTCM SC-104 formatted data, instead using a proprietary, highly compressed,
correction format. With this service, the positioning accuracy does not degrade as a function of distance to a particular
base station because the data content is not composed of a single base station’s information; it is composed of an entire
network’s information.

Topic Last Updated: v1.08 / June 21, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 24

GNSS Technology and Platforms
Atlas Signal Information
The Atlas signal is a line-of-sight UHF signal that is similar to GNSS. For the Atlas differential receiver to acquire the
signal, there must be a line of sight between the antenna and the geostationary communications satellite.
Various Atlas communications satellites are used for transmitting the correction data to Atlas users around the world.
When the Atlas receiver has acquired an Atlas signal, the elevation and azimuth are available in the menu system to
enable troubleshooting line-of sight problems.
Contact your Atlas service provider for further information on this service.

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 25

GNSS Technology and Platforms
Atlas Reception
Atlas services broadcast at a similar frequency to GNSS and as a result is a line-of-sight system; there must be a line of
sight between the antenna and the Atlas satellite for reception of the service.
Atlas services use geostationary satellites for communication. The elevation angle to these satellites is dependent upon
latitude. For latitudes higher than approximately 55° North or South, the Atlas signal may be blocked more easily by
obstructions such as trees, buildings, and terrain.

Topic Last Updated: v1.07/ February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 26

GNSS Technology and Platforms

Atlas Automatic Tracking
The Hemisphere GNSS Atlas receiver features an automatic mode that allows it to locate the best spot beam if more
than one is available in a particular region. With this function you do not need to adjust the receiver’s frequency. The
receiver also features a manual tune mode for flexibility.
See the JFREQ command for more information on automatic and manual tuning.

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 27

GNSS Technology and Platforms

Atlas Receiver Performance
Atlas receivers provide both a lock indicator and a BER (bit error rate) to describe the lock status and reception quality.
Both these features depend on a line of sight between the antenna and the geostationary communications satellite
broadcasting the Atlas correction information.
Atlas capable Hemisphere GNSS antennas are designed with sufficient gain at low elevation angles to perform well at
higher latitudes where the signal power is lower and the satellite appears lower on the horizon. The BER number
indicates the number of unsuccessfully decoded symbols in a moving window of 2048 symbols. Because of the use of
forward error correction algorithms, one symbol is composed of two bits.
The BER has a default, no-lock value of 500. As the receiver begins to successfully acquire the signal a lower BER
results. For best operation this value should be less than 150 and ideally less than 20.

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 28

GNSS Technology and Platforms

Crescent Base Station
Crescent Base Station Overview
The Crescent receiver with e-Dif subscription can operate in a DGPS base station mode. NMEA 0183 commands need
to be sent to the receiver to enter this mode. These commands may be automatically issued through customized
software or through a simple terminal interface running on a PC, PDA, or data logger. DGPS Base Station Commands
provides detailed information on the commands supported by the base station application.

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 29

GNSS Technology and Platforms
Crescent Base Station Startup
When the receiver running the e-Dif application first starts up, it requires a few minutes to gather enough satellite tracking
information to model the errors for the future. Once commands are sent to put the receiver into base station mode,
corrections will be generated and can be sent via the serial port to rover receivers. In some more challenging GNSS
environments, the time required to model errors can take up to 10 minutes. The receiver must be stationary during this
process and the antenna for the base station must be secured in a stable location.

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 30

GNSS Technology and Platforms
Crescent Base Station Calibration
Base station calibration is the process of modeling the errors at the base station. Calibration can be performed in either a
relative or an absolute sense, depending on positioning needs. Relative positioning provides positions that are accurate to
one another but there may be some offset from the true geographical position.
Calibrating for relative positioning is easier than for absolute position since you are not restricted to using a point with
known coordinates. Calibrating for absolute positioning mode requires placing the GPS antenna at a known reference
location. Care should be taken to use a location that has good sky visibility and is relatively free from obstructions.

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 31

GNSS Technology and Platforms
Crescent Base Station Performance
Base station performance depends primarily on the site location for the base station GNSS antenna. An ideal location
would have no obstructions above the height of the antenna, offering a full 180º by 360º view of the sky. In reality,
obstructions such as trees, vehicles, people, and buildings nearby both block satellite signals and reflect interfering
signals called multipath signals. Multipath degrades the accuracy of the satellite measurements and detracts from the
receiver’s ability to provide accurate and reliable corrections for the rovers.
For a rover to work optimally, a base station should be near by the rover’s area of operation. As distance from the
base to the rover increases, the modeling process cannot tune the solution to the exact environmental conditions at
the rover’s location and the rover’s accuracy will not be as good. Best performance is attained when the distance
from your base to your rover is less than 50 km (30 miles).
Generally, there is little to no advantage to using a base station if it is more than 300 km (180 miles) from the rover.

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 32

GNSS Technology and Platforms

e-Dif
e-Dif - Extended Differential Option for the Crescent Receiver
The Crescent receiver module is designed to work with Hemisphere GNSS’ patented Extended Differential (e-Dif)
software. e-Dif is an optional mode where the receiver can perform with differential-like accuracy for extended periods of
time without the use of a differential service. It models the effects of ionosphere, troposphere, and timing errors for
extended periods by computing its own set of pseudo-corrections.
e-Dif may be used anywhere geographically and is especially useful where SBAS networks have not yet been installed,
such as South America, Africa, Australia, and Asia. Two things are required to enable e-Dif. First your receiver will
require the e-Dif application software to be installed on it. As well, a software key, called a subscription code, is needed
for the receiver to use e-Dif. Both can be installed in the field using a PC computer. See Using RightARM to Load
Firmware if you need to install the application firmware onto your receiver. To install a subscription code, contact
Hemisphere GNSS for a JK command which can be issued to your receiver.
Positioning with e-Dif is jump-free compared to a receiver working with just raw GPS provided the receiver consistently
maintains a lock on at least four satellites at one time. The accuracy of positioning will have a slow drift that limits use of
the e-Dif for approximately 30 to 40 minutes although it depends on how tolerant the application is to drift as e-Dif can be
used for longer periods.
This mode of operation should be tested to determine if it is suitable for the application and for how long the user is
comfortable with its use. As accuracy will slowly drift, the point at which to recalibrate e-Dif to maintain a certain level of
accuracy must be determined.
The figure below displays the static positioning error of e-Dif while it is allowed to age for fourteen consecutive cycles of
30 minutes. The top line indicates the age of the differential corrections. The receiver computes a new set of corrections
using e-Dif during the calibration at the beginning of each hour and modifies these corrections according to its models.
After the initialization, the age correspondingly increases from zero until the next calibration.
The position excursion from the true position (the lines centered on the zero axis are northing [dark line] and easting [light
line]) with increasing correction age is smooth from position to position; however, there is a slow drift to the position. The
amount of drift depends on the rate of change of the environmental errors relative to the models used inside the e-Dif
software engine.

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 33

GNSS Technology and Platforms

Note: You decide how long e-Dif is to function before between calibrations and you should test this operation
mode to determine an acceptable level of performance.

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 34

GNSS Technology and Platforms

e-Dif Rover Mode Operation
Rover mode operation of the Crescent receiver unit with the optional e-Dif application requires NMEA 0183 commands.
These commands may be automatically issued through customized software or through a simple terminal interface
running on a PC, PDA or data logger. See e-Dif Commands for detailed information on the commands supported by the eDif feature.

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 35

GNSS Technology and Platforms

e-Dif Startup
On startup, the receiver with the e-Dif application software running requires a few minutes to gather enough satellite
tracking information to model the errors for the future. And in some environments this can take up to 10 minutes. The
receiver does not have to be stationary for this process but it must be tracking the satellites throughout it. This process of
gathering information and the subsequent initialization of e-Dif is referred to as "calibration."

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 36

GNSS Technology and Platforms

e-Dif Rover Calibration
Rover calibration is the process of modeling the errors at the rover. Calibration can be performed in either a relative or
an absolute sense, depending on positioning needs. Relative positioning provides positions that are accurate to one
another but there may be some offset from the true geographical position. Additionally, unless the same point is used for
all calibrations and its assumed position stored, it is possible for different cycles of e-Dif to have an offset.
Calibrating for relative positioning is easier than for absolute position, since you are not restricted to using a point with
known coordinates. Calibrating for absolute positioning mode requires placing the GPS antenna at a known reference
location. Use this point for subsequent calibrations.

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 37

GNSS Technology and Platforms

e-Dif Rover Performance
The Crescent receiver’s positioning performance is dependant upon the rate at which the environmental modeling of eDif and the environmental errors diverge. The more that e-Dif is able to model the errors correctly, the longer it will
provide reliable and accurate positioning. As there is no way in real time to know the rate of divergence, a rule of thumb
is to set the maximum age of differential to either 30 or 40 minutes, depending on how much error the application is able
to tolerate (or simply recalibrate before 30 to 40 minutes goes by). Hemisphere GNSS testing has shown that relative
accuracy will often be better than 1.0 m 95% of the time after 30 minutes of e-Dif operation.
You should perform testing at your location to determine the level of performance that would be seen on average. When
testing this feature, it is a good idea to look at a number of e-Dif cycles per day, and monitor performance against a
known coordinate and possibly other receivers in autonomous and differential mode. You should do this over a number
of days with different states of the ionosphere.
You can monitor the energy level of the ionosphere based upon the amount of solar flare activityat
http://www.spaceweather.com.

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 38

GNSS Technology and Platforms

L-Dif
L-Dif Local Differential Option
Local differential (L-Dif) is a specialized message type that can be sent only between two Crescent-based receivers.
One receiver is used as the base station and must remain stationary. It is extremely useful to know the coordinates of
the base station position but averaging the position over several days will also suffice. The second receiver is used as
a rover and the messages must be sent either through a cable or over a radio link.

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 39

GNSS Technology and Platforms

L-Dif Startup
On startup, the receiver with the L-Dif running requires several commands to initialize the proprietary messages
that are sent over the air.

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 40

GNSS Technology and Platforms

L-D if Performance
The receiver’s positioning performance in L-Dif mode is dependant upon:

•
•
•

Environment of the base and rover receivers
Distance between them and
Accuracy of the entered coordinates of the base station

Hemisphere GNSS suggests you perform your own testing at your location to determine the level of performance you
would expect on average. When testing this feature, conduct tests of 12-24 hours—in different environments—and
monitor performance against a known coordinate. Do this over a number of days with different states of the ionosphere.
You can monitor the energy level of the ionosphere based upon the amount of solar flare activity at
http://www.spaceweather.com.

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 41

GNSS Technology and Platforms

RTK Overview
Real Time Kinematic (RTK) positioning is the highest form of navigational accuracy for GNSS receivers. Hemisphere
GNSS offers RTK for both Crescent and Eclipse platforms. See RTK commands for more information.

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 42

GNSS Technology and Platforms

Multi-Funcation Application (MFA) Software
Your device may include MFA software that allows you to set the positioning (mode) hierarchy of your device. To verify if
your device contains MFA software send the $JAPP command to the device; the response indicates whether you have
MFA as follows:

•
•

Without MFA (two specific applications listed) Example: $>JAPP,WAASRTKB,AUTODIFF,1,2

With MFA (MFA and one specific application listed) Example: $>JAPP,MFA,SBASRTKB,1,2

The hierarchy is the path your device follows to determine what differential source to use depending on available
sources. The hierarchy is as follows:

1.

RTK

2.

L-band (Atlas)

3.

SBAS

4.

Beacon

5.

External RTCM

6.

Autonomous

If you are running RTK and you lose your RTK radio link, the device defaults to the next highest mode, being either Atlas
high precision service or SBAS (if available). If the new signal becomes unusable, the next mode will be selected (for
example Beacon or External RTCM). Finally, if no correction signals are available, the device defaults to Autonomous.
You can include or exclude specific sources. For example, you can exclude sources that you do not want your device to
use, such as if you want to use only beacon. If you do not exclude the other sources your device may use SBAS instead.
Another example is if you want to exclude Atlas (when you do not have an Atlas subscription) to conserve power. You
include and exclude sources using
the $JDIFFX,INCLUDE and $JDIFFX,EXCLUDE commands, respectively.

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 43

GNSS Technology and Platforms

Post-Processing
Crescent and Eclipse receiver modules can output raw measurement data for post processing applications. The raw
measurement and ephemeris data are contained in the following messages, which must be logged in a binary file:
Observations: Bin 76 (GPS), Bin 66 (GLONASS), Bin 36 (BEIDOU)
Or
Bin 16 (All constellations; required for GALILEO)
Ephemeris: Bin 95 (GPS), Bin 65 (GLONASS), Bin 35 (BEIDOU), Bin 45 (GALILEO)
Time conversion: Bin 94 (GPS), Bin 34 (BEIDOU), Bin 44 (GALILEO)
(Crescent receivers must log Bin 94, 95, and 96 messages for GPS). Depending on the application, the binary data can
be logged to a file and then translated to RINEX at a later time on a PC.
Hemisphere GNSS provides a RINEX translator. It is available by contacting technical support at Hemisphere GNSS;
however, because there is limited ability to store station information in the binary file, developers may consider writing
their own translator. Some code is available for developers but with very limited support. The code should be self-evident
to developers familiar with RINEX and knowledgeable in C language.

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 44

GNSS Technology and Platforms

Hemisphere GNSS Hardware Platforms
Hardware Platforms Overview
Hemisphere GNSS offers the following hardware platforms:

•
•
•

Crescent
Crescent Vector II
Eclipse II

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09 January 8, 2018

Page 45

GNSS Technology and Platforms

Universal Development Kit
The Universal Development Kit allows you to integrate a Hemisphere GNSS OEM board into your design and includes the
following:

•
•
•
•
•

Enclosure
Main carrier board
Set of three adapter boards for use with small form factor Hemisphere GNSS OEM boards
Power cable and AC power supply
Two serial cables - one straight serial cable and one null modem cable for RTK

•

The Universal Development Kit supports the following Hemisphere GNSS OEM boards:
•
Enclosure
•
Crescent
•
Crescent Vector II
•
Eclipse II
•
miniEclipse
•
LX-2 (L-band DGPS and high precision services)

Depending on the Hemisphere GNSS OEM board you purchase with your Universal Development Kit, an Integrator’s Guide is
available for download from the Hemisphere GNSS website at www.hemispheregnss.com (search for Universal Development
Kit).

Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.08/June 21, 2017

Page 46

GNSS Technology and Platforms

Evaluating Receiver Performance
Hemisphere GNSS evaluates performance of the receiver with the objective of determining best-case performance in a
real-world environment. Our testing has shown that the receiver achieves a performance better than 0.6 m 95% of the
time in typical DGPS modes.
The qualifier of 95% is a statistical probability. Manufacturers often use a probability of RMS, one sigma, or one
standard deviation. These three terms all mean the same thing and represent approximately 67% probability.
Performance measures with these probabilities are not directly comparable to a 95% measure since they are lower
probability (less than 70% probability).
Table 1 summarizes the common horizontal statistical probabilities.

Table 1: Horizontal Accuracy Probability Statistics
Accuracy Measure

Probability (%)

rms (root mean square)

63 to 68

CEP (circular error probability)

50

R95 (95% radius)

95 to 98

2drms (twice the distance root)

95

It is possible to convert from one statistic to another using Table 2. Using the value where the 'From' row meets the 'To'
column, multiply the accuracy by this conversion value.

Table 2: Accuracy Conversions
To
From

CEP

rms

R95

2drms

CEP

1

1.2

2.1

2.4

rms

0.83

1

1.7

2.0

R95

0.48

.59

1

1.2

2drms

0.42

.5

.83

1

For example, Product A, after testing, has an accuracy of 90 cm 95% of the time (R95). To compare
this to Product B that has a sub-meter horizontal rms specification of 60 cm:

1.

Select the value from where the 'R95' row and the 'rms' column intersect (to convert to rms). This conversion
value is 0.59.

2.

Multiply the 90 cm accuracy by this conversion factor and the result is 53 cm rms. Compared to Product B’s
60 cm specification of sub-meter rms, Product A offers better performance.

To properly evaluate one receiver against another statistically, the receivers should be using identical correction input
(from an external source) and share the same antenna using a power splitter (equipped with appropriate DC-blocking of
the receivers and a bias-T to externally power the antenna). With this setup, the errors in the system are identical with the
exception of receiver noise.

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 47

GNSS Technology and Platforms
Although this is a comparison of the GNSS performance qualities of a receiver, it excludes other performance merits of a
GNSS engine. The dynamic ability of a receiver should always be compared in a similar way with the test subjects sharing
the same antenna. Unless a receiver is moving, its software filters are not stressed in a similar manner to the final product
application. When testing dynamically, a much more accurate reference would need to be used, such as an RTK system,
so that a "truth" position per epoch is available.
Further, there are other performance merits of a GNSS engine such as its ability to maintain a lock on GNSS and SBAS
satellites. When evaluating this ability, the same GNSS antenna should be shared between the receivers test subjects.
For the sake of comparing the tracking availability of one receiver to another, no accurate "truth" system is required unless
performance testing is also to be analyzed. Again, an RTK system would be required; however, it is questionable how its
performance will fare with environments where there are numerous obstructions such as foliage. Other methods of
providing a truth reference may need to be provided through observation times on surveyed monuments or traversing
well-known routes.
Should you look to compare two RTK systems, determining truth can be very complicated. A rigorous dynamic comparison
of two competing RTK systems should only be attempted by individuals and organizations familiar with RTK and potentially
with inertial navigation equipment. Fortunately, most manufacturer's RTK performance is specified in similar accuracy
values, and in general, RTK accuracy is quite similar across different manufacturers.
Note: Contact Hemisphere GNSS Technical Support for further assistance in developing a test setup or
procedure for evaluation of the receiver.

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 48

Receiver Operation
Receiver Operation Overview
When turned on, the receiver goes through an internal startup sequence. It is, however, ready to communicate immediately.
Refer to the receiver-specific manual for the power specifications of the product.
When its antenna has an unobstructed view of the sky, the receiver provides a position in approximately 60 seconds and
acquires SBAS lock in about 30 seconds more.
Note: The receiver can take up to 5 minutes to receive a full SBAS ionospheric map. Optimum accuracy is
obtained when the receiver is processing corrected positions using complete ionosphere information.

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 49

Communicating with the Receiver
Communicating with Receivers
The receiver module features three primary serial ports (A, B, C) that may be configured independently of each other.
The ports can be configured to output a combination of data types:

•
•
•

NMEA 0183
Hemisphere GPS proprietary binary format
RTCM SC-104

The usual data output is NMEA 0183 messages because these are the industry standard.
Note: If different data types are required to be output from the receiver simultaneously, such as NMEA 0183 and
binary or NMEA 0183 and RTCM SC-104, ensure that the software used for logging and processing of the data
has been designed to correctly parse the different data types from the single stream of data.

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 50

Receiver Operation

NMEA 0183 Messages
NMEA 0183 is a communications standard established by the National Marine Electronics Association (NMEA). NMEA
0183 provides data definitions for a variety of navigation instruments and related equipment such as gyrocompasses,
Loran receivers, echo sounders, and GNSS receivers.
NMEA 0183 functionality is virtually standard on all GNSS equipment available. NMEA 0183 has an ASCII character
format that enables the user to read the data via a receiving device with terminal software.
The following is an example of one second of NMEA 0183 data from the receiver:
$GPGGA,144049.0,5100.1325,N,11402.2729,W,1,07,1.0,1027.4,M,0,M,,010
*61
$GPVTG,308.88,T,308.88,M,0,0.04,N,0.08,K*42
$GPGSV,3,1,10,02,73,087,54,04,00,172,39,07,66,202,54,08,23,147,48,*7 9
$GPGSV,3,2,10,09,23,308,54,11,26,055,54,15,00,017,45,21,02,353,45*78
$GPGSV,3,3,10,26,29,257,51,27,10,147,45,45,,,,,,,,*74
The NMEA 0183 standard allows manufacturers to define proprietary custom commands and to combine data into
proprietary custom messages. Proprietary NMEA 0813 messages are likely to be supported only by specific manufacturers.
All messages and ports can be configured independently (see example below).
Port

Baud
Rate

Messages

A

9600

GPGGA, one every 1
second
GPGSV, one every 5
seconds

B

19200

GPGGA, one every 2
seconds
Bin1, one every 1 second
Bin2, one every 1 second

A selection of NMEA 0183 data messages can be configured at various update rates with each message having a
maximum update rate. A different selection of NMEA 0183 messages with different rates can be configured on another port.
Commands and Messages Overview presents information about the NMEA 0183 interface of the receiver smart antenna.
See Reference Documents for contact information if you need to purchase a copy of the NMEA 0183 standard.
Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

Hemisphere GNSS Proprietary Binary Interface
Hemisphere GNSS proprietary binary messages may be output from the receiver simultaneously with NMEA 0183
messages.
Binary messages are inherently more efficient than NMEA 0183 and would be used when maximum
communication efficiency is required. Some receiver-specific pieces of information are only available through
binary messages, such as raw data for post processing.
Note: If you need to log binary data, make sure the logging software has opened the file as a binary file;
otherwise, data may be lost.
Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 51

Receiver Operation

RTCM SC-104 Protocol
RTCM SC-104 is a standard that defines the data structure for differential correction information for a variety of
differential correction applications. It was developed by the Radio Technical Commission for Maritime services (RTCM)
and has become an industry standard for communication of correction information. RTCM is a binary data protocol and is
not readable with a terminal program. Because it is a binary format and not ASCII text, it appears as "garbage" data on
screen.
The following is an example of how the RTCM data appears on screen:
mRMP@PJfeUtNsmMFM{nVtIOTDbA^xGh~kDH`_FdW_yqLRryrDuh
cB\@}N`ozbSD@O^}nrGqkeTlpLLrYpDqAsrLRrQN{zW|uW@H`z]~aG
xWYt@I`_FxW_qqLRryrDCikA\@Cj]DE]|E@w_mlroMNjkKOsmMFM{ WDw
W@HVEbA^xGhLJQH`_F`W_aNsmMFM[WVLA\@S}amz@ilIuP
qx~IZhTCpLLrYpdP@kOsmMFM[kVDHwVGbA^P{WWuNt_SW_yMs
mMnqdrhcC\@sE^ZfC@}vJmNGAHJVhTCqLRryrdviStW@H_GbA^ P{wxu[k
All Hemisphere GNSS receivers support RTCM v2.x Type 1, Type 5, Type 6, and Type 9 messages for DGPS
positioning.
Hemisphere GNSS receivers do not support RTCM v2.x messages for RTK positioning. However RTCM v3.x
messages (Type 1001 through 1008) are suitable for RTK positioning.

Note: RTCM v2.x is a local area data standard. This means that performance degrades as a function
of distance from the base station when:
Positioning with external connection input to the receiver from an external source or
Outputting corrections from the receiver to another GNSS receiver.
The additional degradation depends on the difference in observed orbit and ionospheric errors
between the reference station and the remote unit. A general rule of thumb is an additional 1 m error
per 100 miles.
This error is often seen as a bias in positioning, resulting in a position offset. The scatter of the receiver
is likely to remain close to constant.

See Reference Documents for RTCM contact information to purchase a copy of the RTCM SC-104 specifications.

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 52

Receiver Operation

Firmware and Subscriptions
Firmware
About Firmware
Hemisphere GNSS products are built on one of three receiver platforms, each of which has specific firmware applications
available.

•
•
•

Crescent - WAAS, e-Dif, Atlas service, L-Dif/RTK base, L-Dif/RTK rover
Crescent Vector - WAAS, RTK rover
Eclipse - WAAS/RTK base, RTK roverAtlas high precisionservices

Some products may require purchasing a subscription code to unlock specific functionality. See Subscription Codes for
more information.
As its name suggests, firmware is somewhere between hardware and software. Like software, it is a computer program
which is executed by a microprocessor or a microcontroller. But it is also tightly linked to a piece of hardware, and has
little meaning outside of it.
Within the context of GNSS, the hardware is the GNSS receiver and it is the receiver’s processor that executes the
firmware. The receiver’s processor supports two simultaneous versions of firmware but only one version operates at a
given time. The two versions—referred to as applications—may have different functionality.
Use the JAPP command to change between two receiver applications.

Topic last updated: v1.07/ February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 53

Receiver Operation
Using RightARM to Load Firmware
RightARM is Hemisphere GNSS software that allows you to load the various GNSS receiver firmware options and
updates as they are provided by Hemisphere GNSS.
To load the firmware:

1.

Download the latest version of RightARM from http://www.hemispheregnss.com.

2.

Install RightARM application on your computer.

3.

Connect the receiver to your computer and power on the receiver.

4.

Double-click the RightARM icon

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

to launch the program. The following screen appears.

Page 54

Receiver Operation

1.

Click the Open Receiver button
or select Receiver > Connect. The Open Receiver
window appears, so you can identify a connected receiver.

2.

Select the Comm Port on your computer to which the receiver is connected, select the 19200 baud rate for the
receiver, and then click OK.
Note: You must set the baud rate to 19200.
When RightARM has successfully connected to the receiver the following message appears in the
lower left corner of the screen.

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 55

Receiver Operation

3.

Click the Programming View button . The Programming View window appears, enabling you to select different
firmware programming options.

4.

Select the Program Type you want to install and then click Select File. The Open window
appears.
Note: Most Hemisphere GNSS receivers have two application locations available for firmware. In this
case, select the Application option under Program Type and follow the remaining steps. Once the
process is complete, you will repeat the process, selecting the Application 2 option when you reach
this step again.

5.
6.

Select the required firmware file from the location where you saved it on your computer and click
Open. "File Loaded" appears in the status window on the Programming View window.

7.

Click the Erase and Program button to erase the firmware that is currently installed on the receiver in the selected
application location and install the newly selected file in its place. "Erasing...Please Wait" appears in the Status field
and a progress bar below this message indicates the programming progress. Once the new firmware has been
successfully loaded on the receiver "Programming Done" appears in the Status field.
Note: Before pressing the Erase and Program button, the Activate Loader check box in the Programming
View window will be selected. After pressing the Erase and Program button, the check box should be
cleared and the Status field should show that the receiver is in loader mode and ready to receive the new
firmware file. If the Activate Loader check box remains selected, turn the receiver off and then back on
again, close and restart RightARM, and then start over at step 5.
WARNING: Do not to interrupt the power supply to the receiver, and do not interrupt the communication
link between the PC and the receiver until programming is complete. Failure to do so may cause the
receiver to become inoperable and will require it to be returned to the factory for repair.

8.

Once the appropriate firmware has been loaded, click the Close button to close the Programming View window.

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 56

Receiver Operation
Note: If a second application needs to be loaded, turn off the receiver, repeating all the steps starting at
step 4, and on step 8 select the Application 2 option from the Program Type field.

9.

Exit RightARM, turn off your receiver, and then disconnect the receiver from your computer.

Topic Last Updated: v1.07/ February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 57

Receiver Operation

Subscriptions Codes
This section covers:
•
•

•

Finding the serial number and inputting a subscription code (e-Dif, RTK, 20 Hz or 10Hz, etc.) into a Hemisphere GNSS
receiver
Viewing the status and interpreting the $JI subscription date codes
The difference between the receiver’s response to the $JK and $JI commands

Topic Last Updated: v1.07/ February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 58

Receiver Operation
Subscribing to an Application
Activating an application code on a Hemisphere GNSS receiver requires the following:

•
•
•
•

Serial communication cable to connect the Hemisphere GNSS receiver to the serial COM port on the computer
Download SLXMon from the www.hemispheregnss.com and install it on your PC or use a generic terminal program
such as HyperTerminal
Load the application to which to subscribe onto the Hemisphere GNSS receiver (see Using RightARM to Load
Firmware)
Purchase the application subscription code from Hemisphere GNSS or an authorized Hemisphere GNSS
representative

To activate the application on a Hemisphere GNSS receiver:

1.

Connect the Hemisphere GNSS receiver to the serial COM port on the computer.
Start SLXMon.

2.

Select File > Connect and then select the appropriate Comm Port and Baud Rate to open communication with the
receiver.

3.

Select Control > View Command Page.

4.

In the Receiver Command Page window type $JAPP in the Message box and then click Send.

5.

Confirm which applications are loaded onto the receiver and the order in which they appear in the Reply box.

Example Response (in Reply box):
$>JAPP,WAAS,DIFF
where WAAS (SBAS, EGNOS, MSAS) is the number one application (or application number 1) and DIFF (same as e-Dif) is the
"other" application (or application number 2)

6.

If DIFF is listed as application number 2 in the $JAPP response then type the following command in the Message box:

$JAPP,O

7.

where 'O' is the "other" application in the example. This swaps the two applications so that DIFF is be the current
application.

8.

Type the following command in the Message box:
$JI
The first number in the response is the serial number of the receiver. Example
Response (in Reply box):
$>JI,810133,1,3,09031998,01/06/1998,12/31/2018,3.5,31
The serial number is 810133. You will need to provide it to Hemisphere GNSS with your request for an e-Dif
subscription code.

1.

Type the following command in the Message box after receiving the subscription code from Hemisphere GNSS:
$JK,nnnn

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 59

Receiver Operation
where 'nnnn' is the subscription number. The receiver will respond with "subscription accepted."

Topic Last Updated: v1.7 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 60

Receiver Operation

Interpreting the $JK 'Date'/Subscription Codes
Subscriptions codes enable GNSS differential correction sources on your receiver. When discussing them it is important
to understand the following.

•

•

•

The YYYY component of a MM/DD/YYYY formatted date—returned by the JK command—is not always just the
year component of that date. When a date’s year starts with 30, only the 30 represents the year - and that year is
3000. A subscription expiration date of 01/01/3000 effectively means there is no expiration date.
The last two digits of the 30YY 'date' represent the data output rate and the GNSS differential correction sources
that have been subscribed to and are therefore enabled on your receiver. Hemisphere GNSS refers to these two
digits as the Additive Code (see Understanding Additive Codes).
The 30 and the 00 in the 'year' 3000, then, represents "Expires 3000 (so effectively does not expire), the data rate
is 10 Hz, and SBAS is enabled." The 'year' 3015 indicates "Expires 3000, the data rate is 20 Hz and differential
correction sources SBAS/e-Dif/RTK and L-Dif have been subscribed to and are enabled."

Below is an example of the $JK command response, part of which is the subscription start and expiration dates (the
Date Code is shaded).

$>JK,01/01/3000,0

Topic Last Updated: v1.09 / January 8, 2018

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 61

Receiver Operation

Understanding Additive Codes
Tables 1 and 2 below provide subscription information for Crescent and Eclipse receivers, where the data rate and
subscription are indicated by the 'date' returned by the JK command. For Eclipse II receivers, refer to Eclipse II
Subscription Codes. The part of the date that indicates the data rate and subscription code is called the Additive
Code. The last two digits in the subscription expiration date’s ‘year’ comprise the Additive Codes, that is, the
available data output rate from the receiver, plus the subscriptions—the enabled GPS differential correction sources.
Table 3 outlines the components of the Crescent, Eclipse, and Eclipse II Additive Codes. The subscription codes
have different additive components for Crescent, Eclipse, and Eclipse II.

Table 1: Crescent Subscription Codes
Date Code (Additive
Code)

Hex Code

Maximum
Data Rate

Subscription Description

3000 (0)

HEX 0

10 Hz

SBAS enabled

3001 (1)

HEX 1

20 Hz

SBAS enabled

3002 (0+2)

HEX 2

10 Hz

SBAS, e-Dif enabled

3003 (1+2)

HEX 3

20 Hz

SBAS, e-Dif enabled

3004 (0+4)

HEX 4

10 Hz

SBAS, RTK Rover enabled

3005 (1+4)

HEX 5

20 Hz

SBAS, RTK Rover enabled

3006 (0+2+4)

HEX 6

10 Hz

SBAS, RTK Rover, e-Dif enabled

3007 (1+2+4)

HEX 7

20 Hz

SBAS, RTK Rover, e-Dif enabled

3008 (0+8)

HEX 8

10 Hz

SBAS, L-Dif Rover, L-Dif Base, RTK Base enabled

3009 (1+8)

HEX 9

20 Hz

SBAS, L-Dif Rover, L-Dif Base, RTK Base enabled

3010 (0+2+8)

HEX A

10 Hz

3011 (1+2+8)

HEX B

20 Hz

SBAS, L-Dif Rover, L-Dif Base, RTK Base, e-Dif
enabled
SBAS, L-Dif Rover, L-Dif Base, RTK Base, e-Dif
enabled

3012 (0+4+8)

HEX C

10 Hz

SBAS, L-Dif Rover, L-Dif Base, RTK Rover, RTK
Base enabled

3013 (1+4+8)

HEX D

20 Hz

SBAS, L-Dif Rover, L-Dif Base, RTK Rover, RTK
Base enabled

3014 (0+2+4+8)

HEX E

10 Hz

SBAS, L-Dif Rover, L-Dif Base, RTK Rover, RTK
Base, e-Dif enabled

3015 (1+2+4+8)

HEX F

20 Hz

SBAS, L-Dif Rover, L-Dif Base, RTK Rover, RTK
Base, e-Dif enabled

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 62

Receiver Operation

Table 2: Eclipse Subscription Codes
Date Code
(Additive
Code)

Hex Code

Maximum
Data Rate

Subscription Description

3000 (0)

HEX 0

10 Hz

SBAS, Atlas enabled

3001 (1)

HEX 1

20 Hz

SBAS,Atlas enabled

3004 (0+4)

HEX 4

10 Hz

SBAS,Atlas , RTK Rover, RTK Base, Raw L1/L2 data enabled

3005 (1+4)

HEX 5

20 Hz

SBAS,Atlas , RTK Rover, RTK Base, Raw L1/L2 data enabled

3008 (0+8)

HEX 8

10 Hz

SBAS,Atlas , RTK Base, Raw L1/L2 data enabled

3009 (1+8)

HEX 9

20 Hz

SBAS,Atlas , RTK Base, Raw L1/L2 data enabled

3016 (0+16)

HEX 10

10 Hz

SBAS,Atlas , Raw L1/L2 data enabled

3017 (1+16)

HEX 11

20 Hz

SBAS,Atlas , Raw L1/L2 data enabled

Eclipse II Subscription Codes (go here)

Table 3: Crescent, Eclipse, and Eclipse II Additive Codes Components
Crescent
Code

Description

Eclipse
Code

Description

Eclipse II
Code

Description

0

10 Hz

0

10 Hz

0

10 Hz

1

20 Hz

1

20 Hz

1

20 Hz

2

e-Dif

2

n/a

2

e-Dif

4

L-Dif Rover, L-Dif Base, RTK
Rover

4

Raw L1/L2 Data, RTK Base, RTK
Rover

4

RTK Rover
(minimum
L1 only)

8

RTK Base

8

Raw L1/L2 Data, RTK Base

8

RTK Base
(minimum
L1 only)

16

n/a

16

Raw L1/L2 Data

16

Raw Data
(minimum
L1 only)

32

n/a

32

n/a

32

L2 signals

64

n/a

64

n/a

64

GLONASS signals
(minimum L1 only)

Crescent Additive Code Examples

•
•

10 Hz (SBAS), e-Dif, and RTK is 0+2+4 = 6 (so 3006)
20 Hz (SBAS), e-Dif, and RTK is 1+2+4 = 7 (so 3007)

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 63

Receiver Operation

Comparing the JI and JK Responses
Example 1:
In the following Crescent examples, the Date Code is shaded.

•
JI query date code example:
$>JI,311077,1,7,04102005,01/01/1900,01/01/3000,6.8Hx,46
•
JK query date code example:
$>JK,01/01/3000,0,(1, 2, 5 or no number)
In the JK example the last two digits ('00') of the Date Code ('3000') represent the Hex Code (the second column of Table 2 above).
The last digit to the right (1, 2, 5 or no number) is the Downgrade Code...this is the output rate in Hertz indicating a downgrade from the
default of 10 Hz. So if 1, 2 or 5 does not appear (no number), the output rate is the default 10 Hz.
The Date Codes are identical in either query and are directly related to each other. Also, the last digit in the JK query is the hexadecimal
equivalent of the last two digits in the Date Code. The following example further illustrate this (Date Code is shaded).
Note: The JI response provides the decimal Date Code while the JK response provides both the decimal Date Code and the hex
Date Code (the Hex Code).
Example 2:
$>JI,311077,1,7,04102005,01/01/1900,01/01/3015,6.8Hx,46
•
JK query date code example:
$>JK,01/01/3015,F
In this example the last two digits ('15') of the Date Code ('3015') is the decimal equivalent of the last value ('F'), which is the Hex Code (see
the last row in Table 1 above). Example shows no downgrade code.

Topic Last Updated: v1.03 / January 11, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 64

Receiver Operation
Eclipse II Subscription Codes
Use the information below to determine your Eclipse II subscription code and its features.

1

2

4

8

16

0x01

0x02

0x04

0x08

20H z

e-Dif

RTK Rover,
RTK Base,
Raw Out

RTK Base,

0x40

Raw Out

L2

GLONASS

0

3001

1

Y

3002

2

Y

3003

3

Y

3004

4

Y

3005

5

Y

Y

3006

6

Y

Y

3007

7

Y

3008

8

Y

3009

9

Y

Y

3010

A

Y

Y

3011

B

Y

Y

3012

C

Y

Y

3013

D

Y

Y

Y

3014

E

Y

Y

Y

3015

F

Y

3016

10

Y

3017

11

Y

3018

12

Y

Y

Y

0x20

3000

Y

Y

0x10

Hex
Code

Y

Y

64

Date Code
(Additive Code)

Raw Out

Standard

Y

32

Y

Y

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 65

Receiver Operation

Y

Y

3019

13

Y

Y

3020

14

Y

Y

3021

15

Y

Y

Y

3022

16

Y

Y

Y

3023

17

Y

Y

3024

18

Y

Y

3025

19

Y

Y

Y

3026

1A

Y

Y

Y

3027

1B

Y

Y

Y

3028

1C

Y

Y

Y

3029

1D

Y

Y

Y

Y

3030

1E

Y

Y

Y

Y

3031

1F

Y

3032

20

Y

3033

21

Y

Y

3034

22

Y

Y

3035

23

Y

Y

3036

24

Y

Y

3037

25

Y

Y

Y

3038

26

Y

Y

Y

3039

27

Y

Y

3040

28

Y

Y

3041

29

Y

Y

Y

3042

2A

Y

Y

Y

3043

2B

Y

Y

3044

2C

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 66

Receiver Operation

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

3046

2E

Y

Y

Y

Y

3047

2F

Y

Y

3048

30

Y

Y

3049

31

Y

Y

Y

3050

32

Y

Y

Y

3051

33

Y

Y

Y

3052

34

Y

Y

Y

3053

35

Y

Y

Y

Y

3054

36

Y

Y

Y

Y

3055

37

Y

Y

Y

3056

38

Y

Y

Y

3057

39

Y

Y

Y

Y

3058

3A

Y

Y

Y

Y

3059

3B

Y

Y

Y

Y

3060

3C

Y

Y

Y

Y

3061

3D

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

3062

3E

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

3063

3F

Y

3064

40

Y

3065

41

Y

Y

3066

42

Y

Y

3067

43

Y

Y

3068

44

Y

Y

3069

45

Y

Y

3070

46

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

2D

Y

Y

Y

3045

Y

Y

Y

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 67

Receiver Operation

Y

3071

47

Y

Y

3072

48

Y

Y

3073

49

Y

Y

Y

3074

4A

Y

Y

Y

3075

4B

Y

Y

Y

3076

4C

Y

Y

Y

3077

4D

Y

Y

Y

Y

3078

4E

Y

Y

Y

Y

3079

4F

Y

Y

3080

50

Y

Y

3081

51

Y

Y

Y

3082

52

Y

Y

Y

3083

53

Y

Y

Y

3084

54

Y

Y

Y

3085

55

Y

Y

Y

Y

3086

56

Y

Y

Y

Y

3087

57

Y

Y

Y

3088

58

Y

Y

Y

3089

59

Y

Y

Y

Y

3090

5A

Y

Y

Y

Y

3091

5B

Y

Y

Y

Y

3092

5C

Y

Y

Y

Y

3093

5D

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

3094

5E

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

3095

5F

Y

3096

60

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 68

Receiver Operation
Y

Y

3097

61

Y

Y

Y

3098

62

Y

Y

Y

3099

63

Y

Y

Y

3100

64

Y

Y

Y

3101

65

Y

Y

Y

Y

3102

66

Y

Y

Y

Y

3103

67

Y

Y

Y

3104

68

Y

Y

Y

3105

69

Y

Y

Y

Y

3106

6A

Y

Y

Y

Y

3107

6B

Y

Y

Y

Y

3108

6C

Y

Y

Y

Y

3109

6D

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

3110

6E

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

3111

6F

Y

Y

Y

3112

70

Y

Y

Y

3113

71

Y

Y

Y

Y

3114

72

Y

Y

Y

Y

3115

73

Y

Y

Y

Y

3116

74

Y

Y

Y

Y

3117

75

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

3118

76

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

3119

77

Y

Y

Y

Y

3120

78

Y

Y

Y

Y

3121

79

Y

Y

Y

Y

3122

7A

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 69

Receiver Operation

75

Y

Y

Y

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Y

Y

Y

Y

3123

7B

Y

Y

Y

Y

3124

7C

Page 70

Receiver Operation
Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

3125

7D

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

3126

7E

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

Y

3127

7F

Y

Y

Topic Last Updated: v1.03 / January 11, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 71

Receiver Operation
Determining the Receiver Type and Current Application
To determine the current receiver type, use the JT command. Table 1 shows the receiver type indicated by the JT
response.

Table 1: $JT Response and Receiver Type
$JT Response

Receiver Type

SX1x

SX-1

SX2x

Crescent

SLXx

SLX2/SLX3

DF2x

Eclipse

DF3x

Eclipse II

MF3x

miniEclipse

The 'x' in the responses represents the receiver’s current application. For example, if x = i, as in SX2i, 'i' is the
application code for e-Dif.
Table 2 shows the application for the application code in the JT response.

Table 2: $JT Response and Application
$JT Responses with
Application Code

Receiver Application

r

RTK rover

b

RTK base

i

e-Dif

g

L-band

g

WAAS

g

Standalone

a

Vector

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 72

Receiver Operation

Configuring the Receiver
You can configure all aspects of receiver operation through any serial port using NMEA 0183 commands. You can:

•

•
•
•
•

Select one of the two on-board applications:
o Two applications may be loaded at the same time, but only one can be active
o You can select the active application through serial commands or through menu options on products with
displays
Set the baud rate of communication ports
Select NMEA 0183 data messages to output on the serial ports and select the output rate of each message
Set the maximum differential age cut-off
Set the satellite elevation angle cut-off mask

The appropriate commands are described in Commands and Messages.

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 73

Receiver Operation

Configuring the Data Message Output
In addition to its differential-only Port D, the receiver features three primary bidirectional ports referred to as A, B, and C.
You can configure GPS data messages for all three ports by sending NMEA 0183 commands to the receiver module
through all its communication ports. You can configure the output of Port B through A, for instance, and vice versa. The
JASC NMEA message allows you to turn the messages on or off as required.
Note: For receivers that have a USB port that supports writing to a USB flash drive you can specify Port T as a
port to receive messages.
In the examples below where you can specify the port, use 'PORTT' to specify Port T.

'THIS' Port and the 'OTHER' Port
The NMEA 0183 interface for Port A and B both use 'THIS' and 'OTHER' terminology.

•

•

THIS port
The port you are currently connected to for inputting commands. To get the data output through THIS port it is
not necessary to specify 'this' (see Example 1 below).
The OTHER port
To specify the OTHER port for the data output, you need to include 'OTHER' in the command. See the two
examples following which are both based on you being connected to Port B.

Example 1:
To turn the GPGGA message on at 5 Hz on Port B, use the following command:
$JASC,GPGGA,5
Because B is THIS it does not have to be specified.

Example 2:
To turn the GPGGA message on at an output rate of 5 Hz on Port A, use the following command:
$JASC,GPGGA,5,OTHER
Because B is THIS and A is OTHER, you have to specify OTHER. In contrast, when turning messages on or off on Port C
from Port A or Port B, you must specify Port C in the command.

Example 3:
To turn the GPGLL NMEA 0183 message on at 10 Hz on Port C, use the following command:
$JASC,GPGLL,10,PORTC
As with Port A and B, when communicating directly with Port C, you do not need to specify anything at the end of the
message. See Commands and Messages for more information.

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 74

Receiver Operation

Saving the Receiver Configuration
Each time the configuration of the receiver is changed, the new configuration should be saved so the receiver
does not have to be reconsidered for the next power cycle.
To save the settings:

•

Issue the JSAVE command. The receiver records the current configuration to non-volatile memory. The
receiver indicates when the save process, which takes about five seconds, is complete.

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 75

Receiver Operation

Using Port D for RTCM Input
The receiver has a port designed to accommodate externally supplied corrections input according to the RTCM SC-104
protocol. Port D provides this functionality although it has been fixed to operate at a baud rate of 9600 (8 data bits, no
parity, and 1 stop bit, that is, 8-N-1).
To use Port D of the receiver for correction input, you must set the receiver to operate in beacon differential mode using
the following command:
$JDIFF,BEACON
This command was designed to “turn on” Port D differential operation in our products because many use the Hemisphere
GNSS SBX beacon module interfaced to Port D.
Note: The receiver is compatible with RTCM SC-104 message types 1-3, 5-7, 9 and 16 although not all the
message types contain differential data.
To return to using SBAS as the correction source, send the following command to the receiver:
$JDIFF,WAAS
See Commands and Messages for detailed information on NMEA 0183 messages supported by the receiver.

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 76

Receiver Operation

SBX-4 Database Mode
Enabling Database Mode
Database mode is automatically enabled when the SBX-4 receives a valid RMC message on Port 0. This requires the
baud rate of Port 0 to be the same as the corresponding GPS receiver port.

Performance in Database Mode
In most installations Database mode will result in faster initial acquisition and better GPS accuracy compared
to Auto mode.
In some installations Database mode may not work as well as Auto mode for the following reasons:

•

•

The closest station is not in the station database and the SBX-4 has not yet received a Type7 Almanac message.
Most stations now broadcast the Almanac message every ten minutes. Assuming the SBX-4 can tune to a
surrounding station and receive a Type7 message, it will update the station database and automatically retune to the
closest station.
Signal quality in the area is poor. IEC61108-4 requires the receiver to switch away from a station when WER rises
above 10%. For installations that do not need to comply with IEC61108-4 this threshold can be increased as usable
corrections can be obtained for word error rates up to 50%.

Available Production Configuration Settings
Disable the automatic switch to Database mode:

$PCSI,8,NITRAM,A

Enable weak signal tracking (WER of 50%):

$PCSI,8,NITRAM,W

Enable legacy Q value output (in place of WER):

$PCSI,8,NITRAM,Q

Set SBX-4 to factory defaults:

$PCSI,8,NITRAM,E

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 77

Receiver Operation

Ethernet Configuration
As of firmware version V5.6.1, the Hemisphere P328 receiver board has Ethernet support. It is disabled by default, but may
be enabled.
The P328 is connected to a carrier board or enclosure which connects the P328’s Ethernet pins to a standard RJ-45 jack
(with integrated magnetics as appropriate).

Enabling and Disabling Ethernet
The full current state of Ethernet configuration may be checked with the command “$JETHERNET”. Doing this when Ethernet
is disabled should give a result like the following:
$JETHERNET
$>JETHERNET,MAC,8C-B7-F7-F0-00-01
$>JETHERNET,MODE,OFF
$>JETHERNET,PORTI,OFF
$> Current Ethernet IP Address: None
To enable Ethernet, determine if the receiver is allowed to be assigned an IP address automatically via DHCP, or statically
assigned. If you are unsure, please contact the administrator of the network you wish to connect it to.
To enable Ethernet support with a DHCP-assigned IP address, simply use the command:
$JETHERNET,MODE,DHCP
The receiver will attempt to get an address from the DHCP server on the network. You should be able to see the current IP
address reported by a “$JETHERNET” query change.
To enable Ethernet support with a statically assigned IP address, use the command
$JETHERNET,MODE,STATIC,ip,subnet,gateway,dns
where ip/subnet/gateway/dns are each replaced with the relevant IP address. The gateway and dns parameters are
optional, and only useful for allowing outgoing connections from the P328, which are not currently supported anyway. An
example command would be
$JETHERNET,MODE,STATIC,192.168.0.42,255.255.255.0
If one wishes to disable Ethernet use the command
$JETHERNET,MODE,OFF
With Ethernet enabled, one can access the receiver on Windows machnies via “HGNSSxx”, where “xx” is the receiver’s
ESN. For example from the command line one could use the command,
ping HGNSS1234567

Enabling Ethernet Services
With Ethernet enabled, it should be possible to send an ICMP ping to the P328 receiver from a PC on the same network, if
one wishes to test that. No actual services are enabled on Ethernet by default however though, so to make practical use of
Ethernet support, one must also enable a service.
As of the writing of this document, the only Ethernet service implemented is the PORTI virtual serial port. Additional types of
Ethernet services may be implemented in future firmware versions.

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 78

Receiver Operation
The PORTI virtual serial port allows a listening TCP port to be opened, which will act just like a local serial port of the
receiver would. Only one TCP client may be connected at a time.
Important Note: Enabling “PORTI” on Ethernet should only be done with the P328 connected to a trusted network, since it
gives full access to the receiver just as a local serial port would, and has no authentication or security mechanisms.
To enable the PORTI service, use the command
$JETHERNET,PORTI,port
where port is replaced with the TCP port number which one wishes to use. Any port in the range 1 to 65535 is allowable,
but it is recommended one consider which TCP port numbers are typically reserved for various common protocols and avoid
those port numbers.
To disable the PORTI service, use the command
$JETHERNET,PORTI,OFF

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 79

Commands and Messages
Commands and Messages Overview
The receiver supports a selection of NMEA 0183 messages, proprietary messages that conform to NMEA 0183
standards, and Hemisphere GNSS proprietary binary messages. It is your decision as a systems designer whether or
not to support a NMEA 0183-only software interface or a selection of both NMEA 0183 and binary messages.
All Crescent and Eclipse receivers are configured with NMEA 0183 commands and can output NMEA 0183 messages. In
addition to NMEA 0183, some receivers can be configured using NMEA 2000 commands and can output NMEA 2000
messages.

Commands

•

General operation and configuration commands

•

GNSS commands

•

SBAS commands

•

e-Dif commands

•

Vector commands and messages

•

GLONASS commands and messages

•

DGPS base station commands

•

Local differential and RTK commands and messages

•

Beacon receiver commands and messages

•

L-band commands

•

RAIM commands

Messages

•

Data messages

•

Binary messages

•

NMEA 2000 CAN messages

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 80

Commands and Messages
NMEA 0183 Message Format
NMEA 0183 messages (sentences) have the following format:
$XXYYY,ZZZ,ZZZ,ZZZ...*CC
where:
Element

Description

$

Message header character

XX

NMEA 0183 talker field (GP = GPS, GL = GLONASS, GA = GALILEO, GB =
BEIDOU, GN = All constellations)

YYY

Type of GPS NMEA 0183 message

ZZZ

Variable length message fields

*CC

Checksum



Carriage return



Line feed

Null (empty) fields occur when there is no information for that field. You can use the JNP command to specify the
number of decimal places output in the GPGGA and GPGLL messages.

What does  mean?
The literal translation means "Carriage Return, Line Feed." They are terms used in computer programming languages to
describe the end of a line or string of text. If you are writing your own communication software for a receiver, see some of
the examples below. If you are already using a program such as Hemisphere GNSS' PocketMax, when you click to send a
command to the receiver, the program adds the carriage return and line feed to the end of the text string for you. If you are
using HyperTerminal or other terminal software, typically the Enter key on your keyboard is set to send the 
pair. You may need to define this in the setup section of the terminal software. Some software may treat the Enter key on
your numeric keypad differently than the main Enter key in the main QWERTY section of the keyboard – use the main
Enter key for best results.
Originally, the carriage return and line feed characters were for use with printers. The carriage return character would
signal the printer to send the print head back to the left edge of the page on the current line of text. The line feed
command instructed the printer to advance the paper one line. Today, electronics often use the carriage return and line
feed instructions to signify the end of a string of text, prompting the device to process the string and execute the
instructions sent in the text string.
Electronics use different ways to represent the  characters. In ASCII numbers,  is represented as 13 in
decimal, or 0D in hexadecimal. ASCII for  is 10 decimal, or 0A hexadecimal. Some computer languages use
different ways to represent . Unix and C language can use “\x0D\x0A". C language can also use “\r\n” in some
instances. Java may use CR+LF. In Unicode, carriage return is U+000D, and line feed is U+000A. It is advised to clearly
understand how to send these characters if you are writing your own interface software.

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 81

Commands and Messages

Command/Query/Message Types
General Operation and Configuration Commands
The following table lists the commands related to the general operation and configuration of the receiver.
Command

Description

JAIR

Specify how the receiver will respond to the
dynamics associated with airborne applications

JALT

Turn altitude aiding for the receiver on or off

JAPP

Specify or query receiver application firmware

JASC,D1

Set the RD1 diagnostic information message from
the receiver to on or off

JASC,VIRTUAL

Configure the receiver to have RTCM data input on
one port and output through the other (when using
an external correction source)

JBAUD

Specify the baud rates of the receiver or query the
current setting

JBIN

Enable the output of the various binary messages
supported by the receiver

JCONN

Create a virtual circuit between the A and B ports to
enable communication through the receiver to the
device on the opposite port

JDIFF

Specify or query the differential mode of the receiver

JDIFF,AVAILABLE

Query the receiver for the differential types currently
being received

JDIFFX,EXCLUDE

Specify the differential sources to be excluded from
operating in a multi-diff application

JDIFFX,GNSSOUT

Specify GNSS output in correction formats or query
the current setting

JDIFFX,INCLUDE

Specify the differential sources to be allowed to
operate in a multi-diff application

JDIFFX,SOURCE

Query the receiver for the differential source

JDIFFX,TYPE

Query the receiver for the differential type

JEPHOUT,PERIODSEC

to allow ephemeris messages (95, 65, 35) to go out a
rate other than when they change

JFLASH,DIR

Display the files on a USB flash drive

JFLASH,FILE,CLOSE

Close an open file on a USB flash drive

JFLASH,FILE,NAME

Open a specific file, append to a specific file, or
display the file name of the open file on a USB flash
drive

JFLASH,FILE,OPEN

Create and open a file with an automatically
generated file name on a USB flash drive

JFLASH,FREESPACE

Display the free space in kilobytes (KB) on a USB
flash drive

JFLASH,NOTIFY,CONNECT

Enable/disable the automatic response when a USB
flash drive is inserted or removed (if port is not
specified the response will be sent to the port that
issued the command)

JFLASH,QUERYCONNECT

Manually verify if a USB flash drive is connected or
disconnected

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 82

Commands and Messages
JFORCEAPP

Force an application to be used in a multi-application
(MFA)

JI

Display receiver information, such as its serial
number and firmware version

JK

Subscribe the receiver to various options, such as
higher update rates, e-Dif (or base station capability)
or L-Dif; or query for the current subscription
expiration date when running Atlas application or the
receiver subscription code when running all other
applications

JK,SHOW

contain authorization information

JLIMIT

Set the threshold of estimated horizontal
performance for which the DGPS position LED is
illuminated or query the current setting

JMODE

Query receiver for status of JMODE settings

JMODE,BASE

Enable/disable base mode functionality or query the
current setting

JMODE,FIXLOC

Set the receiver to not re-average (or re-average) its
position or query the current setting

JMODE,FOREST

Turn the higher gain functionality (for tracking under
canopy) on/off or query the current setting

JMODE,GLOFIX

Enable/disable use of RTCM v3 (RTK) GLONASS
correctors

JMODE,GPSONLY

Set the receiver to use GPS data in the solution or
query the current setting (if GLONASS is available,
setting to YES will cause the receiver to only use
GPS data)

JMODE,L1ONLY

Set the receiver to use L1 data even if L2 data is
available or query the current setting

JMODE,MIXED

Include satellites that do not have differential
corrections in the solution

JMODE,NULLNMEA

Enable/disable output of NULL fields in NMEA 0183
messages when no there is no fix (when position is
lost)

JMODE,SBASNORTK

Disable/enable the use of SBAS ranging signals
(carrier phase) in RTK

JMODE,SBASR

Enable/disable SBAS ranging

JMODE,STRICTRTK

Use this command to invoke stricter checks on whether
RTK fix is declared. Forces float of RTK at 30 seconds
of Age-of-Diff

JMODE,SURETRACK

Enable/disable SureTrack functionality (default is
enabled) or query the current setting

JMODE,SURVEY

Assure RTK fix is not declared when residual errors
exceed 10 cm. Also forces use of GLONASS and
prevents SureTrack operation.

JMODE,TIMEKEEP

Enable/disable continuous time updating in NMEA
0183 messages when there is no fix (when position
is lost)

JMODE,TUNNEL

Enable/disable faster reacquisition after coming out
of a tunnel or query the current setting

JPOS

Speed up the initial acquisition when changing
continents with the receiver or query the receiver for
the current position of the receiver

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 83

Commands and Messages
JPPS,FREQ

Specify the pps frequency of the receiver or query
the current setting

JPPS,WIDTH

Specify the pps width of the receiver or query the
current setting

JPRN,EXCLUDE

For advanced users only.
Exclude GPS and/or other GNSS satellites from
being used in the positioning solution or query the
current setting

JQUERY,GUIDE

Query the receiver for its determination on whether
or not it is providing suitable accuracy after both the
SBAS and GPS have been acquired (up to five
minutes)

JQUERY,TEMPERATURE

Query the receiver’s temperature

JRELAY

Send user-defined text out of a serial port

JRESET

Reset the receiver to its default operating parameters
by turning off outputs on all ports, saving the
configuration, and setting the configuration to its
defaults

JSAVE

Send this command after making changes to the
operating mode of the receiver

JSHOW

Query the current operating configuration of the
receiver

JSHOW,ASC

Query receiver for current ASCII messages being
output

JSHOW,BIN

Query receiver for current Bin messages being
output

JSHOW,CONF

Query receiver for configuration settings

JSHOW,GP

Query the receiver for each GP message currently
being output through the current port and the update
rate for that message

JSHOW,THISPORT

Query to determine which receiver port you are
connected to

JSYSVER

Returns the boot loader version from the GPS card

JT

Query the receiver for its GPS engine type

Note: Use the JSAVE command to save changes you need to keep and wait for the $>SAVE COMPLETE
response.

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 84

Commands and Messages

GNSS Commands
The following table lists the commands supported by the internal GNSS engine for its configuration and operation.
Command

Description

JAGE

Specify maximum DGPS (COAST) correction age (6 to 8100 seconds)

JASC,GN

Enable the GPS data messages at a particular update rate to be turned on or off

JMASK

Specify the elevation cutoff mask angle for the GPS engine

JNMEA,PRECISION

Specify or query the number of decimal places to output in the GPGGA and the GPGLL
messages or query the current setting

JNP

Specify the number of decimal places output in the GPGGA and GPGLL messages

JOFF

Turn off all data messages being output through the current port or other port

JOFF,ALL

Turn off all data messages being output through all ports

JSMOOTH

Set the carrier smoothing interval (15 to 6000 seconds) or query the current setting

JTAU,COG

Set the course over ground (COG) time constant (0.00 to 3600.00 seconds) or query
the current setting

JTAU,SPEED

Set the speed time constant (0.00 to 3600.00 seconds) or query the current setting

Note: Use the JSAVE command to save changes you need to keep and wait for the $>SAVE COMPLETE response.
The following table lists the messages applicable to GNSS
Message

Description

Bin16

GNSS code and phase observation information

Bin19

GNSS Tracking Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.07/ February 16, 2017

SBAS Commands
The following table lists the commands supported by the SBAS demodulator for its control and operation.
Command

Description

JASC,D1

Set the RD1 diagnostic information message from the receiver to on or off

JASC,RTCM

Configure the receiver to output RTCM version 2 DGPS corrections from SBAS or beacon
through either receiver serial port

JGEO

Display information related to the current frequency of SBAS and its location in relation to the
receiver’s antenna

JWAASPRN

Change the SBAS PRNs in memory or query the receiver for current PRNs in memory

Note: Use the JSAVE command to save changes you need to keep and wait for the $>SAVE COMPLETE
response.

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 85

Commands and Messages

e-Dif Commands
The following table lists the commands supported by the e-Dif application for its control and operation.
Command

Description

JRAD,1

Display the current reference position in e-Dif applications only

JRAD,1,LAT,LON,HEIGHT

Use this command—a derivative of the JRAD,1,P command—when absolute
positioning is required in e-Dif applications only

JRAD,1,P

e-Dif: Record the current position as the reference with which to compute e-Dif
corrections. This would be used in relative mode as no absolute point information is
specified.
DGPS Base Station: Record the current position as the reference with which to
compute Base Station corrections in e-Dif applications only. This would be used in
relative mode as no absolute point information is specified

JRAD,2

Forces the receiver to use the new reference point (you normally use this command
following a JRAD,1 type command)

JRAD,3

Invoke the e-Dif function once the unit has started up with the e-Dif application active,
or, update the e-Dif solution (calibration) using the current position as opposed to the
reference position used by the JRAD,2 command

JRAD,7

Turn auto recalibration on or off

Note: Use the JSAVE command to save changes you need to keep and wait for the $>SAVE COMPLETE response.

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 86

Commands and Messages

Vector Commands and Messages
The following table lists the commands related to the GPS heading aspect of the Vector OEM heading system.
Command

Description

JASC

Turn on different messages

JASC,INTLT

Configure the receiver to output pitch and roll data (pitch and roll are factory calibrated over
temperature to be accurate to ±3°C)

JASC,PASHR

Configure the receiver to output time, true heading, roll, and pitch data in one message

JASC,PTSS1

Configure the receiver to output heave, pitch, and roll in the commonly used TSS1 message
format

JATT,COGTAU

Set the course over ground (COG) time constant (0.0 to 3600.0 seconds) or query the current
setting

JATT,CSEP

Query for the current separation between GPS antennas

JATT,EXACT

Enable/disable internal filter reliance on the entered antenna separation or query the current
setting

JATT,FLIPBRD

Turn the flip feature on/off (allowing you to install the Crescent Vector board upside down) or
query the current feature status

JATT,GYROAID

Turn gyro aiding on or off or query the current setting

JATT,HBIAS

Set the heading bias or query the current setting

JATT,HELP

Show the available commands for GPS heading operation and status

JATT,HIGHMP

Set/query the high multipath setting for use in poor GPS environments

JATT,HRTAU

Set the heading rate time constant or query the current setting

JATT,HTAU

Set the heading time constant or query the current setting

JATT,LEVEL

Turn level operation on or off or query the current setting

JATT,MOVEBASE

Set the auto GPS antenna separation or query the current setting

JATT,MSEP

Manually set the GPS antenna separation or query the current setting

JATT,NEGTILT

Turn the negative tilt feature on or off or query the current setting

JATT,NMEAHE

Instruct the Crescent Vector to preface the HDG, HDM, HDT, and ROT messages with GPor
HE

JATT,PBIAS

Set the pitch/roll bias or query the current setting

JATT,PTAU

Set the pitch time constant or query the current setting

JATT,ROLL

Configure the Crescent Vector for roll or pitch GPS antenna orientation

JATT,SEARCH

Force the Crescent Vector to reject the current GPS heading solution and begin a new search

JATT,SPDTAU

Set the speed time constant (0.0 to 3600.0 seconds) or query the current setting

JATT,SUMMARY

Display a summary of the current Crescent Vector settings

JATT,TILTAID

Turn tilt aiding on or off or query the current setting

JATT,TILTCAL

Calibrate tilt aiding or query the current feature status

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 87

Commands and Messages
The following table lists Vector messages.
Message

Description

GNGSA

GNSS DOP and active satellites

GPDTM

Datum reference

GPGGA

GPS fix data

GPGLL

Geographic position - latitude/longitude

GPGNS

GNSS fix data

GPGRS

GNSS range residuals

GPGST

GNSS pseudorange error statistics

GPGSV

GNSS satellite in view

GPHDG/HEHDG

Provide magnetic deviation and variation for calculating magnetic or true heading

GPHDM/HEHDM

Provide magnetic heading of the vessel derived from the true heading calculated

GPHDT/HEHDT

Provide true heading of the vessel

GPHEV

Heave value in meters

GPRMC

Recommended minimum specific GNSS data

GPROT/HEROT

Contains the vessel’s rate of turn (ROT) information

GPRRE

Range residual message

GPVTG

Course over ground and ground speed

GPZDA

Time and date

PASHR

Time, true heading, roll, and pitch data in one message

PSAT,GBS

Satellite fault detection used for RAIM

PSAT,HPR

Proprietary NMEA sentence that provides the true heading, pitch/roll information and time ina
single message

PSAT,INTLT

Proprietary NMEA sentence that provides the title measurement from the internal inclinometer
(in degrees)

TSS1

Heave, pitch, and roll message in the commonly used TSS1 message format

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / Octoter 13, 2016

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 88

Commands and Messages

GLONASS Commands and Messages
The following table lists the commands applicable to GLONASS-capable receivers.
Command

Description

JASC,GL

Enable the GLONASS data messages at a particular update rate to be turned on or off.
When turning messages on, various update rates are available depending on the
requirements.

JMODE,GPSONLY

Set the receiver to use GPS data in the solution or query the current setting (if
GLONASS is available, setting to YES will cause the receiver to only use GPS data)

JNMEA,GGAALLGNSS

Configure the GGA string to include full GNSS information (the number of used
GLONASS satellites will be included in the GPGGA message) or query the current
setting

The following table lists the messages applicable to GLONASS-capable receivers.
Message

Description

Bin16

GALILEO GNSS code and phase observation information

Bin62

GLONASS almanac information

Bin65

GLONASS ephemeris information

Bin66

GLONASS L1 code and carrier phase information

Bin69

GLONASS L1 diagnostic information

GLMLA

GLONASS almanac data - contains complete almanac data for one GLONASS satellite (multiple
sentences may be transmitted, one for each satellite in the GLONASS constellation)

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 89

Commands and Messages

GALILEO Commands and Messages
The following table lists the commands applicable to GALILEO-capable receivers.
Command

Description

JASC,GAGSV

Enable/disable the data for GALILEO satellites in view. When turning messages on,
various update rates are available depending on the requirements.

JASC,GNGNS

Enable/disable fix data for GNSS systems including GALILEO (GAGNS). When turning
messages on, various update rates are available depending on the requirements.

JMODE,GPSONLY

Set the receiver to use GPS data in the solution or query the current setting (if GALILEO
is available, setting to YES will cause the receiver to only use GPS data)

JNMEA,GGAALLGNSS

Configure the GGA string to include full GNSS information (the number of used satellites
will be included in the GPGGA message) or query the current setting

The following table lists the messages applicable to GALILEO-capable receivers.
Message

Description

Bin45

GALILEO ephemeris information

Bin16

GALILEO GNSS code and phase observation information

Bin44

GALILEO time conversion information

*Note: For observations in tracking status, see GNSS, Bin 16 & Bin 19.

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 90

Commands and Messages

QZSS Commands and Messages
The following table lists the commands applicable to QZSS-capable receivers.
Command

Description

JASC,GQGSV

Enable/disable the data for QZSS satellites in view.

JASC,GNGNS

Enable/disable fix data for GNSS systems.

JASC,GNGSA

DOP and active satellite information

The following table lists the binary messages applicable to QZSS-capable receivers.
Message

Description

Bin16

GNSS code and phase observation information

Bin19

GNSS diagnostic information

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 91

Commands and Messages

DGPS Base Station Commands
The following table lists the commands supported by the base station feature for its control and operation.
Command

Description

JRAD,1

Display the current reference position in e-Dif applications only

JRAD,1,LAT,LON,HEIGHT

Use this command—a derivative of the JRAD,1,P command—when absolute
positioning is required in e-Dif applications only

JRAD,1,P

e-Dif: Record the current position as the reference with which to compute e-Dif
corrections. This would be used in relative mode as no absolute point information is
specified.
DGPS Base Station: Record the current position as the reference with which to
compute Base Station corrections in e-Dif applications only. This would be used in
relative mode as no absolute point information is specified

JRAD,9

Initialize the Base Station feature and use the previously entered point, either with
$JRAD,1,P or $JRAD,1,LAT,LON,HEIGHT, as the reference with which to compute
Base Station corrections in e-Dif applications only. Use this for both relative mode
and absolute mode.

JRAD,10

Specify BDS message to be transmitted by base station

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 92

Commands and Messages

Local Differential and RTK Commands and Messages
The following table lists the commands supported by Local Differential (L-Dif) and RTK feature for its control and operation.
Command

Description

JASC,CMR

Set the proprietary CMR messages to on or off to provide corrections to the rover
(only applies to an Eclipse base station receiver when using GPS dual frequency
RTK mode)

JASC,DFX

Set the proprietary DFX messages to on or off to provide corrections to the rover
(only applies to a Crescent base receiver when using L-Dif or RTK mode)

JASC,ROX

Set the proprietary ROX messages to on or off to provide corrections to the rover
(only applies to an Eclipse base station receiver when using GPS dual frequency
RTK mode)

JASC,RTCM3

Set the RTCM version 3 messages to on or off to provide corrections to the rover
(only applies to an Eclipse base station receiver when using GPS dual frequency
RTK mode)

JASC,PSAT,BLV,1

Configure the receiver to output the North,East,Up base-line vector

JASC,PSAT,FVI,1

Configure the receiver to output a message include most position and attitude
information

JASC,PSAT,RTKPROG

Configure the receiver to output RTK fix progress

JASC,PSAT,RTKSTAT

Configure the receiver to output the most relevant parameters affecting RTK

JASC,PSAT,VCT,1

Configure the receiver to output the heading, pitch, roll, and master to slave vector

JMODE,BASE

Enable/disable base mode functionality or query the current setting

JNMEA,PRECISION

Specify or query the number of decimal places to output in the GPGGA andthe
GPGLL messages or query the current setting

JNP

Specify the number of decimal places output in the GPGGA and GPGLLmessages

JQUERY,RTKPROG

Perform a one-time query of RTK fix progress information

JQUERY,RTKSTAT

Perform a one-time query of the most relevant parameters that affect RTK

JRTK,1

Show the receiver’s reference position (can issue command to base station or rover)

JRTK,1,LAT,LON,HEIGHT

Set the receiver’s reference position to the coordinates you enter (canissue
command to base station or rover)

JRTK,1,P

Set the receiver’s reference coordinates to the current calculated position if you do
not have known coordinates for your antenna location (can issue command to base
station or rover)

JRTK,5

Show the base station’s transmission status for RTK applications (can issue
command to base station)

JRTK,5,Transmit

Suspend or resume the transmission of RTK (can issue command to base station)

JRTK,6

Display the progress of the base station (can issue command to base station)

JRTK,12

Disable or enable the receiver to go into fixed integer mode (RTK) vs. float mode (LDif) - can issue command to rover

JRTK,17

Display the transmitted latitude, longitude, and height of the base station (can issue
command to base station or rover)

JRTK,18

Display the distance from the rover to the base station, in meters (can issue
command to rover)

JRTK,18,BEARING

Display the bearing from the base station to the rover, in degrees (can issue
command to rover)

JRTK,18,NEU

Display the distance from the rover to the base station and the delta North, East, and
Up, in meters (can issue command to rover)

JRTK,28

Set the base station ID transmitted in ROX/DFX/CMR/RTCM3 messages (can issue
command to base station)

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 93

Commands and Messages

JRTCM3, ANTNAME

Specify the antenna name that is transmitted in various RTCM3 messages from the
base

JRTCM3, EXCLUDE

Specify RTCM3 message types to not be transmitted (excluded) by base station

JRTCM3, INCLUDE

Specify RTCM3 message types to be transmitted by base station

JRTCM3, NULLANT

Specify the antenna name as null (no name) that is transmitted in various RTCM3
messages from the base

The following table lists the Local Differential (L-Dif) and RTK messages.
Message

Description

PSAT,RTKPROG

Contains RTK fix progress information

PSAT,RTKSTAT

Contains the most relevant parameters affecting RTK

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / October 13, 2016

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 94

Commands and Messages

Beacon Receiver Commands and Messages
If integrating a Hemisphere GNSS SBX beacon module with the receiver GNSS engine, Hemisphere GNSS recommends
interfacing the beacon receiver to Port D of the receiver engine. Hemisphere GNSS has implemented some command
and message pass-through intelligence for such an integration. In this configuration you can issue the commands in the
following table to the beacon receiver through either Port A, Port B, or Port C of the receiver. When you issue queries to
the SBX primary communications port, the response messages are output interspersed with RTCM correction information.
This may cause conflicts with a GNSS receiver’s ability to compute differential corrected solutions. By sending these
queries to the SBX secondary communications port the flow of RTCM corrections on the primary port will not be
interrupted.
The following table lists the beacon commands/messages found in this Help file.
Query

NMEA 0183 Query Type

Description

GPCRQ,MSK

Standard

Query the SBX for its operational status

GPCRQ,MSS

Standard

Query the SBX for its performance status

GPMSK

Standard

Tune beacon the receiver and turn on diagnostic information

PCSI,0

Hemisphere GNSS
proprietary

Query the SBX to output a list of available proprietary PCSI
commands

PCSI,1

Hemisphere GNSS
proprietary

Query the SBX for a selection of parameters related to the
operational status of its primary channel

PCSI,1,1

Hemisphere GNSS
proprietary

Obtain beacon status information from the SBX beacon engine
inside the receiver

PCSI,2

Hemisphere GNSS
proprietary

Query the SBX to output a selection of parameters related to the
operational status of its secondary channel

PCSI,3,1

Hemisphere GNSS
proprietary

Query the SBX to output the search information used for beacon
selection in Automatic Beacon Search mode. The output has three
frequencies per line.

PCSI,3,2

Hemisphere GNSS
proprietary

Display the ten closest beacon stations

PCSI,3,3

Hemisphere GNSS
proprietary

Display the contents of the beacon station database

PCSI,4

Hemisphere GNSS
proprietary

Clear search history in Auto mode

PCSI,5

Hemisphere GNSS
proprietary

Set the baud rate of Port0 and Port1

PCSI,6

Hemisphere GNSS
proprietary

Reboot SBX receiver

PCSI,7

Hemisphere GNSS
proprietary

Swap modes on the receiver

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 95

Commands and Messages
The following table lists the beacon messages found in this Help file.
Message

Description

CRMSK

Operational status message of SBX

CRMSS

Performance status message of SBX

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 96

Commands and Messages

Atlas® Commands
The following tables lists the commands accepted by the Atlas-band receiver to configure and monitor the Atlas
functionality of the receiver.

Command

Description

$JI

Requests the serial number and firmware version number
from the receiver
Requests the authorization from the receiver
Is used to send the authorization to the receiver

$JK
$JASC,GPGGA,1

Requests receiver to output GGA positions at 1Hz.

$JASC,RD1,1

EnablesAtlas Diagnostic message output

$JDIFF,LBAND,SAVE

EnablesAtlas mode for tracking the Atlas communication
satellites
Enables the Atlas solution in the receiver

$JDIFF,INCLUDE,ATLAS
$JFREQ,AUTO

Automatically sets theAtlas parameters to track the Atlas
communication satellites

$JATLAS,LIMIT

Configure the accuracy threshold for when the NMEA
0183 GPGGA message reports a quality indicator of 4.
See $JATLAS,LIMIT, section for more detail
Saves issued commands

$JSAVE

Note: Use the JSAVE command to save changes you need to keep and wait for the $J>SAVE COMPLETE
response.

If your Atlas communication is working properly the following should apply:

o
o

o

Bit Error Rate: less than 10-10
Spot Beam Freq:
▪
AMERICAS: 1545.5300
▪
APAC: 1539.8525
▪
EMEA: 1540.9525
Nav Condition: FFFFF

If this is not the case, then enter the following commands in the Receiver Command Page, one at a time:

Command
$JFREQ,AUTO
$JDIFF,LBAND,SAVE
$JFREQ,AUTO
$JDIFF,LBAND,SAVE

Topic Last Updated: v1.09 / January 8, 2018

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 97

Commands and Messages

RAIM Commands
RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) is a GNSS integrity monitoring scheme that uses redundant ranging
signals to detect a satellite malfunction resulting in a large range error. The Hemisphere GNSS products use RAIM to alert
users when errors have exceeded a user-specified tolerance. RAIM is available for SBAS, and Beacon, applications.
The following table lists the available RAIM commands.
Command

Description

JRAIM

Specify the parameters of the RAIM scheme that affect the output of the PSAT,GBS
message or query the current setting

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 98

Commands and Messages

Data Messages
Note: Output rates greater than 1Hz may require a subscription. Output rates greater than 20 Hz are not available for
all products. Please refer to your product’s documentation for the supported output rates.

For messages supporting rates greater than 1 Hz, see the following table:

Firmware
Version

Support Output Rates

50 Hz

50, 25, 10, 5, 2, 1, .2, 0

20 Hz

20, 10, 5, 4, 2, 1, .2, .5, 0

For message descriptions and maximum rates see the following table:

Message

Maximum
Rate

Description

GNGSA

1 Hz

GPS DOP and active satellite information

GPALM

1 Hz

GPS almanac data

GPGGA

50 Hz

Detailed GPS position information

GPGLL

50 Hz

Latitude and longitude data

GPGNS

50 Hz

Fixes data for single or combined satellite navigation systems

GPGRS

50 Hz

Supports Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM)

GPGST

1 Hz

GNSS pseudorange error statistics

GPGSV

1 Hz

GNSS satellite in view

GPHDG/HEHDG

50 Hz

Magnetic deviation and variation for calculating magnetic or true heading

GPHDM/HEHDM

50 Hz

Magnetic heading of the vessel derived from the true heading calculated

GPHDT/HEHDT

50 Hz

True heading of the vessel

GPHEV

50 Hz

Heave value in meters

GPRMC

50 Hz

Recommended minimum specific GNSS data

GPROT/HEROT

50 Hz

Vessel’s rate of turn (ROT) information

GPRRE

1 Hz

Range residual message

GPVTG

50 Hz

Course over ground and ground speed

GPZDA

50 Hz

UTC time and date information

PASHR

1 Hz

Time, true heading, roll, and pitch data in one message

PSAT,ATTSTAT

1HZ

PSAT,GBS

1 Hz

Used to support Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM)

PSAT,HPR

50 Hz

Proprietary NMEA message that provides the true heading, pitch, roll, and
time in a single message

PSAT,INTLT

1 Hz

Proprietary NMEA message that provides the tilt measurements from the
internal inclinometers (in degrees)

PSAT,RTKPROG

1 Hz

Contains RTK fix progress information

PSAT,RTKSTAT

1 Hz

Contains the most relevant parameters affecting RTK

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 99

Commands and Messages
RD1

1 Hz

SBAS diagnostic information

TSS1

50 Hz

Heave, pitch, and roll message in the commonly used TSS1 message format

Topic Last Updated: v1.09 / January 8, 2018

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page
100

Commands and Messages

Binary Messages
Message Structure
The binary messages supported by the receiver are in an Intel Little Endian format for direct read in a PC
environment. More information on this format at the following web site:
http://www.cs.umass.edu/~verts/cs32/endian.html
Each binary message begins with an 8-byte header and ends with a carriage return, line feed pair (0x0D, 0x0A). The
first four characters of the header is the ASCII sequence $BIN.
The following table provides the general binary message structure.
Component

Description

Type

Bytes

Values

Header

Synchronization String

4 byte
string

4

$BIN

Block ID - type of binary
message

Unsigned
short

2

1, 2, 80, 93,
94, 95, 96, 97,
98, or 99

DataLength - the length of
the binary messages

Unsigned
short

2

52, 16, 40, 56,
96, 128, 300,
28, 68, or 304

Data

Binary Data - varying fields
of data with a total length
of DataLength bytes

Mixed
fields

52, 16,
40, 56,
96, 128,
300, 28,
68, or 304

Varies - see
message
tables

Epilogue

Checksum - sum of all
bytes of the data (all
DataLength bytes); the
sum is placed in a 2-byte
integer

Unsigned
short

2

Sum of data
bytes

CR- Carriage return

Byte

1

0D hex

LF - Line feed

Byte

1

0A hex

Messages
Message

Description

Bin1

GPS position message (position and velocity data)

Bin2

GPS DOPs (Dilution of Precision)

Bin3

Lat/Lon/Hgt, Covariances, RMS, DOPs and COG, Speed, Heading

Bin5

Base station information

Bin16

All constellation code and phase information

Bin 19

GNSS diagnostic information

Bin35

BeiDou ephemeris information

Bin36

BeiDou code and carrier phase information (all frequencies)

Bin44

GALILEO time conversion

Bin45

GALILEO ephemeris

Bin62

GLONASS almanac information

Bin65

GLONASS ephemeris information

Bin66

GLONASS L1/L2 code and carrier phase information

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 100

Commands and Messages
Bin69

GLONASS L1/L2 diagnostic information

Bin76

GPS L1/L2 code and carrier phase information

Bin80

SBAS data frame information

Bin89

SBAS satellite tracking information

Bin93

SBAS ephemeris information

Bin94

Ionospheric and UTC conversion parameters

Bin95

GPS ephemeris information

Bin96

GPS L1 code and carrier phase information

Bin97

Processor statistics

Bin98

GPS satellite and almanac information

Bin99

GPS L1 diagnostic information

Bin100

GPS L2 diagnostic information

Bin122

Alternate position solution data

Bin209

SNR and status for all GNSS tracks

Topic Last Updated: v1.09 / January 8, 2018

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 101

Commands and Messages

NMEA 2000 CAN Messages

Message

Description

GNSSPositionData

Detailed GPS position information

GNSSPositionRapidUpdates

Abbreviated GPS position information

NMEACogSogData

GPS speed and direction information

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 102

Commands and Messages

GPCRQ
GPCRQ,MSK Command

Command
Type

Beacon Receiver

Description

Standard NMEA 0183 query to prompt the SBX for its operational status (response is the CRMSK message)
You can issue this command through the secondary serial port with a standard response issued to the same
port. This will not affect the output of RTCM data from the main serial port when the receiver has acquired a
lock on a beacon station.

Command
Format

$GPCRQ,MSK

$CRMSK,fff.f,X,ddd,Y,n*CC
Receiver
Response

Example

where
Response
Component

Description

fff.f

Frequency in kHz (283.5 to 325)

X

Tune mode (M = manual, A = automatic, D = database)

ddd

MSK bit rate (100 or 200 bps)

Y

MSK rate selection mode (M = manual, A = automatic, D = database)

n

Period of output of CRMSS performance status message (0 to 100 seconds)

Response example:

$CRMSK,322.0,M,100,A,2*CC
The frequency is 322.0 kHz, tune mode is Manual, MSK bit rate is 100 bps, MSK rate selection mode is
Automatic, and the message is output every 2 seconds.

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 103

Commands and Messages

GPCRQ,MSS Command

Command
Type

Beacon Receiver

Description

Standard NMEA 0183 query to prompt the SBX for its performance status (response is the CRMSS
message)
You can issue this command through the secondary serial port with a standard response issued to the same
port. This will not affect the output of RTCM data from the main serial port when the receiver has acquired a
lock on a beacon station.

Command
Format

$GPCRQ,MSS

$CRMSS,xx,yy,fff.f,ddd*CC
Receiver
Response

Example

where
Response
Component

Description

xx

Signal strength in dBμV/m

yy

Signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) in dB

fff.f

Frequency in kHz (283.5 to 325)

ddd

MSK bit rate in bps (100 or 200)

Response example:

$CRMSS,65,36,322.0,100*CC
The signal strength is 65 dBμV/m, SNR is 36 dB, frequency is 322.0 kHz, and MSK bit rate is 100 bps.

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 104

Commands and Messages

GPMSK Command

Command
Type

Beacon Receiver

Description

Beacon Tune command
Instruct the SBX to tune to a specified frequency and automatically select the correct MSK rate. When you
send this command through Port A, Port B, or Port C, it is automatically routed to Port D. The resulting
confirmation of this message is returned to the same port from which you sent the command.

Command
Format

$GPMSK,fff.f,F,mmm,M[,n]
where:
Command/Response
Component

Description

fff.f

Beacon frequency in kHz (283.5 to 325)
This may be left blank if the following field 'F' is set to 'A' (automatic) or 'D'
(database)

F

Frequency selection mode
(M = manual, A = automatic, D = database)

mmm

MSK bit rate
This may be left blank if the following field 'M' is set to 'A' (automatic) or 'D'
(database)

M

MSK rate selection mode
(M = manual, A = automatic, D = database)

n

Period of output of CRMSS performance status message (0 to 100 seconds),
where leaving the field blank will output the message once
Note: This field is optional when using database tuning mode or automatic
tuning mode.

$CRMSS,xx,yy,fff.f,ddd*CC
Receiver
Response

Example

where
Response
Component

Description

xx

Signal strength in dBμV/m

yy

Signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) in dB

fff.f

Frequency in kHz (283.5 to 325)

ddd

MSK bit rate in bps (100 or 200)

To instruct the SBX to tune to 310.5 kHz with a bit rate of 100 and output the CRMSS message every 20
seconds issue the following command:

$GPMSK,310.5,M,100,M,20
...and the receiver response is:

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 105

Commands and Messages

$CRMSS,65,36,310.5,100*CC
(repeating every n=20 seconds)
If using database tuning mode issue the following command:

$GPMSK,,D,,D

If using automatic tuning mode issue the following command:

$GPMSK,,A,,A

Additional
Information

When the SBX acknowledges this message, it immediately tunes to the specified frequency and
demodulates at the specified rate.
When you set 'n' to a non-zero value, the SBX outputs the CRMSS message at that period through the
serial port from which the SBX was tuned. When you issue this command with a non-zero 'n' value through
Port B, the periodic output of the CRMSS performance status message does not impact the output of RTCM
on Port A. However, when tuning the SBX with a non-zero 'n' value through Port A, the CRMSS message is
interspersed with the RTCM data. Most GPS engines will not be able to filter the CRMSS message, causing
the overall data to fail parity checking. When power to the SBX is removed and reapplied, the status output
interval resets to zero (no output).
When tuning the SBX engine, if the 'n' field in this message is non-zero, the CRMSS message output by the
SBX may interrupt the flow of RTCM data to the GPS receiver. Repower the SBX to stop the output of the
CRMSS message or retune the Beacon receiver with 'n' set to zero.

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 106

Commands and Messages

JAGE Command

Command
Type

GPS

Description

Specify maximum DGPS (COAST) correction age (6 to 8100 seconds). Using
COAST technology, the receiver can use old correction data for extended
periods of time.
The default setting for the receiver is 2700 seconds.
If you select a maximum correction age older than 1800 seconds (30
minutes), test the receiver to ensure the new setting meets the requirements,
as accuracy will slowly drift with increasing time.

Command
Format

Receiver
Response
Example

$JAGE,age
where 'age' is the maximum differential age timeout

$>

To set the DGPS correction age to 60 seconds issue the following command:

$JAGE,60

Additional
Information

To query the receiver for the current DGPS correction age, issue the JSHOW
command.
What does  mean?

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 107

Commands and Messages

JAIR Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Specify how the receiver will respond to the dynamics associated with
airborne applications or query the current setting

Command
Format

Specify how the receiver responds

$JAIR,r
where 'r' is the AIR mode:

•

NORM - normal track and nav filter bandwidth

•

HIGH - highest track and nav filter bandwidth (receiver is
optimized for the high dynamic environment associated with
airborne platforms)

•

LOW - lowest track and nav filter bandwidth

•

AUTO - default track and nav filter bandwidth, similar to
NORM but automatically goes to HIGH above 30 m/sec

Query the current setting

$JAIR

Receiver
Response

Receiver response when specifying how the receiver responds or querying
the current setting

$>JAIR,MAN,NORM
$>JAIR,MAN,HIGH
$>JAIR,MAN,LOW
$>JAIR,AUTO,NORM

Example

To set the AIR mode to LOW issue the following command:

$JAIR,LOW
The response is then:

$>JAIR,MAN,LOW

Additional
Information

Defaults to normal (NORM) which is recommended for most applications.
The AUTO option enables the receiver to decide when to turn JAIR to HIGH.
CAUTION: Setting AIR mode to HIGH is not recommended for Crescent
Vector operation.
On the HIGH setting, the receiver tolerates larger and sudden drops in the
SNR value before it discards the data as being invalid. This additional
tolerance is beneficial in applications such as crop dusting where an aircraft
is banking rapidly. As the aircraft banks, the antenna position shifts from
upright and having a clear view of the sky to being tipped slightly, with a

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 108

Commands and Messages

possibly obscured view of the sky, and then back to upright. This sudden
tipping of the antenna causes the SNR value to drop.
If the tolerance is not set as HIGH, the receiver views the data recorded while
banking as invalid and discards it. As a result the GPS position will not be
accurate.
The status of this command is also output in the JSHOW message.

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 109

Commands and Messages

JALT Command

Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Turn altitude aiding for the receiver on or off
When set to something other than NEVER, altitude aiding uses a fixed altitude instead of using one satellite’s
observations to calculate the altitude. The advantage of this feature, when operating in an application where a
fixed altitude is acceptable, is that the extra satellite’s observations can be used to the betterment of the latitude,
longitude, and time offset calculations, resulting in improved accuracy and integrity. Marine markets, for example,
may be well suited for use of this feature.

Command
Format

$JALT,c[,h[,GEOID]]
where 'c' (feature status variable) and 'h' (threshold variable) may be one of the following:
c Value

Correspondi
ng h Value

Description

NEVER

N/A

Default
mode of
operation
where
altitude
aiding is
not used.

SOMETIMES

PDOP

Sets the
receiver to
use altitude
aiding
depending
upon the
PDOP
threshold.

SATS

NUMSATS

Sets the
receiver to
use altitude
aiding
depending
upon the
number of
visible
satellites. If
there are
fewer visible
satellites
than
specified by
NUMSATS,
altitude
aiding is
used.

ALWAYS

HEIGHT

Sets the
receiver to
use altitude
aiding
regardless

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Format

$JALT,NEVER

$JALT,SOMETIMES,PDOP

$JALT,SATS,NUMSATS

$JALT,ALWAYS,HEIGHT
$JALT,ALWAYS,HEIGHT,GEOID

Page 110

Commands and Messages

of a
variable. In
this case,
you may
specify the
ellipsoidal
altitude
HEIGHT
that the
receiver
should use.

To obtain a HEIGHT value to use with ALWAYS (using DGPS positions), average the HEIGHT over a period of
time (the longer the time period, the more accurate this HEIGHT value). This is the ellipsoidal height.

$JALT,ALWAYS,HEIGHT
If you use the height reported from the GPGGA message (this is actually geoidal and not ellipsoidal), use the
following command:

$JALT,ALWAYS,HEIGHT,GEOID

Receiver
Response
Example

$>

To turn altitude aiding on to SOMETIMES with a PDOP of 5 issue the following command:

$JALT,SOMETIMES,5
7
To turn altitude aiding on to ALWAYS using the height of 401.6 m as reported in the GPGGA message (geoidal
height) issue the following command:

$JALT,ALWAYS,401.6,GEOID

Additional
Information

To query the receiver for the current setting, issue the JSHOW command. For example, if you issue the following
command:

$JALT,ALWAYS,404.2
...then issuing the JSHOW command displays the following as part of its output:

$>JSHOW,ALT,ALWAYS,404.2

Topic Last Updated: v1.03 / January 11, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 111

Commands and Messages

JAPP Command

Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Specify which of the installed applications should be utilized or query the receiver
for the currently installed applications
Note: Hemisphere GNSS Crescent and Eclipse GPS receivers are able to hold
up to two different application firmware programs simultaneously.

Command
Format

Specify receiver application firmware (when two applications are present)

$JAPP,OTHER or $JAPP,O
(the second command uses the letter O, not a zero) or

$JAPP,x
where ‘x’ is either 1 (application in slot 1) or 2 (application in slot 2)
Query receiver application firmware

$JAPP

Receiver
Response

For example, if WAAS (SBAS) and AUTODIFF (e-Dif) are the two installed
applications (WAAS in slot1 and AUTODIFF in slot2) and WAAS is the current
application, if you issue the $JAPP,OTHERcommand on a
receiver, the response to $JAPP will
be$>JAPP,AUTODIFF,WAAS,2,1, indicating that application slot 2 (eDif) is currently being used.
Hemisphere GNSS recommends that you follow up the sending of these
commands with a $JAPP query to see which application is 1 or 2. It is best to
use these two commands when upgrading the firmware inside the receiver,
because the firmware upgrading utility uses the application number to designate
which application to overwrite.
Response to querying the current setting

$>JAPP,CURRENT,OTHER,[1 OR 2],[2 OR 1]
where:

•

'CURRENT' indicates the current application in use

•

'OTHER' indicates the secondary application that is not
currently in use

•

1 and 2 indicate in which application slots the applications
reside

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 112

Commands and Messages
Example

If the response
to $JAPP is $>JAPP,WAAS,AUTODIFF,1,2, this
indicates:
•
WAAS (SBAS) is the current application and is in application slot 1
•
e-Dif is the other application (not currently used) and is in application slot 2

Additional
Information

When querying the current setting, the following application names may
appear (depending on your product):
•

Crescent

WAAS – Changes to the SBAS application. For the sake of the application names, the SBAS application is referred to as
WAAS by the receiver’s internal firmware
• AUTODIFF – Changes to the e-Dif application. Referred to as "AUTODIFF" in the receiver’s
internal firmware
• LOCRTK – Changes to the local differential rover application
• RTKBAS – Changes to the local differential base application
• LBAND – Changes toAtlas DGPS service

•

Eclipse

WAASRTKB – Changes to the SBAS/RTK Base application
• LBAND – Changes to Atlas DGPS service

•

RTK – Changes to the RTK Rover application

• Eclipse II
SBASRTKB – Changes to the SBAS/L-band/RTK Base application
• AUTODIFF – Changes to the e-Dif application, referred to as "AUTODIFF" in the firmware
• RTK – Changes to the RTK Rover application
• MFA - Multi-function application
• miniEclipse
WAASRTKB – Changes to the SBAS/RTK Base application
• AUTODIFF – Changes to the e-Dif application, referred to as "AUTODIFF" in the firmware
• RTK – Changes to the RTK Rover application
• MFA - Multi-function application

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 113

Commands and Messages
Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 114

Commands and Messages

JASC
JASC Command Overview
The JASC command is used to request ASCII messages.
Command

Description

JASC,CMR

Set the proprietary CMR messages to on or off to provide corrections to the rover

JASC,D1 (RD1)

Set the RD1 diagnostic information message from the receiver to on or off

JASC,DFX

Set the proprietary DFX messages to on or off to provide corrections to the rover

JASC,GL

Enable the GLONASS data messages at a particular update rate to be turned on or
off. When turning messages on, various update rates are available depending on the
requirements.

JASC,GN

Enable the GNSS data messages at a particular update rate to be turned on or off.
When turning messages on, various update rates are available depending on the
requirements.

JASC,GP

Enable the GPS data messages at a particular update rate to be turned on or off

JASC,INTLT

Configure the receiver to output pitch and roll data

JASC,PASHR

Configure the receiver to output time, true heading, roll, and pitch data in one
message

JASC,PSAT,ATTSTAT

Configure the receiver to output the information of secondary antenna

JASC,PSAT,BLV,1

Configure the receiver to output the North,East,Up base-line vector

JASC,PSAT,FVI,1

Configure the receiver to output a message include most position and
attitude information

JASC,PSAT,RTKPROG

Configure the receiver to output RTK fix progress

JASC,PSAT,RTKSTAT

Configure the receiver to output the most relevant parameters affecting RTK

JASC,PSAT,VCT,1

Configure the receiver to output the heading, pitch, roll, and master to slave vector

JASC,PTSS1

Configure the receiver to output heave, pitch, and roll in the commonly used TSS1
message format

JASC,ROX

Set the proprietary ROX messages to on or off to provide corrections to the rover

JASC,RTCM

Configure the receiver to output RTCM version 2 DGPS corrections from SBAS or
beacon through either receiver serial port

JASC,RTCM3

Set the RTCM version 3 messages to on or off to provide corrections to the rover

JASC,VIRTUAL

Configure the receiver to have RTCM data input on one port and output through the
other (when using an external correction source)

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 115

Commands and Messages

JASC,CMR Command
Command
Type

Local Differential and RTK

Description

Set the proprietary CMR messages to on or off to provide corrections to the
rover
This command only applies to an Eclipse base station receiver when using
GPS dual frequency RTK mode. RTK is relative to the reference position
(base only).

Command
Format

Receiver
Response
Example

$JASC,CMR,r[,OTHER]
where:

•

'r' = correction status variable (0 = turn corrections Off, 1 =
turn corrections On)

•

',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current
port when you send the command without it (and without
the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when
you send the command with it (without the brackets). See
Configuring the Data Message Output for detailed
information on 'THIS' and 'OTHER' port terminology.

$>

To turn on CMR messages on the OTHER port issue the following command:

$JASC,CMR,1,OTHER

Additional
Information

To query the receiver for the current setting, issue the JSHOW command.
To change the broadcast station ID, use JRTK,28.

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 116

Commands and Messages

JASC,D1 Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration, SBAS

Description

Set the RD1 diagnostic information message from the receiver to on or off
There is currently only an (R)D1 message.

Command
Format

Receiver
Response

Example

$JASC,D1,r[,OTHER]
where:

•

'r' = message rate (0 = Off, 1 = On at 1Hz)

•

',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change in the RD1
message on the current port when you send the command
without it (and without the brackets) and enacts a change in
the RD1 message on the other port when you send the
command with it (without the brackets). See Configuring the
Data Message Output for detailed information on 'THIS' and
'OTHER' port terminology.

$>

To output the RD1 message once per second from THIS port issue the
following command:

$JASC,D1,1
...and the output will look similar to the following:

$RD1,410213,1052,1551.489,1,0,39,- 611.5,0,1F,1F,0,999999
$RD1,410214,1052,1551.489,1,0,40,615.1,0,1F,1F,0,999999
$RD1,410215,1052,1551.489,1,0,40,607.1,0,1F,1F,0,999999
See RD1 message for a description of each field in the response.
Additional
Information

Although you request D1 through this command the responding message is
RD1.
To query the receiver for the current setting, issue the JSHOW command.
For example, if you issue the following command:

$JASC,D1,1
...then issuing the JSHOW command displays the following as part of its
output:

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 117

Commands and Messages
$>JSHOW,ASC,D1,1

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 118

Commands and Messages

JASC,DFX Command
Command
Type

Local Differential and RTK

Description

Set the proprietary DFX messages to on or off to provide corrections to the
rover
This command only applies to a Crescent base receiver when using L-Dif or
RTK mode. Differential is relative to the reference position (base only). See
the JASC,ROX command for the equivalent message for the Eclipse series of
products.

Command
Format

$JASC,DFX,r[,OTHER]
where:

•

'r' = correction status variable (0 = turn corrections Off, 1 =
turn corrections On)

•

',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current
port when you send the command without it (and without
the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when
you send the command with it (without the brackets). See
Configuring the Data Message Output for detailed
information on 'THIS' and 'OTHER' port terminology.

Receiver
Response

$>

Example

To turn on DFX messages on THIS port issue the following command:

$JASC,DFX,1

Additional
Information

To query the receiver for the current setting, issue the JSHOW command.
To change the broadcast station ID, use JRTK,28.

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 119

Commands and Messages

JASC,GL Command
Command
Type

GLONASS

Description

Enable the GLONASS data messages at a particular update rate to be turned on or off. When turning
messages on, various update rates are available depending on therequirements.

Command
Format

$JASC,msg,r[,OTHER]
where:

•

'msg' = name of the data message

•

'r' = message rate (see table below)

•

',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port (THIS port) whenyou
send the command without it (and without the brackets) and enacts a change on the
other port (OTHER port) when you send the command with it (without the brackets).
See Configuring the Data Message Output for detailed information on 'THIS' and
'OTHER' port terminology.

Send a command with a zero value for the 'R' field to turn off a message.

Receiver
Response
Example

MSG

R (rate in Hz)

Description

GLMLA

1 (on) or 0 (off)
When set to on the
message is sent once
(one message for each
tracked satellite) and
then sent again
whenever satellite
information changes

GLONASS almanac data

GLGGA

20, 10, 2, 1, 0 or .2

GPS fix data

GLGLL

20, 10, 2, 1, 0 or .2

Geographic position - latitude/longitude

GLGNS

20, 10, 2, 1, 0 or .2

GNSS fix data

GLGSA

1 or 0

GLONASS DOP and active satellites

GLGSV

1 or 0

GLONASS satellite in view

$>
To output the GLGNS message through the OTHER port at a rate of 20 Hz, issue the following command:

$JASC,GLGNS,20,OTHER
Additional
Information

The status of this command is also output in the JSHOW message.
What does  mean?

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 120

Commands and Messages
Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 121

Commands and Messages

JASC,GA Command

Command
Type

GALILEO

Description

Enable the GALILEO data messages at a particular update rate to be turned on or off. When turning
messages on, various update rates are available depending on the requirements.

Command
Format

$JASC,msg,r[,OTHER]
where:

•

'msg' = name of the data message

•

'r' = message rate (see table below)

•

',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port (THIS port) whenyou
send the command without it (and without the brackets) and enacts a change on the
other port (OTHER port) when you send the command with it (without the brackets).
See Configuring the Data Message Output for detailed information on 'THIS' and
'OTHER' port terminology.

Send a command with a zero value for the 'R' field to turn off a message.

Receiver
Response

MSG

R (rate in Hz)

Description

GNGNS

20, 10, 2, 1, 0 or .2

All GNSS fix data (GAGNS output is GALILEO)

GAGSV

1 or 0

GALILEO satellites in view

$>

Example

To output the GAGNS message through the OTHER port at a rate of 20 Hz, issue the following command:

Additional
Information

The status of this command is also output in the JSHOW message.
What does  mean?

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 122

Commands and Messages

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 123

Commands and Messages

JASC,GQ Command

Command
Type

QZSS

Description

Enable the QZSS data messages at a particular update rate to be turned on or off.

Command
Format

$JASC,msg,r[,OTHER]
where:

•

'msg' = name of the data message

•

'r' = message rate (see table below)

•

',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port (THIS port) when you
send the command without it (and without the brackets) and enacts a change onthe
other port (OTHER port) when you send the command with it (without the brackets).
See Configuring the Data Message Output for detailed information on 'THIS' and
'OTHER' port terminology.

Send a command with a zero value for the 'R' field to turn off a message.
MSG

GQGSV
Receiver
Response
Example

R (rate in Hz)

Description

1 or 0

QZSS satellites in view

$>

To output the GAGNS message through the OTHER port, issue the following command:

$JASC,GNGNS,1,OTHER

Additional
Information

The status of this command is also output in the JSHOW message.
What does  mean?

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 124

Commands and Messages
Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 125

Commands and Messages

JASC,GN Command
Command
Type

GPS, Vector

Description

Enable the GNSS data messages at a particular update rate to be turned on or off. When turning messages
on, various update rates are available depending on therequirements.

Command
Format

$JASC,msg,r[,OTHER]
where:

•

'msg' = name of the data message

•

'r' = message rate (see table below)

•

',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port (THIS port) when you
send the command without it (and without the brackets) and enacts a change on the
other port (OTHER port) when you send the command with it (without the brackets).
See Configuring the Data Message Output for detailed information on 'THIS' and
'OTHER' port terminology.

Send a command with a zero value for the 'R' field to turn off a message.

Receiver
Response
Example

MSG

R (rate in Hz)

Description

GNGGA

20, 10, 2, 1, 0 or .2

GNSS fix data

GNGLL

20, 10, 2, 1, 0 or .2

Geographic position - latitude/longitude

GNGNS

20, 10, 2, 1, 0 or .2

GNSS fix data

GNGSA

1 or 0

GNSS DOP and active satellites

$>

To output the GNGNS message through the OTHER port at a rate of 20 Hz, issue the following command:

$JASC,GNGNS,20,OTHER

Additional
Information

The status of this command is also output in the JSHOW message.
What does  mean?

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 126

Commands and Messages

JASC,GP Command
Command
Type

GPS, Vector

Description

Enable the GPS data messages at a particular update rate to be turned on or off. When turning messages
on, various update rates are available depending on therequirements.

Command
Format

$JASC,msg,r[,OTHER]
where:

•

'msg' = name of the data message

•

'r' = message rate (see table below)

•

',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port (THIS port) when you
send the command without it (and without the brackets) and enacts a change on the
other port (OTHER port) when you send the command with it (without the brackets).
See Configuring the Data Message Output for detailed information on 'THIS' and
'OTHER' port terminology.

Send a command with a zero value for the 'R' field to turn off a message.
MSG

R (rate in Hz)

Description

GPALM

1 or 0

GPS almanac data

GPDTM

1 or 0

Datum reference

GPGBS

1 or 0

Satellite fault detection used for RAIM

GPGGA

20, 10, 2, 1, 0 or .2

Detailed GPS position information

GPGLL

20, 10, 2, 1, 0 or .2

Latitude and longitude data

GPGNS

20, 10, 2, 1, 0 or .2

Fixes data for single or combined satellite navigation
systems

GPGRS

1, 0 or .2

GNSS range residuals

GNGSA

1 or 0

GPS DOP and active satellite information

GPGST

1 or 0

GNSS pseudorange error statistics

GPGSV

1 or 0

GNSS satellite in view

GPHDG
or
HEHDG

20, 10, 2, 1, 0 or .2

Magnetic deviation and variation for calculating magnetic
or true heading

GPHDM
or
HEHDM

20, 10, 2, 1, 0 or .2

Magnetic heading of the vessel derived from the true
heading calculated

GPHDT
or
HEHDT

20, 10, 2, 1, 0 or .2

True heading of the vessel

GPHEV

20, 10, 2, 1, 0 or .2

Heave value in meters

GPHPR

20, 10, 2, 1, 0 or .2

Proprietary NMEA message that provides the true
heading, pitch, roll, and time in a single message

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 127

Commands and Messages

Receiver
Response
Example

GPRMC

10, 2, 1, 0 or .2

Recommended minimum specific GNSS data

GPROT
or
HEROT

20, 10, 2, 1, 0 or .2

Vessel’s rate of turn (ROT) information

GPRRE

1 or 0

Range residual message

GPVTG

20, 10, 2, 1, 0 or .2

Course over ground and ground speed

GPZDA

20, 10, 2, 1, 0 or .2

UTC time and date information

INTLT

1 or 0

Proprietary NMEA message that provides the tilt
measurements from the internal inclinometers (in
degrees)

$>

To output the GPGGA message through the OTHER port at a rate of 20 Hz, issue the following command:

$JASC,GPGGA,20,OTHER

Additional
Information

The status of this command is also output in the JSHOW message.
What does  mean?

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 128

Commands and Messages

JASC,INTLT Command
Command
Type

Vector

Description

Configure the receiver to output pitch and roll data (pitch and roll are factory
calibrated over temperature to be accurate to ±3°C)
Saved with JSAVE.

Command
Format

$JASC,INTLT,r[,OTHER]
where:

•

'r' = message rate (0 = Off, 1 = On at 1Hz)

•

',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current
port when you send the command without it (and without
the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when
you send the command with it (without the brackets). See
Configuring the Data Message Output for detailed
information on 'THIS' and 'OTHER' port terminology.

$PSAT,INTLT,pitch,roll*CC
Receiver
Response

where pitch and roll are in degrees

Example

Additional
Information

PSAT,INTLT message

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 129

Commands and Messages

JASC,PASHR Command
Command
Type

Vector

Description

Configure the receiver to output time, true heading, heave, roll, and pitch data in one message

Command
Format

Receiver
Response

$JASC,PASHR,r[,OTHER]
where:

•

'r' = message rate (0 = Off, 1 = On at 1Hz)

•

',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when you send the command without it
(and without the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when you send the command with it
(without th brackets). See Configuring the Data Message Output for detailed information on 'THIS' and
'OTHER' port terminology.

$PASHR,hhmmss.ss,HHH.HH,T,RRR.RR,PPP.PP,heave,rr.rrr,pp.ppp,hh.hhh,QF*CC
<
where:

Example

Message
Component

Description

hhmmss.ss

UTC time

HHH.HH

Heading value in decimal degrees

T

True heading (T displayed if heading is relative to true north)

RRR.RR

Roll in decimal degrees (- sign will be displayed when applicable)

PPP.PP

Pitch in decimal degrees (- sign will be displayed when applicable)

heave

Heave, in meters

rr.rrr

Roll standard deviation in decimal degrees

pp.ppp

Pitch standard deviation in decimal degrees

hh.hhh

Heading standard deviation in decimal degrees

QF

Quality Flag

•

0 = No position

•

1 = All non-RTK fixed integer positions

•

2 = RTK fixed integer position

*CC

Checksum



Carriage return



Line feed

To turn on the PASHR message on THIS port issue the following command:

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 130

Commands and Messages
$JASC,PASHR,1
...and the message output appears similar to the following:

$PASHR,162930.00,,T,2.48,3.92,-0.64,0.514,0.514,0.000,1*05
$PASHR,162931.00,,T,2.38,3.93,-0.70,0.508,0.508,0.000,1*07
$PASHR,162932.00,,T,2.67,4.00,-0.66,0.503,0.503,0.000,1*04

Additional
Information

PASHR message

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 131

Commands and Messages

JASC,PSAT,ATTSTAT Command

Command
Type

Local Differential and RTK

Description

The information of secondary antenna.

Command
Format

$JASC,PSAT,ATTSTAT,r[,OTHER]
where:

•

'r' = message rate (0 = Off, 1 = On at 1Hz)

•

',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current
port when you send the command without it (and without
the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when
you send the command with it (without the brackets). See
Configuring the Data Message Output for detailed
information on 'THIS' and 'OTHER' port terminology.

.

Receiver
Response
Example

$>

To turn on this message on the THIS port issue the following command:

$JASC,PSAT,ATTSTAT,1

Additional
Information

Issuing the JSAVE command after setting JASC,PSAT,ATTSTAT to 1
(message on at 1Hz) does not save this setting. You must enable
JASC,PSAT,ATTSTAT (set it to 1) each time you power on the receiver.

Related
Commands
and
Messages

PSAT,ATTSTAT message

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / Octoter 13, 2016

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 132

Commands and Messages

JASC,PSAT,BLV Command

Command
Type

Local Differential and RTK

Description

Configure the receiver to output the North, East,Up base-line vector

Command
Format

$JASC,PSAT,BLV,r[,OTHER]
where:

•
•

'r' = message rate 0,1,2,5,10,20 (0 = Off, 1 = On at 1Hz)

',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current
port when you send the command without it (and without
the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when
you send the command with it (without the brackets). See
Configuring the Data Message Output for detailed
information on 'THIS' and 'OTHER' port terminology.

.

Receiver
Response
Example

$>

To turn on this message on the THIS port issue the following command:

$JASC,PSAT,BLV,1

Additional
Information

.

Related
Commands
and
Messages

PSAT, BLV message

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / Octoter 13, 2016

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 133

Commands and Messages

JASC,PSAT,FVI Command

Command
Type

Local Differential and RTK

Description

Contains much more special information

Command
Format

$JASC,PSAT,FVI,r[,OTHER]
where:

•
•

'r' = message rate 0,1,2,5,10,20 (0 = Off, 1 = On at 1Hz)

',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current
port when you send the command without it (and without
the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when
you send the command with it (without the brackets). See
Configuring the Data Message Output for detailed
information on 'THIS' and 'OTHER' port terminology.

.

Receiver
Response
Example

$>

To turn on this message on the THIS port issue the following command:

$JASC,PSAT,FVI,1

Additional
Information

.

Related
Commands
and
Messages

PSAT, FVI message

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / Octoter 13, 2016

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 134

Commands and Messages

JASC,PSAT,RTKPROG Command
Command
Type

Local Differential and RTK

Description

Configure the receiver to output RTK fix progress

Command
Format

$JASC,PSAT,RTKPROG,r[,OTHER]
where:

•

'r' = message rate (0 = Off, 1 = On at 1Hz)

•

',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current
port when you send the command without it (and without
the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when
you send the command with it (without the brackets). See
Configuring the Data Message Output for detailed
information on 'THIS' and 'OTHER' port terminology.

You can also perform a one-time query of the message information by
issuing the JQUERY,RTKPROG command.

Receiver
Response
Example

$>

To turn on this message on the THIS port issue the following command:

$JASC,PSAT,RTKPROG,1

Additional
Information

Issuing the JSAVE command after setting JASC,PSAT,RTKPROG to 1
(message on at 1Hz) does not save this setting. You must enable
JASC,PSAT,RTKPROG (set it to 1) each time you power on the receiver.
See also PSAT,RTKPROG message.

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 135

Commands and Messages
Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 136

Commands and Messages

JASC,PSAT,RTKSTAT Command
Command
Type

Local Differential and RTK

Description

Configure the receiver to output the most relevant parameters affecting RTK

Command
Format

$JASC,PSAT,RTKSTAT,r[,OTHER]
where:

•

'r' = message rate (0 = Off, 1 = On at 1Hz)

•

',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current
port when you send the command without it (and without
the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when
you send the command with it (without the brackets). See
Configuring the Data Message Output for detailed
information on 'THIS' and 'OTHER' port terminology.

You can also perform a one-time query of the message information by
issuing the JQUERY,RTKSTAT command.

Receiver
Response
Example

$>

To turn on this message on the THIS port issue the following command:

$JASC,PSAT,RTKSTAT,1

Additional
Information

Issuing the JSAVE command after setting JASC,PSAT,RTKSTAT to 1
(message on at 1Hz) does not save this setting. You must enable
JASC,PSAT,RTKSTAT (set it to 1) each time you power on the receiver.

Related
Commands
and
Messages

JQUERY,RTKSTAT command
PSAT,RTKSTAT message

Topic Last Updated: v1.05 / January 18, 2013

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 137

Commands and Messages

JASC,PSAT,VCT Command
Command
Type

Local Differential and RTK

Description

Command
Format

$JASC,PSAT,VCT,r[,OTHER]
where:

•
•

'r' = message rate 0,1,2,5,10,20 (0 = Off, 1 = On at 1Hz)

',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current
port when you send the command without it (and without
the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when
you send the command with it (without the brackets). See
Configuring the Data Message Output for detailed
information on 'THIS' and 'OTHER' port terminology.

.

Receiver
Response
Example

$>

To turn on this message on the THIS port issue the following command:

$JASC,PSAT,VCT,1
Additional
Information

Related
Commands
and
Messages

.

PSAT, VCT message

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / Octoter 13, 2016

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 138

Commands and Messages

JASC,PTSS1 Command

Command
Type

Vector

Description

Configure the receiver to output heave, pitch, and roll in the commonly used TSS1 message format

Command
Format

Receiver
Response

$JASC,PTSS1,r[,OTHER]
where:

•

'r' = message rate (in Hz) of 0 (off), 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 5, 10, or 20 (if subscribed)

•

',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when you send the command without it
(and without the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when you send the command with it
(without the brackets). See Configuring the Data Message Output for detailed information on 'THIS' and
'OTHER' port terminology.

:XXAAAASMHHHHQMRRRRSMPPPP*CC
where:
Message
Component

Description

XX

Horizontal acceleration

AAAA

Vertical acceleration

HHHH

Heave, in centimeters

S

S = space character

M

Space if positive; minus if negative

Q

Status flag
Value

Description

h

Heading aided mode (settling) The System is receiving heading aiding signals from a gyrocompass but is still
awaiting the end of the three minutes settling period after power-on or a change of
mode or heave bandwidth. The gyrocompass takes approximately five minutes to
settle after it has been powered on. During this time, gyrocompass aiding of the
System will not be perfect. The status flag does NOT indicate this condition.

F

Full aided mode (settled condition) - The System is receiving and using aiding
signals from a gyrocompass and from a GPS receiver or a Doppler log.

M

Space if positive; minus if negative

RRRR

Roll, in units of 0.01 degrees (ex: 1000 = 10°)

S

S = space character

M

Space if positive; minus if negative

PPPP

Pitch, in units of 0.01 degrees (ex: 1000 = 10°)



Carriage return

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 139

Commands and Messages


Additional
Information

Line feed

TSS1 message

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 140

Commands and Messages

JASC,ROX Command
Command
Type

Local Differential and RTK

Description

Set the proprietary ROX messages to on or off to provide corrections to the
rover
This command only applies to an Eclipse base station receiver when using
GPS dual frequency RTK mode. RTK is relative to the reference position
(base only).

Command
Format

Receiver
Response
Example

$JASC,ROX,r[,OTHER]
where:

•

'r' = correction status variable (0 = turn corrections Off, 1 =
turn corrections On)

•

',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current
port when you send the command without it (and without
the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when
you send the command with it (without the brackets). See
Configuring the Data Message Output for detailed
information on 'THIS' and 'OTHER' port terminology.

$>

To turn on ROX messages on the OTHER port issue the following command:

$JASC,ROX,1,OTHER

Additional
Information

To query the receiver for the current setting, issue the JSHOW command.
To change the broadcast station ID, use JRTK,28.

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 141

Commands and Messages

JASC,RTCM Command
Command
Type

SBAS

Description Configure the receiver to output RTCM version 2 DGPS corrections from
SBAS or beacon through either receiver serial port. The correction data
output is RTCM SC-104, even though SBAS uses a different over-the-air
protocol (RTCA).

Command
Format

Receiver
Response

Example

$JASC,RTCM,r[,OTHER]
where:

•

'r' = message status variable (0 = Off, 1 = On)

•

',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current
port when you send the command without it (and without
the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when
you send the command with it (without the brackets). See
Configuring the Data Message Output for detailed
information on 'THIS' and 'OTHER' port terminology.

$>

To output RTCM corrections from SBAS or beacon on THIS port (current
port) issue the following command:

$JASC,RTCM,1

Additional
Information

To verify the current setting is on, issue the JSHOW command. You will see
output similar to the following:

$>JSHOW,ASC,RTCM,1.0
If the current setting is off, the JSHOW command will not show any
information for this setting.

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 142

Commands and Messages

JASC,RTCM3 Command
Command
Type

Local Differential and RTK

Description

Set the RTCM version 3 messages to on or off to provide corrections to the
rover
This command only applies to an Eclipse base station receiver when using
GPS dual frequency RTK mode. RTK is relative to the reference position
(base only).

Command
Format

Receiver
Response
Example

$JASC,RTCM3,r[,OTHER]
where:

•

'r' = correction status variable (0 = turn corrections Off, 1 =
turn corrections On)

•

',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current
port when you send the command without it (and without
the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when
you send the command with it (without the brackets). See
Configuring the Data Message Output for detailed
information on 'THIS' and 'OTHER' port terminology.

$>

To turn on RTCM3 messages on the OTHER port issue the following
command:

$JASC,RTCM3,1,OTHER

Additional
Information

To query the receiver for the current setting, issue the JSHOW command.
To change the broadcast station ID, use JRTK,28.

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 143

Commands and Messages

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 144

Commands and Messages

JASC,VIRTUAL Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Configure the receiver to have RTCM data input on one port and output
through the other (when using an external correction source)
For example, if RTCM is input on Port B, the data will be output through Port
A having corrected the receiver position. The receiver acts as a pass-through
for the RTCM data. Either port may be configured to accept RTCM data
input; this command enables the opposite port to output the RTCM data.

Command
Format

Receiver
Response

Example

$JASC,VIRTUAL,r[,OTHER]
where:

•

'r' = message status variable (0 = Off, 1 = On)

•

',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current
port when you send the command without it (and without
the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when
you send the command with it (without the brackets). See
Configuring the Data Message Output for detailed
information on 'THIS' and 'OTHER' port terminology.

$>

To configure THIS port to output RTCM messages that are being input
through the OTHER port issue the following command:

$JASC,VIRTUAL,1

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 145

Commands and Messages

JATT
JATT Command Overview
The JATT command is used to define or query attitude settings for Vector products.
Command

Description

JATT,COGTAU

Set the course over ground (COG) time constant (0.0 to 3600.0 seconds) or query
the current setting

JATT,CSEP

Query to retrieve the current separation between GPS antennas

JATT,EXACT

Enable/disable internal filter reliance on the entered antenna separation or query
the current setting

JATT,FLIPBRD

Allow upside down installation

JATT,GYROAID

Turn on gyro aiding or query the current feature status

JATT,HBIAS

Set the heading bias or query the current setting

JATT,HELP

Show the available commands for GPS heading operation and status

JATT,HIGHMP

Set/query the high multipath setting for use in poor GPS environments

JATT,HRTAU

Set the rate of turn time constant or query the current setting

JATT,HTAU

Set the heading time constant or query the current setting

JATT,LEVEL

Turn on level operation or query the current feature status

JATT,MOVEBASE

Set the auto GPS antenna separation or query the current setting

JATT,MSEP

Set (manually) the GPS antenna separation or query the current setting

JATT,NEGTILT

Turn on the negative tilt feature or query the current setting

JATT,NMEAHE

Instruct the Vector to preface the HDG, HDT, ROT and THS messages with GP or
HE, and the HDM message with GP or HC.

JATT,PBIAS

Set the pitch bias or query the current setting

JATT,PTAU

Set the pitch time constant or query the current setting

JATT,ROLL

Configure the Vector for roll or pitch output

JATT,SEARCH

Force a new RTK heading search

JATT,SPDTAU

Set the speed time constant (0.0 to 3600.0 seconds) or query the current setting

JATT,SUMMARY

Show the current configuration of the Vector

JATT,TILTAID

Turn tilt aiding on/off or query the Vector for the current status of this feature

JATT,TILTCAL

Calibrate the internal tilt sensor of the Vector

Topic Last Updated: v1.09 / January 8, 2018

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 146

Commands and Messages

JATT,COGTAU Command
Note: The JTAU,COG command provides identical functionality but works with Crescent and Eclipse products in addition
to Crescent Vectorproducts.
Command
Type

Vector

Description

Set the course over ground (COG) time constant (0.0 to 3600.0 seconds) or
query the current setting
This command allows you to adjust the level of responsiveness of the COG
measurement provided in the GPVTG message. The default value is 0.0
seconds of smoothing. Increasing the COG time constant increases the level
of COG smoothing.
COG is computed using only the primary GPS antenna (when using a multiantenna system) and its accuracy depends upon the speed of the vessel
(noise is proportional to 1/speed). This value is invalid when the vessel is
stationary, as tiny movements due to calculation inaccuracies are not
representative of a vessel’s movement.

Command
Format

Set the COG timeconstant

$JATT,COGTAU,cogtau
where 'cogtau' is the new COG time constant that falls within the range of 0.0
to 200.0 seconds
The setting of this value depends upon the expected dynamics of the
Crescent. If the Crescent will be in a highly dynamic environment, this value
should be set lower because the filtering window would be shorter, resulting
in a more responsive measurement. However, if the receiver will be in a
largely static environment, this value can be increased to reduce
measurement noise.
Query the current setting

$JATT,COGTAU

Receiver
Response
Additional
Information

$>

You can use the following formula to determine the COG time constant:
cogtau (in seconds) = 10 / maximum rate of change of course (in °/s)
If you are unsure about the best value for this setting, it is best to be
conservative and leave it at the default setting of 0.0 seconds.

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 147

Commands and Messages

JATT,CSEP Command
Command
Type

Vector

Description

Query the Vector for the current calculated separation between antennas, as
solved for by the attitude algorithms

Command
Format

$JATT,CSEP

$>JATT,X,CSEP
Receiver
Response

where 'X' is the antenna separation in meters

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 148

Commands and Messages

JATT,EXACT Command
Command
Type

Vector

Description

Enable/disable internal filter reliance on the entered antenna separation or
query the current setting

Command
Format

Enable/disable internal filter reliance
To enable internal filter reliance:

$JATT,EXACT,YES
To disable internal filter reliance:

$JATT,EXACT,NO
Query the current setting

$JATT,EXACT

Receiver
Response

$>

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 149

Commands and Messages

JATT,FLIPBRD Command
Command
Type

Vector

Description

Turn the flip feature on/off or querythe current feature status
Allow the Vector OEM board to be installed upside down. You should use this
command only with the Vector Sensor and the Vector OEM board because
flipping the OEM board does not affect the antenna array that needs to
remain facing upwards. When using this command, the board needs to be
flipped about roll so the front still faces the front of the vessel.

Command
Format

Turn the flip feature on/off
To turn the flip feature on:

$JATT,FLIPBRD,YES

To turn the flip feature off (return to default mode - right side up):

$JATT,FLIPBRD,NO

Query current the current setting

$JATT,FLIPBRD

Receiver
Response

$>

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 150

Commands and Messages

JATT,GYROAID Command
Command
Type

Vector

Description

Turn gyro aiding on or off or query the current setting
The Vector’s internal gyro—enabled by default when shipped—offers two
benefits.

•
•

It shortens reacquisition times when a GPS heading is lost
because of obstruction of satellite signals. It does this by reducing
the search volume required for solution of the RTK.
It provides an accurate substitute heading for a short period
(depending on the roll and pitch of the vessel) ideally seeing the
system through to reacquisition.

For these two benefits, Hemisphere GNSS highly recommend leaving gyro
aiding on.
Exceeding rates of 90°/sec is not recommended because the gyro cannot
measure rates beyond this point. This is a new recommendation since
Hemisphere GNSS now uses gyro measurements to obtain a heading rate
measurement.

Command
Format

Turn gyro aiding on/off
To turn gyro aiding on:

$JATT,GYROAID,YES

To turn gyro aiding off:

$JATT,GYROAID,NO

Query the current setting

$JATT,GYROAID

Receiver
Response

$>

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 151

Commands and Messages

Additional Information
Every time you power up the Vector the gyro goes through a warm-up procedure and
calibrates itself. You cannot save the resulting calibration, so the self-calibration takes place
every time the Vector is power cycled.
This self-calibration procedure takes several minutes and is the equivalent of the following
manual calibration procedure.
With the Vector unit installed:
1. Apply power and wait several minutes until it has acquired aGPS signal and is
computing heading.
2. Ensure gyroaiding is on by issuing the following command:

$JATT,GYROAID
3.
4.

Slowly spin the unit for one minute at no more than 15°/sec.
Keep the unit stationary for four minutes. Both the manual andthe self-calibration
procedures calibrate the Crescent Vector’s gyro to the same effect.

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 152

Commands and Messages

JATT,HBIAS Command
Command
Type

Vector

Description Set the heading output from the Vector to calibrate the true heading of the
antenna array to reflect the true heading of the vessel or query the current
setting
Command
Format

Set the heading output

$JATT,HBIAS,x
where 'x' is a bias that will be added to the Vector’s heading in degrees. The
acceptable range for the heading bias is -180.0° to 180.0°. The default value
of this feature is 0.0°.

Query the current setting (current compensation angle)

$JATT,HBIAS

Receiver
Response

$>

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 153

Commands and Messages

JATT,HELP Command
Command
Type

Vector

Description

Show the available commands for GPS heading operation and status

Command
Format

Receiver
Response

$JATT,HELP

$>JATT,HELP,CSEP,MSEP,EXACT,LEVEL,HTAU,HRTAU,HBIASPBIAS,NEGTILT,ROLL,TILTAID,
TILTCAL,MAGAID,MAGCAL,MAGCLR,GYROAID,COGTAU,SPDTAU,SEARCH,SUMMARY

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 154

Commands and Messages

JATT,HIGHMP Command
Command
Type

Vector

Description

Enable/disable the high multipath setting for use in poor GPS environments
or query the current setting
Enabling HIGHMP mode may result in longer heading acquisition times in
high multipath environments. In HIGHMP mode, the Vector will not output
heading until it has good confidence in the result. In very poor environments,
this may take a few minutes or more; in normal environments, there is only a
slight increase in heading acquisition time.

Command
Format

Set the high multipath setting
To enable the high multipath setting:

$JATT,HIGHMP,YES
To disable the high multipath setting:

$JATT,HIGHMP,NO
Query the current setting

$JATT,HIGHMP

Receiver
Response

$>

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 155

Commands and Messages

JATT,HRTAU Command
Command
Type

Vector

Description

Set the rate of turn (ROT) time constant to adjust the level of responsiveness
of the ROT measurement provided in the GPROT message or query the
current setting
The default value of this constant is 2.0 seconds of smoothing. Increasing the
time constant increases the level of ROT smoothing.

Command
Format

Set the heading rate time constant

$JATT,HRTAU,hrtau
where 'hrtau' is the new time constant that falls within the range of 0.0 to
seconds
The setting of this value depends upon the expected dynamics of the vessel.
For example, if the vessel is very large and cannot turn quickly, increasing
this time is reasonable. The resulting heading would have reduced ‘noise’,
resulting in consistent values with time. However, artificially increasing this
value such that it does not agree with a more dynamic vessel could create a
lag in the ROT measurement with higher rates of turn.
Query the current setting

$JATT,HRTAU

Receiver
Response
Additional
Information

$>

You can use the following formula to determine the level of smoothing:
hrtau (in seconds) = 10 / maximum rate of the rate of turn (in °/s2)
Note: If you are unsure about the best value for the setting, leave it at the
default setting of 2.0 seconds.

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 156

Commands and Messages

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 157

Commands and Messages

JATT,HTAU Command

Command
Type

Vector

Description Set the heading time constant to adjust the level of responsiveness of the
true heading measurement provided in the GPHDT message or query the
current setting.
For OEM boards the default value of this constant is 0.5 seconds of
smoothing (regardless of whether the gyro is enabled or disabled). For
finished products that implement an OEM board the default value may be
different—check your product's documentation for this value.
Although the gyro is enabled by default, you can disable it. Increasing the
heading time constant increases the level of heading smoothing and
increases lag only if the gyro is disabled.
Command
Format

Set the heading time constant

$JATT,HTAU,htau
where 'htau' is the new time constant that falls within the range of 0.0 to
seconds
The setting of this value depends upon the expected dynamics of the vessel.
If the vessel is very large and cannot turn quickly, increasing this time is
reasonable. The resulting heading would have reduced ‘noise’ resulting in
consistent values with time. However, artificially increasing this value such
that it does not agree with a more dynamic vessel could create a lag in the
heading measurement with higher rates of turn.
Query the current setting

$JATT,HTAU

Receiver
Response
Additional
Information

$>

You can use the following formula to determine level of heading smoothing
required when the gyro is in use:
Gyro on
htau (in seconds) = 40 / maximum rate of turn (in °/s)
Gyro off
htau (in seconds) = 10 / maximum rate of turn (in °/s)
If you are unsure about the best value for the setting, leave it at the default
setting of 2.0 seconds when the gyro is on and at 0.5 seconds when the gyro
is off.

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 158

Commands and Messages

JATT,LEVEL Command
Command
Type

Vector

Description

Turn level operation on or off or query thecurrent setting
If the Vector will be operated within ±10° of level, you may use this mode of
operation for increased robustness and faster acquisition times of the
heading solution.

Command
Format

Turn level operation on/off
To turn level operation on:

$JATT,LEVEL,YES

To turn level operation off:

$JATT,LEVEL,NO
Query the current setting

$JATT,LEVEL

Receiver
Response

$>

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.05 / January 18, 2013

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 159

Commands and Messages

JATT,MOVEBASE Command
Command
Type

Vector

Description

Set the auto GPS antenna separation or query the current setting
If the operation is turned on ,you do not need to set the GPS antenna
separation manually . Only multi-frequency boards are supported.

Command
Format

Turn level operation on/off
To turn movebase operation on:

$JATT,MOVEBASE,YES
To turn movebase operation off:

$JATT,MOVEBASE,NO
Query the current setting

$JATT,MOVEBASE

Receiver
Response

$>

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.08 / June 21, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 160

Commands and Messages

JATT,MSEP Command

Command
Type

Vector

Description

Manually enter a custom separation between antennas (must be accurate to
within 1 to 2 cm) or query the current setting

Command
Format

Set the antenna separation
Using the new center-to-center measurement, issue the following command:

$JATT,MSEP,sep
where 'sep' is the measured antenna separation entered in meters
Query the current setting

$JATT,MSEP

Receiver
Response

$>

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 161

Commands and Messages

JATT,NEGTILT Command
Command
Type

Vector

Description

Turn the negative tilt feature on or off or query the current setting.
When the secondary GPS antenna (SA) is below the primary GPS antenna (PA), there is an angle formed
between a horizontal line through the center of the primary antenna (Line A in the diagram below) and an
intersecting line through the center of the primary and secondary antennas (Line B). This angle is considered to
be negative.

Depending on the convention for positive and negative pitch/roll, you want to change the sign (either positive or
negative) of the pitch/roll.

Command
Format

Turn negative tilt feature on/off
To change the sign of the pitch/roll measurement:

$JATT,NEGTILT,YES
To return the sign of the pitch/roll measurement to its original value:

$JATT,NEGTILT,NO
Query the current setting

$JATT,NEGTILT

Receiver
Response

$>

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 162

Commands and Messages

JATT,NMEAHE Command
Command
Type

Vector

Description

Instruct the Vector to preface the following messages with GP or HE.

Command
Format

•

HDG

•

HDM

•

HDT

•

ROT

$JATT,NMEAHE,x
where 'x' is either 1 for HE or 0 for GP
To preface specific messages with GP

$JATT,NMEAHE,0
To preface specific messages with HE

$JATT,NMEAHE,1

Receiver
Response

Additional
Information

$>JATT,NMEAHE,OK

The HDM message is for a magnetic compass. The message will be HCHDM
when requesting with $JATT,NMEAHE,1specified.

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 163

Commands and Messages

JATT,PBIAS Command
Command
Type

Vector

Description

Set the pitch/roll output from the Vector to calibrate the measurement if the
antenna array is not installed in a horizontal plane or query the currentsetting

Command
Format

Set the pitch/roll output

$JATT,PBIAS,x
where 'x' is a bias that will be added to the Vector’s pitch/roll measure, in
degrees
The acceptable range for the pitch bias is -15.0° to 15.0°. The default value is
0.0°.
Query the current setting

$JATT,PBIAS

Receiver
Response
Additional
Information

$>

Note: The pitch/roll bias is added after the negation of the pitch/roll
measurement (if invoked with the JATT,NEGTILT command). Use PBIAS to
describe any angular differences between the level of the two GPS antennas.
Pitch is the default, but if the antennas are mounted in the roll direction, you
can still enter the roll bias in PBIAS (make sure JATT,ROLL,YES isset).

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 164

Commands and Messages

JATT,PTAU Command
Command
Type

Vector

Description

Set the level of responsiveness of the pitch measurement provided in the
PSAT,HPR message or query the current setting.
For OEM boards the default value of this constant is 0.5 seconds of
smoothing (regardless of whether the gyro is enabled or disabled). For
finished products that implement an OEM board the default value may be
different—check your product's documentation for this value. Increasing the
pitch time constant increases the level of pitch smoothing and increases lag.

Command
Format

Set the pitch time constant

$JATT,PTAU,ptau
where 'ptau' is the new time constant that falls within the range of 0.0 to
3600.0 seconds.
The setting of this value depends upon the expected dynamics of the vessel.
For instance, if the vessel is very large and cannot pitch quickly, increasing
this time is reasonable. The resulting pitch would have reduced ‘noise’,
resulting in consistent values with time. However, artificially increasing this
value such that it does not agree with a more dynamic vessel could create a
lag in the pitch measurement.
Query the current setting

$JATT,PTAU
Note: If you are unsure about the best value for the setting, leave it at the
default setting of 0.5 seconds.

Receiver
Response
Additional
Information

$>

You can use the following formula to determine the level of pitch smoothing
required:
ptau (in seconds) = 10 / maximum rate of pitch (in °/s)

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 165

Commands and Messages

JATT,ROLL Command
Command
Type

Vector

Description

Configure the Vector for roll or pitch GPS antenna orientation.

Command
Format

Configure the Vector for pitch or roll GPS antenna orientation
To configure the Vector for roll GPS antenna orientation (the Antenna Array
must be installed perpendicular to the vessel’s axis):

$JATT,ROLL,YES
To configure the Vector for pitch GPS antenna orientation (default):

$JATT,ROLL,NO
Query the current setting

$JATT,ROLL

Receiver
Response

$>

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 166

Commands and Messages

JATT,SEARCH Command
Command
Type

Vector

Description

Force the Vector to reject the current GPS heading solution and begin a new
search.

Command
Format

$JATT,SEARCH

Receiver
Response

$>

Additional
Information

The SEARCH function will not work if you have enabled the gyroaid feature
(using the GYROAID command). In this case you must cycle power to the
receiver to have a new GPS solution computed.

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 167

Commands and Messages

JATT,SPDTAU Command
Note: The JTAU,SPEED command provides identical functionality but works with Crescent and Eclipse
products in addition to Crescent Vector products.

Command
Type

Vector

Description

Set the speed time constant (0.0 to 3600.0 seconds) or query the current
setting.
This command allows you to adjust the level of responsiveness of the speed
measurement provided in the GPVTG message. The default value is 0.0
seconds of smoothing. Increasing the speed time constant increases the
level of speed measurement smoothing.

Command
Format

Set the speed time constant

$JATT,SPDTAU,spdtau
where 'spdtau' is the new time constant that falls within the range of 0.0 to
200.1 seconds
The setting of this value depends upon the expected dynamics of the
receiver. If the receiver will be in a highly dynamic environment, you should
set this to a lower value, since the filtering window will be shorter, resulting in
a more responsive measurement. However, if the receiver will be in a largely
static environment, you can increase this value to reduce measurement
noise.
Query the current setting

$JATT,SPDTAU

Receiver
Response
Additional
Information

$>

You can use the following formula to determine the COG time constant
(Hemisphere GNSS recommends testing how the revised value works in
practice):
spdtau (in seconds) = 10 / maximum acceleration (in m/s 2)
If you are unsure about the best value for this setting, it is best to be
conservative and leave it at the default setting of 0.00 seconds.

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 168

Commands and Messages

JATT,SUMMARY Command
Command
Type

Vector

Description

Display a summary of the current Vector settings

Command
Format

$JATT,SUMMARY

$>JATT,SUMMARY,htau,hrtau,ptau,cogtau,spdtau,hbias,pbias,hexflag
Receiver
Response

where:
Component

Description

htau

Current heading time constant, in seconds

hrtau

Current heading rate time constant, in seconds

ptau

Current pitch time constant, in seconds

cogtau

Current course over ground time constant, in seconds

spdtau

Current speed time constant, in seconds

hbias

Current heading bias, in degrees

pbias

Current pitch/roll bias, in degrees

hexflag

Hex code that summarizes the heading feature status
Flag

'On'
Value

'Off'
Value

Gyro aiding

02

0

Negative tilt

01

0

Roll

08

0

Tilt aiding

02

0

Level

01

0

The 'hexflag' field is two separate hex flags:

•

'GN' - Value is determined by computing the sum of the gyro aiding and negative tilt values,
depending on whether they are on or off:

• If the feature is on, their value is included in the sum
• If the feature is off, it has a value of zero when computing the sum
• 'RMTL' - Value is determined in much the same way but by adding the values of roll, tilt aiding, and level operation.
For example, if gyro aiding, roll, and tilt aiding features were each on, the values of 'GN' and 'RMTL' would be:

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 169

Commands and Messages

•

'GN' = hex (02 + 0) = hex (02) = 2

•

'RMTL' = hex (08 + 02) = hex (10) = A

•

‘GN-RMTL’ = 2A

The following tables summarize the possible feature configurations for the first 'GN' character and the second 'RMTL' character.

JATT,SUMMARY 1st GN Character
Configurations
GN Value

Gyro Value

Negative Tilt

0

Off

Off

1

Off

On

2

On

Off

3

On

On

JATT,SUMMARY 2nd RMTL Character
Configurations
RMTL
Value

Roll

Tilt
Aiding

Level

0

Off

Off

Off

1

Off

Off

On

2

Off

On

Off

3

Off

On

On

8

On

Off

Off

9

On

Off

On

A

On

On

Off

B

On

On

On

Example $>JATT,SUMMARY,TAU:H=0.50,HR=2.00,COG=0.00,SPD=0.00,BIAS:H=0.00,P=0.00, FLAG_HEX:HF-RMTL=01

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 170

Commands and Messages

JATT,TILTAID Command

Command
Type

Vector

Description

Turn tilt aiding on or off or query the current setting.
The Vector’s internal tilt sensors (accelerometers) may be enabled by default
(see your specific product manuals for further information).
The sensors act to reduce the RTK search volume, which improves heading
startup and reacquisition times. This improves the reliability and accuracy of
selecting the correct heading solution by eliminating other possible,
erroneous solutions.

Command
Format

Turn tilt aiding on/off
Turn tilt aiding on:

$JATT,TILTAID,YES
Turn tilt aiding off:

$JATT,TILTAID,NO
Query the current setting

$JATT,TILTAID

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to turn tilt aiding on/off

$>

Response to querying the current setting
If setting is currently ON the response is:

$>JATT,TILTAID,ON
If setting is currently OFF the response is:

$>JATT,TILTAID,OFF

Additional
Information

Tilt aiding is required to increase the antenna separation of the Vector OEM
beyond the default 0.5 m length.

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 171

Commands and Messages

JATT,TILTCAL Command
Command
Type

Vector

Description

Calibrate the internal tilt sensors of the Vector. Calibration takes
approximately two seconds and is automatically saved to memory for
subsequent power cycles.
You can calibrate the tilt sensor of the Vector in the field but the Vector
enclosure must be horizontal when you calibrate.

Command
Format

Receiver
Response

$JATT,TILTCAL

$>

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 172

Commands and Messages

JBAUD Command
Command
Type

Description
Command
Format

General Operation and Configuration

Specify the baud rates of the receiver or query the current setting.
Specify the baud rates

$JBAUD,r[,OTHER][,SAVE]
where:

•

'r' = baud rate (4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, or
115200)

•

',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current
port when you send the command without it (and without
the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when
you send the command with it (without the brackets)

•

',SAVE' = optional field, saves the baud rate into flash
memory so that if you reset power the receiver will boot at
the new baud rate (it may take several seconds to save the
baud rate to flash memory)

Query the current setting

$JBAUD[,OTHER]
where:

•

Receiver
Response

Example

',OTHER' = optional field, queries the current port when you
send the command without it (and without the brackets) and
queries the other port when you send the command with it
(without the brackets)

$>JBAUD,R[,OTHER]
The response format is the same whether you specify the baud rates or
query the current settings.

Issue the following command to set the baud rate to 19200 on the current
port:

$JBAUD,19200
...the response is then:

$>JBAUD,19200
Issue the following command to set the baud rate to 9600 on the OTHER port
and save it into memory:

$JBAUD,9600,OTHER,SAVE

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 173

Commands and Messages

...the response is then:

$>JBAUD,9600,OTHER
Note: When saving the baud rate wait until you see the SAVE COMPLETE message before powering off the
Additional
receiver. See the JSAVE command for an example of this output.
Information
The status of this command is also output when issuing the JSHOW command.

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 174

Commands and Messages

JBIN Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description Enable the output of the various binary messages—most notably the Bin95 and Bin96 messages—to be requested. The Bin95 and Bin96
messages contain all the information required for post processing.

Command
Format

$JBIN,msg,r
where:

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

•
•

'msg' = binary message you want to output
'r' = message rate as shown in the following table

Page 175

Commands and Messages
Message
Name

MSG

R (Hz)

Description

Bin1

1

20, 10, 2, 1, 0, or
.2

GPS position message (position and velocity
data)

Bin2

2

1 or 0

GPS DOPs (Dilution of Precision)

Bin3

3

20, 10, 2, 1, 0, or
.2

Lat/Lon/Hgt, Covariances, RMS, DOPs and
COG, Speed, Heading

1 or 0

Base station information

Bin5

5

Bin16

16

All constellation code and phase observation
data

Bin19

GNSS diagnostic information

Bin35

35

1 or 0

BeiDou ephemeris information

Bin36

36

1 or 0

BeiDou code and carrier phase information (all
frequencies)

Bin44

44

GALILEO time conversion

Bin45

45

GALILEO ephemeris

Bin62

62

1 or 0

GLONASS almanac information

Bin65

65

1 or 0

GLONASS ephemeris information

Bin66

66

20, 10, 2, 1, or 0

GLONASS L1/L2 code and carrier phase
information

Bin69

69

1 or 0

GLONASS L1/L2 diagnostic information

Bin76

76

20, 10, 2, 1, 0, or
.2

GPS L1/L2 code and carrier phase information

Bin80

80

1 or 0

SBAS data frame information

Bin89

89

1 or 0

SBAS satellite tracking information

Bin93

93

1 or 0

SBAS ephemeris information

Bin94

94

1 or 0

Ionospheric and UTC conversion parameters

Bin95

95

1 or 0

GPS ephemeris information

Bin96

96

20, 10, 2, 1, or 0

GPS L1 code and carrier phase information

Bin97

97

20, 10, 2, 1, 0, or
.2

Processor statistics

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 176

Commands and Messages

.

Receiver
Response

Example

Bin98

98

1 or 0

GPS satellite and almanac information

Bin99

99

1 or 0

GPS L1 diagnostic information

Bin100

100

1 or 0

GPS L2 diagnostic information

Bin122

122

20, 10, 5, 2, 1, 0, .5,
.2, .1

Alternate position solution data

Bin209

209

1 or 0

SNR and status for all GNSS tracks

$>

To output the Bin76 message at a rate of 10 Hz, issue the following command:

$JBIN,76,10

Additional
Information

Higher update rates may be available with a subscription on Bin 1, 2, 96, 97 and 99.

Topic Last Updated: v1.09 / January 8, 2018

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 177

Commands and Messages

JBOOT
JBOOT Command

Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Power down the Eclipse engine and then power it back up. This
allows you to reboot the receiver to drop the satellite to which itis
currently locked and retune to another satellite without cyclingthe
power of the Eclipse II.

$JBOOT

Command
Format

Receiver
Response

If MFA is the current application and you send the $JBOOT command, the
response is similar to the following:

$>STARTED,MFA,Ver=1.2Qe
If any application other than MFA is the current application and you send the
$JBOOT command, the response is similar to the following:

$>

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 178

Commands and Messages

JBOOT,LBAND Command
and

Command
Type
L-B
Description

Power down theAtlas portion of the Eclipse engine and then power it back
up. This allows you to reboot the receiver to drop the satellite to which it is
currently locked and retune to another satellite without cycling the power of
the Eclipse II..

$JBOOT,LBAND
Command
Format

Receiver
Response
Additional
Information

$>

JFREQ

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 179

Commands and Messages

JCONN Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Create a virtual circuit between two ports to enable communication through
the receiver to the device on the opposite port.

Command
Format

To connect two ports virtually:

$JCONN,P1,P2
where P1 and P2 are a pair of the following: A,B,C,D or
PortA,PortB,PortC,PortD
Examples

$JCONN,A,B
$JCONN,PortA,PortB
To disconnect virtual connection:

$JCONN,X

Receiver
Response
Additional
Information

$>

Caution: Hemisphere GNSS receivers with menus, such as an R Series, use
JCONN within the menu application. Any settings you make with JCONN on
these products may disable the menu functions until power is cycled.

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 180

Commands and Messages

JDIFF
JDIFF Command

Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Specify or query the differential source of the receiver.
Forces the system to use “diff” as the source (see table in Command Format section
below).

Command
Format

Specify the differential mode

$JDIFF,diff[,SAVE]
where:

•

'diff' (differential source) may be one of the following:
DIFF

Description

OTHER

Instruct the receiver to use external corrections
input through the opposite port that is
communicating

THIS

Instruct the receiver to use external corrections
input through the same port that is
communicating

PORTA
or
PORTB
or
PORTC
or
PORTD

Instruct the receiver to:

BEACON

Instruct the receiver to use RTCM corrections
entering Port C at a fixed rate of 9600 baud. This
input does not have to be from a beacon receiver,
such as SBX. However, this is a common source of
corrections.

WAAS

Instruct the receiver to use SBAS. This is also the
response when running the local dif application as
the base.

RTK

Response when running the local dif or rover RTK
application for the rover.

LBAND

Instruct the receiver to turn on theAtlas
module and useAtlas. Setting diff to anything
other thanAtlas turns off theAtlas module.

X

Instruct the receiver to use e-Dif

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

•

Use external corrections input
through the specified port.

•

Allow RTCM2 (DGPS) inputs to
receiver.

Page 181

Commands and Messages

mode
NONE

Instruct the receiver to operate in
autonomous mode. This turns off the use of
SBAS,Atlas, and RTCM2 (DGPS); however,
RTK is still allowed.

•

,SAVE' = optional field, saves the differential source into
flash memory so that if you reset power the receiver will
boot with the new differential source (it may take several
seconds to save the differential source to flash memory).

•

Using $JDIFF with SBAS, RTCM2, or Atlas assigns the
priority in the MFA. For example, RTCM2 is a higher priority
if the assigned diff port is PORTA. See MFA for more
information.

Query the current DIFF setting

$JDIFF

Receiver
Response

Receiver response when specifying the differential source

$>
Receiver response when querying the differentialsource

$>JDIFF,SOURCE,TYPE
where:

•

'SOURCE' is the port/source as issued with the JDIFF
command

•

'TYPE' is the differential type actually being used

'AUTO' is the response when queried in e-Dif

Example

Issue the following command to query the receiver:

$JDIFF
...and if the differential source is WAAS, the response is:

$>JDIFF,WAAS

Additional
Information

The status of this command is also output in the JSHOW message.

Topic Last Updated: v1.07/ February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 182

Commands and Messages

JDIFF,AVAILABLE Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Query the receiver for the differential types currently being received

Command
Format

$JDIFF,AVAILABLE

$>JDIFFX,AVAILABLE,x[,x][,x]...[,x]
Receiver
Response

where 'x' is the differential type(s)

Example
Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 183

Commands and Messages

JDIFFX,EXCLUDE Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Specify the differential sources to be excluded from operating in a multi-differential application
or query the receiver for excluded differential sources

Command
Format

Specify the differential sources to be excluded

$JDIFFX,EXCLUDE[,SBAS][,RTCM2][,EDIF][,DFX][,CMR] [,RTCM3][,ROX
]
Query the current setting

$JDIFFX,EXCLUDE

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to exclude differential sources

$>

Response to querying the current setting

$JDIFFX,EXCLUDE[,SOURCE1][,SOURCE2]...[,SOURCEn]
where SOURCE1 through SOURCEn represent each excluded source
Example

Issue the following commandto exclude RTCM3:

$JDIFFX,EXCLUDE,RTCM3
If you then issue $JDIFFX,EXCLUDE to query the current setting the
response is (if RTCM3 is the only excluded source):

$>JDIFFX,EXCLUDE,RTCM3

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 184

Commands and Messages

JDIFFX,GNSSOUT Command

Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Specify the GNSS systems to be output in the differential or query the current
setting

Command
Format

Specify the GNSS systems to be output in the differential

$JDIFFX,GNSSOUT,gnss,x
where:

•
•

'gnss' = GNSS system to be output in the differential (GPS ,
GLONASS, BEIDOU, GALILEO)
'x' = NO (do not output specified GNSS system in the differential)
or YES (output specified GNSS system in the differential)

Query the current setting
Query what GNSS systems are output in thedifferential

$JDIFFX,GNSSOUT
Receiver response when querying the current setting
See Example section below

Example

Specify that GPS is output in correction formats
Command: $JDIFFX,GNSSOUT,GPS,YES
Response: $>
Query what GNSS systems are output in the differential
Command: $JDIFFX,GNSSOUT
Response if just GPS: $>JDIFFX,GNSSOUT,GPS
Response if all GPS and GLONASS:

$>JDIFFX,GNSSOUT,GPS,GLONASS
Query if a specific GNSS system is output in the differential (example uses
GLONASS)
Command: $JDIFFX,GNSSOUT,GLONASS
Response if GLONASS is output:

$>JDIFFX,GNSSOUT,GLONASS,YES

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 185

Commands and Messages
Response if GLONASS is not output:

$>JDIFFX,GNSSOUT,GLONASS,NO
Additional Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 186

Commands and Messages

JDIFFX,INCLUDE Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Specify the differential sources to be allowed to operate in a multi-differential application or
query the receiver for included differential sources

Command
Format

Specify the differential sources to be included

$JDIFFX,INCLUDE[,SBAS][,RTCM2][,EDIF][,DFX][,CMR]
[,RTCM3][,ROX ][,ATLAS]
Query the current setting

$JDIFFX,INCLUDE

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to include differential sources

$>

Response to querying the current setting

$JDIFFX,INCLUDE[,SOURCE1][,SOURCE2]...[,SOURCEn]
where SOURCE1 through SOURCEn represent each included source

Example

Issue the following command to include CMR:

$JDIFFX,INCLUDE,CMR
If you then issue $JDIFFX,INCLUDE to query the current setting the
response may be (showing all included sources including CMR):

$>JDIFFX,INCLUDE,SBAS,RTCM2,EDIF,DFX,CMR,RTCM3,ROX

Additional
Information

For example, if an Eclipse II receiver with SBAS,Atlas, and RTK-base in the same application
(multi-diff) has no activeAtlas subscription:
1.
2.
3.

The receiver triesAtlas high precision services and when it is not found, falls back
toAtlas DGPS service.
The receiver triesAtlas DGPS service and when it is not found, falls back to
WAAS.
No warnings when subscription has expired – user expects a certain levelof
accuracy withAtlas services, not SBAS level accuracy.

If you do not actively watch theAtlas service end date, you could potentially use SBAS without
knowing it. This command limits the differential sources to ensure a certain level of accuracy is
retained.

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 187

Commands and Messages

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 188

Commands and Messages

JDIFFX,SOURCE Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Query the receiver for the differential source

Command
Format

$JDIFFX,SOURCE

$>JDIFFX,source
Receiver
Response

Example

where 'source' is the differential source

Response ifAtlas is thedifferential source

$>JDIFFX,SOURCE,LBAND
Response if RTK is the differential source through Port B

$>JDIFFX,SOURCE,PORTB

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 189

Commands and Messages

JDIFFX,TYPE Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Query the receiver for the differential type

Command
Format

$JDIFFX,TYPE

$>JDIFFX,TYPE,type
Receiver
Response

Example

where 'type' is one of the following differential types:

•

NONE (no differential corrections)

•

CMR

•

DFX

•

EDIF

•

ROX

•

RTCM2

•

RTCM3

•

SBAS

Response if SBAS is the differential type

$>JDIFFX,TYPE,SBAS
Response if RTK (ROX) is the differential type

$>JDIFFX,TYPE,ROX

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 190

Commands and Messages

JDISNAVMODE Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Enable/disable Athena nav mode reporting in BIN1 and BIN3
messages.

Command
Format

$JDISNAVMODE

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to enable/disable detailed nav
mode display

$>
Response to querying the current setting

$> JDISNAVMODE[,DEFAULT][,PHOENIX]

Additional
Information

This setting is automatically saved and can be reset to default by sending $JRESET

Topic Last Updated: v1.08 / June 21, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 191

Commands and Messages

JEPHOUT,PERIODSEC Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

to allow ephemeris messages (95, 65, 35) to go out a rate other than
when they change. This also does the same rate for the ionoutc
message 94. This is a global message and applies to all ephemeris
messages on all ports..

Command
Format

Enable/disable the command
To enable this command

$JEPHOUT,1
To disable this command:

$JEPHOUT,0
Query the current setting

$JEPHOUT

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to enable/disable command

$>

Response to querying the current setting
the response is:

If setting is currently enabled

$>JEPHOUT,1
If setting is currently disabled the response is:

$>JEPHOUT,0
Additional
Information

..

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / Octoter 13, 2016

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 192

Commands and Messages

JETHERNET
JETHERNET Command Overview
The JETHERNET command is used to configure Ethernet settings on Ethernet-capable boards.
Command

Description

JETHERNET

Query current Ethernet configuration state

JETHERNET,MODE

Enable/Disable Ethernet

JETHERNET, PORTI

Enable/Disable PORTI virtual serial port

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 193

Commands and Messages

JETHERNET,MODE
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

On receivers with Ethernet support, this command allows configuring how the receiver connects to a
network on the Ethernet interface.

Command
Format

$JETHERNET,MODE,OFF
$JETHERNET,MODE,DHCP
$JETHERNET,MODE,STATIC,IP,SUBNET[,GATEWAY[,DNS]]
Where IP, SUBNET, GATEWAY, and DNS are the ip address, subnet
mask, gateway ip, and dns server ip respectively, in the standard
decimal notation.
$>JETHERNET,MODE,...

Receiver
Response

Example

To disable Ethernet support, one would use the command

$JETHERNET,MODE,OFF
To enable Ethernet support in DHCP (automatic IP address assignment by the network) mode, use the following command.

$JETHERNET,MODE,DHCP
To enable Ethernet support with a fixed IP address of 192.168.1.5, one could use the following command.

$JETHERNET,MODE,STATIC,192.168.1.5,255.255.255.0

Additional
Information
Topic Last Updated v.1.07 / : February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 194

Commands and Messages

JETHERNET,PORTI
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

This command configures the virtual serial port ‘PORTI’, which may be accessible via the Ethernet
interface. By default PORTI is disabled, but may be enabled on a specified TCP port using this
command.
Note that PORTI provides full access just as a local serial port would, without any authentication, so
should only be enabled on a trusted network.

Command
Format

$JETHERNET,PORTI,OFF
$JETHERNET,PORTI,TCPPORT
Where TCPPORT is a decimal number from 1 to 65535 representing the TCP port to listen for incoming
connections on.

$>JETHERNET,PORTI,...
Receiver Where the response reflects the current configuration.
Response

Example

To disable the PORTI virtual serial port, one may use the command:

$>JETHERNET,PORTI,OFF
To enable PORTI listening on TCP port 5000, one may use the following command:

$>JETHERNET,PORTI,5000

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 14. 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 195

Commands and Messages

JFLASH
JFLASH Command Overview
The JFLASH command is used to perform file operations via a USB flash drive on Eclipse and Eclipse II based
receivers.
Command

Description

JFLASH,DIR

Display the files on a USB flash drive

JFLASH,FILE,CLOSE

Close an open file on a USB flash drive

JFLASH,FILE,NAME

Open a specific file, append to a specific file, or display the file name of the open file
on a USB flash drive

JFLASH,FILE,OPEN

Create and open a file with an automatically generated file name on a USB flash
drive

JFLASH,FREESPACE

Display the free space in kilobytes (KB) on a USB flash drive

JFLASH,NOTIFY,CONNECT

Enable/disable the automatic response when a USB flash drive is inserted or
removed

JFLASH,QUERYCONNECT

Manually verify if a USB flash drive is connected or disconnected

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 196

Commands and Messages

JFLASH,DIR Command

Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Display the files on a USB flash drive
You can only display files at the root level of the flash drive (you cannot
navigate into subdirectories).

Command
Format

$JFLASH,DIR

$>JFLASH,file1
Receiver
Response

$>JFLASH,file2
$>JFLASH,file3
...
$>JFLASH,filen
One line appears for each file at the root level of the flash drive.

Example

If you issue the $JFLASH,DIR command and the root level of the flash
drive contains the following files:
hemi_1.bin, hemi_2.bin, hemi_3.bin
the response is:

$>JFLASH,hemi_1.bin
$>JFLASH,hemi_2.bin
$>JFLASH,hemi_3.bin

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 197

Commands and Messages

JFLASH,FILE,CLOSE Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Close an open file on a USB flash drive
Closing a file does not turn off the messages being written to the flash drive;
it just closes the file so you can safely remove the flash drive.
Caution: Close the file before removing the flash drive. Failure to do so may
corrupt the file.

Command
Format

$JFLASH,FILE,CLOSE

$>JFLASH,CLOSE mass_storage:0:\filename
Receiver
Response

Example

If you issue the $JFLASH,FILE,CLOSE command and the
'hemi_4.bin' file on the flash drive is currently open, the response is:

$>JFLASH,CLOSE mass_storage:0:\HEMI_4.BIN

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 198

Commands and Messages

JFLASH,FILE,NAME Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Open a specific file, append to a specific file, or display the file name of the
open file on a USB flash drive

Command
Format

Open a specific file (overwrite or append)

$JFLASH,FILE,NAME,filename[,APPEND]
where:

•

'filename' is the name of the file and it must be a legal 8.3
file name

•

',APPEND' is an optional field that allows you to append
data to the file

Warning: Using this command without the ',Append' option overwrites the
existing file without warning.
Display the name of the open file

$JFLASH,FILE,NAME

Receiver
Response

Response from issuing command to open an existing file or append to an
existing file

$>JFLASH, OPEN mass_storage:0:\filename
Response from issuing command to display the name of the open file

$>JFLASH, mass_storage:0:\filename

If you attempt to display the name of the open file and no file is actually open
the response is:

$>JFLASH, NO FILE OPEN

Example

If you issue the following command to open file hemi_4.bin on a USB flash
drive:

$JFLASH,FILE,NAME,hemi_4.bin
the response is:

$>JFLASH, mass_storage:0:\HEMI_4.BIN

Additional
Information

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 199

Commands and Messages

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 200

Commands and Messages

JFLASH,FILE,OPEN Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Create and open a file with an automatically generated file name (hemi_1.bin
… hemi_99.bin) on a USB flash drive (only 8.3 file format is allowed)

Command
Format

$JFLASH,FILE,OPEN

$>JFLASH,OPEN mass_storage:0:\filename
Receiver
Response

Example

where 'filename' is the name of the new file

If you issue the $JFLASH,FILE,OPEN command and the root level of
the flash drive contains the following files:
hemi_1.bin, hemi_2.bin, hemi_3.bin
the response is:

$>JFLASH,OPEN mass_storage:0:\HEMI_4.bin

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 201

Commands and Messages

JFLASH,FREESPACE Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Display the free space in kilobytes (KB) on a USB flash drive
You can use a flash drive larger than 4GB; however, this command will not
display a number greater than 4GB.

Command
Format

$JFLASH,FREESPACE

$>JFLASH,FREESPACE,
Receiver
Response

Example

numbytes bytes

where 'numbytes' is the number of kilobytes

The following response indicates a USB flash drive with approximately 2GB
of free space.

$>JFLASH,FREESPACE,

2001731584 bytes

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 202

Commands and Messages

JFLASH,NOTIFY,CONNECT Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Enable/disable the automatic response when a USB flash drive is inserted or
removed (if port is not specified the response will be sent to the port that
issued the command)

$JFLASH,NOTIFY,CONNECT,r[,PORT]

Command
Format

Receiver
Response

where:

•

'r' is the message status variable (0 = Off, 1 = On)

•

',PORT' is an optional field you use to specify the port to
which the response will be sent (if you do not specify a port,
the response is sent to the port from which you issued the
command)

Response to issuing command to enable notification

$>
Response to inserting a flash drive if notification is enabled

$>JFLASH,CONNECTED
Response to removing a flash drive if notification is enabled

$>JFLASH,DISCONNECTED

Additional
Information

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 203

Commands and Messages

JFLASH,QUERYCONNECT Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Manually verify if a USB flash drive is connected or disconnected

Command
Format

Receiver
Response

$JFLASH,QUERYCONNECT

Response to verifying the connection status of a flash drive if the flash drive
is connected

$>JFLASH,CONNECTED
$>
Response to verifying the connection status of a flash drive if the flash drive
is disconnected

$>JFLASH,DISCONNECTED
$>

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 204

Commands and Messages

JFREQ Command
and

Command
Type
L-B
Description

Tune the Atlas receiver (manually or automatically) or query the receiver for the current setting

Command
Format

Tune the Atlas receiver

To manually tune the receiver:

$JFREQ,freq,symb
where:

•

'freq' is the frequency in kHz (reply is in MHz)

•

'symb' is the symbol baud rate (1200 or 2400)

Note: When manually tuning the receiver by entering the frequency ('freq') make sure you enter a decimal point before the last
digit for any frequencies that are to .5 Hz (see table in Additional Information section below).
Examples:
Correct: $JFREQ,1557835,1200 (1,557,835 Hz, no decimal required)
Correct: $JFREQ,1539962.5,600 (1,539,962.5 Hz, decimal required)
Incorrect: $JFREQ,15399625,600 (1,539,962.5 Hz, decimal required)

To auto-tune the receiver:

$JFREQ,0
Note: You must restart theAtlas receiver (either by cycling power to theAtlas receiver or by issuing the JBOOT,LBAND
command) for changes to take effect.
Query the current setting

$JFREQ

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to tune receiver

$>

Response to querying the current setting

$>JLBEAM,Sent sfreq,Used ufreq,Baud baud,Geolon[,AUTO]
where:
Response
Componen
t

Description

sfreq

Frequency to which theAtlas receiver is instructed to tune (in this example, 1557.8550 MHz)

ufreq

Frequency to which theAtlas receiver is tuned

baud

Baud rate of the signals being received

lon

Approximate longitude of the geostationary satellite to which theAtlas receiver is tuned

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 205

Commands and Messages
[Optional Field]
'AUTO' appears at the end of the query response only when the L-band receiver is in ‘auto-tune’
mode.

Example

Manually Tune a Frequency (command and response)

$JFREQ,1557835,1200
$>
Auto-Tune a Frequency based on Geographic Location (command and response)

$JFREQ,0
$>
Query a Manually Tuned Receiver (response)

$>JLBEAM,Sent 1557.8350,Used 1557.8350,Baud 1200,Geo -101
Query an Auto-Tuned Receiver (response)

$>JLBEAM,Sent 1557.8550,Used 1557.8550,Baud 1200,Geo -101,AUTO

Additional
Information

The status of this command is also output when issuing the JSHOW command.
The following table provides frequency information for the Atlas satellites. This information is subject to change. Visit your
Atlas service provider's website for up-to-date satellite constellation and broadcast information.
Coverage
Area
North and
South
America
Asia-Pacific
Europe,
Middle East
and Africa

Frequency

Baud Rate

Satellite Name

1545.5300

600

AMERICAS

1539.8525
1540.9525

600
600

APAC
EMEA

If you are already locked onto an Atlas signal, you will need to break the lock on the Atlas satellite before JFREQ will
manually tune to your new signal. To do this, either disconnect the antenna momentarily, cycling power to the receiver,
issuing the JBOOT,OMNI command, or block signal to the antenna physically, for example by covering it with something
metallic.

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 206

Commands and Messages
Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 205

Commands and Messages

JATLAS,LIMIT Command
Command
Type

and

L-C
Description

When using Atlas, configure the accuracy threshold for when the GPGGA quality indicator reports a Fix.

Command
Format

$JATLAS,LIMIT,[OPTION],[THRESHOLD],SAVE
where:

•
•
•

[THRESHOLD] is in meters
The SAVE field is optional. However, if omitted this setting will not survive a power cycle. $JSAVE does not save this
setting.
Options are 3D, HORI, or VERT

To configure the receiver so that it reports an RTK fix when the Atlas solution has converged to 3D accuracy of 30cm, send:
$JATLAS,LIMIT,3D,0.3,SAVE

Query the current setting

$JATLAS,LIMIT

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 206

Commands and Messages
Receiver Response

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 207

Commands and Messages
Response to issuing command to tune receiver

$>

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 208

Commands and Messages

JFORCEAPP Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration Commands

Description

Force an application to be used in a multi-application (MFA)
Note: This command is not saved; it is only for the current session.
Force an application to be used

Command
Format

$JFORCEAPP,app
where 'app' is one of the following applications:

•

AUTO = allow automatic selection of the application in the
MFA (default setting)

•

RTK

•

SBAS

Query the current setting

$JFORCEAPP

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to force an application to be used

$>

Response to querying the current setting
If currently set to SBAS the response is:

$>JFORCEAPP,SBAS

Example

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.05 / January 18, 2013

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 209

Commands and Messages

JGEO Command
Command
Type

SBAS

Description

Display information related to the current frequency of SBAS and its location in relation to the receiver’s antenna

Command
Format

$JGEO[,ALL]
where ',ALL' is an optional field that displays information for all SBAS satellites (including those not being used)

$>JGEO,SENT=1575.4200,USED=1575.4200,PRN=prn,LON=lon,EL=ele,AZ=az
Receiver
Response

Example

where:
Response
Component

Description

JGEO

Message header

Sent=1575.4200

Frequency sent to the digital signal processor

Used=1575.4200

Frequency currently used by the digital signal processor

PRN=prn

WAAS satellite PRN number

Lon=-lon

Longitude of the satellite

El=ele

Elevation angle from the receiver antenna to the WAAS satellite, reference to the horizon

AZ=az

Azimuth from the receiver antenna to the WAAS satellite, reference to the horizon

To display information related to the current frequency of SBAS issue the following command:

$JGEO[,ALL]
The response is then:

$>JGEO,SENT=1575.4200,USED=1575.4200,PRN=122,LON=-54,EL=9.7,AZ=114.0
To display information for dual SBAS satellites issue the following command:

$JGEO[,ALL]
The response is:

$>JGEO,SENT=1575.4200,USED=1575.4200,PRN=122,LON=-54,EL=9.7,AZ=114.0
$>JGEO,SENT=1575.4200,USED=1575.4200,PRN=134,LON=178,EL=5.0,AZ=252.6
The first line of output is identical to the output from the first JGEO query above; however, the second line of output provides
information on the WAAS satellite not being currently used. Both lines of output follow the same format.

Additional
Information

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 209

Commands and Messages

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 210

Commands and Messages

JI Command

Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Display receiver information, such as its serial number and firmware version

Command
Format

$JI

$>JI,SN,FLT,HW,PROD,SDATE,EDATE,SW,DSP
Receiver
Response

Example

where:
Response
Component

Description

SN

Serial number of the GPS engine

FLT

Fleet number

HW

Hardware version

PROD

Production date code

SDATE

Subscription begin date

EDATE

Subscription expiration date

SW

Application software version number

DSP

DSP version (only valid for Atlas applications)

From a Crescent Vector:

$>JI,452204,1,7,02122009,01/01/1900,01/01/3007,1.5Pa,46
From a Crescent with Atlas:

$>JI,883765,1,7,12052010,01/06/1980,06/30/2011,4.9Pa,11

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.09 / January 8, 2018

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 211

Commands and Messages

JK Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Subscribe the receiver to various options, such as higher update rates, e-Dif
(or base station capability) or L-Dif
or
Query for the current subscription expiration date when running Atlas
application or the receiver subscription code when running all other
applications

Command
Format

Subscribe the receiver to specific options

$JK,x…
where 'x…' is the subscription key provided by Hemisphere GNSS and is 10
characters in length
Query the current setting

$JK

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to subscribe

$>

Response to querying the current setting when running Atlas applications

$>JK,EndDate,1HzOnly
where:

•
•

'EndDate' is the subscription end date

'1HzOnly' has a value of 1 if the receiver is limited to 1 Hz output (if
the receiver is subscribed to a minimum of 10 Hz output this field is
omitted)
Response to querying the current setting when running all other applications

$>JK,DateCode,SubscriptionCode,DowngradeCode
where:

•

•
•

Example

'DateCode' indicates your subscription information (compare last
four digits of Date Code to determine your subscription and see the
Example section below and the examples in Understanding
Additive Codes)
'SubscriptionCode' is the hex equivalent of the Date Code
'DowngradeCode' is the output rate in Hertz indicating a
downgrade from the default of 10 Hz (if 1, 2 or 5 does not appear
the output rate is the default 10 Hz)

If you query the receiver for the current setting when running A t l a s
applications the response will appear similar to the following:

$>JK,06/30/2011,0

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 212

Commands and Messages
If you query the receiver for the current setting when running any other
application the response will appear similar to the following (Crescent Vector
example response shown). Example shows no downgrade code (using
default output rate of 10 Hz).

$>JK,01/01/3007,7

Additional
Information

Interpreting the $JK 'Date'/Subscription Codes

Last Updated: v1.09 / January 8, 2018

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 213

Commands and Messages

JK,SHOW Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

contain authorization information

Command
Format

Receiver
Response

$JK,SHOW

$>JK,SHOW,0,SUBOPT,ENDDATE,0,OPT=,SUBSCRIPTION DESCRTIPTION,
where:
Response
Component

Description

0

UNKNOWN

SUBOPT

Subscription code (see Interpreting the $JK 'Date'/Subscription Codes to determine the meaning of the
subscription code)

END DATE

The subscription end date

0

UNKNOWN

OPT=
Subscription
Description

X HZ
The maximum data rate .
EDIF
Supports EDIF function .
RTK
Supports RTK function.
BASE
Supports RTK base function.
RAW_DATA
Supports the RAW data output .
L2_L5
Supports other frequencies besides L1.
MULTI_GNSS
Supports other satellite system besides GPS.
BEIDOUB3
Supports B3 frequencie.
ATLAS_LBAND
Supports receive ATLAS/China CM signal .
ATLAS_Xcm
The most accurate accuracy by ATLAS/China CM.

Example

:

$>JK,SHOW,0,157F,12/31/2016,0,OPT=,20HZ,EDIF,RTK,BASE,RAW_DATA,L2_L5,
MULTI_ GNSS,BEIDOUB3,ATLAS_LBAND,ATLAS_30cm

Additional Interpreting the $JK 'Date'/Subscription Codes
Information

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 214

Commands and Messages

Topic Last Updated: v1.09 / January 8, 2018

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 215

Commands and Messages

JLBEAM Command
Command
Type

L-Band

Description

Display the information of each spot beam currently in use by the Atlas receiver

Command
Format

Receiver
Response

$JLBEAM

$>JLBEAM,Sent freq,Used freq,Baud xxx,Geo xxx (1)
$>JLBEAM,freq1,lon1,lat1,baud1,satlon1
(2)
.
.
.
$>JLBEAM,freqn,lonn,latn,baudn,satlonn
where:
Response
Component

Description

"Sent" freq

Frequency sent to the digital signal processor (DSP)

"Used" freq

Frequency currently being used by the digital signal processor (DSP)

"Baud"
xxxx

Currently used baud rate of the acquired signal

"Geo" xxx

Currently used satellites longitude (in degrees)

The output second line components are described in the following table:
Response
Component

Description

freq

Frequency of the spot beam

lon

Longitude of the center of the spot beam (in degrees)

lat

Latitude of the center of the spot beam (in degrees)

baud

Baud rate at which this spot beam is modulated

satlon

Satellites longitude (in degrees)

Example $>JLBEAM,Sent

1551.4890,Used 1551.4890,Baud 1200,Geo -101

$>JLBEAM,1556.8250,-88,45,1200,(-101)
$>JLBEAM,1554.4970,-98,45,1200,(-101)
$>JLBEAM,1551.4890,-108,45,1200,(-101)

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 216

Commands and Messages

$>JLBEAM,1531.2300,25,50,1200,(16)
$>JLBEAM,1535.1375,-75,0,1200,(-98)
$>JLBEAM,1535.1375,-165,13,1200,(-98)
$>JLBEAM,1535.1525,20,6,1200,(25)
$>JLBEAM,1558.5100,135,-30,1200,(160)
$>JLBEAM,1535.1375,90,15,1200,(109)
$>JLBEAM,1535.1375,179,15,1200,(109)

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 217

Commands and Messages

JLIMIT Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Set the threshold of estimated horizontal performance for which the DGPS
position LED is illuminated or query the current setting.

Command
Format

Set the threshold of estimated horizontal performance

$JLIMIT,limit
where 'limit' is the new limit in meters
Query the current setting

$JLIMIT

Receiver
Response

Receiver response when setting the threshold of estimated horizontal
performance

$>
Receiver response when querying the current threshold of estimated
horizontal performance

$>JLIM,RESID,LIMIT
where 'LIMIT' is the limit in meters

Example

To set the threshold to 5 m issue the following command:

$JLIMIT,5
If you then query the receiver with $JLIMIT the response is:

$JLIM,RESID,5.00

Additional
Information

The default value for this parameter is a conservative 10.00 m.
The status of this command is also output in the JSHOW message.

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 218

Commands and Messages

JLXBEAM Command
and

Command
Type
L-B
Description

Command
Format

Receiver
Response

Display spot beam debug information

$JLXBEAM

$>JLBEAMEX
$> Beam:1,DDSfreq1,symbol1,lon1,lat1,lonrad1,latrad1,beamrot1,satlon1,*
$> Beam:2,DDSfreq2,symbol2,lon2,lat2,lonrad2,latrad2,beamrot2,satlon2,*
$> Beam:n,DDSfreqn,symboln,lonn,latn,lonradn,latradn,beamrotn,satlonn,*

where:

Example

Response
Component

Description

DDSfreq

DDS frequency

symbol

Symbol rate used for that particular spot beam

lon

Longitude of the spot beam centroid

lat

Latitude of the spot beam centroid

lonrad

Longitude radius of the spot beam

latrad

Latitude radius of the spot beam

beamrot

Rotation angle of the spot beam

satlon

Longitude of the Atlas satellite

*

Reserved

$>JLBEAMEX
$> Beam:22,1535125000,600,-26,40,2,41,0,9999,*
$> Beam:21,1535157500,600,65,30,31,18,-21,64,*

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 219

Commands and Messages

$> Beam:13,1535185000,1200,136,-25,23,28,-40,144,*
$> Beam:13,1535185000,1200,172,-40,13,26,-26,144,*
$> Beam:24,1557835000,1200,-100,49,6,28,0,-101,*
$> Beam:24,1557835000,1200,-101,66,12,6,0,-101,*
$> Beam:25,1557845000,1200,-74,52,12,30,-30,-101,*
$> Beam:26,1557855000,1200,-122,45,11,30,25,-101,*
$> Beam:8,1535137500,1200,-85,2,30,20,-5,-98,*
$> Beam:8,1535137500,1200,-60,-25,34,36,-20,-98,*
$> Beam:4,1535137500,1200,109,2,14,19,-27,109,*
$> Beam:4,1535137500,1200,140,38,27,51,-56,109,*
$> Beam:7,1537440000,1200,23,-2,29,49,50,25,*
$> Beam:7,1537440000,1200,14,59,41,23,34,25,*
$> Beam:7,1537440000,1200,11,28,17,24,0,25,*

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 220

Commands and Messages

JMASK Command

Command
Type

GPS

Description

Specify the elevation cutoff mask angle for the GPS engine
Any satellites below this mask angle will be ignored even if available. The
default angle is 5° because satellites available below this angle will have
significant tropospheric refraction errors.

Command
Format

Receiver
Response

Example

$JMASK,e
where the elevation mask cutoff angle 'e' may be a value from 0 to 60°

$>

To specify the elevation cutoff mask angle to 10° issue the following
command:

$JMASK,10

Additional
Information

To query the receiver for the current setting, issue the JSHOW command.

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 221

Commands and Messages

JMODE
JMODE Overview
The JMODE command is used to control various GPS tracking parameters.
Command

Description

JMODE

Query receiver for status of JMODE settings

JMODE,BASE

Enable/disable base mode functionality or query the current setting

JMODE,BDSOFF

Set the receiver to use BDS data in the solution

JMODE,FIXLOC

Set the receiver to not re-average (or re-average) its position or query the current
setting

JMODE,FOREST

Enable/disable high gain functionality (for tracking under canopy) or query the
current setting

JMODE,GLOFIX

Enable/disable use of RTCM v3 (RTK) GLONASS correctors

JMODE,GLOOFF

Set the receiver to use GLONASS data in the solution

JMODE,GPSOFF

Set the receiver to use GPS data in the solution

JMODE,GPSONLY

Set the receiver to use GPS data in the solution or query the current setting (if
GLONASS is available, setting to YES will cause the receiver to only use GPS
data)

JMODE,L1ONLY

Set the receiver to use L1 data even if L2 data is available or query the current
setting

JMODE,MIXED

Include satellites that do not have DGPS or SBAS corrections in the solution

JMODE,NULLNMEA

Enable/disable output of NULL fields in NMEA 0183 messages when no there is no
fix (when position is lost)

JMODE,SBASNORTK

Disable/enable the use of SBAS ranging signals (carrier phase) in RTK

JMODE,SBASR

Enable/disable SBAS ranging or query the current setting

JMODE,STRICTRTK

Use this command to invoke stricter checks on whether RTK fix is declared. Forces
float of RTK at 30 seconds of Age-of-Diff
Enable/disable SureTrack functionality (default is enabled) or query the current
setting

JMODE,SURETRACK
JMODE,SURVEY

Assure RTK fix is not declared when residual errors exceed 10 cm. Also forces
use of GLONASS and prevents SureTrack operation

JMODE,TIMEKEEP

Enable/disable continuous time updating in NMEA 0183 messages when there is
no fix (when position is lost) or query the current setting

JMODE,TUNNEL

Enable/disable faster reacquisition after coming out of a tunnel or query the current
setting

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / Octoter 13, 2016

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 222

Commands and Messages

JMODE Command

Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Query receiver for status of JMODE settings

Command
Format

Receiver
Response

Example

$JMODE

$>JMODES[,BASE][,FIXLOC][,FOREST][,GLOFIX][,GPSONLY][,L1ONLY][,MIXED]
[,NULLNM

If FOREST and TUNNEL are set to ON and all others ( MIXED, NULLNMEA, SBASR, and TIMEKEEP) are set to OFF and
you issue

$JMODES,TUNNEL,FOREST
If all features are set to OFF and you issue the JMODE command the receiver response willbe:

$JMODES

Additional
Information

The status of this command is also output in the JSHOW response. For example, if TUNNEL is set to ON and all other
JMODE option

$>JSHOW,MODES,TUNNEL

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 223

Commands and Messages

JMODE,BASE Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration, Local Differential and RTK Commands

Description

Enable/disable base mode functionality or query the current setting
• If base mode is NO (disabled) and the receiver is receiving RTK corrections, these corrections are
echoed out when RTK corrections (ROX, RTCM3, CMR) are requested

•

Command
Format

If base mode is YES (enabled), the receiver computes its own corrections, regardless of whether or
not it is receiving RTK corrections from another source

Enable/disable base mode
To enable base mode:

$JMODE,BASE,YES
To disable base mode:

$JMODE,BASE,NO
Query the current setting

$JMODE,BASE

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to enable/disable base mode

$>

Response to querying the current setting
If base mode is currently enabled the response is:

$>JMODE,BASE,YES
If base mode is currently disabled the response is:

$>JMODE,BASE,NO

Example

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 224

Commands and Messages

JMODE,BDSOFF Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Set the receiver to use BDS data in the solution

Command
Format

Close/Open BDS operation
Close BDS operation:

$JMODE,BDSOFF,YES
Open BDS operation:

$JMODE,BDSOFF,NO

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to turn enable/disable BDS operation

$>

Response to querying the current setting
If BDS operation is currently enabled the response is:

$>JMODE,BDSOFF,YES
If BDS operation is currently disabled the response is:

$>JMODE,BDSOFF,NO

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / Octoter 13, 2016

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 225

Commands and Messages

JMODE,FIXLOC Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Set the receiver to not re-average (or re-average) its position or query the
current setting.
$JMODE,FIXLOC,YES assure that the BASE will not re-average its
position. Good for permanent installations.

Command
Format

Enable/disable position re-averaging
To set receiver to not re-average its position:

$JMODE,FIXLOC,YES
To set receiver to re-average its position:

$JMODE,FIXLOC,NO
Query the current setting

$JMODE,FIXLOC

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to enable/disable position re-averaging

$>

Response to querying the current setting
If setting is currently enabled (no position re-averaging) the response is:

$>JMODE,FIXLOC,YES
If setting is currently disabled (position re-averaging enabled) the response
is:

$>JMODE,FIXLOC,NO

Example

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 226

Commands and Messages

JMODE,FOREST Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Enable/disable high gain functionality (for tracking under canopy) or query the
current setting.
This command is useful if you are trying to maximize the likelihood of
calculating a position, but are willing to sacrifice accuracy. See also
JMODE,MIXED.

Command
Format

Enable/disable high gain functionality
To enable high gain functionality:

$JMODE,FOREST,YES
To disable high gain functionality:

$JMODE,FOREST,NO
Query the current setting

$JMODE,FOREST

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to turn functionality on/off

$>

Response to querying the current setting
If high gain functionality is currently enabled the response is:

$>JMODE,FOREST,YES
If high gain functionality is currently disabled the response is:

$>JMODE,FOREST,NO

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 227

Commands and Messages

JMODE,GLOFIX
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Enable/disable use of RTCM v3 (RTK) GLONASS correctors.
GLOFIX does not affect CMR or ROX (CMR does not have GLONASS, and
ROX correctors are always used regardless of the GLOFIX setting) and
SureTrack is automatically used for any satellite that does not have
GLONASS correctors.

Command
Format

Enable/disable use of RTCM v3 GLONASS correctors
To enable use of RTCM v3 GLONASS correctors:

$JMODE,GLOFIX,YES
To disable use of RTCM v3 GLONASS correctors:

$JMODE,GLOFIX,NO
Query the current setting

$JMODE,GLOFIX

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to turn functionality on/off

$>

Response to querying the current setting
If use of RTCM v3 GLONASS correctors is currently enabled the response is:

$>JMODE,GLOFIX,YES
If use of RTCM v3 GLONASS correctors is currently disabled the response
is:

$>JMODE,GLOFIX,NO

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 228

Commands and Messages

JMODE,GLOOFF Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Set the receiver to use GLONASS data in the solution

Command
Format

Close/Open GLONASS operation
Close GLONASS operation:

$JMODE,GLOOFF,YES
Open GLONASS operation:

$JMODE,GLOOFF,NO

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to turn enable/disable GLONASS operation

$>

Response to querying the current setting
If GLONASS operation is currently enabled the responseis:

$>JMODE,GLOOFF,NO
If GLONASS operation is currently disabled the response is:

$>JMODE,GLOOFF,YES

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / Octoter 13, 2016

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 229

Commands and Messages

JMODE,GPSOFF Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Set the receiver to use GPS data in the solution or query the current setting

Command
Format

Close/Open GPS operation
Close GPS operation:

$JMODE,GPSOFF,YES
Open GPS operation:

$JMODE,GPSOFF,NO

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to turn enable/disable GPS-only operation

$>

Response to querying the current setting
If GPS-only operation is currently enabled the response is:

$>JMODE,GPSONLY,YES
If GPS-only operation is currently disabled the response is:

$>JMODE,GPSONLY,NO

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 230

Commands and Messages

JMODE,GPSONLY Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description Set the receiver to use GPS data in the solution or query the current setting (if
GLONASS is available, setting to YES will cause the receiver to only use
GPS data)
Command
Format

Enable/disable GPS-only operation
Enable GPS-only operation:

$JMODE,GPSONLY,YES
Disable GPS-only operation (use GLONASS as well if available):

$JMODE,GPSONLY,NO
Query the current setting

$JMODE,GPSONLY

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to turn enable/disable GPS-only operation

$>

Response to querying the current setting
If GPS-only operation is currently enabled the response is:

$>JMODE,GPSONLY,YES
If GPS-only operation is currently disabled the response is:

$>JMODE,GPSONLY,NO

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 231

Commands and Messages

JMODE,L1ONLY Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Set the receiver to use L1 data even if L2 data is available or query the
current setting:

Command
Format

•

When set to YES receiver will use Atlas DGPS service or
L1 RTK

•

When set to NO receiver will use Atlas high precision
services or L1/L2 RTK

Set receiver to use/not use L1 data even if L2 data is available
To use L1 data (even if L2 data is available):

$JMODE,L1ONLY,YES
To use L2 data if it is available:

$JMODE,L1ONLY,NO
Query the current setting

$JMODE,L1ONLY

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to turn functionality on/off

$>

Response to querying the current setting
If the receiver is currently using L1 data only even if L2 data is available the
response is:

$>JMODE,L1ONLY,YES
If the receiver is currently using L2 data if it is available the response is:

$>JMODE,L1ONLY,NO

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 232

Commands and Messages

JMODE,MIXED Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Include satellites that do not have DGPS or SBAS corrections in the solution
or query the current setting
This command is useful if you are trying to maximize the likelihood of
calculating a position, but are willing to sacrifice accuracy. See also
JMODE,FOREST.

Command
Format

To include/exclude satellites without DGPS or SBAS corrections
To include satellites without DGPS or SBAScorrections:

$JMODE,MIXED,YES
To exclude satellites without DGPS or SBAS corrections:

$JMODE,MIXED,NO
Query the current setting

$JMODE,MIXED

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to include/exclude satellites without DGPS or
SBAS corrections

$>

Response to querying the current setting
If satellites without differential corrections are currently included the response
is:

$>JMODE,MIXED,YES
If satellites without differential corrections are currently excluded the
response is:

$>JMODE,MIXED,NO

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 233

Commands and Messages

JMODE,NULLNMEA Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Enable/disable output of NULL fields in NMEA 0183 messages when no there is no fix (when position is lost) or
query the current setting
This only applies to position portion of the messages; it does not affect the time portion of the message. If this
setting is disabled and position is lost then the positioning parameters of the message from the most recent known
position are repeated (instead of being NULL if enabled).

Command
Format

Enable/disable output of NULL fields in NMEA 0183 messages
To enable output:

$JMODE,NULLNMEA,YES
To disable output:

$JMODE,NULLNMEA,NO
Query the current setting

$JMODE,NULLNMEA

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to enable/disable output of NULL fields in NMEA 0183 messages

$>

Response to querying the current setting
If setting is currently enabled the response is:

$>JMODE,NULLNMEA,YES
If setting is currently disabled the response is:

$>JMODE,NULLNMEA,NO

Example

If the most recent GPGGA message is as follows:

$GPGGA,220715.00,3333.4254353,N,11153.3506065,W,2,10,1.0,406.614,M,26.294,M,6.0,1001*70
...and then position is lost and JMODE,NULLNMEA is set to NO the GPGGA message repeats as follows (most
recent known values do not change):

$GPGGA,220715.00,3333.4254353,N,11153.3506065,W,2,10,1.0,406.614,M,26.294,M,6.0,1001*70
For the same message, if position is lost and JMODE,NULLNMEA is set to YES the GPGGA message repeats as
follows (position parameters are NULL):

$GPGGA,220716.00,,,,,0,,,,M,,M,,*48

Additional

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 234

Commands and Messages

Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.03 / January 11, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 235

Commands and Messages

JMODE,SBASNORTK Command
Command
Type

Description

Command
Format

General Operation and Configuration

Disable/enable the use of SBAS ranging signals (carrier phase) in RTK
Disable/enable use of SBAS ranging signals in RTK
To disable use of SBAS ranging signals in RTK:

$JMODE,SBASNORTK,YES
To enable use of SBAS ranging signals in RTK:

$JMODE,SBASNORTK,NO
Query the current setting

$JMODE,SBASNORTK

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to disable/enable the use of SBAS ranging
signals in RTK

$>

Response to querying the current setting
If current setting is to disable SBAS ranging the response is:

$>JMODE,SBASNORTK,YES
If current setting is to enable SBAS ranging the response is:

$>JMODE,SBASNORTK,NO

Example

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 236

Commands and Messages

JMODE,SBASR Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Enable/disable SBAS ranging or query the current setting

Command
Format

Enable/disable SBAS ranging
To enable SBAS ranging:

$JMODE,SBASR,YES
To disable SBAS ranging:

$JMODE,SBASR,NO
Query the current setting

$JMODE,SBASR

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to enable/disable SBAS ranging

$>

Response to querying the current setting
If setting is currently enabled the response is:

$>JMODE,SBASR,YES
If setting is currently disabled the response is:

$>JMODE,SBASR,NO

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 237

Commands and Messages

JMODE,STRICTRTK Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Use this command to invoke stricter checks on whether RTK fix is
declared. Forces float of RTK at 30 seconds of Age-of-Diff

Command
Format

Enable/disable STRICTRTK functionality
To enable STRICTRTK functionality:

$JMODE,STRICTRTK,YES
To disable STRICTRTK functionality:

$JMODE,STRICTRTK,NO
Query the current setting

$JMODE,SURETRACK

Receiver
Response $>

Response to issuing command to enable/disable command

Response to querying the current setting
If setting is currently enabled the response is:

$>JMODE,STRICTRTK,YES
If setting is currently disabled the response is:

$>JMODE,STRICTRTK,NO

Additional
Information

This mode is not saved between power cycles..

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 238

Commands and Messages

JMODE,SURETRACK Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Enable/disable SureTrack functionality (default is enabled) or query the
current setting

Command
Format

Enable/disable SureTrack functionality
To enable SureTrack functionality:

$JMODE,SURETRACK,YES
To disable SureTrack functionality:

$JMODE,SURETRACK,NO
Query the current setting

$JMODE,SURETRACK

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to enable/disable SureTrack functionality

$>

Response to querying the current setting
If setting is currently enabled the response is:

$>JMODE,SURETRACK,YES
If setting is currently disabled the response is:

$>JMODE,SURETRACK,NO

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 239

Commands and Messages

JMODE,SURVEY Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Assure RTK fix is not declared when residual errors exceed 10 cm. Also
forces use of GLONASS and prevents SureTrack operation.

Command
Format

Enable/disable continuoustime updating
To enable this command

$JMODE,SURVEY,YES
To disable this command:

$JMODE,SURVEY,NO
Query the current setting

$JMODE,SURVEY

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to enable/disable command

$>

Response to querying the current setting
If setting is currently enabled the response is:

$>JMODE,SURVEY,YES
If setting is currently disabled the response is:

$>JMODE,SURVEY,NO
Additional
Information

This mode is not saved between power cycles (for now)..

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / Octoter 13, 2016

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/December 217, 20217

Page 240

Commands and Messages

JMODE,TIMEKEEP Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Enable/disable continuous time updating in NMEA 0183 messages when
there is no fix (when position is lost) or query the current setting
When position is lost the time is the only parameter in the message that
continues to update; all other parameters remain the same.

Command
Format

Enable/disable continuoustime updating
To enable continuous time updating:

$JMODE,TIMEKEEP,YES
To disable continuous time updating:

$JMODE,TIMEKEEP,NO
Query the current setting

$JMODE,TIMEKEEP

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to enable/disable continuous time updating

$>

Response to querying the current setting
If setting is currently enabled the response is:

$>JMODE,TIMEKEEP,YES
If setting is currently disabled the response is:

$>JMODE,TIMEKEEP,NO

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 241

Commands and Messages

JMODE,TUNNEL Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Enable/disable faster reacquisition after coming out of a tunnel or query the
current setting

Command
Format

Enable/disable faster reacquisition after coming out of a tunnel
To enable faster reacquisition:

$JMODE,TUNNEL,YES
To disable faster reacquisition:

$JMODE,TUNNEL,NO
Query the current setting

$JMODE,TUNNEL

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to turn functionality on/off

$>

Response to querying the current setting
If setting is currently enabled the response is:

$>JMODE,TUNNEL,YES
If setting is currently disabled the response is:

$>JMODE,TUNNEL,NO

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 242

Commands and Messages

JMSG99 Command
Type

Vector

Description

Change the output in the Bin99 message to be from the specified antenna

Format

$JMSG99,0
where '0' is used view the primary antenna SNR (default)

$JMSG99,1
where '1' is used view the secondary antenna SNR
Receiver
Response

$>

Other

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 243

Commands and Messages

JNMEA
JNMEA,GGAALLGNSS Command
Command
Type

GLONASS

Description

Configure the GGA string to include full GNSS information (the number of
used GNSS satellites will be included in the GPGGA message) orquery the
current setting
The GGA message is only supposed to report position and satellite
information based on the GPS constellation. The combined constellation
position and satellite data should be reported in the GNSS message, but
some users with older equipment cannot utilize this message. This
command allows users with older equipment that require a GGA message
to be able to utilize and take advantage of the larger constellation of GNSS
satellites.

Command
Format

Include/exclude full GNSS information in GGA string
To include full GNSS information in GGA string:

$JNMEA,GGAALLGNSS,YES

To exclude full GNSS information from GGA string:

$JNMEA,GGAALLGNSS,NO
Query the current setting

$JNMEA,GGAALLGNSS

Receiver
Response

Include/exclude full GNSS information in GGA string

$>
Query the current setting
If set to yes, querying the current setting returns the following:

$>JNMEA,GGAALLGNSS,YES
If set to no, querying the current setting returns the following:

$>JNMEA,GGAALLGNSS,NO

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 244

Commands and Messages

JNMEA,PRECISION Command
Command
Type

GPS, Local Differential and RTK, L-Band

Description

Specify or query the number of decimal places to output in the GPGGA,
GPGLL, and GPGNS messages or query the current setting
Specify the number of decimal places

Command
Format

$JNMEA,PRECISION,x
where 'x' specifies the number of decimal places from 1 to 8
Query the current setting

$JNMEA,PRECISION

Receiver
Response

Specify the precision

$>
Query the current setting

$>JNMEA,PRECISION,x
where 'x' refers to the number of decimal places to output
Additional
Information

When using RTK orAtlas high precision services, Hemisphere GNSS
recommends you set JNMEA,PRECISION to at least 7 decimal places. High
accuracy positioning techniques require at least 7 decimal places to maintain
millimeter (mm) accuracy.
This command is the same as JNP.

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 245

Commands and Messages

JNP Command
Command
Type

GPS, Local Differential and RTK, L-Band

Description

Specify or query the number of decimal places to output in the GPGGA,
GPGLL, and GPGNS messages or query the current setting

Command
Format

Specify the number of decimal places

$JNP,x
where 'x' specifies the number of decimal places from 1 to 8
Query the current setting

$JNP

Receiver
Response

Specify the number of decimal places to output

$>
Query the current setting

$>JNP,x
where 'x' refers to the number of decimal places to output

Additional
Information

When using RTK or Atlas high precision services, Hemisphere GNSS
recommends you set JNP to at least 7 decimal places. High accuracy
positioning techniques require at least 7 decimal places to maintain millimeter
(mm) accuracy.
This command is the same as JNMEA,PRECISION.

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 246

Commands and Messages

JOFF
JOFF Command
Command
Type

GPS

Description

Turn off all data messages being output through the current port or other port
(or Port C), including any binary messages such as Bin95 and Bin96

Command
Format

$JOFF[,OTHER]
When you specify the ',OTHER' data field (without the brackets), this
command turns off all messages on the other port. There are no variable data
fields for this message.
You can issue this command as follows to turn off all messages on Port C:
$JOFF,PORTC

Receiver
Response
Additional
Information

$>

To turn off all data messages being output through all ports, including any
binary messages such as Bin95 and Bin96, see the JOFF,ALL command

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 247

Commands and Messages

JOFF,ALL Command
Command
Type

GPS

Description

Turn off all data messages being output through all ports, including any
binary messages such as Bin95 and Bin96

$JOFF,ALL
Command
Format

Receiver
Response
Additional
Information

$>

To turn off all data messages being output through a single port, including
any binary messages such as Bin95 and Bin96, see the JOFF command

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 248

Commands and Messages

JPOS Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Speed up the initial acquisition when changing continents with the receiver or
query the receiver for the current position of the receiver (for example,
powering up the receiver for the first time in Europe after it has been tested in
Canada)
The command enables the receiver to begin the acquisition process for the
closest SBAS spot beams. This saves some time with acquisition of the
SBAS service. However, use of this message is typically not required
because of the quick overall startup time of the receiver module.

Command
Format

Specify the latitude and longitude

$JPOS,lat,lon
where both 'lat' and 'lon':

•

Must be entered in decimal degrees

•

Do not need to be more accurate than half a degree

Query the current setting

$JPOS

Receiver
Response

Receiver response when specifying the latitude and longitude

$>
Receiver response when querying the current setting

$>JPOS,LAT,LON

Additional
Information

The status of this command is also output in the JSHOW message.

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 249

Commands and Messages

JPPS Command
JPPS,FREQ Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Specify the pps frequency of the receiver or query the current setting.

Command
Format

$JPPS,FREQ,r,SAVE

Set the receiver’s specific pps frequency (in Hz)
where:
'r' = specific pps frequency
The SAVE field is optional. However, if omitted this setting will not survive a power cycle. This
setting is not saved with $JSAVE. It must be saved by adding the SAVE field.

Query the current setting

$PPS,FREQ

Receiver
Response $>

Response to issuing command

Response to querying the current setting

$JPPS,FREQ,1.00

Example

Issue the following command to set the pps frequency to 2.000 on the
current port:

$JPPS,FREQ,2
...the response is then:

$>
If you query the current setting now, the response is:

$JPPS,FREQ,2.00
Additional
Information

This mode is not saved between power cycles

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / Octotbr 13, 2016

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 250

Commands and Messages

JPPS,PERIOD Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Specify the pps peiod (in seconds) of the receiver or query the current setting.

Command
Format

$JPPS,PERIOD,r

Set the receiver’s specific pps period

where:
'r' = specific pps period
(inverse of frequency)
The SAVE field is optional. However, if omitted this setting will not survive a power cycle. This setting is
not saved with $JSAVE. It must be saved by adding the SAVE field.

Query the current setting

$PPS,PERIOD

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command

$>

Response to querying the current setting

$JPPS,PERIOD,1.0

Example

Issue the following command to set the pps period to 2 seconds (0.5 Hz)

$JPPS,PERIOD,2
...the response is then:

$>
If you query the current setting now, the response is:

$JPPS,PERIOD,2.000
Additional
Information

This mode is not saved between power cycles

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 251

Commands and Messages

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / October 13, 2016

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 252

Commands and Messages

JPPS,WIDTH Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Specify the pps width of the receiver or query the current setting

Command
Format

$JPPS,WIDTH,r,SAVE

Set the receiver’s specific pps width (microseconds)

where:
'r' = specific pps widthThe SAVE field is optional. However, if omitted this setting will not survive a
power cycle. This setting is not saved with $JSAVE. It must be saved by adding the SAVE field.

Query the current setting

$PPS,WIDTH

Receiver
Response

Response to issuingcommand

$>

Response to querying the current setting

$JPPS,WIDTH,999.996

Example

Issue the following command to set the pps width to 2.000 on the current
port:

$JPPS,WIDTH,2
...the response is then:

$>
If you query the current setting now, the response is:

$JPPS,WIDTH,2.000
Additional
Information

This mode is not saved between power cycles

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / October 13, 2016

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 253

Commands and Messages

JPRN,EXCLUDE Command
Note: For advanced users only. Not required for typical operation.

Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration Commands

Description

For advanced users only.
Exclude GPS and/or other GNSS satellites from being used in the
positioning solution or query the current setting

Command
Format

Exclude PRNs from being used in the positioning solution
Exclude GPS and/or other GNSS PRNs:

$JPRN,EXCLUDE[,GPS,x,x,x…][,GLO,y,y,y…][,GAL,z,z,z…]
where:

•

'x,x,x...' represents the GPS PRNs you want to exclude

•

'y,y,y...' represents the GLONASS PRNs you want to exclude

•

‘z,z,z…’ represents the GALILEO PRNs you want to exclude

Exclude no GNSS PRNs:

$JPRN,EXCLUDE,NONE

Exclude no GPS PRNs

$JPRN,EXCLUDE,GPS,NONE

Exclude no GLONASS PRNs:

$JPRN,EXCLUDE,GLO,NONE
Exclude no GALILEO PRNs:

$JPRN,EXCLUDE,GAL,NONE
Query the current setting
Query all excluded PRNs (GPS and GLONASS):

$JPRN,EXCLUDE

Query excluded GPS PRNs:

$JPRN,EXCLUDE,GPS

Query excluded GLONASS PRNs:

$JPRN,EXCLUDE,GLO
Query excluded GALILEO PRNs:

$JPRN,EXCLUDE,GAL
GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 254

Commands and Messages

Receiver
Response

See Example section below

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 255

Commands and Messages

Example

If you excluded no GPS or GLONASS PRNS and issued
the $JPRN,EXCLUDE,GPS command the response is:

$>JPRN,EXCLUDE,GPS,NONE,GLO,NONE

If you excluded one GPS PRN (22) and one GLONASS PRN (10) and issued
the following commands you would see the following corresponding responses:

•

Command: $JPRN,EXCLUDE,GPS
Response: $>JPRN,EXCLUDE,GPS,22

•

Command: $JPRN,EXCLUDE,GLO
Response: $>JPRN,EXCLUDE,GLO,10

•

Command: $JPRN,EXCLUDE
Response: $>JPRN,EXCLUDE,GPS,22,GLO,10

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 256

Commands and Messages

JQUERY
JQUERY,GUIDE Command

Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Query the receiver for its determination on whether or not it is providing
suitable accuracy after both the SBAS and GPS have been acquired (up to
five minutes)
This feature takes into consideration the download status of the SBAS
ionospheric map and also the carrier phase smoothing of the unit.

Command
Format

Receiver
Response

$JQUERY,GUIDE

If the receiver is ready for use with navigation, or positioning with optimum
performance, it returns:

$>JQUERY,GUIDE,YES
Otherwise, it returns:

$>JQUERY,GUIDE,NO

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 257

Commands and Messages

JQUERY,RTKPROG Command
Command
Type

Local Differential and RTK

Description

Perform a one-time query of RTK fix progress information

Command
Format

$JQUERY,RTKPROG
As an alternative you can log this as a message using the JASC,PSAT,RTKPROGcommand.

$>JQUERY,RTKPROG,R,F,N,SS1,SS2,SS3,MASK*CC
Receiver
Response

where
Message
Component

Description

R

1 = Ready to enter RTK ambiguity fix
0 = Not ready to enter RTK ambiguity fix

F

1 = Receiver running in RTK ambiguity fix mode
0 = Receiver not running in RTK ambiguity fix mode

N

Number of satellites used to fix

SS1

summer-1
SS1 must be significantly larger than SS2 and SS3 to enter R=1 mode

Example

SS2

summer-2

SS3

summer-3

MASK

Bit mask; bits identify which GNSS observables are being received from base recently
(1 = GPS, 3 = GPS + GLONASS)

*CC

Checksum



Carriage return



Line feed

$>JQUERY,RTKPROG,1,1,23,243.3,0.0,0.0,3

Additional
Information

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 256

Commands and Messages

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 257

Commands and Messages

JQUERY,RTKSTAT Command
Command
Type

Local Differential and RTK

Description

Perform a one-time query of the most relevant parametersaffecting RTK

Command
Format

Receiver
Response

$JQUERY,RTKSTAT
As an alternative you can log this as a message using the JASC,PSAT,RTKSTAT command.

$>JQUERY,RTKSTAT,MODE,TYP,AGE,SUBOPT,DIST,SYS,NUM,SNR,RSF,BSF,HAG,
ACCSTAT,SNT
where
Message
Component

Description

MODE

Mode (FIX,FLT,DIF,AUT,NO)

TYP

Correction type (DFX,ROX,CMR,RTCM3,CMR+,...)

AGE

Age of differential corrections, in seconds

SUBOPT

Subscription code (see Interpreting the $JK 'Date'/Subscription Codes to
determine the meaning of the subscription code)

DIST

Distance to base in kilometers

SYS

Systems in use:

•

GPS: L1, L2, L5

•

GLONASS: G1, G2

•

Galileo: E5a, E5b, E5a+b, E6

NUM

Number of satellites used by each system

SNR

Quality of each SNR path, where:

•

A is > 20 dB

•

B is > 18 dB

•

C is > 15 dB

•

D is <= 15 dB

RSF

Rover slip flag (non zero if parity errors in last 5 minutes, good for detecting jamming
and TCXO issues)

BSF

Base slip flag

HAE

Horizontal accuracy estimation

ACCSTAT

RTK accuracy status (hex), where:

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 258

Commands and Messages

•

0x1 = no differential or differential too old, for the application

•

0x2 = problems with differential message

•

0x4 = horizontal position estimate poor for the application

•

0x8 = HDOP high, poor satellite geometry

•

0x10 = fewer than 6 L1 sats used

•

0x20 = poor L1 SNRs

•

0x40 = not in RTK mode

•

0x80 = not in RTK mode or RTK only recently solved (< 10secs
ago)

•

0x100 = RTK solution compromised, may fail

The status message can be any of the above or any combination of the above. For
example, a status message of '047' indicates the following:

SNT

Example

•

0x1 = no differential or differential too old, for the application

•

0x2 = problems with differential message

•

0x4 = horizontal position estimate poor for the application

•

0x40 = not in RTK mode

Ionospheric scintillation, values are:

•

0 (little or no scintillation - does not adversely affect RTK solution)

•

1-100 (scintillation detected - adversely affects RTK solution)



Carriage return



Line feed

$>JQUERY,RTKSTAT,FIX,ROX,
1,007F,0.0,(,L1,L2,G1,G2,)(,14,11,9,9,)(,A,A,A,A,),0,1,0.008,000,3

Additional
Information

Related
Commands
and
Messages

JASC,PSAT,RTKSTAT command
PSAT,RTKSTAT message

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 259

Commands and Messages

Topic Last Updated: v1.05 / January 18, 2013

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 260

Commands and Messages

JQUERY,TEMPERATURE Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Query the receiver’s temperature

Command
:
Format
$JQUERY,TEMPERATURE

Receiver
Response

Additional
Information

$>JQUERY,TEMPERATURE,51.88

..

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 261

Commands and Messages

JRAD
JRAD Command Overview
This topic provides information related to the NMEA 0183 messages accepted by the receiver’s e-Dif
application. The following table provides a brief description of the commands supported by the e-Dif
application for its control and operation.
Command

Description

JRAD,1

Display the current reference position in e-Dif applications only

JRAD,1,LAT,LON,HEIGHT

Use this command—a derivative of the JRAD,1,P command—when absolute
positioning is required in e-Dif applications only

JRAD,1,P

e-Dif: Record the current position as the reference with which to compute e-Dif
corrections. This would be used in relative mode as no absolute point information is
specified.
DGPS Base Station: Record the current position as the reference with which to
compute Base Station corrections in e-Dif applications only. This would be used in
relative mode as no absolute point information is specified

JRAD,2

Forces the receiver to use the new reference point (you normally use this command
following a JRAD,1 type command)

JRAD,3

Invoke the e-Dif function once the unit has started up with the e-Dif application active,
or, update the e-Dif solution (calibration) using the current position as opposed to the
reference position used by the JRAD,2 command

JRAD,7

Turn auto recalibration on or off

JRAD,9

Initialize the Base Station feature and use the previously entered point, either with
$JRAD,1,P or $JRAD,1,LAT,LON,HEIGHT, as the reference with which to compute
Base Station corrections in e-Dif applications only. Use this for both relative mode and
absolute mode.

JRAD,10

Specify BDS message to be transmitted by base station

Note: Use the JSAVE command to save changes you need to keep and wait for the $>SAVE COMPLETE response.

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / Octoter 13, 2016

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 262

Commands and Messages

JRAD,1 Command
Command
Type

e-Dif, DGPS Base Station

Description

Display the current reference position in e-Dif applications only

Command
Format

$JRAD,1

$>JRAD,1,LAT,LON,HEIGHT
Receiver
Response

where:
Command
Component

Description

LAT

Latitude of the reference point in decimal degrees

LON

Longitude of the reference point in decimal degrees

HEIGHT

Ellipsoidal height of the reference point in meters

Upon startup of the receiver with the e-Dif application running—as opposed to with the SBAS application—
no reference position will be present in memory. If you attempt to query for the reference position, the
receiver’s response will be:

$>JRAD,1,FAILED,PRESENT LOCATION NOT STABLE

Example

When you issue the $JRAD,1 command the response will be similar to the following:

$>JRAD,1,51.00233513,-114.08232345,1050.212

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 263

Commands and Messages

JRAD,1,LAT,LON,HEIGHT Command
Command
Type

Dif, DGPS Base Station

e-

Description

Command
Format

Use this command—a derivative of the JRAD,1,P command—when absolute positioning is required in e-Dif
applications only

$JRAD,1,lat,lon,height
where:
Command
Component

Description

lat

Latitude of the reference point in decimal degrees

lon

Longitude of the reference point in decimal degrees

height

Ellipsoidal height of the reference point in meters. Ellipsoidal height can be calculated by
adding the altitude and the geoidal separation, both available from the GPGGA message.
Example:

$GPGGA,173309.00,5101.04028,N,11402.38289,W,2,07,1.4
, 1071.0,M,- 17.8,M,6.0, 0122*48
ellipsoidal height = 1071.0 + (-17.8) = 1053.2 meters

Both latitude and longitude must be entered as decimal degrees. The receiver will not accept the command if
there are no decimal places.

Receiver
Response

$>JRAD,LAT,LON,HEIGHT

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 264

Commands and Messages

JRAD,1,P Command
Command
Type

Dif, DGPS Base Station

eDescription

Command
Format

e-Dif: Record the current position as the reference with which to compute eDif corrections. This would be used in relative mode as no absolute point
information is specified.
DGPS Base Station: Record the current position as the reference with which
to compute Base Station corrections in e-Dif applications only. This would be
used in relative mode as no absolute point information is specified

$JRAD,1,P

$>JRAD,1,OK
Receiver
Response

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 265

Commands and Messages

JRAD,2 Command
Command
Type

e-Dif

Description

Forces the receiver to use the new reference point
You normally use this command following a JRAD,1 type command.

Command
Format

$JRAD,2

$>JRAD,2,OK
Receiver
Response

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 266

Commands and Messages

JRAD,3 Command
Command
Type

Dif

eDescription

This command has two primary purposes.

•
•

Command
Format

Receiver
Response

To invoke the e-Dif function once the unit has startedup with the e-Dif application active
To update the e-Dif solution (calibration) using the current position as opposed to the reference
position used by the JRAD,2 command

$JRAD,3

If the receiver has tracked enough satellites for a long enough period before
you issue this command, it will respond with the following. (The tracking
period can be from 3 to 10 minutes and is used for modeling errors going
forward.

$>JRAD,3,OK
If the e-Dif algorithms do not find sufficient data, the receiver responds with:

$>JRAD,3,FAILED,NOT ENOUGH STABLE SATELLITE TRACKS

Additional
Information

If you receive the failure message after a few minutes of operation, try again
shortly after until you receive the “OK” acknowledgement message. The e-Dif
application begins operating as soon as the $>JRAD,3,OK message has
been received; however, a you will still need to define a reference position for
e-Dif unless relative positioning is sufficient for any needs.

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 267

Commands and Messages

JRAD,7 Command
Command
Type

Dif

eDescription

Command
Format

Turn auto recalibration on or off

$JRAD,7,n
where 'n' is the auto-recalibration variable (0 = Off or 1 = On, 0 is the
default)

$>JRAD,7,OK
Receiver
Response

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 268

Commands and Messages

JRAD,9 Command
Command
Type

DGPS Base Station

Description

Initialize the Base Station feature and use the previously entered point, either
with $JRAD,1,P or $JRAD,1,LAT,LON,HEIGHT, as the reference with which
to compute Base Station corrections in e-Dif applications only. Use this for
both relative mode and absolute mode.

Command
Format

To initialize/turn off base station mode
To initialize base station mode and use storedcoordinates:

$JRAD,9,1,1
To turn off base station mode:

$JRAD,9,0
$>JRAD,9,OK
Receiver
Response

Additional
Information

(same response for turning base station mode on or off)

The $JASC,RTCM,1 command must be sent to the receiver to start
outputting standard RTCM corrections.

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 269

Commands and Messages

JRAD,10 Command
Command
Type

DGPS Base Station

Description

Specify BDS message to be transmitted by base station

Command
Format

$JRAD,10,1

Specify BDS message to be transmitted by base station

Specify BDS message to be not transmitted by base station

$JRAD,10,0

$>JRAD,10,OK
Receiver
Response
(same response for specify BDS to be transmitted or not)

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / Octoter 13, 2016

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 270

Commands and Messages

JRAIM Command
Command
Type

RAIM

Description

Specify the parameters of the RAIM scheme that affect the output of the PSAT,GBS message or query the
current setting
Specify the parameters of the RAIM scheme

Command
Format

$JRAIM,hpr,probhpr,probfalse
where:
Command
Component

Description

hpr

Horizontal Protection Radius: notification in the PSAT,GBS message that the horizontal
error has exceeded this amount will be received. The acceptable range for this value is
1 to 10,000 m. The default is 10 m.

probhpr

Maximum allowed probability that the position computed lies outside the HPR. The
acceptable range for this value is 0.001% to 50%. The default is 5%.

probfalse

Maximum allowed probability that there is a false alarm (that the position error is
reported outside the of the HPR, but it is really within the HPR). The acceptable range
for this value is 0.001% to 50%. The default is 1%.

Query the current setting

$JRAIM

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to specify RAIM scheme parameters

$>

Response to querying the current setting

$>JRAIM,HPR,probHPR,probFALSE

Example

To specify the RAIM scheme parameters as HPR = 8 m, probHPR = 2%, and probFALSE = 0.5% issue the
following command:

$JRAIM,8,2,0.5
If you then query the receiver for the RAIM scheme issue the following command:

$JRAIM
...and the response will be:

$>JRAIM,8.00,2.0000,0.5000

Additional

The purpose of the probability of false alarm is to help make a decision on whether to declare a fault or

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 271

Commands and Messages
Information

warning in an uncertain situation. The philosophy is to only issue a fault if the user is certain (to within the
probability of a false alarm) that the protection radius has been exceeded, else issue a warning.

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 272

Commands and Messages

JRELAY Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Send user-defined text out of a serial port

Command
Format

Receiver
Response

Example

$JRELAY,PORTx,msg
•

'x' = destination port where the message (MSG) will be sent

•

'msg' = message to be sent

$>

Example 1:
Command

$JRELAY,PORTA,HELLO\nTHERE\n
Response

HELLO
THERE
$>

Example 2:
The following commands apply to the A101 and A325 antennas. You can configure the A101 and A325
through the serial ports using these commands.

•

Configure the setup and output of tilt commands as follows (note that all commands are preceded
with $JRELAY,PORTC, to direct them through internal Port C):

$JRELAY,PORTC,$JTILT,CALIBRATE[,RESET]
Output the tilt offset values for the X and Y axes. If performing a reset, ensure the A101/A325 is on a flat surface.

o

$JRELAY,PORTC,$JTILT,TAU[,value]

Output the filter constant for tilt value smoothing.

o

$JRELAY,PORTC,$JTILT,COMPENSATION[,[ON|OFF],[height
offset]]

Turn positioning tilt compensation on/off (currently only the GPGGA data log is supported for tilt compensated position
output).

o

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

$JRELAY,PORTC,$JASC,GPGGA,rate[,port]

Page 273

Commands and Messages

Turn tilt compensated GPGGA message on.

o $JRELAY,PORTC,$JTILT,COGBIAS[,value]
Set a COG bias to be used in the tilt compensation algorithms (for use when the A101/A325 is not mounted with the connector facing the
forward direction of travel).

o $JRELAY,PORTC,$JASC,INTLT,rate[,port]
or
$JRELAY,PORTC,$JASC,PSAT,INTLT,rate[,port]
•

Log tilt information from the A101/A325
Set/query the receiver mode—serial or NMEA2000 (commands must be sent over Port A):

$JRELAY,PORTC,$JQUERYMODE
Query the receiver for the current mode

o

$JRELAY,PORTC,$JSERIALMODE

Set the receiver mode to serial

o

$JRELAY,PORTC,$JN2KMODE

Set the receiver mode to NMEA2000

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 274

Commands and Messages

JRESET Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Reset the receiver to its default operating parameters by:

•
•
•

Command
Format

Turning off outputs on all ports
Saving the configuration
Setting the configuration to its defaults (in following table)
Configuration

Setting

Elev Mask

5

Residual limit

10

Alt aiding

None

Age of Diff

45 minutes

Air mode

Auto

Diff type

Default for
app

NMEA
precision

5 decimals

COG
smoothing

None

speed
smoothing

None

WAAS

UERE
thresholds

$JRESET[,x]
where ',x' is an optional field:

•
•

When set to ALL does everything $JRESET does, plus it clears
almanacs
When set to BOOT does everything $JRESET,ALL does, plus
clears use of the real-time clock at startup, clears use of backed-up
ephemeris and almanacs, and reboots the receiver when done

$JRESET
Receiver
Response

$> Saving Configuration. Please Wait...
$>
$> Save Complete

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 275

Commands and Messages

Additional
Information

CAUTION: $JRESET clears all parameters. For the V101 Series and the
LV101 you will have to issue the $JATT, FLIPBRD,YES command to properly
redefine the circuitry orientation inside the product once the receiver has
reset. Failure to do so will cause radical heading behavior.

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 276

Commands and Messages

JRTCM3
JRTCM3,ANTNAME Command
Command
Type

Local Differential and RTK

Description

Specify the antenna name that is transmitted in various RTCM3 messages
from the base

Command
Format

Specify the antenna name

$JRTCM3,ANTNAME,name
where name must be an antenna name from the following list:
http://www.ngs.noaa.gov/ANTCAL/LoadFile?file=ngs08.003
Query the current setting

$JRTCM3,ANTNAME

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to specify the antenna name

$>

Response to querying the current setting

$JRTCM3,ANTNAME,name
where name is the previously specified antenna name

Example

To specify the antenna name as a Hemisphere GNSS A42 antenna
(HEMA42), issue the following command:

$JRTCM3,ANTNAME,HEMA42
If you then issue $JRTCM3,ANTNAME to query the current
setting the response is:

$>JRTCM3,ANTNAME,HEMA42

Additional
Information

See JRTCM3,NULLANT for information on setting the antenna name to a null
value (no name)

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 277

Commands and Messages

JRTCM3,EXCLUDE
Command
Type

Local Differential and RTK

Description

Specify RTCM3 message types to not be transmitted (excluded) by base station

Command
Format

Specify the RTCM3 messages to not be transmitted

$JRTCM3,EXCLUDE[,1004][,1005][,1006][,1007][,1008][,1012][,1033][,1104]
[,4011][,MSM3][,MSM4]
Query the current setting

$JRTCM3,EXCLUDE

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to exclude specific RTCM3 messages from being transmitted

$>

Response to querying the current setting

$JRTCM3,EXCLUDE[,MSG1][,MSG2]...[,MSGn]
where MSG1 through MSGn represent each included message type to not be transmitted (excluded)

Example

Assume all available RTCM3 messages are included (1004, 1005, 1006, 1007, 1008, 1012, 1033). You then issue the
following command to exclude message types 1004, 1006, and 1012:

$JRTCM3,EXCLUDE,1004,1006,1012
If you then issue $JRTCM3,EXCLUDE to query the current setting the response is:
$>JRTCM3,EXCLUDE,1004,1006,1012
Correspondingly, if you issue $JRTCM3,INCLUDE to query the current setting for included messages
the response is:

$>JRTCM3,INCLUDE,1005,1007,1008,1033

Additional
Information

See JRTCM3,INCLUDE for more information on including RTCM3 messages for transmission

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / Octoter 13, 2016

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 278

Commands and Messages

JRTCM3,INCLUDE Command
Command
Type

Local Differential and RTK

Description

Specify RTCM3 message types to be transmitted by base station

Command
Format

Specify the RTCM3 messages to be transmitted

$JRTCM3,INCLUDE[,1004][,1005][,1006][,1007][,1008][,1012][,1033][,1104]
[,4011][,MSM3][,MSM4]
Query the current setting

$JRTCM3,INCLUDE

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to include specific RTCM3 messages to be transmitted

$>

Response to querying the current setting

$JRTCM3,INCLUDE[,MSG1][,MSG2]...[,MSGn]
where MSG1 through MSGn represent each included message type to be transmitted

Example

Assume none of the available RTCM3 messages are included (1004, 1005, 1006, 1007, 1008, 1012, 1033). You then
issue the following command to include message types 1004, 1006, and 1012

$JRTCM3,INCLUDE,1004,1006,1012
If you then issue $JRTCM3,INCLUDE to query the current setting the response is:

$>JRTCM3,INCLUDE,1004,1006,1012

Additional
Information

See JRTCM3,EXCLUDE for more information on including RTCM3 messages for transmission

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / Octoter 13, 2016

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 279

Commands and Messages

JRTCM3,NULLANT Command
Command
Type

Local Differential and RTK

Description

Specify the antenna name as null (no name) that is transmitted in various
RTCM3 messages from the base
Specify the antenna name as null

Command
Format

$JRTCM3,NULLANT

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to exclude specific RTCM3 messages from
being transmitted

$>

Example

Assume you previously specified the antenna name as a Hemisphere GNSS
A42 antenna (HEMA42). If you issue
$JRTCM3,ANTNAME to query the current setting the
response is:

$>JRTCM3,ANTNAME,HEMA42
Now send the following command to specify the antenna name as null (no
name):

$>JRTCM3,NULLANT
If you then issue $JRTCM3,ANTNAME to query the
current setting the response is:

$>JRTCM3,ANTNAME,

Additional
Information

See JRTCM3,ANTNAME for information on specifying the antenna name as
something other than null

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 280

Commands and Messages

JRTK
JRTK Command Overview
The JRTK commands are used to define or query RTK settings.
Command

Description

JRTK,1

Show the receiver’s reference position (can issue command to base station or rover)

JRTK,1,LAT,LON,HEIGHT

Set the receiver’s reference position to the coordinates you enter (can issuecommand
to base station or rover)

JRTK,1,P

Set the receiver’s reference coordinates to the current calculated position if you donot
have known coordinates for your antenna location (can issue command to base station
or rover)

JRTK,5

Show the base station’s transmission status for RTK applications (can issuecommand
to base station)

JRTK,5,Transmit

Suspend or resume the transmission of RTK (can issue command to base station)

JRTK,6

Display the progress of the base station (can issue command to base station)

JRTK,12

Disable or enable the receiver to go into fixed integer mode (RTK) vs. float mode (LDif) - can issue command to rover

JRTK,17

Display the transmitted latitude, longitude, and height of the base station (can issue
command to base station or rover)

JRTK,18

Display the distance from the rover to the base station, in meters (can issue command
to rover)

JRTK,18,BEARING

Display the bearing from the base station to the rover, in degrees (can issue command
to rover)

JRTK,18,NEU

Display the distance from the rover to the base station and the delta North, East, and
Up, in meters (can issue command to rover)

JRTK,28

Set the base station ID transmitted in ROX/DFX/CMR/RTCM3 messages (can issue
command to base station)

Topic Last Updated: v1.03 / January 11, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 281

Commands and Messages

JRTK,1 Command
Command
Type

Local Differential and RTK

Description

Show the receiver’s reference position (can issue command to base station or rover)

Command
Format

$JRTK,1

$JRTK,1,LAT,LON,HEIGHT
Receiver
Response

where
Command
Component

Description

LAT

Latitude of the reference point in decimal degrees

LON

Longitude of the reference point in decimal degrees

HEIGHT

You must enter HEIGHT as ellipsoidal height in meters.
Ellipsoidal height can be calculated by adding the altitude and the geoidal separation, both available
from the GPGGA message.
Example:

$GPGGA,173309.00,5101.04028,N,11402.38289,W,2,07,1.4,1071.0,
M,- 17.8,M,6.0, 0122*48
ellipsoidal height = 1071.0 + (-17.8) = 1053.2 meters
Example

$>JRTK,1,33.55679117,-111.88955483,374.600

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 282

Commands and Messages

JRTK,1,LAT,LON,HEIGHT Command
Command
Type

Local Differential and RTK

Description

Set the receiver’s reference position to the coordinates you enter (can issue command to base station or rover)

Command
Format

$JRTK,1,lat,lon,height
where:
Command
Component

Description

lat

Latitude of the reference point in decimal degrees

lon

Longitude of the reference point in decimal degrees

height

You must enter HEIGHT as ellipsoidal height in meters.
Ellipsoidal height can be calculated by adding the altitude and the geoidal separation, both available
from the GPGGA message.
Example:

$GPGGA,173309.00,5101.04028,N,11402.38289,W,2,07,1.4,1071.0,
M,- 17.8,M,6.0, 0122*48
ellipsoidal height = 1071.0 + (-17.8) = 1053.2 meters

Note: You must enter both latitude and longitude in decimal degrees; the receiver will not accept the command if there are
no decimal places.
Receiver
Response

$>

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 283

Commands and Messages

JRTK,1,P Command
Command
Type

Local Differential and RTK

Description

Set the receiver’s reference coordinates to the current calculated position if
you do not have known coordinates for your antenna location (can issue
command to base station or rover)

Command
Format

Receiver
Response
Additional
Information

$JRTK,1,P

$>

If you have known coordinates for your antenna location, use the
JRTK,1,LAT,LON,HEIGHT command to enter the latitude and longitude (in
decimal degrees) and the ellipsoidal height (in meters).

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 284

Commands and Messages

JRTK,5 Command
Command
Type

Local Differential and RTK

Description

Show the base station’s transmission status for RTK applications (can issue
command to base station)

Command
Format

Receiver
Response

$JRTK,5

If transmission status is suspended, response is as follows:

$>JRTK,6
If transmission status is not suspended, response is as follows:

$>JRTK,5,1

Additional
Information

Also see the JRTK,6 command.

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 285

Commands and Messages

JRTK,5,Transmit Command
Command
Type

Local Differential and RTK

Description

Suspend or resume the transmission of RTK (can issue command to base
station)

Command
Format

Receiver
Response

$JRTK,5,transmit
where "transmit" is 0 (suspend) or 1 (resume)

If the transmission status is not suspended and you issue the following
command to suspend:

$JRTK,5,0
the response is as follows:

$>JRTK,5,OK

Similarly, if the transmission status is suspended and you issue the following
command to resume:

$JRTK,5,1
the response is again as follows:

$>JRTK,5,OK

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 286

Commands and Messages

JRTK,6 Command
Command
Type

Local Differential and RTK

Description

Display the progress of the base station (can issue command to base station)

Command
Format

$JRTK,6

$JRTK,6,TimeToGo,ReadyTransmit,Transmitting
Receiver
Response

Example

where
Response
Component

Description

TimeToGo

Seconds left until ready to transmit RTK

ReadyTransmit

Non zero when configured to transmit and ready to transmit RTK on at least one port. It is a bit mask
of the transmitting port, with bit 0 being port A, bit 1 being port B, and bit 2 being port C. It will be
equal to "Transmitting" unless transmission has be suspended with $JRTK,5,0.

Transmitting

Non-zero when actually transmitting RTK on at least one port. It is a bit mask of the transmitting port,
with bit 0 being port A, bit 1 being port B, and bit 2 being port C.

If the receiver is not ready to transmit:

$>JRTK,6,263,0,0
If the receiver is currently transmitting on Port B:

$>JRTK,6,0,2,2

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 287

Commands and Messages

JRTK,12 Command
Warning! Hemisphere GPS recommends that only advanced users employ this command.

Command
Type

Local Differential and RTK

Description

Disable or enable the receiver to go into fixed integer mode (RTK) vs. float
mode (L-Dif) - can issue command to rover
Note: Requires RTK rover subscription

Command
Format

$JRTK,12,x
where 'x' is:

•
•
Receiver
Response
Additional
Information

1 = Allow RTK (recommended, and the default)
0 = Do not allow RTK, stay in L-Dif

$>

In high multipath conditions it may be desirable to prevent the rover from
obtaining a fixed position. Using $JRTK,12,0 while logging position data is
useful for determining the level of multipath present.

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 288

Commands and Messages

JRTK,17 Command
Command
Type

Local Differential and RTK

Description

Display the transmitted latitude, longitude, and height of the base station (can
issue command to base station or rover)

Command
Format

$JRTK,17

$>JRTK,17,lat,lon,height
Receiver
Response

Example

$>JRTK,17,33.55709242,-111.88916894,380.534

Additional
Information

Format is similar to JRTK,1,LAT,LON,HEIGHT

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 289

Commands and Messages

JRTK,18 Command
Command
Type

Local Differential and RTK

Description

Display the distance from the rover to the base station, in meters (can issue
command to rover)

Command
Format

$JRTK,18

$>JRTK,18,d
Receiver
Response

Example

•

'd' is the baseline distance in meters

•

'm' indicates the units are meters

$>JRTK,18,13154.520

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.03 / January 11, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 290

Commands and Messages

JRTK,18,BEARING Command
Command
Type

Local Differential and RTK

Description

Display the bearing from the base station to the rover, in degrees (can issue
command to rover)

Command
Format

$JRTK,18,BEARING

$>JRTK,18,b
Receiver
Response

Example

•

'b' is the bearing from base to rover in degrees

•

'd' indicates the units are degrees

$>JRTK,18,20.014

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.03 / January 11, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 291

Commands and Messages

JRTK,18,NEU Command

Command
Type

Local Differential and RTK

Description

Display the distance from the rover to the base station and the delta North,
East, and Up, in meters (can issue command to rover)

Command
Format

$JRTK,18,NEU

$>JRTK,18,d,X,Y,Z
Receiver
Response

where

•

'd' is the baseline distance in meters

•

'm' indicates the units are meters

•

'X' is the North delta, in meters

•

'Y' is the East delta, in meters

•

'Z' is the Up delta, in meters

Example $>JRTK,18,13154.509,12360.045,4502.139,33.739

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.03 / January 11, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 292

Commands and Messages

JRTK,28 Command
Command
Type

Local Differential and RTK

Description

Set the base station ID transmitted in ROX/DFX/CMR/RTCM3 messages
(can issue command to base station), where:

Command
Format

•

Default is 333

•

Range is 0-4095 (except for CMR which is 0-31)

Set the base station ID

$JRTK,28,baseid
where 'baseid' is the base station ID
Query the current setting

$JRTK,28

Receiver
Response

Example

$>

To set the base station ID to 123 issue the following command:

$JRTK,28,123

If the base station ID is 333 and you issue the
query the response is:

$JRTK,28

$>JRTK,28,333

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 293

Commands and Messages

JSAVE Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Send this command after making changes to the operating mode of the
receiver

Command
Format

$JSAVE

$> SAVING CONFIGURATION. PLEASE WAIT...
Receiver
Response

then

$> Save Complete

Additional
Information

Ensure that the receiver indicates that the save process is complete before
turning the receiver off or changing the configuration further.
No data fields are required. The receiver indicates that the configuration is
being saved and indicates when the save is complete.

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 294

Commands and Messages

JSHOW
JSHOW Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Query the current operating configuration of the receiver

Command
Format

Receiver
Response

$JSHOW

Use the JSHOW command to provide a complete response from the receiver.
Example (number in parentheses corresponds to line number in table following the response):

$>JSHOW,BAUD,9600 (1)
$>JSHOW,BAUD,9600,OTHER (2)
$>JSHOW,BAUD,9600,PORTC (3)
$>JSHOW,ASC,GPGGA,1.0,OTHER (4)
$>JSHOW,ASC,GPVTG,1.0,OTHER (5)
$>JSHOW,ASC,GPGSV,1.0,OTHER (6)
$>JSHOW,ASC,GPGST,1.0,OTHER (7)
$>JSHOW,ASC,D1,1,OTHER (8)
$>JSHOW,DIFF,WAAS (9)
$>JSHOW,ALT,NEVER (10)
$>JSHOW,LIMIT,10.0 (11)
$>JSHOW,MASK,5 (12)
$>JSHOW,POS,51.0,-114.0 (13)
$>JSHOW,AIR,AUTO,OFF (14)
$>JSHOW,FREQ,1575.4200,250 (15)
$>JSHOW,AGE,1800 (16)
Description of responses:
Line

Description

1

Current port is set to a baud rate of 9600

2

Other port is set to a baud rate of 9600

3

Port C is set to a baud rate of 9600 (Port C is not usually connected externally on the
finished product)

4

GPGGA is output at a rate of 1 Hz from the other port

5

GPVTG is output at a rate of 1 Hz from the other port

6

GPGSV is output at a rate of 1 Hz from the other port

7

GPGST is output at a rate of 1 Hz from the other port

8

D1 is output at a rate of 1 Hz from the other port

9

Current differential mode is WAAS

10

Status of the altitude aiding feature (see the JALT command for information how to set turn
altitude aiding on or off)

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 295

Commands and Messages

Example

11

Receiver does not support this feature

12

Elevation mask cutoff angle (in degrees)

13

Current send position used for startup, in decimal degrees

14

Current status of the AIR mode (see the JAIR command for information how to set the AIR
mode)

15

Current frequency of the augmentation source in use for the receiver (depending on the
configuration of the receiver), followed by the bit rate from the SBAS satellite, and
optionally followed by 'AUTO' (only when theAtlas receiver is in ‘auto-tune’ mode)

16

Current maximum acceptable differential age, in seconds (see the JAGE command for
information how to set the differential age)

See "Receiver Response" section above

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 296

Commands and Messages

JSHOW,ASC Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Query receiver for current ASCII messages being output

Command
Format

$JSHOW,ASC[,x]
where x is one of the following:

•

PORTA

•

PORTB

•

PORTC

•

PORTD

•

OTHER - displays

Whatever port you are connected to you do not need to specify that port. For example, if you connected to Port A, the
following two commands result in the same response:

$JSHOW,ASC
$JSHOW,ASC,PORTA

Receiver
Response

See Example section below

Example

The first row below shows the response to each individual command for Port A (with and without specifying Port A), Port
B, and Port C.
The second row shows the response to the generic $JSHOW command with items similar to the first row responses
highlighted.
Command Sent to
Receiver

Response

$JSHOW,ASC

$>JSHOW,ASC,RTCM,1

$JSHOW,ASC,PORTA

$>JSHOW,ASC,RTCM,1

$JSHOW,ASC,PORTB

$>JSHOW,ASC,CMR,1,OTHER

$JSHOW,ASC,PORTC

$>JSHOW,ASC,D1,1,PORTC

$JSHOW

$>JSHOW,BAUD,19200
$>JSHOW,ASC,GPGNS,1.00
$>JSHOW,ASC,GPGRS,1.00
$>JSHOW,BIN,1,1.00

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 297

Commands and Messages
$>JSHOW,BIN,2,1.00
$>JSHOW,BIN,89,1
$>JSHOW,BIN,99,1
$>JSHOW,ASC,RTCM,1.0
$>JSHOW,BAUD,19200,OTHER
$>JSHOW,ASC,CMR,1,OTHER
$>JSHOW,BAUD,57600,PORTC
$>JSHOW,ASC,GPGGA,1.00,PORTC
$>JSHOW,ASC,GPGSV,1.00,PORTC
$>JSHOW,ASC,GLGSV,1.00,PORTC
$>JSHOW,BIN,69,1,PORTC
$>JSHOW,BIN,100,1,PORTC
$>JSHOW,ASC,D1,1,PORTC
$>JSHOW,DIFF,RTK
$>JSHOW,ALT,NEVER
$>JSHOW,LIMIT,10.0
$>JSHOW,MASK,5
$>JSHOW,POS,33.6,-112.2
$>JSHOW,AIR,AUTO,NORM
$>JSHOW,SMOOTH,LONG900
$>JSHOW,FREQ,1575.4200,250
$>JSHOW,AGE,2700
$>JSHOW,THISPORT,PORTA
$>JSHOW,MODES,FOREST,BASE,GPSONLY,GLOFIX,SURETRACK

Additional
Information

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 298

Commands and Messages

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 299

Commands and Messages

JSHOW,BIN Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Query receiver for current Bin messages being output

Command
Format

$JSHOW,BIN

$>JSHOW,BIN,B1,B1R,B2,B2R...,Bn,BnR
Receiver
Response

where:

•

B1 is the first Bin message being output
B1R is the rate of B1

•

B2 is the second Bin message being output
B2R is the rate of B2
.

.
.
.

•

Bn is the last Bin message being output
BnR is the rate of Bn

Example $>JSHOW,BIN,B01,1.00,B02,1.00,B69,1,B80,1,B89,1,B99,1

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 300

Commands and Messages

JSHOW,CONF Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Query receiver for configuration settings

Command
Format

$JSHOW,CONF

$>JSHOW,CONF,AID,AIDVAL,RES,ELEV,MODE,AGE,DIFF
Receiver
Response

where:
Message
Component

Description

As Displayed in Example Below
This Table

AID

Altitude aiding indicator as set by JALT command:

A

AIDVAL

•

A = ALWAYS

•

N = NEVER

•

S = SOMETIMES

•

T = SATS

Altitude aiding value as by JALT command:

•

If AID = N, then AIDVAL = 0.0

•

If AID = A, then AIDVAL = height

•

If AID = S, then AIDVAL = PDOP threshold

•

If AID = T, then AIDVAL = number of sats

404.2

RES

Residual limit for the $JLIMIT command

10.0

ELEV

Elevation mask cutoff angle (in degrees) as set by JMASK
command

5

MODETYPE

AIR mode type, A (AUTO) or M (MANUAL), as set by JAIR
command

M

MODE

AIR mode, LOW or HIGH or NORM, as set by JAIR
command

LOW

AGE

Maximum acceptable differential age (in seconds)

8100 (259200 is using e-Dif)

DIFF

Current differential mode as set by JDIFF command:

A

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

•

T = THIS PORT

•

P = PORTC

•

O (letter) = OTHER PORT

Page 301

Commands and Messages

B = BEACON
W = WAAS
R = RTK
L = LBAND
A = X (e-Dif, where A = AUTO)
N = NONE
Example $>JSHOW,CONF,A,404.2,10.0,5,M,LOW,259200,A

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 302

Commands and Messages

JSHOW,GP Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Query the receiver for each GP message currently being output through the
current port and the update rate for that message
To see output for other ports you must specify that port or OTHER

Command
Format

$JSHOW,GP[,PORTX][,OTHER]
where:

•

',PORTX' = a port other than the current port, such as Port
B or Port C

•

',OTHER' = Port B if the current port is Port A, or Port A if
the current port is Port B

$>JSHOW,M1,M1R,M2,M2R...,Mn,MnR
Receiver
Response

where:

•

M1 is the first message being output
M1R is the rate of M1

•

M1 is the first message being output
M1R is the rate of M1

.

.
.

•

Example

Mn is the last message being output
MnR is the rate of Bn

$>JSHOW,GP,GGA,1.00,GST,1.00

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 303

Commands and Messages

JSHOW,THISPORT Command

Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Query to determine which receiver port you are connected to

Command
Format

$JSHOW,THISPORT

$>JSHOW,THISPORT,port
Receiver
Response

Example

where 'port' is the port you are connected to

Response if you are connected to Port B:

$>JSHOW,THISPORT,PORTB

Additional
Information

See JSHOW for information on displaying more configuration information for
a receiver

Topic Last Updated: v1.03 / January 11, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 304

Commands and Messages

JSIGNAL Command

Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Set the GNSS signals that the receiver will attempt to track. Specific signals shown here are only valid for receivers
supporting the signal in question.

Command
Format

Specify the signal(s) to be used

$JSIGNAL,INCLUDE[,L1CA][,L1P][,L2P][,L2C][,G1][,G2][,E1BC][,B1][,B2][,B3]
[,E5B][,QZSL1CA][,QZSL2C][,ALL]
Specify the signal(s) NOT to be used

$JSIGNAL,EXCLUDE[,L1CA][,L1P][,L2P][,L2C][,G1][,G2][,E1BC][,B1][,B2][,B3]
[,E5B][,QZSL1CA][,QZSL2C][,ALL]
Query the current setting

$JSIGNAL,INCLUDE
Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to turn functionality on/off

$>

Response to querying the current setting

$>JSIGNAL,INCLUDE[,L1CA][,L1P][,L2P][,L2C][,G1][,G2][,E1BC][,B1][,B2][,B3]
[,E5B][,QZSL1CA][,QZSL2C]

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.10 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 305

Commands and Messages

JSMOOTH Command
Command
Type

GPS

Description

Set the carrier smoothing interval (15 to 6000 seconds) or query the current
setting
This command provides the flexibility to tune in different environments. The
default for this command is 900 seconds (15 minutes) or LONG. A slight
improvement in positioning performance (depending on the multipath
environment) may occur if you use either the SHORT (300 seconds) or
LONG (900 seconds) smoothing interval.

Command
Format

Set the carrier smoothing interval
To set the carrier smoothing interval to a specific number of seconds issue
the following command:

$JSMOOTH,x
where 'x' is one of the following:

•

Number of seconds

•

DEFAULT (equals 900 seconds)
Default for e-Dif is 300 seconds

•

SHORT (equals 300 seconds)

•

LONG (equals 900 seconds)

Query the current setting

$JSMOOTH

Receiver
Response

Receiver response when setting the carrier smoothing interval

$>
Receiver response when querying the current carrier smoothinginterval

$>JSMOOTH,x
where 'x' is the word 'SHORT' or 'LONG' followed by the number of seconds
used:

Example

•

SHORT precedes the number of seconds for any setting
less than 900 seconds

•

LONG precedes the number of seconds for any setting
greater than or equal to 900 seconds

To set the carrier smoothing interval to 750 seconds issue the following
command:

$JSMOOTH,750

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 306

Commands and Messages

...and if you then query the receiver using $JSMOOTH the response is:

$JSMOOTH,SHORT750
To set the carrier smoothing interval to 300 seconds (5 minutes) issue the
following command:

$JSMOOTH,SHORT
To set the carrier smoothing interval to 900 seconds (15 minutes) issue the
following command:

$JSMOOTH,LONG

Additional
Information

If you are unsure of the best value for this setting, leave it at the default
setting of LONG (900 seconds).
The status of this command is also output in the JSHOW message.

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 307

Commands and Messages

JSYSVER Command
Note: This command is only for querying a receiver for its boot loader version. Before attempting to actually
update boot loader software consult Hemisphere GNSS Technical Support.

Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Returns the boot loader version from the GPS card

Command
Format

$JSYSVER

$>SYSVER,v
Receiver
Response

Example

where 'v' is the boot loader version

Response when the boot loader version is 75

$>SYSVER,75

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.05 / January 18, 2013

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 308

Commands and Messages

JT Command
Command
Type

General Operation and Configuration

Description

Query the receiver for its GPS engine type

Command
Format

$JT

$>JT,xxxx
Receiver
Response

Example

where xxxx indicates the GPS engine and mode:
JT Command Response
(xxxx)

GPS Engine

Mode

DF2b

Eclipse

WAAS, RTK Base

DF2g

Eclipse

L-band

DF2r

Eclipse

RTK Rover

DF3g

Eclipse II

WAAS, RTK Base

DF3i

Eclipse II

e-Dif

DF3r

Eclipse II

RTK Rover

MF3g

miniEclipse

WAAS, RTK Base

MF3i

miniEclipse

e-Dif

MF3r

miniEclipse

RTK Rover

SX2a

Crescent Vector

WAAS RTK

SX2b

Crescent

Base

SX2g

Crescent

WAAS

SX2i

Crescent

e-Dif

SX2r

Crescent

Rover

When you issue the $JTcommand a typical response may be:
$>JT,DF2b,MX31rev=28
DF2b indicates an Eclipse receiver with WAAS and RTK Base functionality.
Note: MX31rev=28 is the processor type and only appears as part of the Eclipse receiver
response. You can disregard the processor type as the text that precedes it (DF2b in this
example) provides the requested information (GPS engine and mode).

Additional
Information

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 309

Commands and Messages

Topic Last Updated: v1.03 / January 11, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 310

Commands and Messages

JTAU
JTAU Command Overview
The JTAU command is used to set the time constants for specific parameters for Crescent, Crescent Vector, and Eclipse
products.
Command

Description

JTAU,COG

Set the course over ground time (COG) constant and query the current setting

JTAU,SPEED

Set the speed time constant and query the current setting

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 311

Commands and Messages

JTAU,COG Command
Note: The JATT,COGTAU command provides identical functionality but works only with Crescent Vector
products.
Command
Type

GPS

Description

Set the course over ground (COG) time constant (0.00 to 3600.00 seconds)
or query the current setting
This command allows you to adjust the level of responsiveness of the COG
measurement provided in the GPVTG message. The default value is 0.00
seconds of smoothing. Increasing the COG time constant increases the level
of COG smoothing.
Set the COG timeconstant

Command
Format

$JTAU,COG,tau
where 'tau' is the new COG time constant that falls within the range of 0.00 to
200.1 seconds
The setting of this value depends upon the expected dynamics of the
Crescent. If the Crescent will be in a highly dynamic environment, this value
should be set lower because the filtering window would be shorter, resulting
in a more responsive measurement. However, if the receiver will be in a
largely static environment, this value can be increased to reduce
measurement noise.
Query the current setting

$JTAU,COG

Receiver
Response

Receiver response when setting the COG time constant

$>
Receiver response when querying the current COG time constant

$>JTAU,COG,tau

Example

To set the COG time constant as 2 seconds issue the following command:

$JTAU,COG,2

Additional You can use the following formula to determine the COG time constant: tau
Information (in seconds) = 10 / maximum rate of change of course (in °/s)
If you are unsure about the best value for this setting, it is best to be
conservative and leave it at the default setting of 0.00 seconds.

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 312

Commands and Messages
Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 313

Commands and Messages

JTAU,SPEED Command
Note: The JATT,SPDTAU command provides identical functionality but works only with Crescent Vector products.

Command
Type

GPS

Description

Set the speed time constant (0.00 to 3600.00 seconds) or query the current
setting
This command allows you to adjust the level of responsiveness of the speed
measurement provided in the GPVTG message. The default value is 0.00
seconds of smoothing. Increasing the speed time constant increases the
level of speed measurement smoothing.

Command
Format

Set the speed time constant

$JTAU,SPEED,tau
where 'tau' is the new speed time constant that falls within the range of 0.0 to
200.2 seconds
The setting of this value depends upon the expected dynamics of the
receiver. If the receiver will be in a highly dynamic environment, you should
set this to a lower value, since the filtering window will be shorter, resulting in
a more responsive measurement. However, if the receiver will be in a largely
static environment, you can increase this value to reduce measurement
noise.
Query the current setting

$JTAU,SPEED

Receiver
Response

Receiver response when setting the speed time constant

$>
Receiver response when querying the current speed time constants

$>JTAU,SPEED,tau

Example

To set the speed time constant as 4.6 seconds issue the following command:

$JTAU,SPEED,4.6

Additional
Information

You can use the following formula to determine the COG time constant
(Hemisphere GNSS recommends testing how the revised value works in
practice):
tau (in seconds) = 10 / maximum acceleration (in m/s 2)
If you are unsure about the best value for this setting, it is best to be
conservative and leave it at the default setting of 0.00 seconds.

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 314

Commands and Messages
Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 315

Commands and Messages

JWAASPRN Command
Command
Type

SBAS

Description

Change the SBAS PRNs in memory or query the receiver for current PRNs in
memory
Valid PRNs include:

•

EGNOS (Europe SBAS): 120, 124, 126

•

GAGAN (India SBAS): 127

•

SDCM (Russia SBAS): 125, 141, 140

•

MSAS (Japan SBAS): 129, 137

•

WAAS (North America SBAS): 133, 135, 138

Change the SBAS PRNs in memory

Command
Format

$JWAASPRN,prn1,prn2,prn3
where 'prn1' and 'prn2' specify PRNs for Crescent receivers and 'prn3'
specifies the additional PRN for Eclipse receivers
Query the current setting

$JWAASPRN

Receiver
Response

Response to issuing command to change PRNs

$>

Response to querying the current setting

$>JWAASPRN,PRN1,PRN2[,PRN3]

Example

To change the SBAS PRNs in memory for an Eclipse receiver to WAAS
PRNs (133, 135, 138) issue the following command:

$>JWAASPRN,133,135,138

Additional
Information

You can specify an auto-tune mode to tune to the appropriate SBAS PRNs
based on the autonomous GPS position. To auto-tune the PRNs issue the
following command:

$JWAASPRN,AUTO
If you then query the receiver for the PRNs the receiver response will show
',AUTO' at the end. For example, if you query the receiver and the PRNs are
133,135, and 138 and autotuning is enabled the response is as follows:

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 316

Commands and Messages

$>JWAASPRN,133,135,138,AUTO

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 317

Commands and Messages

PCSI
PCSI,0 Command (Receiver Help Query command)
Command
Type

Beacon Receiver

Description

Hemisphere GNSS proprietary NMEA 0183 query
Query the SBX to output a list of available proprietary PCSI commands

Command
Format

$PCSI,0

$PCSI,ACK,0
Receiver
Response

$PCSI,P003-0K,012
$PCSI,0 ->HELP Msg
$PCSI,1 ->Status line A,,
$PCSI,2 ->Status line B,
$PCSI,3 ->Dump Search,
$PCSI,4 ->Wipe Search
$PCSI,5 ->Port Rate,,
$PCSI,6 ->Reset
$PCSI,7 ->RTCM Mode

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 318

Commands and Messages

PCSI,1 Command (Status Line A, Channel 0 command)
Command
Type

Beacon Receiver

Description

Hemisphere GNSS proprietary NMEA 0183 query
Query the SBX for a selection of parameters related to the operational status of its primary channel

Command
Format

$PCSI,1

$PCSI,ACK,1
Receiver
Response

$PCSI,CS0,PXXX-Y.YYY,SN,fff.f,M,ddd,R,SS,SNR,MTP,WER,ID,H,T,G
where:

Additional
Information

Response
Component

Description

CS0

Channel 0

PXXX-Y.YYY

Resident SBX firmware version

SN

SBX receiver serial number

fff.f

Channel 0 current frequency

M

Frequency mode (A = automatic, M = manual, D = database)

ddd

MSK bit rate

R

RTCM rate mode (A = automatic, M = manual, D = database)

SS

Signal strength

SNR

Signal-to-noise ratio

MTP

Message throughput

WER

Word Error Rate - Percentage of bad 30-bit RTCM words in the last 25 words

ID

Beacon ID to which the receiver’s primary channel is tuned

H

Health of the tuned beacon [0-7]

T

$PCSI,1 status output period [0-99]

G

AGC gain in dB (0 to 48 db)

Optionally you can modify the Status Line A query to request the output of the response message once
every period at a specified output rate. It has the following format, where 'T' is the output period in
seconds:

$PCSI,1,T
The response will be:

$PCSI,ACK,1

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 319

Commands and Messages

$PCSI,CS0,PXXXY.YYY,SN,fff.f,M,ddd,R,SS,SNR,MTP,WER,ID,H,T,G
You can stop the output of the message by either of the following:

•

Cycling receiver power

•

Issuing the $PCSI,1 query without the output period field

The response message has the same format as discussed above. In addition to this modified version of
the Status Line A command, an additional 'S' field may be placed after the 'T' field, resulting in the
following command:

$PCSI,1,T,S
The 'S' field is not a variable and specifies that the output of the Status Line A message should continue
after the power has been cycled. To return the receiver to the default mode (in which message output
ceases after receiver power is cycled) send the $PCSI,1 query to the receiver.
You may send the $PCSI,1 query through either serial port for reporting of the full status of the primary
receiver channel. The query response is returned to the port from which you issued the command. When
querying the primary receiver channel using the secondary serial port, no interruptions in RTCM data
output will occur on the primary port provided the SBX has acquired a valid beacon.
The response is different depending on whether you are connected directly to the SBX-4 or not.

•

If connected directly (by hardware or JCONN), the response will be bothan
acknowledgement as well as the full PCSI,1 message.

•

If connected through a Crescent receiver (such as the R110) you may see the full
PCSI,1 message. Consider PCSI,1,1 to generate periodic output.

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 320

Commands and Messages

PCSI,1,1 Command (Beacon Status command)
Command
Type

Beacon Receiver

Description Obtain PCSI,CS0 beacon status data from an SBX engine when interfaced to the receiver Port D. When
you send this command through either Port A, B, or C it is automatically routed to Port D. The resulting
PCSI,CS0 message is returned to the same port from which the command was sent at the desired rate.

Command
Format

$PCSI,1,1

$PCSI,CS0,Pxxx-y.yyy,SN,fff.f,M,ddd,R,SS,SNR,MTP,WER,ID,H,T,G
Receiver
Response

where:
Response
Component

Description

CS0

Channel 0

PXXX-Y.YYY

Resident SBX firmware version

SN

SBX receiver serial number

fff.f

Channel 0 current frequency

M

Frequency mode (A = automatic, M = manual, D = database)

ddd

MSK bit rate

R

RTCM rate mode (A = automatic, M = manual, D = database)

SS

Signal strength

SNR

Signal-to-noise ratio

MTP

Message throughput

WER

Word Error Rate - Percentage of bad 30-bit RTCM words in the last 25 words

ID

Beacon ID to which the receiver’s primary channel is tuned

H

Health of the tuned beacon (0-7)

T

$PCSI,1 status output period (0-99)

G

AGC gain in, dB (0 to 48)

Example $PCSI,CS0,P030-0.000,19001,313.0,D,100,D,18,8,80,0,63,0,1,48

Additional
Information

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 321

Commands and Messages

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 322

Commands and Messages

PCSI,2 Command (Status Line B, Channel 1 command)
Command
Type

Beacon Receiver

Description

Hemisphere GNSS proprietary NMEA 0183 query
Query the SBX to output a selection of parameters related to the operational status of its secondary
channel

Command
Format

$PCSI,2

$PCSI,ACK,2
Receiver
Response

$PCSI,CS1,PXXX-Y.YYY,SN,fff.f,M,ddd,R,SS,SNR,MTP,WER,ID,H,T
where:

Example

Response
Component

Description

CS1

Channel 1

PXXX-Y.YYY

Resident SBX firmware version

SN

SBX receiver serial number

fff.f

Channel 1 current frequency

M

Frequency mode (A = automatic, M = manual, D = database)

ddd

MSK bit rate

R

RTCM rate mode (A = automatic, M = manual, D = database)

SS

Signal strength

SNR

Signal to noise ratio

MTP

Message throughput

WER

Word error rate - Percentage of bad 30-bit RTCM words in the last 25 words

ID

Beacon ID to which the receiver’s secondary channel is tuned

H

Health of the tuned beacon (0-7)

T

$PCSI,1 status output period (0-99)

$PCSI,ACK,2
$PCSI,CS1,P030-0.004,770737,291.0,D,200,D,-7,2,0,100,1024,8,0

Additional
Information

Optionally you can modify the Status Line B query to request the output of the response message once
every period. It has the following format, where T is the output period inseconds:

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 323

Commands and Messages

$PCSI,2,T
The response will:

$PCSI,ACK,2
$PCSI,CS0,PXXX-Y.YYY,SN,fff.f,M,ddd,R,SS,SNR,MTP,WER,ID,H,T
The response message has the same format as discussed above. The Status Line B message output
cannot be set to remain active after the power of the SBX has been cycled.
The $PCSI,2 query may be sent through the either serial port for reporting of the full status of the
secondary receiver channel. The response to the query is returned to the port from which the command
was issued. When querying the secondary receiver channel using the secondary serial port, no
interruptions in RTCM data output will occur on the primary port provided that SBX has acquired avalid
beacon.

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 324

Commands and Messages

PCSI,3,1 Command (Receiver Search Dump command)

Command
Type

Beacon Receiver

Description

Hemisphere GNSS proprietary NMEA 0183 query
Query the SBX to output the search information used for beacon selection in Automatic Beacon Search mode.
The output has three frequencies per line.

Command
Format

$PCSI,3,1

$PCSI,ACK,3,1
Receiver
Response

$PCSI,tag1,freq1,ID1,chan1,snr1,ss1,tag2,freq2,ID2,chan2,snr2,ss2,
tag3,freq3,ID3,chan3,snr3,ss3
where:

Example

Response
Component

Description

tag

Channel number with a range of 1 to 84

freq

Channel frequency (kHz * 10)

ID

Beacon ID

chan

Channel information

snr

SNR (dB)

ss

Signal Strength (dBuV/m)

$PCSI,ACK,3,1
$PCSI,01,2835,209,0E,00,-0009,02,2840,339,0E,00,0012,03,2845,006,0E,00,0009
$PCSI,04,2850,342,0E,00,-0010,05,2855,547,0E,00,-0005,06,2860,109,0E,00,- 0011
$PCSI,07,2865,188,0E,00,-0007,08,2870,272,0E,00,-0004,09,2875,682,0E,00,- 0006
$PCSI,10,2880,645,0E,00,-0007,11,2885,256,0E,00,-0009,12,2890,000,06,00,- 0012
$PCSI,13,2895,132,0E,00,-0009,14,2900,281,0E,00,-0010,15,2905,634,0E,00,- 0008
$PCSI,16,2910,172,0E,00,-0007,17,2915,006,0E,00,-0009,18,2920,546,0E,00,- 0014
$PCSI,19,2925,358,0E,00,-0008,20,2930,479,0E,00,-0009,21,2935,358,0E,00,-

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 325

Commands and Messages
0011
$PCSI,22,2940,853,0E,00,-0005,23,2945,588,0E,00,-0015,24,2950,210,0E,00,- 0011
$PCSI,25,2955,000,06,00,-0011,26,2960,663,0E,00,-0010,27,2965,596,0E,00,- 0009
$PCSI,28,2970,000,06,00,-0009,29,2975,917,0E,00,-0009,30,2980,000,06,00,- 0016
$PCSI,31,2985,343,0E,00,-0013,32,2990,546,0E,00,-0010,33,2995,546,0E,00,- 0010
$PCSI,34,3000,172,0E,00,-0014,35,3005,006,0E,00,0011,36,3010,1006,0E,00,-0009
$PCSI,37,3015,006,0E,00,-0015,38,3020,300,0E,00,-0013,39,3025,277,0E,00,- 0100
$PCSI,40,3030,479,0E,00,-0010,41,3035,006,0E,00,-0012,42,3040,050,0E,00,- 0008
$PCSI,43,3045,000,06,00,-0014,44,3050,172,0E,00,-0013,45,3055,000,06,00,- 0011
$PCSI,46,3060,000,06,00,-0011,47,3065,000,06,00,-0014,48,3070,000,06,00,- 0010
$PCSI,49,3075,000,06,00,-0012,50,3080,006,0E,00,-0015,51,3085,000,06,00,- 0015
$PCSI,52,3090,300,0E,00,-0007,53,3095,000,06,00,-0013,54,3100,000,06,00,- 0013
$PCSI,55,3105,000,06,00,-0012,56,3110,127,0E,00,-0013,57,3115,000,06,00,- 0012
$PCSI,58,3120,596,0E,00,-0012,59,3125,051,0E,00,-0009,60,3130,000,06,00,- 0011
$PCSI,61,3135,213,0E,00,-0008,62,3140,000,06,00,-0011,63,3145,000,06,00,- 0015
$PCSI,64,3150,302,0E,00,-0008,65,3155,000,06,00,-0009,66,3160,000,06,00,- 0003
$PCSI,67,3165,000,06,00,-0013,68,3170,000,06,00,0011,69,3175,612,0E,01,0000
$PCSI,70,3180,000,06,00,-0015,71,3185,000,06,00,-0008,72,3190,000,06,00,- 0009
$PCSI,73,3195,000,06,00,0011,74,3200,1002,0E,01,-0002,75,3205,067,0E,00,- 0008
$PCSI,76,3210,001,0E,00,-0008,77,3215,000,06,00,-0009,78,3220,132,0E,00,- 0009
$PCSI,79,3225,000,06,00,-0010,80,3230,339,0E,00,-0013,81,3235,000,06,00,- 0011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 326

Commands and Messages

$PCSI,82,3240,000,06,00,-0010,83,3245,202,0E,00,-0007,84,3250,006,0E,00,- 0002

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 327

Commands and Messages

PCSI,3,2 Command (Ten Closest Stations command)
Command
Type

Beacon Receiver

Description

Display the ten closest beacon stations

$PCSI,3,2

Command
Format

$PCSI,ACK,3,2
Receiver
Response

$PCSI,3,2,StationID,name,freq,status,time,date,distance,health,WER
$PCSI,3,2, ...
$PCSI,3,2, ...
$PCSI,3,2, ...
$PCSI,3,2, ...
...
where:

Example

Response
Component

Description

StationID

Specific ID number for beacon stations (appears in the last field of the
GPGGA message)

name

Name of station

freq

Frequency, in kHz (scaled by 10), on which the station is transmitting. In the
first line of the Example below, 2870 indicates 287.0 kHz.

status

0 (operational), 1 (undefined), 2 (no information), 3 (do not use)

time

Not implemented. Currently displayed at 0

date

Not implemented. Currently displayed at 0

distance

Calculated in nautical miles

health

-1 (not updated), 8 (undefined), 0-7 (valid range)

WER

-1 (not updated), 0-100 (valid range)

$PCSI,ACK,3,3
$PCSI,3,2, 849,Polson

MT,2870,0,210,0,0,-1,-1

$PCSI,3,2, 848,Spokane

WA,3160,0,250,0,0,-1,-1

$PCSI,3,2, 907,Richmond

BC,3200,0,356,0,0,-1,-1

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 328

Commands and Messages

$PCSI,3,2, 888,Whidbey Is.

WA,3020,0,363,0,0,-1,-1

$PCSI,3,2, 887,Robinson Pt.

WA,3230,0,383,0,0,-1,-1

$PCSI,3,2, 874,Billings

MT,3130,0,389,0,0,-1,-1

$PCSI,3,2, 871,Appleton

WA,3000,0,420,0,0,-1,-1

$PCSI,3,2, 908,Amphitrite Pt BC,3150,0,448,0,0,-1,-1
$PCSI,3,2, 886,Fort Stevens

OR,2870,0,473,0,0,-1,-1

$PCSI,3,2, 909,Alert Bay

BC,3090,0,480,0,0,-1,-1

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 329

Commands and Messages

PCSI,3,3 Command (Station Database command)
Command
Type

Beacon Receiver

Description

Display the contents of the beacon station database

$PCSI,3,3

Command
Format

$PCSI,ACK,3,3
Receiver
Response

$PCSI,3,3,IDref1,IDref2,StationID,name,freq,lat,long,datum,status
$PCSI,3,3, ...
$PCSI,3,3, ...
$PCSI,3,3, ...
$PCSI,3,3, ...
...
where:

Example

Response
Component

Description

IDref1

Beacon reference ID (primary)

IDref2

Beacon reference ID (secondary)

StationID

Specific ID number for beacon stations (appears in the last field of the GPGGA message)

name

Name of station

freq

Frequency, in kHz (scaled by 10), on which the station is transmitting. In the first line of the
Example below, 2950 indicates 295.0 kHz.

lat

Scaled by 364 (+ve indicates N and -ve indicates S)

long

Longitude is scaled by 182 (+ve indicates N and -ve indicates S)

datum

1 (NAD83), 0(WGS84)

status

0 (operational), 1(undefined), 2 (no information), 3, (do not use)

$PCSI,ACK,3,3
$PCSI,3,3,0282,0283,0891,Level Island

AK,2950,20554,-24221,1,0

$PCSI,3,3,0306,0307,0906,Sandspit

BC,3000,19377,-23991,1,0

$PCSI,3,3,0278,0279,0889,Annette Is.

AK,3230,20044,-23951,1,0

$PCSI,3,3,0300,0301,0909,Alert Bay

BC,3090,18412,-23099,1,0

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 330

Commands and Messages

$PCSI,3,3,0302,0303,0908,Amphitrite Pt BC,3150,17806,-22850,1,0
$PCSI,3,3,0270,0271,0885,C. Mendocino

CA,2920,14718,-22641,1,0

$PCSI,3,3,0272,0273,0886,Fort Stevens

OR,2870,16817,-22559,1,0

$PCSI,3,3,0304,0305,0907,Richmond

BC,3200,17903,-22407,1,0

$PCSI,3,3,0276,0277,0888,Whidbey Is.

WA,3020,17587,-22331,1,0

...

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 331

Commands and Messages

PCSI,4 Command (Wipe Search command)
Command
Type

Beacon Receiver

Description

Clear search history in Auto mode

Command
Format

$PCSI,4

$PCSI,ACK,4
Receiver
Response

Example

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 332

Commands and Messages

PCSI,5 Command (Set Baud Rates command)
Command
Type

Beacon Receiver

Description

Set the baud rate of Port0 and Port1
The baud rate for Port0 is saved for next powerup; however, the baud rate for
Port1 always defaults to 4800.
Note: This command applies when you connect directly to a beacon board,
as this command has no effect when a beacon board is integrated with a
GNSS receiver.

Command
Format

Receiver
Response

$PCSI,5,portrate0,portrate1
where:

•

portrate0 = desired baud rate for Port0

•

portrate1 = desired baud rate for Port1

$>

Example
Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 333

Commands and Messages

PCSI,6 Command (Reboot command)
Command
Type

Beacon Receiver

Description

Reboot SBX receiver

Command
Format

Receiver
Response

Example

$PCSI,6

See example below

When sending this command your response will appear similar to below:

$PCSI,S/N:00019001
$PCSI,FCFGcrc,B5E5,CCFGcrc,B5E5,Pass
$PCSI,FGLBcrc,19BC,CGLBcrc,19BC,Pass
$PCSI,FLSHcrc,0531 Pass
$PCSI,FSTAcrc,56C3 Base,2FB2,B077

Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 334

Commands and Messages

PCSI,7 Command (Swap Modes command)
Command
Type

Beacon Receiver

Description

Swap modes on the receiver (allowing you to output RTCM and PCSI on the
desired ports—Port0 and Port1)
Note: This command applies when you connect directly to a beacon board,
as this command has no effect when a beacon board is integrated with a
GNSS receiver.

Command
Format

$PCSI,7,mode
where mode is:

•

1 = PCSI on Port1 and RTCM on Port0

•

2 = PCSI on Port0 and RTCM on Port1

$PCSI,ACK,7,mode
Receiver
Response

For example, when sending the following command...

$PCSI,7,1
... the response is:

$PCSI,ACK,7,1

Example
Additional
Information

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 335

Commands and Messages

Binary Messages Code
Binary Messages Code
This section provides the code for the binary messages that Hemisphere GNSS uses.
// BinaryMsg.h
#ifndef

BinaryMsg_H

#define

BinaryMsg_H

#ifdef

cplusplus

extern "C" {
#endif
/*

* Copyright (c) 2006

Hemisphere GNSS and CSI Wireless Inc.,

* All Rights Reserved.
*

* Use and copying of this software and preparation of derivative works
* based upon this software are permitted. Any copy of this software or
* of any derivative work must include the above copyright notice, this
* paragraph and the one after it.

Any distribution of this software or

* derivative works must comply with all applicable laws.
*

* This software is made available AS IS, and COPYRIGHT OWNERS DISCLAIMS
* ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* PURPOSE, AND NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER PROVISION CONTAINED HEREIN, ANY
* LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE SOFTWARE OR ITS USE IS
* EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED, WHETHER ARISING IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING
* NEGLIGENCE) OR STRICT LIABILITY, EVEN IF COPYRIGHT OWNERS ARE ADVISED
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
*/
#if defined(WIN32) || (

ARMCC_VERSION >= 300441)

#pragma pack(push)
#pragma pack(4)

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 336

Commands and Messages
#endif
/****************************************************/
/*

SBinaryMsgHeader

*/

/****************************************************/
typedef struct
{
char

m_strSOH[4];

short m_byBlockID;
or 80 ) */

/* start of header ($BIN)

*/ unsigned

/* ID of message (1,2,99,98,97,96,95,94,93

unsigned short m_wDataLength;

/* 52 16,304,68,28,300,128,96,56, or 40 */

} SBinaryMsgHeader;
typedef struct
{
unsigned long
long
0x01300063 */

ulDwordPreamble;

/* 0x4E494224

ulDwordInfo;

/*

} SBinaryMsgHeaderDW;
0x012C0060 */

= $BIN

*/ unsigned

0x00340001 or 0x00100002 or

/* or 0x00440062 or 0x001C0061 or
/* or 0x0080005F or 0x0060005E or

0x0038005D */
/* or 0x00280050 */
#define BIN_MSG_PREAMBLE

0x4E494224

/* $BIN = 0x4E494224 */

#define BIN_MSG_HEAD_TYPE1

0x00340001

/* 52 = 0x34 */

#define BIN_MSG_HEAD_TYPE2

0x00100002

/* 16 = 0x10 */

#define BIN_MSG_HEAD_TYPE99 0x01300063

/* 99 = 0x63, 304 = 0x130 */

#define BIN_MSG_HEAD_TYPE102 0x01580066 /* 102 = 0x66, 344 = 0x158 */
#define BIN_MSG_HEAD_TYPE101 0x01C00065 /* 101 = 0x65, 448 = 0x1C0 */
#define BIN_MSG_HEAD_TYPE100 0x01040064 /* 100 = 0x64, 260 = 0x104*/
#define BIN_MSG_HEAD_TYPE98 0x00440062

/* 98 = 0x62, 68

= 0x44

*/

#define BIN_MSG_HEAD_TYPE97 0x001C0061

/* 97 = 0x61, 28

= 0x1C

*/

#define BIN_MSG_HEAD_TYPE96 0x012C0060

/* 96 = 0x60, 300 = 0x12C */

#define BIN_MSG_HEAD_TYPE95 0x0080005F

/* 95 = 0x5F, 128 = 0x80

*/

#define BIN_MSG_HEAD_TYPE94 0x0060005E

/* 94 = 0x5E, 96

= 0x60

*/

#define BIN_MSG_HEAD_TYPE93 0x0038005D

/* 93 = 0x5D, 56

= 0x38

*/

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 337

Commands and Messages
#define BIN_MSG_HEAD_TYPE91 0x0198005B
bytes -8 -2 -2*/

/* 91 = 0x5B, 408 = 0x198 = total size in

#define BIN_MSG_HEAD_TYPE89 0x00500059

/* 89 = 0x59, 80

= 0x50

*/

#define BIN_MSG_HEAD_TYPE80 0x00280050

/* 80 = 0x50, 40

= 0x28

*/

#define BIN_MSG_HEAD_TYPE76 0x01C0004C
bytes -8 -2 -2*/

/* 76 = 0x4C, 448 = 0x1C0 = total size in

#define BIN_MSG_HEAD_TYPE71 0x01C00047
bytes -8 -2 -2*/

/* 71 = 0x47, 448 = 0x1C0 = total size in

#define BIN_MSG_HEAD_TYPE16 0x01380010
phase observables

/* 16 = 0x10, 312 = 0x138 */ //GNSS

#define BIN_MSG_HEAD_TYPE45 0x0080002D
subframe words --- similar to GPS

/* 45 = 0x2D, 128 = 0x80

*/

//Galileo

#define BIN_MSG_HEAD_TYPE44 0x0038002C /* 44 = 0x2C, 56 = 0x38 */ //Galileo time
offsets

#define BIN_MSG_HEAD_TYPE61 0x0140003D

/* 61 = 0x3D, 320 = 0x140 */

#define BIN_MSG_HEAD_TYPE62 0x0028003E

/* 62 = 0x3E,

40 =

0x28 */

#define BIN_MSG_HEAD_TYPE65 0x00440041

/* 65 = 0x41,

68 =

0x44 */

#define BIN_MSG_HEAD_TYPE66 0x01600042

/* 66 = 0x42, 352 = 0x160 */

#define BIN_MSG_HEAD_TYPE69 0x012C0045

/* 69 = 0x45, 300 = 0x12C */

#define BIN_MSG_HEAD_TYPE59 0x0100003B

/* 59 = 0x3B, 256 = 0x100 */ //GPS L2C

#define BIN_MSG_HEAD_TYPE10 0x0194000A
in bytes -8 -2 -2*/

/* 10 = 0xA, 404 = 0x194 = total size

#if defined(_RXAIF_PLOT_MESSAGES_)
#define BIN_MSG_HEAD_TYPE11
size(112) in bytes -8 -2 -2*/

0x0064000B

/* 11 = 0x0B, 100 = 0x64 = total

#endif
#define BIN_MSG_CRLF
#define CHANNELS_12

0x0A0D

/* CR LF = 0x0D, 0x0A */

12

#define cBPM_SCAT_MEMSIZE 100
#if defined(_RXAIF_PLOT_MESSAGES_)
#define cBPM_AIFSCAT_MEMSIZE 16
#endif
typedef
union
{
SBinaryMsgHeader
sBytes
; SBinaryMsgHeaderDW
sDWord;
GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 338

}

Commands and Messages

SUnionMsgHeader;

/****************************************************/
/*

SBinaryMsg1

*/

/****************************************************/
typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

unsigned char
max)*/

m_byAgeOfDiff;

/* age of differential, seconds (255

unsigned char
*/

m_byNumOfSats;

/* number of satellites used (12 max)

unsigned short m_wGPSWeek;

/* GPS week */

double

m_dGPSTimeOfWeek;

/* GPS tow

double

m_dLatitude;

/* Latitude degrees, -90..90 */ double

m_dLongitude;

/* Latitude

m_fHeight;

/* (m), Altitude ellipsoid */ float

m_fVNorth;

/* Velocity north

float

m_fVEast;

/* Velocity eastm/s */

float

m_fVUp;

/* Velocity up

m_fStdDevResid;

/* (m), Standard Deviation of

float

float
Residuals */

*/

degrees, -180..180 */

m/s */

m/s */

unsigned short m_wNavMode;
unsigned short m_wAgeOfDiff;

/* age of diff using 16 bits

*/

unsigned short m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the datalength

unsigned short m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */

*/

} SBinaryMsg1;

/* length = 8 + 52 + 2 + 2 = 64 */

/****************************************************/
/*

SBinaryMsg2

*/

/****************************************************/
typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

unsigned long

m_ulMaskSatsTracked;

/* SATS Tracked, bit mapped 0..31 */

unsigned long

m_ulMaskSatsUsed;

/* SATS Used, bit mapped 0..31 */

unsigned short m_wGpsUtcDiff;
UTC) */

/* GPS/UTC time difference (GPS minus

unsigned short m_wHDOPTimes10;

/* HDOP

(0.1 units) */ unsigned

short m_wVDOPTimes10;

/* VDOP

(0.1 units) */ unsigned

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 339

short m_wWAASMask;

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Commands and Messages

/* Bits 0-1: tracked sats, Bits 2-3:

Page 340

Commands and Messages
used sats, Bits 5-9 WAAS PRN 1
minus
120, Bits 10-14 WAAS PRN 1 minus
120 */
unsigned short m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the datalength

unsigned short m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */

*/

} SBinaryMsg2;

/* length = 8 + 16 + 2 + 2 = 28 */

/****************************************************/
/*

SChannelData

*/

/****************************************************/
typedef struct
{
unsigned char m_byChannel;
unsigned char m_bySV;
tracked
*/
unsigned char m_byStatus;

/* channel number

*/

/* satellite being tracked, 0 == not
/* Status bits (code carrier bit frame...)

*/
unsigned char m_byLastSubFrame; /* last subframe processed */
unsigned char m_byEphmVFlag;

/* ephemeris valid flag */

unsigned char m_byEphmHealth;

/* ephemeris health */ unsigned

char m_byAlmVFlag;

/* almanac valid flag */

unsigned char m_byAlmHealth;

/* almanac health */

char

/* elevation angle */ unsigned

m_chElev;

char m_byAzimuth;

/* 1/2 the Azimuth angle */

unsigned char m_byURA;

/* User Range Error */

unsigned char m_byDum;

/* Place Holder */

unsigned short m_wCliForSNR;

/* code lock indicator for SNR divided by 32

short

m_nDiffCorr;

/* Differential correction * 100 */

short

m_nPosResid;

/* position residual * 10 */

*/

short
m_nDoppHz;

m_nVelResid;

/* velocity residual *

/* expected doppler in HZ */

short

10 */

short

m_nNCOHz;

/* track from NCO in HZ */
} SChannelData;

/* 24 bytes */

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 341

Commands and Messages
/****************************************************/
/*

SChannelL2Data

*/

/****************************************************/
//#if defined(_DUAL_FREQ_) typedef
struct
{
unsigned char m_byChannel;

/* channel number

*/

unsigned char m_bySV;
tracked
*/

/* satellite being tracked, 0 == not

unsigned char m_byL2CX;
frame...)
*/

/* Status bits for L2P (code carrier bit

unsigned char m_byL1CX;
frame...)
*/

/* Status bits for L1P (code carrier bit

unsigned short m_wCliForSNRL2P; /* code lock indicator for SNR divided by 32 */
unsigned short m_wCliForSNRL1P; /* code lock indicator for L1P SNR divided by 32 */

short

m_nC1_L1;

/* C1-L1 in meters * 100 */

short

m_nP2_C1;

/* P2-C1 in meters * 100 */

short

m_nP2_L1;

/* P2-L1 in meters * 100 */

short

m_nL2_L1;

/* L2-L1 in meters * 100 */

short

m_nP2_P1;

/* P2-P1 in meters * 100 */

short

m_nNCOHz;

/* track from NCO in HZ */

} SChannelL2Data;

/* 20 bytes */

//#endif
/****************************************************/
/*

SChannelL2CData

for USING_GPSL2CL

*/

/****************************************************/
typedef struct
{
unsigned char m_byChannel;

// channel number

unsigned char m_bySV;
tracked

// satellite being tracked, 0 == not

unsigned char m_byL2CX;
frame...)

// Status bits for L2P (code carrier bit

unsigned char spare1;

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 342

Commands and Messages
unsigned short m_wCliForSNRL2C; // code lock indicator for SNR divided by
32
unsigned short spare2;
short

m_nL2C_L1Ca;

//L2CL - CA code error

short

m_nL2C_L2P;

//L2CL - L2P code error meters * 100 short

m_nL2_L1;

//L2CL - L1CA phase error meters * 100

m_nL2_L2P;

//L2CL - L2P phase error meters * 100 short

short

meters * 100

spare3;
short

m_nNCOHz;

} SChannelL2CData;

// track from NCO in HZ

// 20 bytes

/****************************************************/
/*

SBinaryMsg99

*/

/****************************************************/
typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

unsigned char
m_byNavMode;
(high bit =has_diff) */
char

m_cUTCTimeDiff;

/* Nav Mode FIX_NO, FIX_2D, FIX_3D
/* whole Seconds between UTC and GPS

*/
unsigned short m_wGPSWeek;

/* GPS week */

double

/* GPS tow

m_dGPSTimeOfWeek;

*/

SChannelData m_asChannelData[CHANNELS_12]; /* channel data */ short
m_nClockErrAtL1;

/* clock error at L1, Hz */

unsigned short m_wSpare;

/* spare */
unsigned short m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the datalength

*/
unsigned short m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */

} SBinaryMsg99;

/* length = 8 + 304 + 2 + 2 = 316 */

#define CHANNELS_SBAS_E

3

/****************************************************/
/*

SBinaryMsg89

* Supports 3 SBAS Satellites

*/

/****************************************************/
typedef struct

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 343

Commands and Messages
{
SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

long

m_lGPSSecOfWeek;

/* GPS tow integer sec */

unsigned char

m_byMaskSBASTracked; /* SBAS Sats Tracked, bit mapped 0..3

unsigned char

m_byMaskSBASUSED;

*/

unsigned short m_wSpare;
SChannelData

/* SBAS Sats Used, bit mapped 0..3 */
/* spare */

m_asChannelData[CHANNELS_SBAS_E];

/* SBAS channel data */

unsigned short m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the datalength

unsigned short m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */

*/

} SBinaryMsg89;

/* length = 8 + 80 + 2 + 2 = 92 */

/****************************************************/
/*

SBinaryMsg100

*/

/****************************************************/
//#if defined(_DUAL_FREQ_) typedef
struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

unsigned char
m_byNavMode;
(high bit =has_diff) */
char

m_cUTCTimeDiff;

/* Nav Mode FIX_NO, FIX_2D, FIX_3D
/* whole Seconds between UTC and GPS

*/
unsigned short m_wGPSWeek;
unsigned long

m_ulMaskSatsUsedL2P; /* L2P SATS Used, bit mapped 0..31 */ double
m_dGPSTimeOfWeek;

unsigned long

/* GPS week */

/* GPS tow

*/

m_ulMaskSatsUsedL1P; /* L1P SATS Used, bit mapped 0..31 */

SChannelL2Data m_asChannelData[CHANNELS_12]; /* channel data */
unsigned short m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the datalength

*/
unsigned short m_wCRLF;
} SBinaryMsg100;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */
/* length = 8 + 260 + 2 + 2 = 272 */

//#endif
/****************************************************/
/*

SBinaryMsg59

for USING_GPSL2CL

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

*/

Page 344

Commands and Messages
/****************************************************/
typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

unsigned char
m_byNavMode;
(high bit =has_diff) */ //1 byte
char
*/

m_cUTCTimeDiff;
//1 byte

unsigned short m_wGPSWeek;

/* Nav Mode FIX_NO, FIX_2D, FIX_3D
/* whole Seconds between UTC and GPS
/* GPS week */
//2 bytes

unsigned long

m_ulMaskSatsUsedL2P; /* L2P SATS Used, bit mapped 0..31 */
//4 bytes

double

m_dGPSTimeOfWeek;

/* GPS tow
*/
//8 bytes

SChannelL2CData m_asChannelData[CHANNELS_12]; /* channel data */
//20*12 bytes
unsigned short m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the datalengtha

unsigned short m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */

*/

} SBinaryMsg59;

/* length = 8 + 260 + 2 + 2 = 272 */

/****************************************************/
/*

SSVAlmanData

*/

/****************************************************/
typedef struct
{
short

m_nDoppHz;

/* doppler in HZ for stationary receiver */

unsigned char m_byCountUpdate;

/* count of almanac updates */

unsigned char m_bySVindex;

/* 0 through 31 (groups of 8)*/

unsigned char m_byAlmVFlag;

/* almanac valid flag */ unsigned

char m_byAlmHealth;

/* almanac health */

char

/* elevation angle */ unsigned

m_chElev;

char m_byAzimuth;
} SSVAlmanData;

/* 1/2 the Azimuth angle */

/* 8 bytes */

/****************************************************/
/*

SBinaryMsg98

*/

/****************************************************/

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 345

Commands and Messages
typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader

SSVAlmanData

m_sHead;

m_asAlmanData[8];

/* SV data, 8 at a time */

unsigned char m_byLastAlman;

/* last almanac processed */

unsigned char m_byIonoUTCVFlag;

/* iono UTC flag */

short m_wSpare;

unsigned

/* spare */

unsigned short m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the datalength

unsigned short m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */

*/

} SBinaryMsg98;
*/

/* length = 8 + (64+1+1+2) + 2 + 2 = 80

/****************************************************/
/*

SBinaryMsg97

*/

/****************************************************/
typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader
unsigned long
450e-6) */

m_sHead;
m_ulCPUFactor;

/* CPU utilization Factor (%=multby

unsigned short m_wMissedSubFrame;

/* missed subframes */

unsigned short m_wMaxSubFramePend;

/* max subframe pending */

unsigned short m_wMissedAccum;

/* missed accumulations */

unsigned short m_wMissedMeas;

/* missed measurements */

unsigned long

m_ulSpare1;

/* spare 1 (zero)*/ unsigned

long

m_ulSpare2;

/* spare 2 (zero)*/ unsigned

long

m_ulSpare3;

/* spare 3 (zero)*/ unsigned

short m_wSpare4; /* spare 4 (zero)*/
unsigned short m_wSpare5;

/* spare 5 (zero)*/

unsigned short m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the datalength

*/
unsigned short m_wCRLF;
} SBinaryMsg97;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */
/* length = 8 + (28) + 2 + 2 = 40 */

/****************************************************/

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 346

Commands and Messages
/*

SObservations

*/

/****************************************************/
typedef struct
{
unsigned long

m_ulCS_TT_SNR_PRN; /* Bits 0-7 PRN (PRN is 0 if no data)

*/
/* Bits 8-15 SNR_value
SNR = 10.0*log10( 0.8192*SNR_value)
*/
/* Bits 16-23 Phase Track Time in units of
1/10 second (range = 0 to 25.5 seconds
(see next word) */
/* Bits 24-31 Cycle Slip Counter Increments
by 1 every cycle slip with natural roll
over after 255 */
unsigned long
otherwise

m_ulDoppler_FL;

/* Bit
Bit

0: 1 if Valid Phase, 0
1: 1 if Track Time > 25.5 sec,
0 otherwise

Bits 2-3: unused
Bits 4-32: Signed (two's compliment)
doppler in units of m/sec x 4096. (i.e.,
LSB = 1/4096). Range =
+/- 32768 m/sec. Computed as phase
change over 1/10 sec. */
double
double
0.190293672798365*/
} SObservations;

m_dPseudoRange;

/* pseudo ranges (m) */

m_dPhase;

/* phase (m) L1 wave len =

/* 24 bytes */

/****************************************************/
/*

SBinaryMsg96

*/

/****************************************************/
typedef struct
{

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 347

Commands and Messages
SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

unsigned short

m_wSpare1;

/* spare 1 (zero)*/

unsigned short

m_wWeek;

/* GPS Week Number */

double

m_dTow;

/* Predicted GPS Time in seconds */

SObservations

m_asObvs[CHANNELS_12];/* 12 sets of observations */

unsigned short
datalength */
unsigned short

m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the

m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */

} SBinaryMsg96;
*/

/* length = 8 + (300) + 2 + 2 = 312

/****************************************************/
/*

SBinaryMsg95

*/

/****************************************************/
/* sent only upon command or when values change */ typedef
struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

unsigned short
belongs. */

m_wSV;

/* The satellite to which this data

unsigned short
9/1/2004)*/

m_wSpare1;

/* spare 1 (chan number (as zero

unsigned long
6sec) */

m_TOW6SecOfWeek;

/* time at which this arrived (LSB =

unsigned long m_SF1words[10]; /* Unparsed SF 1 message words. */ unsigned long
m_SF2words[10]; /* Unparsed SF 2 message words. */ unsigned long

m_SF3words[10];

/* Unparsed SF 3 message words.*/
/* Each of the subframe words
contains
one 30-bit GPS word in the lower
30 bits, The upper two bits are
ignored
Bits are placed in the words from
left to
right as they are received */
unsigned short

m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the datalength

unsigned short

m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */

*/

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 348

Commands and Messages
} SBinaryMsg95;
*/

/* length = 8 + (128) + 2 + 2 = 140

/****************************************************/
/*

SBinaryMsg94

*/

/****************************************************/
/* sent only upon command or when values change */ typedef
struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

/* Iono parameters. */
double

m_a0,m_a1,m_a2,m_a3;

/* AFCRL alpha parameters. */

double

m_b0,m_b1,m_b2,m_b3;

/* AFCRL beta parameters.

*/

/* UTC conversion parameters. */
double
unsigned long
GPS week. */

m_A0,m_A1;

/* Coeffs for determining UTC time. */

m_tot;

/* Reference time for A0 & A1, sec of

unsigned short m_wnt;

/* Current UTC reference week number.

*/
unsigned short m_wnlsf;
effective. */

/* Week number when dtlsf becomes

unsigned short m_dn;
becomes effective. */

/* Day of week (1-7) when dtlsf

short

m_dtls;

/* Cumulative past leap seconds. */

short

m_dtlsf;

/* Scheduled future leap seconds. */

unsigned short m_wSpare1;

/* spare 4 (zero)*/

unsigned short m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the datalength

unsigned short m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */

*/

} SBinaryMsg94;

/* length = 8 + (96) + 2 + 2 =

108 */

/****************************************************/
/*

SBinaryMsg93

*/

/****************************************************/
/* sent only upon command or when values change */
/* WAAS ephemeris */ typedef
struct

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 349

Commands and Messages
{
SUnionMsgHeader
unsigned short
belongs. */
unsigned short
unsigned long
1sec) */
unsigned short
unsigned short
Service Spec */

m_sHead;
m_wSV;

/* The satellite to which this data

m_wWeek;

/* Week corresponding to m_lTOW*/

m_lSecOfWeekArrived; /* time at which this arrived (LSB =
m_wIODE;
m_wURA;

/* See 2.5.3 of Global Pos Sys Std Pos

long m_lTOW;

/* Sec of WEEK Bit 0 = 1 sec */

long m_lXG;

/* Bit 0 = 0.08 m */

long m_lYG;

/* Bit 0 = 0.08 m */

long m_lZG;

/* Bit 0 = 0.4 m */

long m_lXGDot;

/* Bit 0 = 0.000625 m/sec */

long m_lYGDot;

/* Bit 0 = 0.000625 m/sec */

long m_lZGDot;

/* Bit 0 = 0.004 m/sec */

long m_lXGDotDot;

/* Bit 0 = 0.0000125 m/sec/sec */

long m_lYGDotDot;

/* Bit 0 = 0.0000125 m/sec/sec */

long m_lZGDotDot;

/* Bit 0 = 0.0000625 m/sec/sec */

short

m_nGf0;

/* Bit 0 = 2**-31 sec */

short

m_nGf0Dot;

/* Bit 0 = 2**-40 sec/sec */

unsigned short

m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the datalength

unsigned short

m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */

*/

} SBinaryMsg93;

/* length = 8 + (56) + 2 + 2 = 68 */

/****************************************************/
/*

SBinaryMsg80

*/

/****************************************************/
typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

unsigned short m_wPRN;

/* Broadcast PRN */

unsigned short m_wSpare;

/* spare (zero) */

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 350

Commands and Messages
unsigned long

m_ulMsgSecOfWeek;

/* Seconds of Week For Message */

unsigned long

m_aulWaasMsg[8];

/* Actual 250 bit waas message*/

unsigned short m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the datalength

unsigned short m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */

*/

} SBinaryMsg80;

/* length = 8 + (40) + 2 + 2 = 52 */

/****************************************************/
/*

SMsg91Data

*/

/****************************************************/
typedef struct
{
unsigned char
tracked
*/

bySV;

/* satellite being tracked, 0 == not

unsigned char

byStatus;

/* Status bits (code carrier bit frame...)

unsigned char

byStatusSlave;

/* Status bits (code carrier bit frame...)

unsigned char

byChannel;

/* Not used */

*/
*/

unsigned short wEpochSlew;
_1MS_EPOCH_SLEW */
unsigned short wEpochCount;

/* 20*_20MS_EPOCH_SLEW +
/* epoch_count */

unsigned long
codeph_SNR;
32 = SNR/4096, upper 4 bits */

/* 0-20 = code phase (21 bits), 28-

unsigned long
ulCarrierCycles_SNR;
SNR/4096 lower 8 bits */

/* 0-23 = carrier cycles, 24-32 =

unsigned short wDCOPhaseB10_HalfWarns;
Cycle Warn

/* 0-11 = DCO phase, 12-14 = Half
15 = half Cycle added */

unsigned short m_wPotentialSlipCount;

/* potential slip count */

/* SLAVE DATA */
unsigned long
codeph_SNR_Slave;
bits), 28-32 = SNR/4096, upper 4 bits */

/* 0-20 = code phase (21

unsigned long
ulCarrierCycles_SNR_Slave;
32 = SNR/4096 lower 8 bits */

/* 0-23 = carrier cycles, 24-

unsigned short wDCOPhaseB10_HalfWarns_Slave; /* 0-11 = DCO phase, 12-14 = Half
Cycle Warn
15 = half Cycle added */

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 351

Commands and Messages
unsigned short m_wPotentialSlipCount_Slave;

/* potential slip count */

} SMsg91Data; /* 32 bytes */
/****************************************************/

/*

SBinaryMsg91

*/

/*

Comment: Transmits data from Takemeas.c

*/

/*

debugging structure.

*/

/*

Added by bbadke 7/07/2003

*/

/****************************************************/
typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

/* 8 */

double

m_sec;

/* 8 bytes */

int

m_iWeek;

/* 4 bytes */

unsigned long

m_Tic;

/* 4 bytes */

long

lTicOfWeek;

/* 4 bytes */

long

lProgTic;

/* 4 bytes */ SMsg91Data

s91Data[CHANNELS_12];

/* 12*32= 384 bytes */

m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the

m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */

unsigned short
datalength */
unsigned short
} SBinaryMsg91;
420 */

/* length = 8 + (408) + 2 + 2 =

/****************************************************/
/*

SObsPacket

*/

/****************************************************/
typedef struct
{
unsigned long

m_ulCS_TT_W3_SNR;

/* Bits 0-11 (12 bits) =SNR_value
For L1 SNR = 10.0*log10(

0.1024*SNR_value)
FOR L2 SNR = 10.0*log10(
0.1164*SNR_value) */
/* Bits 12-14 (3 bits) = 3 bits of
warning

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 352

Commands and Messages
for potential 1/2 cycle slips.

A

warning
exists if any of these bits are
set. */
/* bit 15: (1 bit) 1 if Track Time >
25.5 sec,
0 otherwise */
/* Bits 16-23 (8 bits): Track Time in
units
of 1/10 second (range = 0 to 25.5
seconds) */
/* Bits 24-31 (8 bits) = Cycle Slip
Counter
Increments by 1 every cycle slip with
natural roll-over after 255 */
unsigned long
otherwise

m_ulP7_Doppler_FL;

/* Bit 0: (1 bit) 1 if Valid Phase, 0
Bit 1-23: (23 bits) =Magnitude of

doppler
LSB = 1/512 cycle/sec
Range = 0 to 16384 cycle/sec
Bit 24: sign of doppler,
1=negative, 0=pos
Bits 25-31 (7 bits) = upper 7 bits
of the
23 bit carrier phase.
LSB = 64 cycles,

MSB = 4096

cycles */
unsigned long

m_ulCodeAndPhase;

/* Bit 0-15 (16 bits) lower 16 bits of

code
pseudorange
LSB = 1/256 meters MSB
= 128 meters
Note, the upper 19 bits are
given in
m_aulCACodeMSBsPRN[] for CA
code
Bit 16-31 lower 16 bits of the
carrier phase,

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 353

Commands and Messages
7 more bits are in
m_ulP7_Doppler_FL
LSB = 1/1024 cycles MSB
= 32 cycles */

} SObsPacket;

/* 12 bytes , note: all zero if data not available */

/* A NOTE ON DECODING MESSAGE 76

* Notation: "code" -- is taken to mean the PseudoRange derived from code
phase.
*

"phase" -- is taken to mean range derived from carrier phase.

*

This will contain cycle ambiguities.

*

* Only the lower 16 bits of L1P code, L2P code and the lower 23 bits of
* carrier phase are provided. The upper 19 bits of the L1CA code are found
* in m_aulCACodeMSBsPRN[].

The upper 19 bits of L1P or L2P must be derived

* using the fact that L1P and L2P are within 128 meters of L1CA.

To

* determine L1P or L2P, use the lower 16 bits provided in the message and
* set the upper bits to that of L1CA.

Then add or subtract one LSB of the

* upper bits (256 meters) so that L1P or L2P are within 1/2 LSB (128 meters)
* of the L1CA code.
*

The carrier phase is in units of cycles, rather than meters,

* and is held to within 1023 cycles of the respective code range.

Only

* the lower 16+7=23 bits of carrier phase are transmitted in Msg 76.
* In order to determine the remaining bits, first convert the respective
* code range (determined above) into cycles by dividing by the carrier
* wavelength.

Call this the "nominal reference phase". Next extract the 16

* and 7 bit blocks of carrier phase from Msg 76 and arrange to form the lower
* 23 bits of carrier phase.

Set the upper bits (bit 23 and above) equal to

* those of the nominal reference phase.

Then, similar to what was done for

* L1P and L2P, add or subtract the least significant upper bit (8192 cycles)
* so that carrier phase most closely agrees with the nominal reference phase
* (to within 4096 cycles).
*/

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 354

Commands and Messages

#define CHANNELS_12_PLUS (CHANNELS_12+2)
satellites */
#define CHANNELS_L1_E
satellites) */

/* up to two SBAS

(CHANNELS_12+CHANNELS_SBAS_E) /* All L1 (including SBAS

/****************************************************/
/*

SBinaryMsg76

*/

/****************************************************/
typedef struct
{

SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

double

m_dTow;

/* GPS Time in seconds */

unsigned short

m_wWeek;

/* GPS Week Number */

unsigned short

m_wSpare1;

/* spare 1 (zero)*/

unsigned long

m_ulSpare2;

/* spare 2 (zero)*/

SObsPacket

m_asL2PObs[CHANNELS_12];

/* 12 sets of L2(P)

observations */
SObsPacket
observations */
unsigned long

m_asL1CAObs[CHANNELS_L1_E];

/* 15 sets of L1(CA)

m_aulCACodeMSBsPRN[CHANNELS_L1_E]; /* array of 15words.
bit 7:0 (8 bits) =

satellite PRN, 0
if no satellite
bit 12:8 (5 bits) = spare
bit 31:13 (19 bits) = upper
19 bits
of L1CA

LSB = 256 meters
MSB = 67108864

meters */
unsigned long
L1(P) code.

m_auL1Pword[CHANNELS_12];

/* array of 12 words relating to
Bit 0-15 (16 bits) lower 16

bits of the
L1P code pseudo range.
LSB = 1/256 meters MSB =
128 meters
Bits 16-27 (12 bits) = L1P
SNR_value

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 355

Commands and Messages
0.1164*SNR_value)

SNR = 10.0*log10(
If Bits 16-27 all zero, no

L1P track
Bits 28-31 (4 bits) spare */
unsigned short
datalength */
unsigned short

m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the

m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */

} SBinaryMsg76;
460 */

/* length = 8 + (448) + 2 + 2 =

/****************************************************/
/*

SMsg71DataL1

*/

/****************************************************/
typedef struct
{
unsigned char
tracked
*/

bySV;

/* satellite being tracked, 0 == not

unsigned char
frame...)
*/

byStatus;

/* Status bits (code carrier bit

unsigned char
byStatusL1P;
SNR/32768, if zero and

/* 0-8 lower 8 bits of L1P
if upper two bits of

m_wSNR_codeph_L1P are zero
then L1P is not tracking */
...)

unsigned char
*/

byStatusL2P;

unsigned short wEpochSlew;
_1MS_EPOCH_SLEW */
unsigned short wEpochCount;

/* Status bits (code carrier phase
/* 20*_20MS_EPOCH_SLEW +
/* epoch_count */

unsigned long
codeph_SNR;
32 = SNR/4096, upper 4 bits */

/* 0-20 = code phase (21 bits), 28-

unsigned long
ulCarrierCycles_SNR;
SNR/4096 lower 8 bits */

/* 0-23 = carrier cycles, 24-32 =

unsigned short wDCOPhaseB10_HalfWarns;
Cycle Warn

/* 0-11 = DCO phase, 12-14 = Half
15 = half Cycle added */

unsigned short m_wPotentialSlipCount;

/* potential slip count */

} SMsg71DataL1; /* 20 bytes */
/****************************************************/

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 356

Commands and Messages
/*

SMsg71DataL1PL2P

*/

/****************************************************/
typedef struct
{
/* L1P and L2P Data */
//
unsigned long
codeph_SNR_L1P; NOT USED YET
bits), 28-32 = SNR/8192, upper 4 bits */

/* 0-22 = L1 code phase (23

unsigned long
codeph_SNR_L2P;
bits), 28-32 = SNR/8192, upper 4 bits */

/* 0-22 = L2P code phase (23

unsigned long
ulCarrierCycles_SNR_L2P;
24-32 = SNR/8192 lower 8 bits */

/* 0-23 = carrier cycles,

unsigned short wDCOPhaseB10_L2P;
Spare */

/* 0-11 = DCO phase, 12-15 =

unsigned short m_wSNR_codeph_L1P;
L1P code,
14-15 SNR/32768 Upper 2 bits */

/* 0-13 = lower 14 bits of
/* To get full L1P code, use

upper bits form L2P and adjust by
+/- 2**14 if necessary */
} SMsg71DataL1PL2P; /* 12 bytes */
/****************************************************/

/*

SBinaryMsg71

*/

/*

Comment: Transmits data from Takemeas.c

*/

/*

debugging structure for Dual Freq.

*/

/****************************************************/
typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

/* 8 */

double

m_sec;

/* 8 bytes */

int

m_iWeek;

/* 4 bytes */

unsigned long

m_Tic;

/* 4 bytes */

long

lTicOfWeek;

/* 4 bytes */

long

lProgTic;

/* 4 bytes */

SMsg71DataL1PL2P s91L2PData[CHANNELS_12];

/* 12*12 = 144 bytes */

SMsg71DataL1

s91Data[CHANNELS_12_PLUS];

/* 14*20 = 280 bytes */

m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the

unsigned short
datalength */

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 357

unsigned short

Commands and Messages

m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed

*/
} SBinaryMsg71;
= 460 */

/* length = 8 + (448) + 2 + 2

/////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//

SBinaryMsg10

//

Comment: Transmits scatter plot data from

//

buffacc.c

//
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////
enum eBIN10_TYPE {eBIN10_GPSL1CA=0,eBIN10_GPSL1P,eBIN10_GPSL2P,
eBIN10_GLONASSL1,eBIN10_GLONASSL2,eBIN10_GPSL2CL,eBIN10_GPSL5
Q};
typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

// 8 bytes

unsigned short m_awScatterPlotDataI[cBPM_SCAT_MEMSIZE]; //100*2 = 200 bytes unsigned
short m_awScatterPlotDataQ[cBPM_SCAT_MEMSIZE]; //100*2 = 200 bytes unsigned short
m_wChannel;
unsigned short m_wSigType;
unsigned short
datalength
unsigned short

m_wCheckSum;
m_wCRLF;

} SBinaryMsg10;
+2 = 416

// one of eBIN10_TYPE
// sum of all bytes of the
// Carriage Return Line Feed
// length = 8 +200 +200 +2 +2 +2

#if defined(_RXAIF_PLOT_MESSAGES_)
/////////////////////////////////////////////////////
//

SBinaryMsg11

//

Comment: Transmits scatter plot data for RXGNSS_AIF statistics

//
///////////////////////////////////////////////////// enum
eBIN11_TYPE {eBIN11_COUNTS=0,eBIN11_VALUES};
typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

// 8 bytes

Page 358

Commands and Messages

unsigned short
= 32 bytes

m_awScatterPlotDataValues[cBPM_AIFSCAT_MEMSIZE];

//16*2

unsigned short
= 32 bytes

m_awScatterPlotDataCntMag[cBPM_AIFSCAT_MEMSIZE];

//16*2

unsigned short
= 32 bytes

m_awScatterPlotDataCntDCoff[cBPM_AIFSCAT_MEMSIZE]; //16*2

unsigned short

m_wChannel;

// aif_sel 0: AIF_A, 1: AIF_B, ...

unsigned short

m_wSigType;

// one of eBIN11_TYPE

m_wCheckSum;

// sum of all bytes of the

m_wCRLF;

// Carriage Return Line Feed

unsigned short
datalength

unsigned short
} SBinaryMsg11;
+2 = 112

// length = 8 +32 +32 +32 +2 +2 +2

#endif
/****************************************************/
/*

SGLONASSChanData

*/

/****************************************************/ typedef
struct
{
unsigned char m_bySV;

/* Bit (0-6) = SV slot, 0 == not tracked
* Bit 7 = Knum flag
* = KNum+8 if bit 7 set
*/

unsigned char m_byAlm_Ephm_Flags;

/* ephemeris and almanac status flags */
/* bit 0: Ephemeris available but timed

out

* bit 1: Ephemeris valid
* bit 2: Ephemeris health OK
* bit 3: unused
* bit 4: Almanac available
* bit 5: Almanac health OK
* bit 6: unused
* bit 7: Satellite doesn't exist
*/
unsigned char m_byStatus_L1;
frame...)
*/

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

/* Status bits (code carrier bit

Page 359

Commands and Messages

unsigned char m_byStatus_L2;
frame...)
*/
char

m_chElev;

/* Status bits (code carrier bit
/* elevation angle */ unsigned

char m_byAzimuth;

/* 1/2 the Azimuth angle */

unsigned char m_byLastMessage;

/* last message processed */

unsigned char m_bySlip01;

/* cycle slip on chan 1 */

unsigned short m_wCliForSNR_L1;
32 */

/* code lock indicator for SNR divided by

unsigned short m_wCliForSNR_L2;
32 */

/* code lock indicator for SNR divided by

short

m_nDiffCorr_L1;

/* Differential correction * 100 */

short

m_nDoppHz;

/* expected doppler in HZ at glonass L1

short

m_nNCOHz_L1;

/* track from NCO in HZ */

short

m_nNCOHz_L2;

/* track from NCO in HZ */

short

m_nPosResid_1;

/* position residual 1 * 1000 */

short

m_nPosResid_2;

/* position residual 2 * 1000 */

*/

} SGLONASSChanData;

/* 24 bytes */

/****************************************************/
/*

SBinaryMsg69

*/

/****************************************************/
typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

long

m_lSecOfWeek;

/* tow

unsigned short
solution */

m_wL1usedNavMask;

/* mask of L1 channels used in nav

unsigned short
solution */

m_wL2usedNavMask;

/* mask of L2 channels used in nav

*/

SGLONASSChanData

m_asChannelData[CHANNELS_12]; /* channel data 12X24 = 288 */

unsigned short

m_wWeek;

/* week */

unsigned char

m_bySpare01;

/* spare 1 */

unsigned char

m_bySpare02;

/* spare 2 */

unsigned short

m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the datalength

*/

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 360

Commands and Messages
unsigned short

m_wCRLF;

} SBinaryMsg69;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */
/* length = 8 + 300 + 2 + 2 = 312 */

/****************************************************/
/*

SMsg61Data

*/

/****************************************************/
typedef struct
{
unsigned char

bySV;

/* satellite slot

0 == not tracked

unsigned char
frame...)
*/

byStatusL1;

/* Status bits (code carrier bit

unsigned char
frame...)
*/

byStatusL2;

/* Status bits (code carrier bit

unsigned char
Phase

byL1_L2_DCO;

/* 0-3 = upper 4 bits of L1 carrier DCO

*/

* 4-7 = upper 4 bits of L2 carrier DCO
Phase
*/
unsigned short wEpochSlewL1;

/* 0-9 = slew, 0 to 1000 count for ms of

sec
* 10-15 = 6 bits of L1 slip count */
unsigned short wEpochCountL1;
ms of sec

/* 0-9 = epoch_count, 0 to 1000 count for
* 10-15 = 6 bits of L2 slip count */

unsigned long
9+12),

codeph_SNR_L1;

/* 0-20 =

L1 code phase (21 bits =

* 21-32 = L1 SNR/4096 (upper 11 of 12
bits) */
unsigned long

ulCarrierCycles_L1; /* 0-23 = L1 carrier cycles,
* 24-32 = L1 Carrier DCO lower 8 bits

*/
unsigned long
9+12),

codeph_SNR_L2;

/* 0-20 =

L2 code phase (21 bits =

* 21-32 = L2 SNR/4096 (upper 11 of 12
bits) */
unsigned long

ulCarrierCycles_L2; /* 0-23 = L2 carrier cycles,

* 24-32 = L2 Carrier DCO lower 8 bits
*/
} SMsg61Data; /* 24 bytes */

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 361

Commands and Messages
/****************************************************/
/*

SBinaryMsg61

*/

/*

Comment: Transmits data from TakemeasGLONASS.c

*/

/*

debugging structure for Dual Freq.

*/

/****************************************************/
typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

/* 8 */

unsigned long

m_Tic;

/* 4 bytes */

unsigned long

ulSpare;

/* 4 bytes */ unsigned

short

awHalfWarns[CHANNELS_12]; /* 12*2 = 24 bytes */
/* each word is

* bit 0-2

L1 Half Cycle Warn

* bit 3 = L1 half cycle added
* bit 4-6

L2 Half Cycle Warn

* bit 7 = L2 half cycle added
* 8 =

LSB of 12 bit L1

* 9 =

LSB of 12 bit L2

SNR/4096

SNR/4096

* bit 10-15 Ktag of the SV */
SMsg61Data
unsigned short
datalength */
unsigned short

as61Data[CHANNELS_12];

/* 12*24 = 288 bytes */

m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the

m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */

} SBinaryMsg61;
332 */

/* length = 8 + (320) + 2 + 2 =

/****************************************************/
/*

SBinaryMsg66

GLONASS OBS (see notes on mesage 76) */

/****************************************************/
typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

double

m_dTow;

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

/* Time in seconds */

Page 362

Commands and Messages
unsigned short

m_wWeek;

/* GPS Week Number */

unsigned short

m_wSpare1;

/* spare 1 (zero)*/

unsigned long

m_ulSpare2;

/* spare 2 (zero)*/

SObsPacket
observations */

m_asL1Obs[CHANNELS_12];

/* 12 sets of L1(Glonass)

SObsPacket
observations */

m_asL2Obs[CHANNELS_12];

/* 12 sets of L2(Glonass)

unsigned long

m_aulL1CodeMSBsSlot[CHANNELS_12]; /* array of 12 words.
bit 7:0 (8 bits) =

satellite Slot, 0
if no satellite
bit 12:8 (5 bits) = spare
bit 31:13 (19 bits) = upper
19 bits
of L1

LSB = 256 meters
MSB = 67108864

meters */
unsigned short
datalength */
unsigned short

m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the

m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */

} SBinaryMsg66;
364 */

/* length = 8 + (352) + 2 + 2 =

/****************************************************/
/*

SGLONASS_String, added for glonass strings

*/

/****************************************************/
typedef struct
{
unsigned long m_aul85Bits[3];

/* holds bits 9-85 of the GLONASS string

*/

/*
* bit order in message 65

*

MSB

LSB

* m_aul85Bits[0]: 85 84. ......... 54
* m_aul85Bits[1]: 53 52. ......... 22
* m_aul85Bits[2]: 21 20. .... 9
*/
} SGLONASS_String;

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

/* 12 bytes (max of 96 bits) */

Page 363

Commands and Messages
/****************************************************/

/* SBinaryMsg65, added by JL for glonass subframe immediate data + string_5
*/
/****************************************************/
/* sent only upon command or when values change (not including changes in tk)
*/
typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader
unsigned char
this data belongs. */

m_sHead;
m_bySV;

/* The satellite to which

m_byKtag;

/* The satellite K Number + 8.

unsigned short
4 bytes */

m_wSpare1;

/* Spare, keeps alignment to

unsigned long
arrived */

m_ulTimeReceivedInSeconds;

/* time at which this

unsigned char
*/

SGLONASS_String
m_asStrings[5];
Glonass Frame (60 bytes) */

/* first 5 Strings of

unsigned short
datalength */

m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of

unsigned short
Feed */

m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line

} SBinaryMsg65;
2 = 80 */

/* length = 8 + (68) + 2 +

/*********************************************************************/
/*

SBinaryMsg62, Glonass almanac data. Containing string

*

5 and the two string pair for each satellite after string 5.

*

String 5 contains the time reference for the glonass almanac

*

and gps-glonass time differences.

*
*********************************************************************/ typedef
struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader
unsigned char
this data belongs. */
unsigned char

m_sHead;
m_bySV;

/* The satellite to which

m_byKtag_ch;

/* Proprietary data */

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 364

Commands and Messages

unsigned short
4 bytes */
SGLONASS_String
(36 bytes)

m_wSpare1;

/* Spare, keeps alignment to

m_asStrings[3];

/* glonass almanac data
0 & 1 = Two almanac SFs,

3= SF 5*/
unsigned short
datalength */

m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the

unsigned short
Feed */

m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line

} SBinaryMsg62;
= 52 */
#if defined(WIN32) || (

/* length = 8 + (40) + 2 + 2
ARMCC_VERSION >= 300441)

#pragma pack(pop)
#endif
#ifdef

cplusplus

}
#endif
#endif //

BinaryMsg_H_

Last updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 365

Commands and Messages

Bin1 Message

Message
Type

Binary

Description

GNSS position message (position and velocity data)

Command
Format to
Request
Message

Message
Format

$JBIN,1,r
where:

•

'1' = Bin1 message

•

'r' = message rate in Hz (20, 10, 2, 1, 0, or .2)

Message
Component

Description

Type

Bytes

Values

AgeOfDiff

Age of differential, seconds. Use
Extended AgeOfDiff first. If both = 0,
then no differential

Byte

1

0 to 255

NumOfSats

Number of satellites used in the GPS
solution

Byte

1

0 to 12

GPSWeek

GPS week associated with this
message

Unsigned
short

2

0 to 65535

GPSTimeOfWeek

GPS tow (sec) associated with this
message

Double

8

0.0 to
604800.0

Latitude

Latitude in degrees north

Double

8

-90.0 to 90.0

Longitude

Longitude in degrees East

Double

8

-180.0 to
180.0

Height

Altitude above the ellipsoid in meters

Float

4

VNorth

Velocity north in m/s

Float

4

VEast

Velocity east in m/s

Float

4

Vup

Velocity up in m/s

Float

4

StdDevResid

Standard deviation of residuals in
meters

Float

4

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Positive

Page 366

Commands and Messages

NavMode

Navigation mode:

Unsigned
short

0 = No fix
1 = Fix 2d no diff
2 = Fix 3d no diff
3 = Fix 2D with diff
4 = Fix 3D with diff
5 = RTK float
6 = RTK integer fixed

2

Bits 0
through 6 =
Navmode
Bit 7 =
Manual
mark

When
$JDISNAVMODE,PHOENIX
Is enabled
7 = RTK float (SureFix enabled)
8 = RTK integer fixed (SureFix
enabled)
9 = RTK SureFixed
10 = aRTK integer fixed
11 = aRTK float
12 = aRTK Atlas converged
13 = aRTK Atlas un-converged
14 = Atlas converged
15 = Atlas un-converged
If bit 7 is set (left-most bit), then
this is a manual position
Extended
AgeOfDiff

Structure

Extended age of differential,
seconds. If 0, use 1 byte AgeOfDiff
listed above

Unsigned
short

2

0 to 65536

typedef struct
{

SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

unsigned char

m_byAgeOfDiff;

/* age of differential, seconds

m_byNumOfSats;

/* number of satellites used (12

unsigned short

m_wGPSWeek;

/* GPS week */

double

m_dGPSTimeOfWeek;

/* GPS tow

double

m_dLatitude;

/* Latitude degrees, -90..90 */

double

m_dLongitude;

/* Longitude degrees, -180..180 */

float

m_fHeight;

/* (m), Altitude ellipsoid */

float

m_fVNorth;

/* Velocity north

float

m_fVEast;

/* Velocity eastm/s */

float

m_fVUp;

/* Velocity up

(255 max)*/

unsigned char
max)
*/

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

*/

m/s */

m/s */

Page 367

Commands and Messages
float
Residuals */

m_fStdDevResid;

/* (m), Standard Deviation of

unsigned short

m_wNavMode;

unsigned short

m_wAgeOfDiff;

/* age of diff using 16 bits

unsigned short

m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the

*/

datalength */

unsigned short
} SBinaryMsg1;

m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */
/* length = 8 + 52 + 2 + 2 = 64 */

Additional
Information

Message has a BlockID of 1 and is 52 bytes, excluding the header and epilogue

Related
Commands

JBIN

Topic Last Updated: v1.08 / June 9, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 368

Commands and Messages

Bin2 Message
Message
Type

Binary

Description

GPS DOPs (Dilution of Precision)
This message contains various quantities that are related to the GNSS solution, such as satellites tracked,
satellites used, and DOPs.

Command
Format to
Request
Message

Message
Format

$JBIN,2,r
where:

•

'2' = Bin2 message

•

'r' = message rate in Hz (1 or 0)

Message
Component

Description

Type

Bytes

Values

MaskSatsTracked

Mask of satellites tracked by the
GPS. Bit 0 corresponds to the
GPS satellite with PRN 1.

Unsigned long

4

Individual bits
represent satellites

MaskSatsUsed

Mask of satellites used in the
GPS solution. Bit 0 corresponds
to the GPS satellite with PRN 1.

Unsigned long

4

Individual bits
represent satellites

GpsUtcDiff

Whole seconds between UTC
and GPS time (GPS minus
UTC)

Unsigned short

2

Positive

HDOPTimes10

Horizontal dilution of precision
scaled by10 (0.1 units)

Unsigned short

2

Positive

VDOPTimes10

Vertical dilution of precision
scaled by 10 (0.1 units)

Unsigned short

2

Positive

WAASMask

PRN and tracked or used status
masks

Unsigned short

2

See following

•

Bit 00 - Mask of satellites tracked by first WAAS satellite

•

Bit 01 - Mask of satellites tracked by second WAAS satellite

•

Bit 02 - Mask of satellites used by first WAAS satellite

•

Bit 03 - Mask of satellites used by second WAAS satellite

•

Bit 04 - Unused

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 369

Commands and Messages

Bits 05-09 - Value used to find PRN of first WAAS satellite (This value + 120 = PRN)
Bits 10-14 - Value used to find PRN of second WAAS satellite (This value + 120 = PRN)
Bit 15 - Unused

Structure

typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

unsigned long

m_ulMaskSatsTracked; /* SATS Tracked, bit mapped 0..31 */

unsigned

m_ulMaskSatsUsed;

/* SATS Used, bit mapped 0..31 */

m_wGpsUtcDiff;

/* GPS/UTC time difference (GPS minus

unsigned short

m_wHDOPTimes10;

/* HDOP (0.1 units) */

unsigned short

m_wVDOPTimes10;

/* VDOP (0.1 units) */

unsigned short

m_wWAASMask;

/* Bits 0-1: tracked sats, Bits 2-3:

long

unsigned short
UTC) */

used sats, Bits 5-9 WAAS PRN 1 minus
120, Bits 10-14 WAAS PRN 1 minus 120
*/
unsigned short

m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the datalength

unsigned short

m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */

*/

} SBinaryMsg2;

/* length = 8 + 16 + 2 + 2 = 28 */

Additional
Information

Message has a BlockID of 2 and is 16 bytes, excluding the header and epilogue

Related
Commands

JBIN

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16,
2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 370

Commands and Messages

Bin3 Message
Message
Type

Binary

Description

Lat/Lon/Hgt, Covariances, RMS, DOPs and COG, Speed, Heading

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JBIN,3,r
where:

•

'3' = Bin3 message

•

'r' = message rate in Hz

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 371

Commands and Messages

Message
Format

Message
Component

Description

Type

Bytes

Values

GPSTimeOfWeek

GPS tow (sec) associated with this
message

Double

8

0.0 to 604800.0

GPSWeek

GPS week associated with this
message

Unsigned
short

2

0 to 65535

SATS Tracked

Number of satellites tracked in
the GPS solution

Unsigned
short

2

NumOfSats

Number of satellites used in the GPS
solution

Byte

2

NAV Mode

Navigation mode:
0 = No fix
1 = Fix 2d no diff
2 = Fix 3d no diff
3 = Fix 2D with diff
4 = Fix 3D with diff
5 = RTK float
6 = RTK integer fixed
When
$JDISNAVMODE,PHOENIX
enabled

unsigned char

1

Bits 0
through 6 =
Navmode
Bit 7 = Manual
mark

7 = RTK float (SureFix enabled)
8 = RTK integer fixed (SureFix
enabled)
9 = RTK SureFixed
10 = aRTK integer fixed
11 = aRTK float
12 = aRTK Atlas converged
13 = aRTK Atlas un-converged
14 = Atlas converged
15 = Atlas un-convergedIf bit 7 is
set (left-most bit), then this is a
manual position

Spare

unsigned char

1

Latitude

Latitude in degrees north

Double

8

-90.0 to 90.0

Longitude

Longitude in degrees East

Double

8

-180.0 to
180.0

Height

Altitude above the ellipsoid in meters

Float

4

Horizontal Speed

Velocity horizontal in m/s

Float

4

Vup

Velocity up in m/s

Float

4

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 372

Commands and Messages

COG

Course over Ground, degrees

Float

4

Heading

Heading(degrees), Zero unless
vecto

Float

4

Pitch

Pitch (degrees), Zero unless
vector

Float

4

Float

4

Unsigned
short

2

Unsigned
short
Unsigned
short
Unsigned
short

4

Spare
AgeOfDiff

Age of differential, seconds. Use
Extended AgeOfDiff first. If both =
0, then no differential

Spare
Spare
Spare

4
4

HRMS

Horizontal RMS

Float

4

VRMS

Vertical RMS

Float

4

HDOP

Horizontal DOP

Float

4

VDOP

Vertical DOP

Float

4

TDOP

Time DOP

Float

4

CovNN

Covaraince North-North

Float

4

CovNE

Covaraince North-East

Float

4

CovNU

Covaraince North-Up

Float

4

CovEE

Covaraince East-East

Float

4

CovEU

Covaraince East-Up

Float

4

CovUU

Covaraince Up-Up

Float

4

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 373

Commands and Messages
Structure

typedef struct

{
SUnionMsgHeader
Double

m_sHead;

//

m_dGPSTimeOfWeek;

// GPS tow

unsigned short

m_wGPSWeek;

// GPS week

unsigned short

m_wNumSatsTracked;

// SATS Tracked

unsigned short

m_wNumSatsUsed;

unsigned char

m_byNavMode;

// Nav Mode (same as message 1)

unsigned char

m_bySpare00;

// Spare

double

m_dLatitude;

// Latitude degrees, -90..90 double

m_dLongitude;

// Longitude degrees, -180..180

m_fHeight;

// (m), Altitude ellipsoid float

m_fSpeed;

// Horizontal Speed

float

m_fVUp;

// Vertical Velocity +up

float

m_fCOG;

// Course over Ground, degrees

float

m_fHeading;

// Heading (degrees), Zero unless vector

float

m_fPitch;

// Pitch (degrees), Zero unless vector float

float

// SATS Used

m/s
m/s

m_fSpare01;

// Spare

unsigned short

m_wAgeOfDiff;

// age of differential, seconds

unsigned short

m_wSpare02;

// Spare

unsigned long

m_ulSpare03;

// Spare

unsigned long

m_ulSpare04;

// Spare

float

m_fHRMS;

// Horizontal RMS

float

m_fVRMS;

// Vertical

float

m_fHDOP;

// Horizontal DOP

float

m_fVDOP;

// Vertical DOP

float

m_fTDOP;

// Time DOP

float

m_fCovNN;

// Covaraince North-North

float

m_fCovNE;

// Covaraince North-East

float

m_fCovNU;

// Covaraince North-Up

float

m_fCovEE;

// Covaraince East-East

float

m_fCovEU;

// Covaraince East-Up

float

m_fCovUU;

// Covaraince Up-Up

unsigned short

m_wCheckSum;

// sum of all bytes of the header and data

unsigned short

m_wCRLF;

// Carriage Return Line Feed

} SBinaryMsg3;
74 hex)

RMS

// length = 8 + 116 + 2 + 2 = 128

(108 =

Additional
Information
Related
Commands

JBIN

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 374

Commands and Messages

Topic Last Updated: v1.08 / June 21, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 375

Commands and Messages

Bin5 Message
Message
Type

Description
Command
Format to
Request
Message

Binary

Base station information

$JBIN,5,r
where:

•

'5' = Bin5 message

•

'r' = message rate in Hz

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 376

Commands and Messages

Message
Format

Message
Component

Description

Type

Bytes

Values

Latitude

Latitude of base station in degrees
north

Double

8

-90.0 to 90.0

Longitude

Longitude of base station in
degrees east

Double

8

-180.0 to 180.0

Height

Base station altitude in meters

Float

4

BaseID

Base station ID

Unsigned
short

2

Unsigned
short

2

Char array

16*1 =
16

Unsigned
short array

16*2 =
32

Spare
DiffFormat
Spare

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

String giving the format of the differential
(i.e. RTCM3)

0 to 65535

Page 377

Commands and Messages
Structure

typedef struct

{
SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

//

[8]

double

m_dLatitude;

// Base Latitude degrees, -90..90

[8 bytes]

double

m_dLongitude;

// Base Longitude

[8 bytes]

float

m_fHeight;

// Base Altitude ellipsoid, (m)

unsigned short

m_wBaseID;

// BaseID

[2 bytes]

unsigned short

m_wSpare;

// Spare

[2 bytes]

char

m_szDiffFormat[16];

// String giving format of Differential

[16 bytes]

unsigned short

m_awSpare[16];

// 32 bytes of spare

[32 bytes]

unsigned short

m_wCheckSum;

// sum of all bytes of the header and data

unsigned short

m_wCRLF;

// Carriage Return Line Feed

} SBinaryMsg5;

degrees, -180..180

// length = 8 + 72 + 2 + 2 = 84

[4 bytes]

(72 = 48 hex)

Additional Information

Related
Commands

JBIN

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 378

Commands and Messages

Topic Last Updated: v1.09 / January 8, 2018

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 379

Commands and Messages

Bin16 Message
Message
Type

Binary

Description

Generic GNSS observations (see notes on message 76)

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JBIN,16,r
where:

'16' = Bin16 message
'r' = message rate in Hz (1 or 0)

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 380

Commands and Messages
Message
Format

Message
Component

Description

Type

Bytes

Values

Tow

Time in seconds

double

8

Week

GPS week number

Unsigned short

2

Individual bits
represent satellites

Spare1

Not used at this time

Unsigned short

2

Future Use

PageCount

Page information

Unsigned long

4

See following

Unsigned long

4

See following

[0-15] Spare bits
[16,17,18,19,20,21] Number of Pages = N
[22,23,24,25,26,27] Page Number [0...N-1]
[28,29,30,31] Spare bits
AllSignalsIncluded_
01

Bit mask of all signals included in
the set of pages

bit 0 = GPS:L1CA included
bit 1 = GPS:L2P included
bit 2 = GPS:L2C included
bit 3 = GPS:L5 included
bit 7:4 = spare
bit 8 = GLO:G1C or GLO:G1P included
bit 9 = GLO:G2C or GLO:G1P included
bit 15:10 = spare
bit 16 = GAL:E1BC included
bit 17 = GAL:E5A included
bit 18 = GAL:E5B included
bit 23:19 = spare
bit 24 = BDS:B1I included
bit 25 = BDS:B2I included
bit 26 = BDS:B3I included
bit 31:27 = spare

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 381

Commands and Messages
Message

Description

Type

Bytes

Values

AllSignalsInclude
d_02

Bit mask of all signals
included in the set of pages

Unsigned long

4

See following

•

bit 0 = QZS:L1CA included

•

bit 1 = spare

•

bit 2 = QZS:L2C included

•

bit 3 = QZS:L5 included

•

bit 4 = QZS:L1C included

•

bit 31:5 = spare

Obs[16]

16 sets of observations

Structure array

16*12 =
192

CodeMSBsPRN

Array of 16 32-bit words

Array of
unsigned longs

16*4=64

•

bit 7:0 (8 bits) = satellite PRN,

•

bit 12:8 (5 bits) = Log_Base_2(X+1)

= 0 if no satellite
where X = Time, in units of 1/100th sec,
since carrier phase tracking was last stressed
or cycle slipped
•

bit 31:13 (19 bits) = upper 19 bits
of code pseudorange LSB = 256 meters
MSB = 67108864 meters

ChanSignalSYS

Array of 16 16-bit words

Array of
unsigned shorts

•

[15,14] spare bits

•

[13] = 1 if GLONASS P-Code

•

[12,11,10,9,8] = Channel (0 is the first channel)

•

[7,6,5,4] = Signal ID (L1CA, L5, G1, B1I, B2I, B3I, etc)

16*2=32

GPS Signal ID: L1CA=0, L2P=1, L2C=2, L5=3
GLO Signal ID: G1C/G1P=0, G2C/G2P=1
GAL Signal ID: E1BC=0, E5A=1, E5B=2
BDS Signal ID: B1I=0, B2I=1, B3I=2
QZS Signal ID: L1CA=0, L2C=2, L5=3, L1C=4
•

Structure

[3,2,1,0] = GNSS System, 0=GPS,1=GLO,2=GAL,3=BDS,4=QZS

CheckSum

Sum of all bytes of header
and data

Unsigned short

2

CRLF

Carriage return line feed

Unsigned short

2

typedef struct

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 382

Commands and Messages

{
SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

//

(8 bytes)

double

m_dTow;

// Time in seconds (8 bytes)

unsigned short

m_wWeek;

// GPS Week Number (2 bytes)

unsigned short

m_wSpare1;

// spare 1 (zero)

unsigned long

m_uPageCount; //[0-15] Spare bits

(2 bytes)

//[16,17,18,19,20,21] Number of Pages = N
//[22,23,24,25,26,27] Page Number [0...N-1]
//[28,29,30,31] Spare bits
// Bit mask of all signals included
in the set of pages
unsigned long

m_uAllSignalsIncluded_01;

// bit 0

= GPS:L1CA included

// bit 1

= GPS:L2P included

// bit 2

= GPS:L2C included

// bit 3

= GPS:L5 included

// bit 7:4 = spare
// bit 8

= GLO:G1C or GLO:G1P

// bit 9

= GLO:G2C or GLO:G1P

included
included
// bit 15:10 = spare
// bit 16 = GAL:E1BC included
// bit 17 = GAL:E5A included
// bit 18 = GAL:E5B included
// bit 23:19 = spare
// bit 24 = BDS:B1I included
// bit 25 = BDS:B2I included
// bit 26 = BDS:B3I included
// bit 31:27 = spare
unsigned long

m_uAllSignalsIncluded_02;

// bit 0

= QZS:L1CA included

// bit 1

= spare

// bit 2

= QZS:L2C included

// bit 3

= QZS:L5 included

// bit 4

= QZS:L1C included

// bit 31:5 = spare
SObsPacket
bytes)

m_asObs[CHANNELS_gen];

// 16 sets of observations (16*12=192

unsigned long
(16*4=64 bytes)

m_aulCodeMSBsPRN[CHANNELS_gen]; // array of 16, 32 bit words
// bit 7:0 (8 bits) = satellite

PRN,
//

= 0 if no

satellite
// bit 12:8 (5 bits) =
Log_Base_2(X+1)
//

where X = Time, in

units of 1/100th sec,
GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 383

Commands and Messages

//

since carrier phase

//

or cycle slipped

tracking was last stressed
// bit 31:13 (19 bits) = upper 19
bits
// of code pseudorange LSB = 256
meters
//

MSB =

67108864 meters
unsigned short
bytes)

m_awChanSignalSYS[CHANNELS_gen]; // Array of 16, 16 bit words (32
//[15,14]

spare bits

//[13] = 1 if GLONASS P-Code
//[12,11,10,9,8] = Channel (0 is the
first channel)
//[7,6,5,4] = Signal ID (L1CA, L5,
G1, B1I, B2I, B3I, etc)
// GPS Signal ID: L1CA=0, L2P=1,
L2C=2, L5=3
// GLO Signal ID: G1C/G1P=0,
G2C/G2P=1
// GAL Signal ID: E1BC=0, E5A=1,
E5B=2
// BDS Signal ID: B1I=0, B2I=1, B3I=2
// QZS Signal ID: L1CA=0, L2C=2,
L5=3, L1C=4
//[3,2,1,0] = GNSS System,
0=GPS,1=GLO,2=GAL,3=BDS,4=QZS
unsigned short
and data (2 bytes)

m_wCheckSum;

/// sum of all bytes of the header

unsigned short
(2 bytes)

m_wCRLF;

// Carriage Return Line Feed

} SBinaryMsg16;
(8+2+2+4+4+4+192+64+32=312) + 2 + 2 = 324

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

// length = 8 +

Page 384

Commands and Messages
Additional
Information
Related Commands JBIN

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 385

Commands and Messages

Bin19 Message

Message
Type

Binary

Description

GNSS diagnostic information

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JBIN,19,r
where:
'19' = Bin19 message
'r' = message rate in Hz (1 or 0)

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 386

Commands and Messages
Message Component

Description

Type

Bytes

SecOfWeek

Time of Week

long

4

GPSWeek

GPS Week Number

unsigned short

2

NavMode

Nav Mode

unsigned char

1

UTCTimeDiff

Whole seconds
between UTC and GPS
time

char

1

PageCount

Information about the
paging of the BIN19
message.

unsigned long

4

Bitmask of all signals
includes in this set of
pages

unsigned long

AllSignalsIncludes01

Values

0-255

Bits [16,17,18,19,20,21] Number of Pages = N
Bits [22,23,24,25,26,27] Page Number [0...N-1]

4

bit 0 = GPS:L1CA included
bit 1 = GPS:L2P included
bit 2 = GPS:L2C included
bit 3 = GPS:L5 included
bit 8 = GLO:G1C or GLO:G1P included
bit 9 = GLO:G2C or GLO:G1P included
bit 16 = GAL:E1BC included
bit 17 = GAL:E5A included
bit 18 = GAL:E5B included
bit 24 = BDS:B1I included
bit 25 = BDS:B2I included
bit 26 = BDS:B3I included

AllSignalsIncluded02

Continued bitmask of
all signals included in
this set of pages.

unsigned long

4

bit 0 = QZS:L1CA included
bit 2 = QZS:L2C included
bit 3 = QZS:L5 included
bit 4 = QZS:L1C included

Spare

unsigned short

2

ChannelData[16]

Detailed data for each
signal included.

SGENERICchanData[]

320

ChanSignalSYS

Information about the
type of signal
represented by each
entry in ChannelData

unsigned short[]

32

[13] = 1 if GLONASS P-Code
[12,11,10,9,8] = Channel (0 is the first channel)
[7,6,5,4] = Signal ID (L1CA, L5, G1, B1I, B2I, B3I, etc)
GPS Signal ID = 0: L1CA, 1: L2P, 2: L2C, 3: L5
GLO Signal ID = 0: G1C/G1P, 1: G2C/G2P
GAL Signal ID = 0: E1BC, 1: E5A, 2:E5B
BDS Signal ID = 0: B1I,
QZS Signal ID = 0: L1CA,
L1C

1: B2I,

2:B3I

1: xxx,

2:L2C, 3: L5, 4:

[3,2,1,0] = GNSS System,
0=GPS,1=GLO,2=GAL,3=BDS,4=QZS

CheckSum

Sum of all bytes of
header and data

Unsigned short

2

CRLF

Carriage return line
feed

Unsigned short

2

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 387

Commands and Messages
Structure

//=====================================================================
//

SGENERICchanData

//=====================================================================
typedef struct
{
unsigned char m_bySV;

// Bit (0-6) = SV slot, 0 == not tracked

unsigned char m_byAlm_Ephm_Flags; // ephemeris and almanac status flags
// bit 0: Ephemeris available but timed out
// bit 1: Ephemeris valid
// bit 2: Ephemeris health OK
// bit 3: unused
// bit 4: Almanac available
// bit 5: Almanac health OK
// bit 6: unused
// bit 7: Satellite doesn't exist
unsigned char m_byStatus;

// Status bits (code carrier bit frame...)

char

// elevation angle

m_chElev;

unsigned char m_byAzimuth;

// 1/2 the Azimuth angle

unsigned char m_byLastMessage;

// last message processed

unsigned char m_bySlip;

// cycle slip on chan 1

char

//

m_cFlags;

// [0] bChanEnabled
// [1] bUsedInSolution
unsigned short

m_wCliForSNR;

// code lock indicator for SNR divided by 32

short

m_nDiffCorr;

// Differential correction * 100

short

m_nDoppHz;

// expected doppler in HZ at B1 frequency

short

m_nNCOHz;

// track from NCO in HZ

short

m_nPosResid;

// position residual * 1000

unsigned short

m_wAllocType;

//

} SGENERICchanData; // (20 bytes)
//----------------------------------------------------------------------------//

SBinaryMsg19

//

Generic GNSS message for signal tracking status

//----------------------------------------------------------------------------typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

// 8 bytes

long

m_lSecOfWeek;

// tow (4 bytes)

unsigned short

m_wGPSWeek;

// GPS Week Number (2 bytes)

unsigned char

m_byNavMode;

// Nav Mode FIX_NO, FIX_2D, FIX_3D (high bit =has_diff)

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 388

char

m_cUTCTimeDiff; // whole Seconds between UTC and GPS

unsigned long

m_uPageCount;

// [0-15] Spare bits

Commands and Messages

(4 bytes)

// [16,17,18,19,20,21] Number of Pages = N
// [22,23,24,25,26,27] Page Number [0...N-1]
// [28,29,30,31] Spare bits
// Bit mask of all signals included in the set of pages
unsigned long

m_uAllSignalsIncluded_01;

// bit 0

= GPS:L1CA included

// bit 1

= GPS:L2P included

// bit 2

= GPS:L2C included

// bit 3

= GPS:L5 included

// bit 7:4 = spare
// bit 8

= GLO:G1C or GLO:G1P included

// bit 9

= GLO:G2C or GLO:G1P included

// bit 15:10 = spare
// bit 16 = GAL:E1BC included
// bit 17 = GAL:E5A included
// bit 18 = GAL:E5B included
// bit 23:19 = spare
// bit 24 = BDS:B1I included
// bit 25 = BDS:B2I included
// bit 26 = BDS:B3I included
// bit 31:27 = spare
unsigned long

m_uAllSignalsIncluded_02;

// bit 0

= QZS:L1CA included

// bit 1

= spare

// bit 2

= QZS:L2C included

// bit 3

= QZS:L5 included

// bit 4

= QZS:L1C included

// bit 31:5 = spare
short

m_nClockErrAtL1;// clock error at L1, Hz

unsigned short

m_wSpare1;

SGENERICchanData
unsigned short

(2 bytes)

// spare (2 bytes)

m_asChannelData[CHANNELS_gen]; // channel data 16x20 = 320

m_awChanSignalSYS[CHANNELS_gen]; // Array of 16, 16 bit words (32 bytes)
//[15,14]

spare bits

//[13] = 1 if GLONASS P-Code
//[12,11,10,9,8] = Channel (0 is the first channel)
//[7,6,5,4] = Signal ID (L1CA, L5, G1, B1I, B2I, B3I, etc)
//

GPS Signal ID = 0: L1C

//

GLO Signal ID = 0: G1C

//

GAL Signal ID = 0: E1B

//

BDS Signal ID = 0: B1I

//

QZS Signal ID = 0: L1C

4: L1C

//[3,2,1,0] = GN
unsigned short
unsigned short
} SBinaryMsg19;

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

m_wCheckSum;

// sum of all bytes of th

m_wCRLF;

// Carriage Return Line F
// length = 8+(4+2+1+1+4+

Page 389

Commands and Messages

Additional
Information

Related
Commands

Topic Last Updated: v1.08 / June 9, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 390

Commands and Messages

Bin35 Message
Message
Type

Binary

Description

BeiDou ephemeris information

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JBIN,35,r
where:

'35' = Bin35 message

•

Message
Format

''r' = 1 (on) or 0 (off),
When set to on the message is sent once (one message for each tracked satellite at 1 second intervals)
and then sent again whenever satellite information changes

Message
Component

Description

Type

Bytes

SV

Satellite to which this data
belongs

Unsigned short

2

Spare1

Not used at this time

Unsigned short

2

SecOfWeek

Time at which this arrived
(LSB=6)

Unsigned long

4

BeiDouNav[30]

Unparsed BeiDou
Navigation message

See following

4 x 30 =
120

Values

Future use

Elements correspond to the ephemeris values as defined in the BeiDou ICD:
1.

Element 00, BDS_tow, Unsigned (4 bytes)

2.

Element 01, BDS_toc, Unsigned (4 bytes)

3.

Element 02, BDS_a0, Signed (4 bytes)

4.

Element 03, BDS_a1,Signed (4 bytes)

5.

Element 04, BDS_a2, Signed (4 bytes)

6.

Element 05, BDS_toe, Unsigned (4 bytes)

7.

Element 06, BDS_Root_A, Unsigned (4 bytes)

8.

Element 07, BDS_Eccentricity, Unsigned (4 bytes)

9.

Element 08, BDS_omega_perigee, Signed (4 bytes)

10. Element 09, BDS_DeltaN_MeanMotionDiff, Signed (4 bytes)
11. Element 10, BDS_M_MeanAnomaly, Signed (4 bytes)
12. Element 11, BDS_OMEGA0_Lon_Ascending, Signed (4 bytes)
13. Element 12, BDS_OMEGA_DOT, Signed (4 bytes)
14. Element 13, BDS_io_InclinationAngle, Signed (4 bytes)
15. Element 14, BDS_IDOT_RateInclination, Signed (4 bytes)
16. Element 15, BDS_Cuc_AmpCosHarmonicLat, Signed (4 bytes)

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 391

Commands and Messages

17. Element 16, BDS_Cus_AmpSinHarmonicLat, Signed (4 bytes)
18. Element 17, BDS_Crc_AmpCosHarmonicRadius, Signed (4 bytes)
19. Element 18, BDS_Crs_AmpSinHarmonicRadius, Signed (4 bytes)
20. Element 19, BDS_Cic_AmpCosHarmonicInclination, Signed (4 bytes)
21. Element 20, BDS_Cir_AmpSinHarmonicInclination, Signed (4 bytes)
22. Element 21, BDS_TGD1_TGD2, Unsigned (4 bytes)

TGD1 in lower 10 bits (bits 0-9)
TGD2 in next 10 bits (10-19)
23. Element 22, BDS_WN, Unsigned (4 bytes)
24. Element 23, BDS_alpha_0_1_2_3, Unsigned (4 bytes)
Packed with 4, 8-bit words, exactly as defined in the BeiDou ICD Alpha3
in lower 8 bits (bits 0-7)
Alpha2 in next 8 bits (bits 8-15)
Alpha1 in next 8 bits (bits 16-23)
Alpha0 in upper 8 bits (bits 24-31)
25. Element 24, BDS_beta_0_1_2_3, Unsigned (4 bytes)
Packed with 4, 8-bit words, exactly as defined in the BeiDou ICD Beta3 in
lower 8 bits (bits 0-7)
Beta2 in next 8 bits (bits 8-15) Beta1
in next 8 bits (bits 16-23) Beta0 in
upper 8 bits (bits 24-31)
26. Element 25, BDS_SatH1_IODC_URA1_IODE, Unsigned (4 bytes)

IODE in lower 5 bits (bits 0-4)
URA1 in next 4 bits (bits 5-8) IODC
in next 5 bits (bits 9-13) SatH1in
next 1 bit (bit 14)
27. Element 26, spare (4 bytes)
28. Element 27, spare (4 bytes)
29. Element 28, spare (4 bytes)
30. Element 29, spare (4 bytes)

Structure

typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader
unsigned short
belongs*/
unsigned short
9/1/2004) */
unsigned long
*/
unsigned long
*/

m_sHead;
m_wSV;

/* The satellite to which this data

m_wSpare1;

/* spare 1 (chan number (as zero

m_TOW6SecOfWeek; /* time at which this arrived (LSB = 6sec)
m_BeidouNav[30]; /* Unparsed BeiDou navigation words.
/* Each of the BeiDou nav words contains one 32bit signed or unsigned word.

Read

as a signed or unsigned long as

needed. */
unsigned short
data */

m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the header and

unsigned short
} SBinaryMsg35;

m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */
/* length = 8 + (128) + 2 + 2 = 140 */

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 392

Commands and Messages

Additional
Information

Message has a BlockID of 35 and is 128 bytes, excluding the header and epilogue

Related
Commands

JBIN

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 393

Commands and Messages

Bin36 Message

Message
Type

Binary

Description

BeiDou code and carrier phase information(all frequencies)

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JBIN,36,r
where:

Message
Format

•

'36' = Bin36 message

•

'r' = message rate in Hz (20, 10, 2, 1, or 0)

Message Component

Description

Type

Bytes

Tow

Time in seconds

Double

2

Week

GPS week number

Unsigned short

2

Spare1

Spare 1 (zero)

Unsigned short

2

FreqPage

See following

Unsigned long

4

Values

31. Bits 0-19 (20 bits)

Spare bits
32. Bits 20-23 (4 bits)

Number of pages
33. Bits 24-27 (4 bits)

Page number
34. Bits 28-31 (4 bits)

Signal ID (0 = B1I, 1 = B2I, 2 = B3I)

Structure

Obs[CHANNELS_20]

20 sets of BeiDou
observations

SObsPacket

20 x 12
= 240

1CodeMSBsPRN[CHANNELS_20]

See following

Unsigned long

20 x 4 =
80

•

Bits 0-7 (8 bits)
Satellite PRN, 0 if no satellite

•

Bits 8-12 (5 bits)
Spare bits

•

Bits 13- 31 (19 bits)
Upper 19 bits of B1/B2/B3, LSB = 256 meters, MSB = 67108864 meters

typedef struct
{

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 394

Commands and Messages

SUnionMsgHeader
bytes)
double
bytes)
unsigned short
bytes)
unsigned short
bytes)
unsigned long

m_sHead;

//

m_dTow;

// Time in seconds (8

m_wWeek;

// GPS Week Number (2

m_wSpare1;

// spare 1 (zero)

m_uFreqPage;

(8

(2

//[0-19] Spare bits
//[20,21,22,23] Number of Pages
//[24,25,26,27] Page Number
//[28,29,30,31] Signal ID (B1I, B2I, B3I,

etc)
SObsPacket
unsigned long

m_asObs[CHANNELS_20];
m_aulCodeMSBsPRN[CHANNELS_20];

// 20 sets of BeiDou observations
//
(20*12=240 bytes)
// array of 20 words
//
(20*4=80 bytes)
// bit 7:0 (8 bits) =
//
satellite PRN, 0
//
if no satellite
// bit 12:8 (5 bits) =
//
spare
// bit 31:13 (19 bits) =
//
upper 19 bits
//
of B1/B2/B3
//
LSB =
256

meters meters
//

short
bytu
enss)igned
esdg short
} SuBnisniag
rn
yM
36;

m_wCheckSum;
m_wCRLF;

MSB = 67108864

// sum of all bytes of datalength
ge8 R+et(u
n+2L+i4n+e240
F+e8e0d) + 2 +
/
/ lCeanrgrti
ha=
8r
+2
//
2=

(2

348
//

= 8 + (336) + 2 + 2 = 348

Additional
Information

Related
Commands

JBIN

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 395

Commands and Messages

Bin44 Message

Message
Type

Binary

Description

Galileo time conversion parameters

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JBIN,44,r
where:

•
•

'44' = Bin44 message
'r' = 1 (on) or 0 (off)
When set to on the message is sent once and then sent again whenever satellite information changes

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 396

Commands and Messages
Message
Format

Message
Component

Description

Type

Bytes

A0, A1

Coefficients for determining UTC time

Double

8 x 2 = 16

tot

Reference time for A0 and A1,
second of Galileo week

Unsigned long

4

wnt

Current Galileo reference week

Unsigned short

2

wnlsf

Week number when dtlsf becomes
effective

Unsigned short

2

dn

Day of week (1-7) when dtlsf
becomes effective

Unsigned short

2

dtls

Cumulative past leap seconds

Short

2

dtlsf

Scheduled future leap seconds

Short

2

Spare

Not used at this time

Short

2

A0G, A1G

Coefficients of GGTO polynomial

Double

8 x 2 = 16

T0G

Reference time of week for GGTO

Unsigned long

4

WN0G

Reference week for GGTO

Unsigned short

2

GGTOisValid

Indicates if GGTO is valied

Unsigned short

2

Values

Future use

0 = GGTO Invalid
1 = GGTO Valid.

CheckSum

Sum of all bytes of header and data

Unsigned short

2

CRLF

Carriage return line feed

Unsigned short

2

Structure

typedef struct
{
// - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - SUnionMsgHeader m_sHead;

// Header of message.

// - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -

(8 bytes)

// - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - // Galileo Time to UTC conversion parameters (32 bytes).
double

m_A0;

// Constant term of polynomial to
//

double

m_A1;

// 1st order term of polynomial to
//

unsigned long

m_tot;

determine UTC from Galileo Time.
determine UTC from Galileo Time.

// Reference time for A0 & A1, sec of
//

Galileo week.

unsigned short

m_wnt;

// Current Galileo reference week.

unsigned short

m_wnlsf;

// GST Week number when m_dtlsf

unsigned short

m_dn;

// Day of the week 1 (= Sunday) to

//

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

becomes effective.

Page 397

Commands and Messages

//

7 (= Saturday) when m_dtlsf

//

becomes effective.

short

m_dtls;

// Cumulative past leap seconds.

short

m_dtlsf;

// Scheduled future (past) leap
//

unsigned short

m_wSpare1;

seconds.

// Spare (zero).

// - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - (32 bytes)
// - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - // GPS Time to Galileo Time conversion parameters (GGTO Parameters).
//
//

dTsys = Tgal - Tgps = m_A0G + m_A1G [TOW - m_t0G + 604800*(WN - m_WN0G)]

//
//

where,

//

dTsys = The time difference between systems

//

Tgal

= Galileo Time

//

Tgps

= GPS Time

//

TOW

= Galileo Time of Week

//

WN

= Galileo Week Number

//

remaining parameters follow.

double

m_A0G;

// Constant term of GGTO polynomial.

double

m_A1G;

// 1st order term of GGTO polynomial.

unsigned long

m_t0G;

// Reference time of week for GGTO.

unsigned short

m_WN0G;

// Reference week for GGTo.

unsigned short

m_wGGTOisValid;

// Coded: 0 == GGTO Invalid,
//

1 == GGTO Valid.

//

The Galileo OS-SIS-ICD indicates

//

that when satellite broadcasts

//

all 1 bit values for A0G, A1G,

//

t0G, and WN0G then "the GGTO is

//

considered as not valid."

// - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - (24 bytes)
// - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - // Message Tail
unsigned short

m_wCheckSum;

// Sum of all bytes of the header and
//

unsigned short

m_wCRLF;

data.

// Carriage Return Line Feed.

// - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - } SBinaryMsg44;

Additional
Information

(4 bytes)

// length = 8 + (32+24) + 2 + 2 = 68.

Message has a BlockID of 44 and is 56 bytes, excluding the header and epilogue

Related Commands JBIN

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 398

Commands and Messages
Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 399

Commands and Messages

Bin45 Message
Message
Type

Binary

Description

Galileo ephemeris information

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JBIN,45,r
where:

•
•

'45' = Bin45 message
''r' = 1 (on) or 0 (off),
When set to on the message is sent once (one message for each tracked satellite at 1 second intervals)
and then sent again whenever satellite information changes

Message Format
Message
Component

Description

Type

Bytes

SV

Satellite to which this data belongs

Unsigned short

2

Spare1

Not used at this time

Unsigned short

2

SecOfWeek

Time at which this arrived (LSB =
6)

Unsigned long

4

SF1words[10]

Unparsed SF 1 message

Unsigned long

4 x 10 = 40

SF2words[10]

Unparsed SF 2 message

Unsigned long

4 x 10 = 40

SF3words[10]

Unparsed SF 3 message

Unsigned long

4 x 10 = 40

Values

Future use

Structure

typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

unsigned short

m_wSV;

/* The satellite to which this data belongs.

*
/
unsigned short

m_wSpare1;

/* spare 1 (chan number (as zero 9/1/2004)*/

unsigned long

m_TOW6SecOfWeek; /* time at which this arrived (LSB = 6sec)

*
/
unsigned long m_SF1words[10]; /* Unparsed SF 1 message words. */ unsigned
long m_SF2words[10]; /* Unparsed SF 2 message words. */ unsigned long
m_SF3words[10];
GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

/* Unparsed SF 3 message words.*/
Page 400

Commands and Messages

/* Each of the subframe words contains

one 30-bit GPS word in the lower
30 bits, The upper two bits are ignored
Bits are placed in the words from left to
right as they are received */
unsigned short

m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the datalength */

unsigned short

m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */

} SBinaryMsg95;

/* length = 8 + (128) + 2 + 2 = 140 */

Additional Information
Message has a BlockID of 45 and is 128 bytes, excluding the header and epilogue

Related Commands JBIN

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 401

Commands and Messages

Bin62 Message

Message
Type

Binary, GLONASS

Description

GLONASS almanac information

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JBIN,62,r
where:

Message
Format

Structure

•

'62' = Bin62 message

•

'r' = message rate in Hz (1 or 0)

Message
Component

Description

Type

Bytes

SV

Satellite to which this data belongs

Byte

1

Ktag_ch

Proprietary data

Byte

1

Spare1

Spare, keeps alignment to 4 bytes

Unsigned short

2

Strings[3]

GLONASS almanac data (36 bytes)

SGLONASS string

36

•

0 & 1 = Two almanac SFs

•

3= SF 5

Values

typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader
unsigned char
belongs. */

m_sHead;
m_bySV;

/* The satellite to which this data

unsigned char

m_byKtag_ch;

/* Proprietary data */

unsigned short

m_wSpare1;

/* Spare, keeps alignment to 4 bytes */

SGLONASS_String

m_asStrings[3]; /* glonass almanac data

(36 bytes)

0 & 1 = Two almanac SFs, 3= SF 5*/
unsigned short m_wCheckSum; /* sum of all bytes of the datalength */
unsigned short
} SBinaryMsg62;

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */
/* length = 8 + (40) + 2 + 2 = 52 */

Page 402

Commands and Messages

Additional
Information
Related
Commands

JBIN

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 403

Commands and Messages

Bin65 Message
Message
Type

Binary, GLONASS

Description

GLONASS ephemeris information

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JBIN,65,r
where:

•
•

Message
Format

Structure

'65' = Bin65 message
''r' = 1 (on) or 0 (off),
When set to on the message is sent once (one message for each tracked satellite at 1 second
intervals) and then sent again whenever satellite information changes

Message Component

Description

Type

Bytes

SV

Satellite to which this data
belongs

Byte

1

Ktag

Satellite K Number + 8

Byte

1

Spare1

Spare, keeps alignment to 4
bytes

Unsigned short

2

TimeReceivedInSeconds

Time at which this arrived

Unsigned long

4

Strings[5]

First five strings of
GLONASS frame (60 bytes)

SGLONASS string

60

Values

typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader m_sHead;
unsigned char
belongs. */

m_bySV;

/* The satellite to which this data

unsigned char

m_byKtag;

/* The satellite K Number + 8. */ unsigned

short

m_wSpare1;

/* Spare, keeps alignment to 4 bytes */

unsigned long

m_ulTimeReceivedInSeconds; /* time at which this arrived */

SGLONASS_String m_asStrings[5]; /* first 5 Strings of Glonass Frame (60 bytes)
*/

unsigned short

m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the datalength */

unsigned short

m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 400

Commands and Messages

} SBinaryMsg65;

/* length = 8 + (68) + 2 + 2 = 80 */

Additional
Information

Related
Commands

JBIN

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 401

Commands and Messages

Bin66 Message
Message
Type

Binary, GLONASS

Description

GLONASS L1/L2 code and carrier phase information

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JBIN,66,r
where:

Message
Format

Structure

•

'66' = Bin66 message

•

'r' = message rate in Hz (20, 10, 2, 1, or 0)

Message Component

Description

Type

Tow

Time in seconds

Double

Week

GPS week number

Unsigned short

Spare1

Spare 1 (zero)

Unsigned short

Spare2

Spare 2 (zero)

Unsigned long

L1Obs[CHANNELS_12]

12 sets of L1
(GLONASS)
observations

SObsPacket

L2Obs[CHANNELS_12]

12 sets of L2
(GLONASS)
observations

SObsPacket

L1CodeMSBsSlot[CHANNELS_12]

See following

Unsigned long

•

Bits 0-7 (8 bits)
Satellite slot, 0 if no satellite

•

Bits 8-12 (5 bits)
Spare bit

•

Bits 13- 31 (19 bits)
Upper 19 bits of L1, LSB = 256 meters, MSB = 67108864 meters

Bytes

Values

typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader m_sHead;
double

m_dTow;

/* Time in seconds */

unsigned short

m_wWeek;

/* GPS Week Number */

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 402

Commands and Messages
unsigned short

m_wSpare1;

/* spare 1 (zero)*/

unsigned long

m_ulSpare2;

/* spare 2 (zero)*/

SObsPacket

m_asL1Obs[CHANNELS_12];

/* 12 sets of L1(Glonass)
observations */

SObsPacket

m_asL2Obs[CHANNELS_12];

/* 12 sets of L2(Glonass)
observations */

unsigned long

m_aulL1CodeMSBsSlot[CHANNELS_12]; /* array of 12 words.
bit 7:0 (8 bits) =

satellite Slot, 0 if
no
satellite
bit 12:8 (5 bits) =
spare
bit 31:13 (19 bits) =
upper 19 bits of L1 LSB
= 256 meters

MSB = 67108864 meters
*/
unsigned short

m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the datalength */

unsigned short

m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */

} SBinaryMsg66;

/* length = 8 + (352) + 2 + 2 = 364 */

Additional
Information
Related
Commands

JBIN

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 403

Commands and Messages

Bin69 Message

Message
Type

Binary, GLONASS

Description

GLONASS L1/L2diagnostic information

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JBIN,69,r
where:

Message
Format

Structure

•

'69' = Bin69 message

•

'r' = message rate in Hz (1 or 0)

Message Component

Description

Type

SecOfWeek

Tow

Long

L1usedNavMask

Mask of L1
channels used in
nav solution

Unsigned short

L2usedNavMask

Mask of L2
channels used in
nav solution

Unsigned short

ChannelData[CHANNELS_12]

Channel data
12X24 = 288

SGLONASSChanData

Week

Week

Unsigned short

Spare01

Spare 1

Unsigned char

Spare02

Spare 2

Unsigned char

Bytes

Values

typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader m_sHead;
long

m_lSecOfWeek;

/* tow

*/

unsigned short
solution */

m_wL1usedNavMask; /* mask of L1 channels used in nav

unsigned short
solution */

m_wL2usedNavMask; /* mask of L2 channels used in nav

SGLONASSChanData

m_asChannelData[CHANNELS_12]; /* channel data 12X24 = 288

*/

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 404

Commands and Messages
unsigned short

m_wWeek;

/* week */

unsigned char

m_bySpare01;

/* spare 1 */

unsigned char

m_bySpare02;

/* spare 2 */

unsigned short

m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the datalength */

unsigned short

m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */

} SBinaryMsg69;

/* length = 8 + 300 + 2 + 2 = 312 */

Additional
Information
Related
Commands

JBIN

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 405

Commands and Messages

Bin76 Message

Message
Type

Binary

Description

GPS L1/L2 code and carrier phase information
Note: "Code" means pseudorange derived from code phase. "Phase" means range derived from carrier phase. This will
contain cycle ambiguities.
Only the lower 16 bits of L1P code, L2P code and the lower 23 bits of carrier phase are provided. The upper 19 bits of the
L1CA code are found in m_aulCACodeMSBsPRN[]. The upper 19 bits of L1P or L2P must be derived using the fact L1P
and L2P are within 128 m (419.9 ft) of L1CA.
To determine L1P or L2P:
1.
2.

Use the lower 16 bits provided in the message.
Set the upper bits to that of L1CA.

3.

Add or subtract on LSB of the upper bits (256 meters (839.9 feet)) so that L1P or L2P are with in 1/2 LSB (128 m
(419.9 ft))
The carrier phase is in units of cycles, rather than meters, and is held to within 1023 cycles of the respective code range.
Only the lower 16+7 = 23 bits of carrier phase are transmitted in Bin 76.
To determine the remaining bits:
1.

Convert the respective code range (determined above) into cycles by dividing by the carrier wavelength. This is
the nominal reference phase.
Extract the 16 and 7 bit blocks of carrier phase from bin 76 and arrange it to form the lower 23 bits of carrier
phase.

2.
3.
4.

Command
Format to
Request
Message

Message
Format

Set the upper bits (bit 23 and above) equal to those of the nominal reference phase
Add or subtract the least significant upper bit (8192 cycles) so that carrier phase most closely agrees with the
nominal reference phase (to within 4096 cycles).

$JBIN,76,r
where:

•

'76' = Bin76 message

•

'r' = message rate in Hz (20, 10, 2, 1, 0, or .2)

Message Component

Description

Type

Bytes

TOW

Predicted GPS time in seconds

Double

8

Week

GPS week number

Unsigned short

2

Spare1

Unsigned long

2

Spare2

Unsigned long

4

Values

L2PSatObs[12]
(array for next 3 fields)

L2 satellite observation data

Structure array

12 x 12 =
144

CS_TT_W3_SNR

See following

Unsigned long

4

•

Bits 0-11 (12 bits)
SNR; 10.0 X log10(0.1164xSNR_value)

•

Bits 12-14 (3 bits)
Cycle Slip Warn (warning for potential 1/2 cycle slips); a warning exists if any of these bits are

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 406

Commands and Messages

set

•

Bit 15 (1 bit)
Long Track Time;1 if Track Time > 25.5 sec (0 otherwise)

•

Bits 16-23 (8 bits)
Track Time (signal tracking time in seconds); LSB = 0.1 seconds; Range = 0 to 25.5 seconds

•

Bits 24-31 (8 bits)
Cycle Slips; increments by 1 every cycle slip with natural roll-over after 255

P7_Doppler_FL

See following

Unsigned long

4

•

Bit 0 (1 bit)
Phase Valid (Boolean);1 if valid phase (0 otherwise)

•

Bits 1-23 (23 bits)
Doppler (magnitude of Doppler);LSB = 1/512 cycle/sec; Range = 0 to 16384 cycle/sec

•

Bit 24 (1 bit)
Doppler Sign (sigh of Doppler);1 = negative, 0 = positive

•

Bits 25-31 (7 bits)
Carrier Phase (High part) (Upper 7 bits of the 23 bit carrier phase): LSB = 64 cycles, MSB =
4096 cycles

CodeAndPhase

See following

Unsigned long

4

•

Bits 0-15 (16 bits)
Pseudorange (lower 16 bits of code pseudorange);LSB = 1/256 meters, MSB = 128 meters
Note: For CA code, the upper 19 bits are given in L1CACodeMSBsPRN[] below

•

Bits 16-31 (16 bits)
Carrier Phase (lower 16 bits of the carrier phase); LSB = 1/1024 cycles, MSB = 32 cycles
Note: The 7 MSBs are given in P7_Doppler_FL (see preceding row in this table)

L1CASatObs[15]
(array for next 3 fields)

L1 satellite code observation
data

Structure array

15 x 12 =
180

CS_TT_W3_SNR

See following

Unsigned long

4

•

Bits 0-11 (12 bits)
SNR; 10.0 X log10(0.1024xSNR_value)

•

Bits 12-14 (3 bits)
Cycle Slip Warn (warning for potential 1/2 cycle slips); a warning exists if any of these bits are
set

•

Bit 15 (1 bit)
Long Track Time;1 if Track Time > 25.5 sec (0 otherwise)

•

Bits 16-23 (8 bits)
Track Time (signal tracking time in seconds); LSB = 0.1 seconds; Range = 0 to 25.5 seconds

•

Bits 24-31 (8 bits)
Cycle Slips; increments by 1 every cycle slip with natural roll-over after 255

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 407

Commands and Messages
P7_Doppler_FL

See following

Unsigned long

4

•

Bit 0 (1 bit)
Phase Valid (Boolean);1 if valid phase (0 otherwise)

•

Bits 1-23 (23 bits)
Doppler (magnitude of Doppler);LSB = 1/512 cycle/sec; Range = 0 to 16384 cycle/sec

•

Bit 24 (1 bit)
Doppler Sign (sigh of Doppler);1 = negative, 0 = positive

•

Bits 25-31 (7 bits)
Carrier Phase (High part) (Upper 7 bits of the 23 bit carrier phase): LSB = 64 cycles, MSB =
4096 cycles

CodeAndPhase

See following

Unsigned long

4

•

Bits 0-15 (16 bits)
Pseudorange (lower 16 bits of code pseudorange);LSB = 1/256 meters, MSB = 128 meters
Note: For CA code, the upper 19 bits are given in L1CACodeMSBsPRN[] below

•

Bits 16-31 (16 bits)
Carrier Phase (lower 16 bits of the carrier phase); LSB = 1/1024 cycles, MSB = 32 cycles
Note: The 7 MSBs are given in P7_Doppler_FL (see preceding row in this table)

L1CACodeMSBsPRN[15]

L1CA code observation

Array of 15
Unsigned long

15 x 4 =

See
following

60

•

Bits 0-7 (8 bits)
PRN (space vehicle ID);PRN = 0 if no data

•

Bits 8-12 (5 bits)
Unused

•

Bits 13-31 (19 bits)
L1CA Range (upper 19 bits of L1CA); LSB = 256 meters, MSB = 67,108,864 meters

L1PCode[12]

L1(P) code observation data

Array of 12
Unsigned long

12 x 4 =
48

See
following

•

Bits 0-15 (16 bits)
L1P Range (lower 16 bits of the L1P code pseudorange);LSB = 1/256 meters, MSB = 128
meters

•

Bits 16-27 (12 bits)
L1P SNR (L1P signal-to-noise ratio); SNR = 10.0 x log(0.1164 x SNR_value), if 0, then L1P
channel not tracked

•

Bits 28-31 (4 bits)
Unused

wCeckSum

Sum of all bytes of header and
data

Unsigned short

2

wCRLF

Carriage return line feed

Unsigned short

2

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 408

Commands and Messages

Structure

typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader m_sHead;
double

m_dTow;

/* GPS Time in seconds */

unsigned short

m_wWeek;

/* GPS Week Number */

unsigned short

m_wSpare1;

/* spare 1 (zero)*/ unsigned

long

m_ulSpare2;

/* spare 2 (zero)*/

SObsPacket

m_asL2PObs[CHANNELS_12];

/* 12 sets of L2(P) observations

SObsPacket

m_asL1CAObs[CHANNELS_L1_E];

/* 15 sets of L1(CA) observations

unsigned long

m_aulCACodeMSBsPRN[CHANNELS_L1_E]; /* array of 15words.

*/
*/

bit 7:0 (8 bits) =
satellite
PRN, 0 if no satellite
bit 12:8 (5 bits) =
spare
bit 31:13 (19 bits) =
upper
19 bits of L1CA LSB
= 256 meters
MSB = 67108864 meters */
unsigned long
L1(P)

m_auL1Pword[CHANNELS_12];

/* array of 12 words relating to
code. Bit 0-15 (16 bits) lower bits of

16
the L1P code pseudo
range.
LSB = 1/256 meters MSB
= 128 meters
Bits 16-27 (12 bits) = L1P
SNR_value
SNR = 10.0*log10(
0.1164*SNR_value)
If Bits 16-27 all zero, no L1P
track

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 409

Commands and Messages

Bits 28-31 (4 bits) spare */

unsigned short

m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the datalength */

unsigned short

m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */

} SBinaryMsg76;

/* length = 8 + (448) + 2 + 2 = 460 */

Additional
Information
Related
Commands

JBIN

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 410

Commands and Messages

Bin80 Message
Message
Type

Binary

Description

SBAS data frame information

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JBIN,80,r
where:

•
•

Message
Format

Structure

'80' = Bin80 message
'r' = message rate in Hz (1 or 0)

Message
Component

Description

Type

Bytes

PRN

Broadcast PRN

Unsigned short

2

Spare

Not used at this time

Unsigned short

2

MsgSecOfWeek

Seconds of week for message

Unsigned long

4

WaasMsg[8]

250-bit WAAS message (RTCA DO0229).
8 unsigned longs, with most significant bit
received first.

Unsigned long

4x8=
32

Values

Future use

typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader

unsigned short m_wPRN;

/* Broadcast PRN */

unsigned short m_wSpare;

/* spare (zero) */

unsigned long

m_ulMsgSecOfWeek;

/* Seconds of Week For Message */ unsigned

long

m_aulWaasMsg[8];

/* Actual 250 bit waas message*/ unsigned

short m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the datalength */

unsigned short m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */

} SBinaryMsg80;

Additional
Information

Related

m_sHead;

/* length = 8 + (40) + 2 + 2 = 52 */

Message has a BlockID of 80 and is 40 bytes, excluding the header and epilogue

JBIN

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 411

Commands and Messages

Commands

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 412

Commands and Messages

Bin89 Message
Message
Type

Binary

Description

SBAS satellite tracking information (supports three SBAS satellites)

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JBIN,89,r
where:

•
•

Message
Format

Structure

'89' = Bin89 message
'r' = message rate in Hz (1 or 0)

Message Component

Description

Type

Bytes

GPSSecOfWeek

GPS tow integer sec

Long

MaskSBASTracked

SBAS satellites tracked, bit
mapped 0..3

Byte

MaskSBASUSED

SBAS satellites used, bit
mapped 0..3

Byte

Spare

Spare

Unsigned
short

ChannelData[CHANNELS_SBAS_E]

SBAS channel data

SChannelData

Values

typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

long

m_lGPSSecOfWeek;

unsigned char

/* GPS tow integer sec */

m_byMaskSBASTracked; /* SBAS Sats Tracked, bit mapped 0..3 */

unsigned char

m_byMaskSBASUSED;

/* SBAS Sats Used, bit mapped 0..3 */

unsigned short

m_wSpare;

/* spare */

SChannelData

m_asChannelData[CHANNELS_SBAS_E];

unsigned short

m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the datalength */

unsigned short

m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */

} SBinaryMsg89;

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

/* SBAS channel data */

/* length = 8 + 80 + 2 + 2 = 92 */

Page 413

Commands and Messages

Additional
Information
Related
Commands

JBIN

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 414

Commands and Messages

Bin93 Message
Message Type

Description

Command
Format to
Request
Message

Binary

SBAS ephemeris information

$JBIN,93,r
where:

•
•

Message
Format

'93' = Bin93 message
'r' = message rate in Hz (1 or 0)

Message
Component

Description

Type

Bytes

SV

Satellite to which this data belongs

Unsigned short

2

Spare

Not used at this time

Unsigned short

2

TOWSecOfWeek

Time at which this arrived
(LSB = 1 sec)

Unsigned long

4

Unsigned short

2

IODE

Structure

URA

Consult the ICD-GPS-200 for
definition in Appendix A

Unsigned short

2

TO

Bit 0 = 1 sec

Long

4

XG

Bit 0 = 0.08 m

Long

4

YG

Bit 0 = 0.08 m

Long

4

ZG

Bit 0 = 0.4 m

Long

4

XGDot

Bit 0 = 0.000625 m/sec

Long

4

YXDot

Bit 0 = 0.000625 m/sec

Long

4

ZGDot

Bit 0 = 0.004 m/sec

Long

4

XGDotDot

Bit 0 = 0.0000125 m/sec/sec

Long

4

YGDotDot

Bit 0 = 0.0000125 m/sec/sec

Long

4

ZGDotDot

Bit 0 = 0.0000625 m/sec/sec

Long

4

Gf0

Bit 0 = 2**-31 sec

Unsigned short

2

Gf0Dot

Bit 0 = 2**-40sec/sec

Unsigned short

2

Values

Future use

typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader m_sHead;

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 415

Commands and Messages

unsigned short

m_wSV;

/* The satellite to which this data belongs. */

unsigned short

m_wWeek;

/* Week corresponding to m_lTOW*/

unsigned long

m_lSecOfWeekArrived; /* time at which this arrived (LSB = 1sec)

unsigned short

m_wIODE;

unsigned short

m_wURA;

*/

/* See 2.5.3 of Global Pos Sys Std Pos Service Spec

*/
long

m_lTOW;

/* Sec of WEEK Bit 0 = 1 sec */

long

m_lXG;

/* Bit 0 = 0.08 m */

long

m_lYG;

/* Bit 0 = 0.08 m */

long

m_lZG;

/* Bit 0 = 0.4 m */

long

m_lXGDot;

/* Bit 0 = 0.000625 m/sec */

long

m_lYGDot;

/* Bit 0 = 0.000625 m/sec */

long

m_lZGDot;

/* Bit 0 = 0.004 m/sec */

long

m_lXGDotDot;

m_lYGDotDot;

/* Bit 0 = 0.0000125 m/sec/sec */ long

/* Bit 0 = 0.0000125 m/sec/sec */ long m_lZGDotDot;

/* Bit 0 = 0.0000625 m/sec/sec */ short m_nGf0; /* Bit 0 = 2**-31
sec */
short

m_nGf0Dot;

/* Bit 0 = 2**-40 sec/sec */

unsigned short

m_wCheckSum; /* sum of all bytes of the datalength */

unsigned short

m_wCRLF;

} SBinaryMsg93;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */
/* length = 8 + (56) + 2 + 2 = 68 */

Additional
Information

Message has a BlockID of 93 and is 45 bytes, excluding the header and epilogue

Related
Commands

JBIN

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 416

Commands and Messages

Bin94 Message

Message
Type

Binary

Description

Ionospheric and UTC conversion parameters

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JBIN,94,r
where:

•
•

Message
Format

Structure

'94' = Bin94 message
'r' = 1 (on) or 0 (off)
When set to on the message is sent once and then sent again whenever satellite information changes

Message
Component

Description

Type

Bytes

a0, a1,a2, a3

AFCRL alpha parameters

Double

8 x 4 = 32

b0, b1,b2, b3

AFCRL beta parameters

Double

8 x 4 = 32

A0, A1

Coefficients for determining UTC time

Double

8 x 2 = 16

tot

Reference time for A0 and A1,
second of GPS week

Unsigned long

4

wnt

Current UTC reference week

Unsigned short

2

wnlsf

Week number when dtlsf becomes
effective

Unsigned short

2

dn

Day of week (1-7) when dtlsf
becomes effective

Unsigned short

2

dtls

Cumulative past leap

Short

2

dtlsf

Scheduled future leap

Short

2

Spare

Not used at this time

Short

2

Values

Future use

typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

/* Iono parameters. */
double

m_a0,m_a1,m_a2,m_a3;

/* AFCRL alpha parameters. */

double

m_b0,m_b1,m_b2,m_b3;

/* AFCRL beta parameters.

*/

/* UTC conversion parameters. */

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 417

Commands and Messages

double

m_A0,m_A1;

/* Coeffs for determining UTC time. */

unsigned long

m_tot;

/* Reference time for A0 & A1, sec of GPS week. */

unsigned short m_wnt;

/* Current UTC reference week number. */

unsigned short m_wnlsf;

/* Week number when dtlsf becomes effective. */

unsigned short m_dn;

/* Day of week (1-7) when dtlsf becomes effective.

short

m_dtls;

/* Cumulative past leap seconds. */

short

m_dtlsf;

/* Scheduled future leap seconds. */

*/

unsigned short m_wSpare1;

/* spare 4 (zero)*/

unsigned short m_wCheckSum; /* sum of all bytes of the datalength */
unsigned short m_wCRLF;
} SBinaryMsg94;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */
/* length = 8 + (96) + 2 + 2 =

Additional
Information

Message has a BlockID of 94 and is 96 bytes, excluding the header and epilogue

Related
Commands

JBIN

108 */

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 418

Commands and Messages

Bin95 Message
Message
Type

Binary

Description

GPS ephemeris information

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JBIN,95,r
where:

•
•

Message
Format

Structure

'95' = Bin95 message
'r' = 1 (on) or 0 (off)
When set to on the message is sent once (one message for each tracked satellite at 1 second intervals) and
then sent again whenever satellite information changes

Message
Component

Description

Type

Bytes

SV

Satellite to which this data belongs

Unsigned short

2

Spare1

Not used at this time

Unsigned short

2

SecOfWeek

Time at which this arrived (LSB =
6)

Unsigned long

4

SF1words[10]

Unparsed SF 1 message

Unsigned long

4 x 10 = 40

SF2words[10]

Unparsed SF 2 message

Unsigned long

4 x 10 = 40

SF3words[10]

Unparsed SF 3 message

Unsigned long

4 x 10 = 40

Values

Future use

typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

unsigned short

m_wSV;

/* The satellite to which this data belongs.

*/
unsigned short

m_wSpare1;

/* spare 1 (chan number (as zero 9/1/2004)*/

unsigned long

m_TOW6SecOfWeek; /* time at which this arrived (LSB = 6sec)

*/
unsigned long m_SF1words[10]; /* Unparsed SF 1 message words. */ unsigned long
m_SF2words[10];

/*

Unparsed

SF

2

message

words.

m_SF3words[10];

/* Unparsed SF 3 message words.*/

*/

unsigned

long

/* Each of the subframe words contains

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 419

Commands and Messages

one 30-bit GPS word in the lower
30 bits, The upper two bits are ignored
Bits are placed in the words from left to
right as they are received */
unsigned short

m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the datalength */

unsigned short

m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */

} SBinaryMsg95;

/* length = 8 + (128) + 2 + 2 = 140 */

Additional
Information

Message has a BlockID of 95 and is 128 bytes, excluding the header and epilogue

Related
Commands

JBIN

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 420

Commands and Messages

Bin96 Message

Message
Type

Binary

Description

GPS L1 code and carrier phase information

Command
Format to
Request
Message

Message
Format

$JBIN,96,r
where:

•
•

'96' = Bin96 message
'r' = message rate in Hz (20, 10, 2, 1, or 0)

Message Component

Description

Type

Bytes

Values

Spare1

Not used at this time

Unsigned short

2

Future use

Week

GPS week number

Unsigned short

2

TOW

Predicted GPS time in
seconds

Double

8

UNICS_TT_SNR_PRN[12]

See following

Unsigned long

4

•

Bits 0-7 (8 bits)
Pseudorandom noise; PRN is 0 if no data

•

Bits 8-15 (8 bits)
Signal-to noise ratio (SNR); SNR=10.0 *log10* (0.8192*SNR)

•

Bits 16-23 (8 bits)
PhaseTrackTime (PTT); in units of 1/10 sec; range=0 to 25 sec (if greater than 25 see
UIDoppler_FL[12] below)

•

Bits 24-31 (8 bits)
CycleSlip Counter (CSC); increments by 1 every cycle with natural rollover after 255

UIDoppler_FL[12]

See following

Unsigned long

4

•

Bit 0 (1 bit)
Phase; Location 0; 1 if valid (0 otherwise)

•

Bit 1 (1 bit)
TrackTime; 1 if track time > 25.5 seconds (0 otherwise)

•

Bits 2-3 (2 bits)
Unused

•

Bits 4-31 (28 bits)
Doppler; Signed (two’s compliment) Doppler in units of m/sec x 4096. (i.e., LSB=1/4096), range
= +/- 32768 m/sec. Computed as phase change over 1/10 sec.

PseudoRange[12]

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Pseudorange

Double

8

Page 421

Commands and Messages
Phase[12]

Structure

Phase (m) L1 wave =
0.190293672798365

Double

8

typedef struct
{

SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

unsigned short

m_wSpare1;

/* spare 1 (zero)*/

unsigned short

m_wWeek;

/* GPS Week Number */

double

m_dTow;

/* Predicted GPS Time in seconds */

SObservations

m_asObvs[CHANNELS_12];/* 12 sets of observations */

unsigned short

m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the datalength */

unsigned short

m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */

} SBinaryMsg96;

/* length = 8 + (300) + 2 + 2 = 312 */

Additional
Information

Message has a BlockID of 96 and is 300 bytes, excluding the header and epilogue

Related
Commands

JBIN

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 422

Commands and Messages

Bin97 Message

Message
Type

Binary

Description

Processor statistics

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JBIN,97,r
where:

•
•

Message
Format

Structure

'97' = Bin97 message
'r' = message rate in Hz (20, 10, 2, 1, 0, or .2)

Message
Component

Description

Type

Bytes

Values

CPUFactor

CPU utilization factor
Multiply by 450e-06 to get
percentage of spare CPU that is
available
Note: This field is only relevant on
the old SLX platforms and Eclipse
platform. It is not relevant for the
Crescent receivers.

Unsigned long

4

Positive

MissedSubFrame

Total number of missed sub frames
in the navigation message since
power on

Unsigned short

2

Positive

MaxSubFramePnd

Max sub frames queued for
processing at any one time

Unsigned short

2

Positive

MissedAccum

Total number of missed code
accumulation measurements in the
channel tracking loop

Unsigned short

2

Positive

MissedMeas

Total number missed pseudorange
measurements

Unsigned short

2

Positive

Spare 1

Not used at this time

Unsigned long

4

Future use

Spare 2

Not used at this time

Unsigned long

4

Future use

Spare 3

Not used at this time

Unsigned long

4

Future use

Spare 4

Not used at this time

Unsigned short

2

Future use

Spare 5

Not used at this time

Unsigned short

2

Future use

typedef struct
{

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 423

Commands and Messages

SUnionMsgHeader
unsigned long

m_sHead;
m_ulCPUFactor;

/* CPU utilization Factor (%=multby 450e-6)

*/
unsigned short m_wMissedSubFrame;

/* missed subframes */

unsigned short m_wMaxSubFramePend; /* max subframe pending */
unsigned short m_wMissedAccum;

/* missed accumulations */

unsigned short m_wMissedMeas;

/* missed measurements */

unsigned long

m_ulSpare1;

/* spare 1 (zero)*/ unsigned

long

m_ulSpare2;

/* spare 2 (zero)*/ unsigned

long

m_ulSpare3;

/* spare 3 (zero)*/ unsigned

short m_wSpare4; /* spare 4 (zero)*/ unsigned short m_wSpare5;

/*

spare 5 (zero)*/
unsigned short m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the datalength */

unsigned short m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */

} SBinaryMsg97;

/* length = 8 + (28) + 2 + 2 = 40 */

Additional
Information

Message has a BlockID of 97 and is 28 bytes, excluding the header and epilogue

Related
Commands

JBIN

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 424

Commands and Messages

Bin98 Message
Message
Type

Binary

Description

GPS satellite and almanac information

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JBIN,98,r
where:

•
•

Message
Format

Structure

'98' = Bin98 message
'r' = message rate in Hz (1 or 0)

Message
Component

Description

Type

Bytes

Values

AlmanData[8]

SV data, 8 at a time

SSVAlmanData

LastAlman

Last almanac processed

Byte

1

0 to 31

IonoUTCVFlag

Flag that is set when ionosphere
modeling data is extracted from the
GPS sub frame 4

Byte

1

0 = not logged
2 = valid

Spare

Not used at this time

Unsigned short

2

Future use

See following

typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

SSVAlmanData

m_asAlmanData[8];

/* SV data, 8 at a time */

unsigned char

m_byLastAlman;

/* last almanac processed */

unsigned char

m_byIonoUTCVFlag;

/* iono UTC flag */

unsigned short

m_wSpare;

/* spare */

unsigned short

m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the datalength */

unsigned short

m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */

} SBinaryMsg98;

/* length = 8 + (64+1+1+2) + 2 + 2 = 80 */

Additional
Information

Message has a BlockID of 98 and is 68 bytes, excluding the header and epilogue

Related
Commands

JBIN

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 425

Commands and Messages
Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 426

Commands and Messages

Bin99 Message
Message
Type

Binary

Description

GPS L1 diagnostic information

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JBIN,99,r
where:

•
•

Message
Format

Structure

'99' = Bin99 message
'r' = message rate in Hz (1 or 0)

Message Component

Description

Type

Bytes

Values

NavMode

Navigation mode data
(lower 3 bits hold the
GPS mode, upper bit
set if differential is
available)

Byte

1

Lower 3 bits
take on the
values:
0 = time not
valid
1 = No fix
2 = 2D fix
3 = 3D fix
Upper bit (bit
7) is 1 if
differential is
available

UTCTimeDiff

Whole seconds
between UTC and
GPS time (GPS minus
UTC)

Byte

1

Positive

GPSWeek

GPS week associated
with this message

Unsigned short

2

0 to 65536

GPSTimeofWeek

GPS tow (sec)
associated with this
message

Double

8

0.0 to
604800.0

sChannelData[CHANNELS_12]

Channel data

SChannelData

12 x 24 =
288

ClockErrAtL1

Clock error of the GPS
clock oscillator at L1
frequency in Hz

Short

2

-32768 to
32768

Spare

Not used at this time

Unsigned short

2

Future use

typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

m_sHead;

Page 427

Commands and Messages
unsigned char

m_byNavMode;

/* Nav Mode FIX_NO, FIX_2D, FIX_3D
(high bit =has_diff) */

char

m_cUTCTimeDiff;

/* whole Seconds between UTC and GPS

unsigned short m_wGPSWeek;

/* GPS week */

double

m_dGPSTimeOfWeek;

/* GPS tow

SChannelData

m_asChannelData[CHANNELS_12]; /* channel data */ short
m_nClockErrAtL1;

*/

/* clock error at L1, Hz */

unsigned short m_wSpare;

/* spare */

unsigned short m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the datalength */

unsigned short m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */

} SBinaryMsg99;

/* length = 8 + 304 + 2 + 2 = 316 */

Additional
Information

Message has a BlockID of 99 and is 304 bytes, excluding the header and epilogue

Related
Commands

JBIN

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 428

*/

Commands and Messages

Bin100 Message
Message
Type

Binary

Description

GPS L2 diagnostic information

Command
Format to
Request
Message

Message
Format

$JBIN,100,r
where:

•
•

'100' = Bin100 message
'r' = message rate in Hz (1 or 0)

Message Component

Description

Type

Bytes

Values

NavMode

Navigation mode data
(lower 3 bits hold the
GPS mode, upper bit
set if differential is
available)

Byte

1

Lower 3 bits
take on the
values:
0 = time not
valid
1 = No fix
2 = 2D fix
3 = 3D fix
Upper bit (bit
7) is 1 if
differential is
available

UTCTimeDiff

Whole seconds
between UTC and
GPS time (GPS minus
UTC)

Byte

1

Positive

GPSWeek

GPS week associated
with this message

Unsigned short

2

0 to 65535

MaskSatsUsedL2P

L2P satellites used,
bit mapped 0..31

Unsigned long

GPSTimeofWeek

GPS tow (sec)
associated with this
message

Double

8

0.0 to
604800.0

MaskSatsUsedL1P

L1P satellites used,
bit mapped 0..31

Unsigned long

sChannelData[CHANNELS_12]

L2 channel data

SChannelData

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

12 x 24 =
288

Page 429

Commands and Messages
Structure

typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader m_sHead;
unsigned char

m_byNavMode;

/* Nav Mode FIX_NO, FIX_2D, FIX_3D
(high bit =has_diff) */

char

m_cUTCTimeDiff;

/* whole Seconds between UTC and GPS

unsigned short

m_wGPSWeek;

/* GPS week */

unsigned long

m_ulMaskSatsUsedL2P

/* L2P SATS Used, bit mapped 0..31 */

double

m_dGPSTimeOfWeek;

/* GPS tow

unsigned long

m_ulMaskSatsUsedL1P; /* L1P SATS Used, bit mapped 0..31 */

SChannelL2Data

m_asChannelData[CHANNELS_12];

unsigned short

m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the datalength */

unsigned short

m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */

} SBinaryMsg100;

*/

/* channel data */

/* length = 8 + 260 + 2 + 2 = 272 */

Additional
Information

Message has a BlockID of 100 and is 260 bytes, excluding the header and epilogue

Related
Commands

JBIN

Topic Last Updated: v1.08 / June 9, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 430

*/

Commands and Messages

Bin122 Message
Message
Type

Description
Command
Format to
Request
Message

Binary

Alternate position solution data

$JBIN,122,r
where:

•

'122' = Bin122 message

•

'r' = message rate in Hz

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 431

Commands and Messages

Message
Format

Message
Component

Description

Type

Bytes

Values

GPSTimeOfWeek

GPS tow (sec) associated with this
message

Double

8

to 604800.0

GPSWeek

GPS week associated with this
message

Unsigned
short

2

0 to 65535

Unsigned
char

1

Unsigned char

1

Unsigned short

2

Unsigned char
array

6*1 =
6

PosType

Correction source

BaseID
SatUsedCount

Type of position
0: Autonomous
1: SBAS
2: Differential phase solution
3: Differential code solution
4: RTK (fixed vs. float is not specified)
5: RTK Fixed
6: RTK Float
7: Tracer
8: Manual
9: Atlas (fixed vs. float not specified)
10: SureFix
11: FastFix
Source of corrections
0: No correction
1: SBAS
2: eDif
3: Atlas
6: RTCM unspecified version
7: RTCM 2.3
8: RTCM 3
9: ROX
11: CMR
Base station ID
Sats used in each system
[GPS, GLN, GAL, BDS, SBAS, QZSS]

0 to 65535

Latitude

Latitude in degrees north

Double

8

-90.0 to 90.0

Longitude

Longitude in degrees east

Double

8

-180.0 to 180.0

Height

Altitude above ellipsoid in meters

Float

4

AgeOfDiff

Age of differential, in seconds

Float

4

VNorth

North-South velocity, +North m/s

Float

4

VEast

East-West velocity, +East m/s

Float

4

VUP

Vertical velocity, +up m/s

Float

4

CovNN

Covariance North-North

Float

4

CovNE

Covariance North-East

Float

4

CovNU

Covariance North-Up

Float

4

CovEE

Covariance East-East

Float

4

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 432

Commands and Messages
CovEU

Covariance East-Up

Float

4

CovUU

Covariance Up-Up

Float

4

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 433

Commands and Messages
Structure

typedef struct

{
SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

double

m_dGPSTimeOfWeek;

// GPS tow

[8 bytes]

unsigned short

m_wGPSWeek;

// GPS week

[2 bytes]

unsigned char

m_byPhxPosType;

// Phoenix position type

[1 bytes]

unsigned char

m_byCorSource;

// Phoenix correction source

[1 byte ]

unsigned short

m_wBaseStationId;

// Base station ID

[2 bytes]

unsigned char

m_bySatUsedCount[6];

// Satellites used per system

[6 bytes]

//

[GPS GLN GAL BDS SBAS QZSS]

double

m_dLatitude;

// Latitude degrees, -90..90

[8 bytes]

double

m_dLongitude;

// Longitude degrees, -180..180

[8 bytes]

float

m_fHeight;

// (m), Altitude ellipsoid

[4 bytes]

float

m_fAgeOfDiff;

// age of differential, seconds

[4 bytes]

float

m_fVNorth;

// North-South Velocity +North m/s

[4 bytes]

float

m_fVEast;

// East-West Velocity +East m/s

[4 bytes]

float

m_fVUp;

// Vertical Velocity +up

[4 bytes]

float

m_fCovNN;

// Covariance North-North

[4 bytes]

float

m_fCovNE;

// Covariance North-East

[4 bytes]

float

m_fCovNU;

// Covariance North-Up

[4 bytes]

float

m_fCovEE;

// Covariance East-East

[4 bytes]

float

m_fCovEU;

// Covariance East-Up

[4 bytes]

float

m_fCovUU;

// Covariance Up-Up

[4 bytes]

m/s

unsigned short m_wCheckSum;

/* sum of all bytes of the header and data */

unsigned short m_wCRLF;

/* Carriage Return Line Feed */

} SBinaryMsg122;

/* length = 8 + 80 + 2 + 2 = 92 */

Additional Information

Related
Commands

JBIN

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 434

Commands and Messages

Topic Last Updated: v1.09 / January 8, 2018

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 435

Commands and Messages

Bin209 Message

Message
Type

Binary

Description

SNR and status for all GNSS tracks

Command
Format to
Request
Message

Message
Format

$JBIN,209,r
where:

•
•

'209' = Bin209 message
'r' = message rate in Hz

Message Component

Description

Type

Bytes

Values

GPSTimeofWeek

GPS tow (sec)
associated with this
message

Double

8

0.0 to
604800.0

GPSWeek

GPS week associated
with this message

Unsigned short

2

0 to 65535

UTCTimeDiff

Whole Seconds
between UTC and
GPS

char

1

Page

Bits 0-1 = Antenna:
0 = Master, 1 =
Slave, 2 = Slave2

Unsigned char

1

Bits 2-4 = Page ID:
0 = page 1, 1 =
page 2, etc
Bits 5-7 = Max
page ID: 0 = only 1
page, 1 = 2 pages

sSVData

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

SNR data

Page 436

Commands and Messages
Structure

typedef struct
{
SUnionMsgHeader

m_sHead;

//

double

m_dGPSTimeOfWeek;

// GPS tow

unsigned short

m_wGPSWeek;

// GPS week

char

m_cUTCTimeDiff;

// Whole Seconds between UTC and GPS

unsigned char

m_byPage;
// Bits 0-1 = Antenna: 0 = Master, 1 = Slave, 2 = Slave2
// Bits 2-4 = Page ID: 0 = page 1, 1 = page 2, etc
// Bits 5-7 = Max page ID: 0 = only 1 page, 1 = 2 pages

SSVSNRData

m_asSVData[40];

// SNR data

unsigned short

m_wCheckSum;

// sum of all bytes of the header and data

unsigned short

m_wCRLF;

// Carriage Return Line Feed

} SBinaryMsg209;

// length = 8 + 332 + 2 + 2 = 344

Additional
Information
Related Commands
JBIN

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / Octoter 13, 2016

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 437

Commands and Messages

CRMSK Message

Message
Type

Beacon Receiver

Description

Operational status message of SBX

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$GPCRQ,MSK

$CRMSK,FFF.F,X,DDD,Y,N*CC
Message
Format

where:
Message
Component

Description

FFF.F

Frequency, in kHz (283.5 to 325)

X

Tune mode (M = manual, A = automatic)

DDD

MSK bit rate, in bps (100 or 200)

Y

MSK rate selection mode (M = manual, A = automatic)

N

Period of output of performance status message, in seconds (0 to 100);
see CRMSS

*CC

Checksum



Carriage return



Line feed

Additional
Information
Related
Commands

GPCRQ,MSK

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 433

Commands and Messages

CRMSS Message

Message
Type

Beacon Receiver

Description

Performance status message of SBX

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$GPCRQ,MSS

$CRMSS,XX,YY,FFF.F,DDD*CC
Message
Format

where:
Message
Component

Description

XX

Signal strength, in dB μV/m

YY

Signal-to-noise ratio, in dB

FFF.F

Frequency, in kHz (283.5 to 325)

DDD

MSK bit rate in bps (100 or 200)

*CC

Checksum



Carriage return



Line feed

Additional
Information
Related
Commands

GPCRQ,MSS

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 434

Commands and Messages

GLMLA Message

Message
Type

GLONASS

Description

GLONASS almanac data
Contains complete almanac data for one GLONASS satellite. Multiple sentences may be transmitted, one for each
satellite in the GLONASS constellation.

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JASC,GLMLA,r[,OTHER]
where:

•

'r' = 1 (on) or 0 (off)
When set to on the message is sent once (one message for each tracked satellite at 1 second intervals)
and then sent again whenever satellite information changes

•

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when you send the command
without it (and without the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when you send the
command with it (without the brackets)

Page 435

Commands and Messages

Message
Format

$GLMLA,A.A,B.B,CC,D.D,EE,FFFF,GG,HHHH,IIII,JJJJJJ,KKKKKK,MMMMMM,
NNNNNN,PPP,QQQ*hh
where:
Message
Component

Description

A.A

Total number of sentences

B.B

Sentence number

CC

Satellite ID (satellite slot) number

D.D

Calendar day count within the four year period beginning with the previous leap year

EE

Generalized health of the satellite and carrier frequency number respectively

FFFF

Eccentricity

GG

DOT, rate of change of the draconitic circling time

HHHH

Argument of perigee

IIII

16 MSB of system time scale correction

JJJJJJ

Correction to the average value of the draconitic circling time

KKKKKK

Time of the ascension node, almanac reference time

MMMMMM

Greenwich longitude of the ascension node

NNNNNN

Correction to the average value of the inclination angle

PPP

LSB of system time scale correction

QQQ

Course value of the time scale shift

Example

Additional
Information

Similar to the GPS message GPALM

Related
Commands

JASC,GL

Topic Last Updated: v1.05 / January 18, 2013

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 436

Commands and Messages

GNSSPositionData Message
Message
Type

NMEA 2000 CAN

Description

Detailed GPS position information
The GNSSPositionData message (PGN 0x1F805/129029) has an update rate of 1 Hz and DLC of 43, 47, or 51, dependent
on the NumberOfReferenceStations.

Command
Format to
Request
Message

Message is continuously output on the CAN port for the following products:

Message
Format

The following table provides the start bit, length (bit), value type, factor, and offset for the GNSSPositionData message.

•
•
•

A100, continuously output
A325, continuously output when NMEA 2000 mode is enabled
V102, continuously output when NMEA 2000 mode is enabled, requires NMEA 2000 adapter

Field Name

Start
bit

Length
(Bit)

Byte
Order

Value Type

Factor

SequenceID

0

8

Intel

Unsigned

1

PositionDate

8

16

Intel

Unsigned

1

PositionTime

24

32

Intel

Unsigned

0.0001

LatitudeLow

56

32

Intel

Unsigned

1.00E-16

LatitudeHigh

88

32

Intel

Signed

4.29E-07

LongitudeLow

120

32

Intel

Unsigned

1.00E-16

LongitudeHigh

152

32

Intel

Signed

4.29E-07

AltitudeLow

184

32

Intel

Unsigned

1.00E-6

AltitudeHigh

216

32

Intel

Signed

4294.97

TypeOfSystem

248

4

Intel

Unsigned

1

GNSSMethod

252

4

Intel

Unsigned

1

GNSSIntegrity

256

2

Intel

Unsigned

1

GNSS_Reserved1

258

6

Intel

Unsigned

1

NumberOfSVs

264

8

Intel

Unsigned

1

HDOP

272

16

Intel

Signed

0.01

PDOP

288

16

Intel

Signed

0.01

GeodalSeparation

304

32

Intel

Signed

0.01

NumberOfReferenceStations

336

8

Intel

Unsigned

1

ReferenceStationType1

344

4

Intel

Unsigned

1

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 437

Commands and Messages

ReferenceStationID1

348

12

Intel

Unsigned

1

AgeOfDGNSSCorrections1

360

16

Intel

Unsigned

0.01

ReferenceStationType2

376

4

Intel

Unsigned

1

ReferenceStationID2

380

12

Intel

Unsigned

1

AgeOfDGNSSCorrections2

392

16

Intel

Unsigned

0.01

The following table provides the offset, minimum and maximum values, unit, and comment for the GNSSPositionData
message.

Field Name

Offset

Min

Max

SequenceID

0

0

255

PositionDate

0

0

65532

day

Days since January 1, 1970.
Date is relative to UTC time.

PositionTime

0

0

86401

sec

24 hour clock, 0=midnight, time
is in UTC

LatitudeLow

0

0

4.29E-07

deg

Latitude referenced to WGS-84

LatitudeHigh

0

-90

90

deg

Latitude referenced to WGS-84

LongitudeLow

0

0

deg

Longitude referenced to WGS-84

LongitudeHigh

0

-180

deg

Longitude referenced to WGS-84

AltitudeLow

0

0

m

Altitude referenced to WGS-84

AltitudeHigh

0

-9.22
E+12

m

Altitude referenced to WGS-84

TypeOfSystem

0

0

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

4

Unit

Comment

An upward counting number
used to tie related information
together between different PGNS

0x0 GPS
0x1 GLONASS
0x2 GPS and GLONASS
0x3 GPS and SBAS,
(WAAS/EGNOS)
0x4 GPS and SBAS and
GLONASS

Page 438

Commands and Messages
GNSSMethod

0

0

15

0x0 No GPS
0x1 GNSS fix
0x2 DGNSS fix
0x3 Precise GNSS
0x4 RTK fixed integer
0x5 RTK float
0x6 Estimated (DR) mode
0x7 Manual input
0x8 Simulate mode
0xE Error

GNSSIntegrity

0

0

3

0x0 No integrity checking
0x1 Safe
0x2 Caution
0X3 Unsafe

GNSS_Reserved1

0

0

63

NumberOfSVs

0

0

252

Numeric count, event counter

HDOP

0

-327.64

327.64

Dilution of Precision (DOP)
indicates the contribution of
satellite configuration geometry
to positioning error

PDOP

0

-327.64

327.64

Dilution of Precision (DOP)
indicates the contribution of
satellite configuration geometry
to positioning error

GeodalSeparation

0

-2.15
E+07

2.15
E+07

m

The difference between the earth
ellipsoid and mean sea-level
(period), defined by the reference
datum used in the position
solution.
'-' indicates mean sea-level
below ellipsoid

NumberOfReferenceStations

0

0

252

Number of reference stations
reported

ReferenceStationType1

0

0

15

0x0 GPS
0x1 GLONASS
0xE Error

ReferenceStationID1

0

0

4095

Reference station ID

AgeOfDGNSSCorrections1

0

0

655.32

ReferenceStationType2

0

0

15

0x0 GPS
0x1 GLONASS
0xE Error

ReferenceStationID2

0

0

4095

Reference station ID

AgeOfDGNSSCorrections2

0

0

655.32

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

sec

sec

Age of differential corrections

Age of differential corrections

Page 439

Commands and Messages

Additional
Information
Related
Commands

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 440

Commands and Messages

GNSSPositionRapidUpdates Message

Message
Type

NMEA 2000 CAN

Description

Abbreviated GPS position information
The GNSSPositionRapidUpdates message (PGN 0x1F801/129025) has an update rate equal to the subscribed rate (default of
10 Hz) and DLC of 8.

Command
Format to
Request
Message

Message is continuously output on the CAN port for the following products:

Message
Format

The following table provides the start bit, length (bit), value type, factor, and offset for fields of the GNSSPositionRapidUpdates
message.

•
•
•

A100, continuously output
A325, continuously output when NMEA 2000 mode is enabled
V102, continuously output when NMEA 2000 mode is enabled, requires NMEA 2000 adapter

Field
Name

Start bit

Length
(Bit)

Byte
Order

Value
Type

Factor

Offset

Min

Max

Unit

Latitude

0

32

Intel

Signed

0.0000001

0

-90

90

deg

Longitude

32

32

Intel

Signed

0.0000001

0

-180

180

deg

Additional
Information

Related
Commands

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 441

Commands and Messages

GPALM Message

Message
Type

Data

Description

Message number (individual and total), week number, satellite health, and the almanac data for each satellite in the GPS
constellation up to a maximum of 32 messages

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JASC,GPALM,r[,OTHER]
where

•

'r' = 1 (on) or 0 (off)
When set to on the message is sent once (one message for each tracked satellite at 1 second intervals) and
then sent again whenever satellite information changes

•

Message
Format

',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when you send the command without it
(and without the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when you send the command with it
(without the brackets)

$GPALM,A,B,C,D,E,F,G,H,J,K,L,M,N,P,Q*CC
where:

Response
Component

Description

As Displayed in First Full Line of Example Below
This Table

A

Total number of messages

31

B

Message number

1

C

Satellite PRN number

02

D

GPS week number (0-1023)

1617

E

Satellite health (bits 17-24 of message)

00

F

Eccentricity

50F6

G

Reference time of almanac (TOA)

0F

H

Satellite inclination angle (sigma)

FD98

J

Rate of right ascension (omega dot)

FD39

K

Square root of semi-major axis (root A)

A10CF3

L

Perigee (omega)

81389B

M

Ascending node longitude (omega O)

423632

N

Mean anomaly (mo)

BD913C

P

Clock parameter 0 (af0)

148

Q

Clock parameter 1 (af1)

001

*CC

Checksum



Carriage return

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 442

Commands and Messages



Example

Line feed

$>
$GPALM,31,1,02,1617,00,50F6,0F,FD98,FD39,A10CF3,81389B,423632,BD913C,148
,001*
$GPALM,31,2,03,1617,00,71B9,0F,F6C2,FD45,A10C96,2B833C,131DB4,BA69EE,2B1,
001*
$GPALM,31,3,04,1617,00,4F01,0F,FD03,FD39,A10BFC,1C6C35,42EDB1,35B537,112,
003*
$GPALM,31,4,05,1617,00,121B,0F,08C8,FD61,A10C5C,09CA99,6D7257,021B32,79F,
7FE*
$GPALM,31,5,06,1617,00,337F,0F,FB6B,FD49,A10CC2,DBE103,161127,10CD11,18C,
7FE*

.
.
.

$GPALM,31,29,30,1617,00,6A85,0F,0ADD,FD5C,A11A83,3F6243,EBCC46,E8548D,145,
001
$GPALM,31,30,31,1617,00,4037,0F,1778,FD3E,A10C28,D62817,C32ADF,781125,01B,
001
$GPALM,31,31,32,1617,00,65B5,0F,0956,FD65,A10DD0,DD74BA,71125D,985AE3,751,
7FE

Additional
Information

Similar to the GLONASS message GLMLA

Related
Commands

JASC,GP

Topic Last Updated: v1.05 / January 18, 2013

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 443

Commands and Messages

GPDTM Message

Message
Type

Data

Description

Datum reference

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JASC,GPDTM,r[,OTHER]
where:

•
•

'r' = message rate (in Hz) of (1 or 0)
',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when you send the command without it
(and without the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when you send the command with it
(without the brackets)

$GPDTM,CCC,A,X.X,K,X.X,L,X.X,CCC*CC
Message
Format

where:

Message
Component

Description

CCC

Local datum (normally W84, but could be NAD83 when using beacon in North America)

A

Local datum subdivision code

X.X

Latitude offset, in minutes

K

Latitude indicator; value is N (North latitude) or S (South latitude)

X.X

Longitude offset, in minutes

L

Longitude indicator; value is E (East longitude) or W (West longitude)

X.X

Altitude offset, in meters

CCC

Reference datum (always W84)

*CC

Checksum



Carriage return



Line feed

Example $GPDTM,W84,,0.0,N,0.0,E,0.0,W84*CC

Additional
Information
Related

JASC,GP

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 444

Commands and Messages

Commands

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 445

Commands and Messages

GPGGA Message
Note: This topic provides information pertaining to GPS. The format is the same for the messages pertaining to
GNSS and GLONASS (see Additional Information below).

Message
Type

Data

Description

Detailed GNSS position information (most frequently used NMEA 0183 data message)

Command
Format to
Request
Message

Message
Format

$JASC,GPGGA,r[,OTHER]
where:

•
•

'r' = message rate (in Hz) of 20, 10, 5, 4, 2, 1, 0, or .2 (0 turns off the message)
',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when you send the command without it
(and without the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when you send the command with
it (without the brackets)

$GPGGA,HHMMSS.SS,DDMM.MMMMM,K,DDDMM.MMMMM,L,N,QQ,PP.P,AAAA.AA,M,±XX.XX,M,
SSS,RRRR*CC
where:
Message
Component

Description

HHMMSS.SS

UTC time in hours, minutes, and seconds of the position

DDMM.MMMMM

Latitude in degrees, minutes, and decimal minutes (you can set the number of decimal places
using the JNP command)

K

Latitude indicator; value is N (North latitude) or S (South latitude)

DDDMM.MMMMM

Longitude in degrees, minutes, and decimal minutes (you can set the number of decimal
places using the JNP command)

L

Longitude indicator; value is E (East longitude) or W (West longitude)

N

Quality indicator; value is:

•

0 = no position

•

1 = undifferentially corrected position (autonomous)

•

2 = differentially corrected position (SBAS, DGPS,Atlas DGPSservice, LDif and e-Dif)

•

4 = RTK fixed integer (Crescent RTK, Eclipse RTK),Atlas high precision
services converged

•

5 = RTK float,Atlas high precision services converging

QQ

Number of satellites used in position solution

P.P

Horizontal dilution of precision (HDOP)

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 446

Commands and Messages
A.A

Antenna altitude, in meters, re: mean-sea-level (geoid)

M

Units of antenna altitude (M = meters)

G.G

Geoidal separation (in meters)

M

Units of geoidal separation (M = meters)

SSS

Age of differential corrections, in seconds

RRRR

Differential reference station ID

*CC

Checksum



Carriage return



Line feed

Example $GPGGA,001038.00,3334.2313457,N,11211.0576940,W,2,04,5.4,354.682,M,- 26.574,M,7.0,0138*79

Additional
Information

This message provides information specific to the satellite system identified by the first two characters of the message.
GPGGA - GPS information
GNGGA - GNSS information
GLGGA - GLONASS information
The JNMEA,GGAALLGNSS command significantly affects the output of the GGA message. If you are tracking more than
GNSS signals, Hemisphere GNSS highly recommends that you review this command.

Related
Commands

JASC,GP, JASC,GN, JASC,GL, JNMEA,GGAALLGNSS

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16,
2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 447

Commands and Messages

GPGLL Message
Note: This topic provides information pertaining to GPS. The format is the same for the messages pertaining to
GNSS and GLONASS (see Additional Information below).

Message
Type

Data

Description

Latitude and longitude data

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JASC,GPGLL,r[,OTHER]
where:

•
•

'r' = message rate in Hz of 20, 10, 2, 1, 0, or .2 (0 turns off the message)
',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when you send the
command without it (and without the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port
when you send the command with it (without the brackets)

$GPGLL,DDMM.MMMMM,S,DDDMM.MMMMM,S,HHMMSS.SS,S*CC
Message
Format

Additional
Information

where:
Message
Component

Description

DDMM.MMMMM

Latitude in degrees, minutes, and decimal minutes

S

S = N (North latitude ) or S (South latitude)

DDDMM.MMMMM

Longitude in degrees, minutes, and decimal minutes

S

S = E (East longitude) or W (West longitude)

HHMMSS.SS

UTC time in hours, minutes, and seconds of GNSS position

S

Status, S = A (valid) or V (invalid)

*CC

Checksum



Carriage return



Line feed

This message provides information specific to the satellite system identified by the first two characters of
the message.
GPGLL - GPS information
GNGLL - GNSS information
GLGLL - GLONASS information
The JNMEA,GGAALLGNSS command significantly affects the output of the GLL message. If you are
tracking more than GNSS signals, Hemisphere GNSS highly recommends that you review this
command.

Related
Commands

JASC,GP, JASC,GN, JASC,GL, JNMEA,GGAALLGNSS

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 448

Commands and Messages
Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 449

Commands and Messages

GPGNS Message
Note: This topic provides information pertaining to GPS. The format is the same for the messages pertaining to
GNSS and GLONASS (see Additional Information below).

Message
Type

Data

Description

Fixes data for single or combined (GPS, GLONASS, possible future satellite systems, and systems combining these) satellite
navigation systems

Command
Format to
Request
Message

Message
Format

$JASC,GPGNS,r[,OTHER]
where:

•
•

'r' = message rate (in Hz) of 20, 10, 2, 1, 0, or .2 (0 turns off the message)
',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when you send the command without it (and the brackets)
and enacts a change on the other port when you send the command with it (without the brack

$GPGNS,HHMMSS.SS,DDMM.MMMMM,K,DDDMM.MMMMM,L,MM,QQ,H.H,A.A,G.G,D.D,R.R,NS*CC

Carriage return



Line feed

Example $GPGNS,224749.00,3333.4268304,N,11153.3538273,W,D,19,0.6,406.110,- 26.294,6.0,0138,S,*6A
Additional
Information

This message provides information specific to the satellite system identified by the first two characters of the message.
GPGNS - GPS information
GNGNS - GNSS information
GLGNS - GLONASS information
GAGNS – GALILEO information
The JNMEA,GGAALLGNSS command significantly affects the output of the GNS message. If you are tracking more than GNSS
sign Hemisphere GNSS highly recommends that you review thiscommand.

Related
Commands

JASC,GP, JASC,GN, JASC,GL, JNMEA,GGAALLGNSS

Topic Last Updated: v1.07/ February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 451

Commands and Messages

GPGRS Message
Message
Type

Data

Description

Supports Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM)

$JASC,GPGRS,r[,OTHER]

Command
Format to
Request
Message •

•

where:
'r' = message rate in Hz of 1, 0, or .2 (0 turns off the message)
',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when you send the command without it (and without the brackets)
and enacts a change on the other port when you send the command with it (without the brackets)

$GPGRS,HHMMSS.SS,M,X.X ... X.X,GSID,SID*CC
Message
Format

where:
Message
Component

Description

HHMMSS.SS

UTC time

M

Mode:
0 = residuals used to calculate the position given in the GPGGA or GPGNS message
1 = residuals were recomputed after the GPGGA or GPGNS message position was computed

X.X ... X.X

Range residuals, in meters, for satellites used in the navigation solution. Order must match order
of satellite ID numbers in GPGSA message. When GPGRS message is used, the GPGSA and
GPGSV messages are generally required with this message.

GSID

GNSS system ID, value is 1 (GPS)

SID

Signal ID, value is 1 (L1 C/A)

*CC

Checksum



Carriage return



Line feed

Additional
Information

Related
Commands

JASC,GP

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 452

Commands and Messages

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 453

Commands and Messages

GNGSA Message
Note: This topic provides information pertaining to all GNSS constellations. The format is the same for the
messages pertaining to only GPS and GLONASS (see Additional Information below).

Message
Type

Data

Description

DOP and active satellite information
Only satellites used in the position computation are present in this message. Null fields are present when data is
unavailable due to the number of satellites tracked.

$JASC,GNGSA,r[,OTHER]

Command
Format to
where:
Request
'r' = message rate in Hz of 1 or 0 (0 turns off the message)
Message •

•

',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when you send the command without it (and without the
brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when you send the command with it (without the brackets)

$GNGSA,A,B,CC ... OO,P.P,Q.Q,R.R,GSID*CC
Message
Format

where:
Message
Component

Description

A

Satellite acquisition mode (M = manually forced to 2D or 3D, A = automatic swap between 2D and
3D)

B

Position mode (1 = fix not available, 2 = 2D fix, 3 = 3D fix)

CC to OO

Satellites used in the position solution, a null field occurs if a channel is unused

P.P

Position Dilution of Precision (PDOP) = 1.0 to 9.9

Q.Q

Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP) 1.0 to 9.9

R.R

Vertical Dilution of Precision (VDOP) = 1.0 to 9.9

GSID

GNSS system ID, value is 1 (GPS), 2 (GLONASS), 3 (GALILEO), 5 (BEIDOU)

*CC

Checksum



Carriage return



Line feed

Additional
Information

This message provides information specific to the satellite system(s) identified by the first two characters of the
message.
GNGSA - GNSS information (all
constellations)
GPGSA - GPS information
GLGSA - GLONASS information

Related
Commands

JASC,GP, JASC,GN, JASC,GL

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 454

Commands and Messages
Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 455

Commands and Messages

GPGST Message
Message
Type

Data

Description

GNSS pseudorange error statistics and position accuracy

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JASC,GPGST,r[,OTHER]
•
•

where:
'r' = message rate in Hz of 1 or 0 (0 turns off the message)
',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when you send the command without it (and without the
brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when you send the command with it (without the brackets)

$GPGST,HHMMSS.SS,A.A,B.B,C.C,D.D,E.E,F.F,G.G*CC
where:
Message
Format
Message
Component

Description

HHMMSS.SS

UTC time in hours, minutes, and seconds of the GPS position

A.A

Root mean square (rms) value of the standard deviation of the range inputs to the navigation
process. Range inputs include pseudoranges and differential GNSS (DGNSS) corrections.

B.B

Standard deviation of semi-major axis of error ellipse, in meters

C.C

Standard deviation of semi-minor axis of error ellipse, in meters

D.D

Error in Eclipse’s semi major axis origination, in decimal degrees, true north

E.E

Standard deviation of latitude error, in meters

F.F

Standard deviation of longitude error, in meters

G.G

Standard deviation of altitude error, in meters

*CC

Checksum



Carriage return



Line feed

Additional
Information

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 456

Commands and Messages
Related Commands
JASC,GP
Topic Last Updated: v1.01 / September 23, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 457

Commands and Messages

GPGSV Message
Note: This topic provides information pertaining to GPS. The format is the same for the message pertaining to
other constelations (see Additional Information below).

Message
Type

Data

Description

GNSS satellite in view
Null fields occur where data is unavailable due to the number of satellites tracked.

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JASC,GPGSV,r[,OTHER]
where:
• 'r' = message rate in Hz of 1 or 0 (0 turns off the message)
• ',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when you send the command without it
(and without the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when you send the command with it
(without the brackets)

$GPGSV,T,M,N,II,EE,AAA,SS,…II,EE,AAA,SS,SID*CC
Message
Format

where:
Message
Component

Description

T

Total number of messages

M

Message number (1 to 3)

N

Total number of satellites in view

II

Satellite number

EE

Elevation, in degrees (0 to 90)

AAA

Azimuth (true), in degrees (0 to 359)

SS

Signal strength, in dB-Hz (0 - 99)
To compare with SNR values found in Bin messages (such as Bin96) subtract
30 from this signal strength value for an approximate SNR value
SS - 30 = SNR (from Bin message)

Additional
Information

SID

Signal ID, value is 1 (L1 C/A)

*CC

Checksum



Carriage return



Line feed

This message provides information specific to the satellite system identified by the first two
characters of the message.
GPGSV – GPS information
GLGSV – GLONASS information
GAGSV – GALILEO information
GQGSV – QZSS information
If you request GNGSV the receiver will respond with GPGSV messages only.

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 458

Commands and Messages

Related
Commands

JASC,GP, JASC,GL, BEIDOU

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 459

Commands and Messages

GPHDG/HEHDG Message
Message
Type

Data

Description

Magnetic deviation and variation for calculating magnetic or true heading
The message simulates data from a magnetic sensor although it does not actually contain one.
The purpose of this message is to support older systems that may not be able to accept the HDT
message that is recommended for use.

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JASC,GPHDG,r[,OTHER]
where:
• 'r' = message rate in Hz of 20, 10, 2, 1, 0 or .2 (0 turns off the message)
• ',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when you send the command without it
(and without the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when you send the command with it
(without the brackets)

$GPHDG,s.s,d.d,D,v.v,V*CC
Message
Format

or

$HEHDG,s.s,d.d,D,v.v,V*CC
where:
Message
Component

Description

s.s

Magnetic sensor reading, in degrees

d.d

Magnetic deviation, in degrees

D

E = Easterly deviation, W = Westerly deviation

v.v

Magnetic variation, in degrees

V

E = Easterly deviation, W = Westerly deviation

*CC

Checksum



Carriage return



Line feed

Additional
Information

You can change the HDG message header to either GP or HE using the JATT,NMEAHE
command.

Related
Commands

JASC,GP

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 460

Commands and Messages

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 461

Commands and Messages

GPHDM/HEHDM Message

Message
Type

Data

Description

Magnetic heading of the vessel derived from the true heading calculated

Command
Format to
Request
Message •

•

$JASC,GPHDM,r[,OTHER]
where:
'r' = message rate in Hz of 20, 10, 2, 1, 0 or .2 (0 turns off the message)
',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when you send the command without it (and
without the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when you send the command with it (without the
brackets)

$GPHDM,X.X,M*CC
Message
Format

or

$HCHDM,X.X,M*CC
where:
Message
Component

Description

X.X

Current heading, in degrees

M

Indicates magnetic heading

*CC

Checksum



Carriage return



Line feed

Additional
Information

You can change the HDM message header to either GP or HE using the JATT,NMEAHE
command.

Related
Commands

JASC,GP

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 462

Commands and Messages

GPHDT/HEHDT Message

Message
Type

Data

Description

True heading of the vessel
This is the direction that the vessel (antennas) is pointing and is not necessarily the direction of
vessel motion (the course over ground).

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JASC,GPHDT,r[,OTHER]
where:
• 'r' = message rate in Hz of 20, 10, 2, 1, 0 or .2 (0 turns off the message)
• ',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when you send the command without it
(and without the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when you send the command with it
(without the brackets)

$GPHDT,X.X,T*CC
Message
Format

or

$HEHDT,X.X,T*CC
where:
Message
Component

Description

X.X

Current heading, in degrees

T

Indicates true heading

*CC

Checksum



Carriage return



Line feed

Additional
Information

You can change the HDT message header to either GP or HE using the JATT,NMEAHE
command.

Related
Commands

JASC,GP

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 463

Commands and Messages

GPHEV Message

Message
Type

Data

Description

Heave value in meters

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JASC,GPHEV,1

$GPHEV,H,*CC
Message
Format

where:
Message
Component

Description

H

Heave value, in meters

*CC

Checksum



Carriage return



Line feed

Additional
Information
Related
Commands

JASC,GP

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 464

Commands and Messages

GPRMC Message

Message
Type

Data

Description

Contains recommended minimum specific GNSS data

Command
Format to
Request
Message

Message
Format

$JASC,GPRMC,r[,OTHER]
where:
• 'r' = message rate in Hz of 10, 2, 1, 0, or .2 (0 turns off the message)
• ',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when you send the command without it (and without the
brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when you send the command with it (without the brackets)

$GPRMC,HHMMSS.SS,A,DDMM.MMM,N,DDDMM.MMM,W,Z.Z,Y.Y,DDMMYY,D.D,V,M,NS*CC

Carriage return



Line feed

Additional
Information

Related
Commands

JASC,GP

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 466

Commands and Messages

GPROT/HEROT Message

Message
Type

Data

Description

Vessel’s rate of turn (ROT) information

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JASC,GPROT,r[,OTHER]
where:
• 'r' = message rate in Hz of 20, 10, 2, 1, 0 or .2 (0 turns off the message)
• ',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when you send the command without it
(and without the brackets) and enacts a change onthe other port when you send the command with it
(without the brackets)

$GPROT,X.X,A*CC
Message
Format

or

$HEROT,X.X,A*CC
where:
Message
Component

Description

X.X

Rate of turn in °/min (negative when the vessel bow turns to port)

A

Flag indicating the data is valid

*CC

Checksum



Carriage return



Line feed

Additional
Information

You can change the ROT message header to either GP or HE using the JATT,NMEAHE command.

Related
Commands

JASC,GP

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 467

Commands and Messages

GPRRE Message

Message
Type

Data

Description

Satellite range residuals and estimated position error

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JASC,GPRRE,r[,OTHER]
where:
• 'r' = message rate in Hz of 1 or 0 (0 turns off the message)
• ',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when you send the command without it
(and without the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when you send the command with it
(without the brackets)

$GPRRE,N,II,RR ... II,RR,HHH.H,VVV.V*CC
Message
Format

where:
Message
Component

Description

N

Number of satellites used in position computation

II

Satellite number

RR

Range residual, in meters

HHH.H

Horizontal position error estimate, in meters

VVV.V

Vertical position error estimate, in meters

*CC

Checksum



Carriage return



Line feed

Additional
Information

Related
Commands

JASC,GP

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 468

Commands and Messages

GPVTG Message

Message
Type

Data

Description

Course over ground and ground speed

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JASC,GPVTG,r[,OTHER]
where:

•
•

'r' = message rate in Hz of 20, 10, 2, 1, 0, or .2 (0 turns off the message)
',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when you send the command
without it (and without the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when you send the
command with it (without the brackets)

$GPVTG,TTT,T,MMM,M,NNN.NN,N,KKK.KK,K,X*CC
Message
Format

Example

where:
Message
Component

Description

TTT

True course over ground (COG) in degrees (000 to 359)

T

True course over ground indicator (always 'T')

MMM

Magnetic course over ground in degrees (000 to 359)

M

Magnetic course over ground indicator (always 'M')

NNN.NN

Speed over ground in knots

N

Speed over ground in knots indicator (always 'N')

KKK.KK

Speed over ground in km/h

K

Speed over ground in km/h indicator (always 'K')

X

Mode
A = Autonomous mode
D = Differential mode
E = Estimated (dead reckoning) mode
M = Manual input mode
S = Simulator mode
N = Data not valid

*CC

Checksum



Carriage return



Line feed

Sample message output:

$GPVTG,103.85,T,92.79,M,0.14,N,0.25,K,D*1E

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 469

Commands and Messages

Additional
Information
Related
Commands

JASC,GP

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 470

Commands and Messages

GPZDA Message

Message
Type

Data

Description

UTC time and date information

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JASC,GPZDA,r[,OTHER]
where:

•
•

'r' = message rate in Hz of 20, 10, 2, 1, 0, or .2 (0 turns off the message)
',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when you send the command
without it (and without the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when you send the
command with it (without the brackets)

$GPZDA,HHMMSS.SS,DD,MM,YYYY,XX,YY*CC
Message
Format

where:
Message
Component

Description

HHMMSS.SS

UTC time in hours, minutes, and seconds of the GPS unit

DD

Day (0 to 31)

MM

Month (1 to 12)

YYYY

Year

XX

Local zone description in hours (-13 to 13)

YY

Local zone description in minutes (0 to 59)

*CC

Checksum



Carriage return



Line feed

Additional
Information
Related
Commands

JASC,GP

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 471

Commands and Messages

NMEACogSogData Message
Message
Type

NMEA 2000 CAN

Description

GPS speed and direction information
The NMEACogSogData command (PGN 0x1F802/129026) has an update rate equal to the subscribed rate (default of 10 Hz) and
DLC of 8.

Command
Format to
Request
Message

Message is continuously output on the CAN port for the following products:

Message
Format

The following table describes the fields of the NMEACogSogData message:

•
•
•

A100, continuously output
A325, continuously output when NMEA 2000 mode is enabled
V102, continuously output when NMEA 2000 mode is enabled, requires NMEA 2000 adapter

Start

Length

Byte

Value

Bit

(Bit)

Order

Type

NMEA_SequenceID

0

8

Intel

NMEA_Direction

8

2

NMEA_Reserved1

10

NMEA_Course

Field Name

Factor

Min

Max

Comment

Unsigned

1

0

255

An upward
counting number
used to tie related
information
together between
different PGNs

Intel

Unsigned

1

0

3

0x0 True north
0x1 Magnetic
north 0x2 Error
0X3 Null

6

Intel

Unsigned

1

0

63

16

16

Intel

Unsigned

0.0001

0

6.5535

GPS based travel
direction, in rad

32

16

Intel

Unsigned

0.01

0

655.35

GPS based travel
speed, in m/s

Reference

OverGround
NMEA_Speed
OverGround

Additional
Information
Related
Commands

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 472

Commands and Messages

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 473

Commands and Messages

PASHR Message
Message
Type

Vector, Data

Description

Time, true heading, roll, pitch, and heave data in one message

Command
Format to
Request
Message

Message
Format

$JASC,PASHR,r[,OTHER]
where:
• 'r' = message rate (in Hz) of 20, 10, 5, 4, 2, 1, 0, or .2 (0 turns off the message)
• ',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when you send the command without it (and without the
brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when you send the command with it (without th brackets). See Configuring
the Data Message Output for detailed information on 'THIS' and 'OTHER' port terminology.

$PASHR,hhmmss.ss,HHH.HH,T,RRR.RR,PPP.PP,heave,rr.rrr,pp.ppp,hh.hhh,QF*CC<
where:
Message
Component

Description

hhmmss.ss

UTC time

HHH.HH

Heading value in decimal degrees

T

True heading (T displayed if heading is relative to true north)

RRR.RR

Roll in decimal degrees (- sign will be displayed when applicable)

PPP.PP

Pitch in decimal degrees (- sign will be displayed when applicable)

heave

Heave, in meters

rr.rrr

Roll standard deviation in decimal degrees

pp.ppp

Pitch standard deviation in decimal degrees

hh.hhh

Heading standard deviation in decimal degrees

QF

Quality Flag

•

0 = No position

•

1 = All non-RTK fixed integer positions

•

2 = RTK fixed integer position

*CC

Checksum



Carriage return



Line feed

Additional

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 474

Commands and Messages
Information

Related
Commands

JASC,PASHR

Topic Last Updated: v1.05 / January 18, 2013

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 475

Commands and Messages

PSAT,ATTSTAT Message
Message
Type

Data,

Description

Command
Format to
Request
Message

Message
Format

$JASC,PSAT,ATTSTAT,r[,OTHER]
where:
• 'r' = message rate in Hz of 1 or 0 (0 turns off the message)
• ',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when you send the command without it (and brackets) and
enacts a change on the other port when you send the command with it (without the brackets)

$PSAT,ATTSTAT,S,MSEP,CSEP,Heading,TYPE,Pitch,Roll,Q,N,SYS,NUM,SNR,*CC
where:
Message
Component

Description

S

ID of the secondary antenna

MSEP

custom separation between antennas manually entered (when the value is MOV, it means
MOVEBASE is on)

CSEP

auto GPS antenna separation

Heading

Heading

TYPE

Heading indicator, value is:
N= Heading used GNSS
G=Heading used gyroscope

Pitch

pitch

Roll

roll

Q

The current setting of antenna directivity, value is
P= antennas placed front and back, output pitch
R= antennas placed left and right, output roll

N

The number of satellite used by the secondary antenna

SYS

Systems in use:

NUM

•

GPS: L1, L2, L5

•

GLONASS: G1, G2

•

BDS: B1,B2 B3

•

Galileo: E5a, E5b, E5a+b, E6

Number of satellites used by each system

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 476

Commands and Messages
SNR

Quality of each SNR path, where:

•

A is > 20 dB

•

B is > 18 dB

•

C is > 15 db

•

D is <= 15 dB

*CC

Checksum



Carriage return



Line feed

Example
$PSAT,ATTSTAT,1,MOV,0.504,334.75,N,1.71,8.0,P,30,(,L1,L2,G1,G2,B1,B2,B3,)(,12,10,9,9,10,10,0,)(,
A,A,C,B,B,B,D,)*1D

Additional
Information

Issuing the JSAVE command after setting JASC,PSAT,ATTSTAT to 1 (message on at 1Hz) does not save this setting. You
must JASC,PSAT,ATTSTAT (set it to 1) each time you power on the receiver.

Related
Commands
and
Messages

JASC,PSAT,ATTSTAT command

Topic Last Updated: v1.8 / June 21, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 477

Commands and Messages

PSAT,GBS Message

Message
Type

Data

Description

Used to support Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM)

Command
Format to
Request
Message

Message
Format

$JASC,GPGBS,r[,OTHER]
where:
• 'r' = message rate in Hz of 1 or 0 (0 turns off the message)
• ',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when you send the command without it (and without the
brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when you send the command with it (without the brackets)

$PSAT,GBS,HHMMSS.SS,KK.K,LL.L,AA.A,ID,P.PPPPP,B.B,S.S,FLAG,GSID,SID*CC

Carriage return



Line feed

Additional
Information

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 478

Commands and Messages

Related
Commands

JASC,GP

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 479

Commands and Messages

PSAT,HPR Message

Message
Type

Data

Description

Proprietary NMEA message that provides the true heading, pitch, roll, and time in a single
message
During normal operation heading and pitch are derived from GPS and roll comes from the inertial
sensor. While coasting heading is based on gyro and pitch/roll are from the inertial sensor.

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JASC,GPHPR,r[,OTHER]
where:

•
•

'r' = message rate in Hz of 20, 10, 2, 1, 0 or .2 (0 turns off the message)
',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when you send the command
without it (and without the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when you send the
command with it (without the brackets)

$PSAT,HPR,TIME,HEADING,PITCH,ROLL,TYPE*CC
Message
Format

where:
Message
Component

Description

TIME

UTC time (HHMMSS.SS)

HEADING

Heading (degrees)

PITCH

Pitch (degrees)

ROLL

Roll (degrees)

TYPE

N = GPS derived heading
G = gyro heading

*CC

Checksum



Carriage return



Line feed

Additional
Information

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 480

Commands and Messages
Related Commands
JASC,GP

Topic Last Updated: v1.05 / January 18, 2013

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 481

Commands and Messages

PSAT,INTLT Message

Message
Type

Data

Description

Proprietary NMEA message that provides the tilt measurements from the internal inclinometers in
degrees. It delivers an output of crude accelerometer measurements of pitch and roll with no
temperature compensation or calibration for GPS heading/pitch/roll.
Pitch and roll are factory calibrated over temperature to be accurate to ±3°C.
CAUTION: User calibration will clear out precise factory calibration.

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JASC,INTLT,r[,OTHER]
where:
• 'r' = message rate in Hz of 1 or 0 (0 turns off the message)
• ',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when yousend the command without it
(and without the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when you send the command with it
(without the brackets)

$PSAT,INTLT,PITCH,ROLL*CC
Message
Format

where:
Message
Component

Description

PITCH

Pitch (degrees)

ROLL

Roll (degrees)

*CC

Checksum



Carriage return



Line feed

Additional
Information

Related
Commands

JASC,GP

Topic Last Updated: v1.00 / August 11, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 482

Commands and Messages

PSAT, BLV Message
Message
Type

Data, Local Differential and RTK

Description

Contains RTK fixprogress information

Command
Format to
Request
Message

Message
Format

$JASC,PSAT,BLV,r[,OTHER]
where:
• 'r' = message rate in Hz of 1 or 0 (0 turns off the message)
• ',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when you send the command without it (and
without the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when you send the command with it (without the
brackets)

$PSAT,BLV,HHMMSS.SS,DATE,A.A,B.B,C.C,ID,STATE,number,pdop*CC
where
Message
Component
HHMMSS.SS

Description
UTC time (HHMMSS.SS)

DATE

Date (day-month-year)

A.A

North component of base to rover vector ( m )

B.B

Esat component of base to rover vector ( m )

C.C

Up component of base to rover vector ( m )

ID

Base station ID

STATE

Quality indicator; value is:

•
•
•
•

0 = no position
1 = undifferentially corrected position (autonomous)
2 = differentially corrected position (SBAS, DGPS, Atlas DGPS
service, L-Dif and e-Dif)
4 = RTK fixed integer (Crescent RTK, Eclipse RTK) ,Atlas high
precision services converged
5 = RTK float, Atlas high precision services converging

NUMBER

Number of used satellite

PDOP

PDOP

*CC

Checksum



Carriage return



Line feed

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 483

Commands and Messages
Example

$PSAT,BLV,000151.00,051115,-0.001,0.002,-0.003,0333,4,20,1.2*52

Additional
Information

Related
Commands

JASC, PSAT, BLV

Topic Last Updated: v1.08 / June 9, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 484

Commands and Messages

PSAT,FVI Message
Message
Type

Data, Local Differential and RTK

Description

Contains much more special information

Command
Format to
Request
Message

Message
Format

$JASC,PSAT,FVI,r[,OTHER]
where:
• 'r' = message rate in Hz of 0,1,2,5,10,20 (0 turns off the message)
• ',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when you send the command without it (and
without the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when you send the command with it (without
the brackets)

$PSAT,FVI,HHMMSS.SS, DDMM.MMMM, DDDMM.MMMM, AA.AAA,
E.E,F.F,G.G,HHH.HHH,hh.hhh,PP.PP,pp.ppp,RR.RRR,rr.rrr,ve.eee,v
n.nnn,vu.uuu,vv.vvv,LE.EEE,LN.NNN,LU.UUU,ZONE,UEEE.EEEE,UNNN.N
NNN,PN,SN,p,h,L,sss*CC
where
Message
Component

Description

HHMMSS.SS

UTC time

DDMM.MMMM

Latitude in degrees and decimal minutes

DDMM.MMMM

Longitude in degrees, and decimal minutes

AA.AAA

altitude

E.E

Standard deviation of latitude error, in meters

F.F

Standard deviation of longitude error, in meters

G.G

Standard deviation of altitude error, in meters

HHH.HHH

Heading (degrees)

hh.hhh.

Standard deviation of heading error, in degrees

PP.PP

Pitch (degrees)

pp.ppp

Standard deviation of pitch error, in degrees

RR.RRR

Roll (degrees)

rr.rrr

Standard deviation of roll error, in degrees

Ve.eee

East to speed(m/s)

Vn.nnn

North to speed (m/s)

Vu.uuu

Vertical speed (m/s)

Vv.vvv

Speed over ground (m/s)

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 485

Commands and Messages
LE.EEE

East component of master to slave vector ( m )

LN.NNN

North component of master to slave vector ( m )

LU.UUU

Up component of master to slave vector ( m )

ZONE

projection area

UEEE.EEEE

East to positon of projection area

UNNN.NNNN

North to position of projection area

PN

Number of satellites used by the primary antenna

SN

Number of satellites used by the secondary antenna

P

Position indicator; value is:

•

0 = no position

•

1 = undifferentially corrected position (autonomous)

•

2 = differentially corrected position (SBAS, DGPS ,Atlas DGPS
service, L-Dif ande-Dif)

•

4 = RTK fixed integer (Crescent RTK, Eclipse RTK), Atlas high
precision services converged

• 5 = RTK float, Atlas high precision services converging
H

Heading indicator; value is:

•

0 = no heading or heading is invalid

•

1 = heading is valid

L

Distance between base and rover in meter

SSS

Age of differential corrections, in seconds

*CC

Checksum



Carriage return



Line feed

Example $PSAT,FVI,011657.00,40.071345258,116.326680384,51.2922,0.001,0.003,0.003,28.358,0.106,-5.306,0.087,,,0.030,0.001,-0.062,0.030,-0.001,0.001,-0.002,117.0,442562.296,4437668.138,25,26,4,1,4.759,1*6B

Additional
Information

Related
Commands

JASC,PSAT,FVI

Topic Last Updated: v1.08 / June 9, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 486

Commands and Messages

PSAT,RTKPROG Message
Message
Type

Data, Local Differential and RTK

Description

Contains RTK fixprogress information

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JASC,PSAT,RTKPROG,r[,OTHER]
where:
• 'r' = message rate in Hz of 1 or 0 (0 turns off the message)
• ',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when you send the command without it (and
without the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when you send the command with it (without
the brackets)

$PSAT,RTKPROG,,R,F,N,SS1,SS2,SS3,MASK*CC
Message
Format

where
Message
Component

Description

R

1 = Ready to enter RTK ambiguity fix
0 = Not ready to enter RTK ambiguity fix

F

1 = Receiver running in RTK ambiguity fix mode
0 = Receiver not running in RTK ambiguity fix mode

N

Number of satellites used to fix

SS1

summer-1
SS1 must be significantly larger than SS2 and SS3 to enter R=1 mode

SS2

summer-2

SS3

summer-3

MASK

Bit mask; bits identify which GNSS observables are being received from base recently
(1 = GPS, 3 = GPS + GLONASS)

*CC

Checksum



Carriage return



Line feed

Example $PSAT,RTKPROG,1,1,24,243.0,0.0,0.0,3*4F

•
•
•

Ready to enter RTK ambiguity fix
Receiver running in RTK ambiguity fix mode
24 satellites used to fix

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 487

Commands and Messages
•
•

summer-1 is 243.0, summer-2 is 0, summer-3 is 0
Bit mask is 3 (GPS + GLONASS)

Additional
Information

Issuing the JSAVE command after setting JASC,PSAT,RTKPROG to 1 (message on at 1Hz) does not save
this setting. You must enable JASC,PSAT,RTKPROG (set it to 1) each time you power on the receiver.

Related
Commands

JASC,PSAT,RTKPROG

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 488

Commands and Messages

PSAT,RTKSTAT Message
Message
Type

Data, Local Differential and RTK

Description

Contains the most relevant parameters affecting RTK

Command
Format to
Request
Message

Message
Format

$JASC,PSAT,RTKSTAT,r[,OTHER]
where:
• 'r' = message rate in Hz of 1 or 0 (0 turns off the message)
• ',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when you send the command without it (and brackets) and
enacts a change on the other port when you send the command with it (without the brackets)

$PSAT,RTKSTAT,MODE,TYP,AGE,SUBOPT,DIST,SYS,NUM,SNR,RSF,BSF,HAG,ACCSTAT,SNT
*CC
where:
Message
Component

Description

MODE

Mode (FIX,FLT,DIF,AUT,NO)

TYP

Correction type (DFX,ROX,CMR,RTCM3,CMR+,...)

AGE

Age of differential corrections, in seconds

SUBOPT

Subscription code (see Interpreting the $JK 'Date'/Subscription Codes to determine the
meaning of the subscription code)

DIST

Distance to base in kilometers

SYS

Systems in use:

•

GPS: L1, L2, L5

•

GLONASS: G1, G2

•

BDS: B1,B2 B3

•

Galileo: E5a, E5b, E5a+b, E6

NUM

Number of satellites used by each system

SNR

Quality of each SNR path, where:

RSF

•

A is > 20 dB

•

B is > 18 dB

•

C is > 15 db

•

D is <= 15 dB

Rover slip flag (non zero if parity errors in last 5 minutes, good for detecting jamming and TCXO
issues)

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 489

Commands and Messages
BSF

Base slip flag

HAE

Horizontal accuracy estimation

ACCSTAT

RTK accuracy status (hex), where:

•

0x1 = no differential or differential too old, for the application

•

0x2 = problems with differential message

•

0x4 = horizontal position estimate poor for the application

•

0x8 = HDOP high, poor satellite geometry

•

0x10 = fewer than 6 L1 sats used

•

0x20 = poor L1 SNRs

•

0x40 = not in RTK mode

•

0x80 = not in RTK mode or RTK only recently solved (< 10 secs ago)

•

0x100 = RTK solution compromised, may fail

The status message can be any of the above or any combination of the above. For example, a
status message of '047' indicates the following:

SNT

•

0x1 = no differential or differential too old, for the application

•

0x2 = problems with differential message

•

0x4 = horizontal position estimate poor for the application

•

0x40 = not in RTK mode

Ionospheric scintillation, values are:

•

0 (little or no scintillation - does not adversely affect RTK solution)

•

1-100 (scintillation detected - adversely affects RTK solution)

*CC

Checksum



Carriage return



Line feed

Example
$PSAT,RTKSTAT,FIX,ROX,1,007F,9.5,(,L1,L2,G1,G2,)(,14,11,9,9,)(,A,A,A,A,),0,1,0.011,000

•
•
•
•
•
•

Fixed mode
ROX corrections
Diff age = 1 second
Subscribed options = 7F (see Understanding Additive Codes for information onsubscriptions)
Distance to base = 9.5 km
L1,L2,G1,G2 are the systems in use

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 490

Commands and Messages

•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Satellites used: L1 = 14, L2 = 11, G1 = 9, G2 = 9
SNR quality is (> 20 dB), (> 20 dB), (> 20 dB), (> 20dB)
Rover slip flag = 0
Base slip flag = 1
Horizontal accuracyestimation = 0.011
RTK accuracy status = 000 (no issues or errors)
Little or no ionospheric scintillation

Additional
Information

Issuing the JSAVE command after setting JASC,PSAT,RTKSTAT to 1 (message on at 1Hz) does not save this setting. You
must e JASC,PSAT,RTKSTAT (set it to 1) each time you power on the receiver.

Related
Commands
and
Messages

JASC,PSAT,RTKSTAT command
JQUERY,RTKSTAT message

Topic Last Updated: v1.08 / June 21, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 491

Commands and Messages

PSAT,VCT Message

Message
Type

Data, Local Differential and RTK

Description

Command
Format to
Request
Message

Message
Format

$JASC,PSAT,VCT,r[,OTHER]
where:
• 'r' =0,1,2,5,10,20HZ (0 turns off the message)
• ',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when you send the command without it (and
without the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when you send the command with it (without the
brackets)

$PSAT,VCT,ID,HHMMSS.SS,A.A,B.B,C.C,D,E.E,F.F,G.G,H.H*CC
where
Message
Component
ID

Description
antenna pair ID (always 1 for now)

HHMMSS.SS

UTC time in hours, minutes, and seconds of the position

A.A

Heading in degree

B.B

Pitch in degree

C.C

Roll in degree

N

Normal, not coasting

E.E

distance between antennas ( m )

F.F

North component of master to slave vector ( m )

G.G

East component of master to slave vector ( m )

H.H

Up component of master to slave vector ( m )

*CC

Checksum



Carriage return



Line feed

Example $PSAT,VCT,1,011657.00,28.358,-5.306,,N,4.7591,4.1530,2.2823,- 0.4401*1F

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 492

Commands and Messages

Additional
Information
Related
Commands

JASC,PSAT,VCT

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / Octoter 13, 2016

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 493

Commands and Messages

RD1 Message
Message
Type

Data

Description

SBAS diagnostic information

Command
Format to
Request
Message

Message
Format

$JASC,D1,r[,OTHER]
where:
• 'r' = message rate (0 = Off, 1 = On at 1Hz)
• ',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change in the RD1 message on the current port when you send the command
without it (and without the brackets) and enacts a change in the RD1 message on the other port when you send the
command with it (without the brackets). See Configuring the Data Message Output for detailed information on 'THIS'
and 'OTHER' port terminology.

$RD1,SEC,WEEK,FREQ,DSPLOCK,BER2,AGC,DDS,DOPPLER,DSPSTAT,ARMSTAT,
DIFFSTAT,NAVCON
where:
Message
Component

Description

SEC

Second of GPS week (may be a couple of seconds old)

WEEK

GPS week number

FREQ

L-band frequency in MHz (1575.4200 is used for SBAS)

DSPLOCK

N/A

BER2

BER - given for both SBAS satellites being tracked

AGC

L-band signal strength

DDS

0.0 for SBAS

DOPPLER

0 for SBAS

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 494

Commands and Messages

DSPSTAT

Status bit mask for the DSP tracking of SBAS

•
•
•
•
•
•

ARMSTAT

Bit 0 = Carrier lock
Bit 1 = BER OK (Viterbi lock) (yellow LED 2)
Bit 2 =Atlas: DSP got lock and has stable freq; WAAS: Frame sync2
Bit 3 = Frame sync1
Bit 4 = Track mode (same as carrier lock)
Bits 5 - 15 Unused

Status bit mask for the ARM GPS solution (ARM status values shown below)

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Bit 0 = GPS lock (yellow LED 1)
Bit 1 = DGPS valid data
Bit 2 = ARM has lock
Bit 3 = Diff and GPS (flashing green LED 3)
Bit 4 = GPS solution is good (solid green LED 3)
Bit 5 = ARM controls yellow LED 2
Bit 6 = ARM command for yellow LED 2
Bits 7 - 15 Unused

DIFFSTAT

SBAS PRN of the satellite in use

NAVCON

Series of hex character fields with each field representing the number of GPS satellites satisfying
a certain condition, all of which conditions are required if the satellite is to be used in the solution
Example of NAVCON for the value 179889A shown below (read right to left)



Hex Field

Description

Value

1 (right
most field)

Hexadecimal count of satellites with valid tracks

A

2

Hexadecimal count of satellites for which an
ephemeris message has been received

9

3

Hexadecimal count of satellites which are healthy

8

4

Hexadecimal count of satellites which passed the
criteria of hex fields 1,2,3 and 5 (satellites that er
tracked, have an ephemeris, are healthy, and are
above the elevation mask)

8

5

Hexadecimal count of satellites above the elevation
mask

9

6

Hexadecimal count of satellites for which a differential
correction is available

7

7

Hexadecimal count of satellites for which a differential
correction is NOT available

1

Carriage return

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 495

Commands and Messages



Line feed

Additional
Information

Related
Commands

JASC,D1 (RD1)

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 496

Commands and Messages

TSS1 Message
Message
Type

Vector, Data

Description

Heave, pitch, and roll message in the commonly used TSS1 message format

Command
Format to
Request
Message

$JASC,PTSS1,r[,OTHER]
where:
• 'r' = message rate (in Hz) of 0 (off), 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 5, 10, or 20 (if subscribed)
• ',OTHER' = optional field, enacts a change on the current port when you send the command without it (and without
the brackets) and enacts a change on the other port when you send the command with it (without the brackets). See
Configuring the Data Message Output for detailed information on 'THIS' and 'OTHER' port terminology.

:XXAAAASMHHHHQMRRRRSMPPPP
Message
Format

where:
Message
Component

Description

XX

Horizontal acceleration (hex value), in 3.83 cm/s², with a range of zero to 9.81 m/s²

AAAA

Vertical acceleration (hex value - 2’s complement), in 0.0625 cm/s², with a range of –20.48 to
+20.48 m/s²

S

Space character

M

Space if positive; minus if negative

HHHH

Heave, in centimeters, with a range of –99.99 to +99.99 meters

Q

Status flag
Value

Description

h

Heading aided mode (settling) - The System is receiving heading aiding
signals from a gyrocompass but is still awaiting the end of the three minutes
settling period after power-on or a change of mode or heave bandwidth.
The gyrocompass takes approximately five minutes to settle after it has
been powered on. During this time, gyrocompass aiding of the System will
not be perfect. The status flag does NOT indicate thiscondition.

F

Full aided mode (settled condition) - The System is receiving and using
aiding signals from a gyrocompass and from a GNSS receiver or a
Doppler log.

M

Space if positive; minus if negative

RRRR

Roll, in units of 0.01 degrees (ex: 1000 = 10°), with a range of –99.99° to +99.99°

S

Space character

M

Space if positive; minus if negative

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 497

Commands and Messages

Example

PPPP

Pitch, in units of 0.01 degrees (ex: 1000 = 10°), with a range of –99.99° to +99.99°



Carriage return



Line feed

:020010 -0001F 0023 -0169
where:
• XX = 02, horizontal acceleration, which is 7.66 cm/s²
• (XX = 02 (hex) = decimal 2, multiplied by 3.83 cm/s² yields 7.66 cm/s²)

•
•

AAAA = 0010, vertical acceleration, which is 1 cm/s²
(AAAA = 0010 (hex), which = decimal 16, multiplied by 0.0625 cm/s² yields 1 cm/s²)

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

S = (space)
M = (minus), meaning following heave value is negative
HHHH = 0001, heave, which is 1 cm (-1 cm based on the Mvalue)
Q = F, status flag, which is full aided mode
M = (space), meaning following roll value is positive
RRRR = 0023, roll, which is 0.23°
S = (space)
M = (minus), meaning following pitch value is negative
PPPP = 0169, pitch, which is 1.69°

Additional
Information

Related
Commands

JASC,PTSS1

Topic Last Updated: v1.07 / February 16, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 498

Resources
Reference Documents
National Marine Electronics Association
National Marine Electronics Association (NMEA) Standard for Interfacing Marine Electronic Devices
Version 2.1, October 15, NMEA 1995
7 Riggs Avenue
Severna Park, MD 21146 Tel:
+1-410-975-9425
Tel Toll Free: +1-800-808-6632
http://www.nmea.org/
Radio Technical Commission for Maritime Services
RTCM Recommended Standards for Differential NAVSTAR GPS Service Version 2.2
Developed by Special Committee No. 104, RTCM 1998 1800
N Kent St, Suite 1060
Arlington, VA 22209, USA Tel:
+1-703-527-2000
http://www.rtcm.org/
Radio Technical Commission for Aeronautics
Minimum Operational Performance Standards (MOPS) for Global Positioning System/Wide Area Augmentation System Airborne
Equipment
Document RTCA D0-229A, Special Committee No. 159, RTCA 1998 71828 L
Street, NW, Suite 805
Washington, D.C. 20036 USA Tel:
+1-202-833-9339
http://www.rtca.org/

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 499

ARIC Research Corporation
Interface Control Document, Navstar GPS Space Segment/Navigation User Interfaces
ICD-GPS-200, April 12, 2000

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 500

Resources
2250 E. Imperial Highway, Suite 450 El
Segundo, CA 90245-3509
http://www.navcen.uscg.gov/

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 501

Resources

Websites
Hemisphere GNSS
http://www.hemispheregnss.com

FAA WAAS
This site offers general information on the WAAS service provided by the U.S. FAAS.
http://www.faa.gov/about/office_org/headquarters_offices/ato/service_units/techops/navservices/gnss/waas/

ESA EGNOS System Test Bed
This site contains information relating to past performance, real-time performance, and broadcast schedule of
EGNOS.
http://www.esa.int/esaNA/egnos.html

Solar and Ionosphereic Activity
The following sites are useful in providing details regarding solar and ionospheric activity.
http://iono.jpl.nasa.gov
http://www.spaceweather.com

Topic Last Updated: v1.06 / March 10, 2015

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 502

Change History

Change History v1.09
$JI

Removed from document

$Atlas, LIMIT, Command

Command added

50Hz

Data Message added

20Hz

Data Message added

Bin5

Added

Bin122

Added

JATT NMEAHE Command

updated command

JDISNAVEMODE Command

replaced “Phoenix” with “Athena”

JATLAS Command

Added

$JPPS Command

Added note

JPPS, PERIOD Command

Added

JPPS,WIDTH Command

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Added units

Page 503

Change History

Change History v1.08

Atlas Commands

`
Removed content. “ When the Hemisphere GNSS Atlas receiver demodulates the
proprietary signal it converts it into a local-area format for input to the GNSS
receiver (standard RTCM SC-104, message Type 1). The Atlas receiver
interpolates corrections from the wide-area signal, specific to the location using
Atlas service processing algorithms. The resulting RTCM corrections are those that
would be calculated if a reference station were set up at the present location. This
type of solution ensures a consistent level of accuracy across the entire coverage
area. The GNSS receiver provides position information to the Atlas receiver for
Atlas service calculations. Atlas high precision services are also available. Atlas
high precision services require a dual frequency receiver such as the Eclipse to
function properly and are approximately three to seven times more accurate than
standard Atlas service.”

Bin1
Changed “GPSWeek” Values to “0 to 65535
Added:

When $JDISNAVMODE,PHOENIX enabled
7 = RTK float (SureFix enabled)
8 = RTK integer fixed (SureFix enabled)
9 = RTK SureFixed
10 = aRTK integer fixed
11 = aRTK float
12 = aRTK Atlas converged
13 = aRTK Atlas un-converged
14 = Atlas converged
15 = Atlas un-converged

Bin19
Added NavMode Value “0-255”

Bin100
Changed “GPSWeek” values to “0 to 65535

JDISNAVMODE
New topic added
PSAT, BLV
Added “BLV” to Message Format

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 504

Change History

Change History v1.07.1
$PSAT, ATTSTAT

Added “S,” to $PSAT, ATTSTAT,MSEP, CSEP

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 505

Change History

Change History v1.07
Atlas Commands

Removed: •”L-Band Commands”
Updated: •”Command/Description” table

Bin16

Moved from GALILEO Commands to GNSS Commands

Ethernet
Configuration

New topic added

GALILEO Commands

Added note:
*Note: For observations in tracking status, see GNSS, Bin 16 & Bin 19.
Added:
•Commands and Messages

GPS to GNSS

Changed GPS to GNSS throughout the document where applicable

GPGSA

Changed to GNGSA (where applicable)

GNGSA

Document system ID 6

GQGSV

Section added

JASC Command
Overview

Removed:
•JASC, PSAT,SMARTBASE
Added:
•JASC< PSAT< VCT,1
JASC, GG Command section added
Replaced JASC, GP to JASC GN

JBIN Command

Added Bin16, Bin44

JBOTT Command

Removed:
•”Omni”, Added “L-Band”. Removed from description “It also allows you to reset the Lband high precision services resolution algorithm.”

JDIFFX, GNSSOUT
GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 506

Change History

Command

Added:
•BEIDOU, GALILEO to Command Format. Replaced “both” GPOS and GLONASS with “all”GPS
and GLONASS

JDIFFX, INCLUDE
Command

Added:
•[, ATLAS] to Command Format

JDIFF Subscription
Code

Removed

JETHERNET-

Added topic

JETHERNET MODE

Added topic

JETHERNET PORTI

Added topic

JHP

Removed topic

JHP, LIMIT
Command

Removed topic

JHP, MODE,
AUTOSEED
Command

Removed topic

JHP, MODE<
IGNORECONV
Command

Removed topic

JHP, POS
\Command

Removed topic

JHP, POS, LAT,
LON, HGT
Command

Removed topic

JHP, POS, LAT,
LON, HGT,,,,
OTHER Command

Removed topic

JHP, POS, OTHER
Command

Removed topic

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 506

Change History

JHP, POS, PRESENT
Command

Removed topic

JHP, RESET,
ACCURACY
Command

Removed topic

JHP, RESET,
ENGINE Command

Removed topic

JHP, SEED
Command

Removed topic

JHP, SEED, LAT,
LON, HGT
Command

Removed topic

JHP, STATIC
Command

Removed topic

JHP, STATUS,
AUTOSEED
Command

Removed topic

JLX BEAM
Command

Added:•Receiver Response commands

JOMS Command

Removed topic

JPRN, EXCLUDE
Command

Added:
•
: ‘z,z,z…’ represents the GALILEO PRNs you want to exclude”, “Exclude no GALILEO
PRNs: $JPRN,EXCLUDE,GAL,NONE”

JSIGNAL Command

Description rewritten to read: “Set the receiver to use the specify signal: GNSS signals that the
receiver will attempt to track. Specific signals shown here are only valid for receivers supporting
the signal in question.”
Added:
•$>JSIGNAL,INCLUDE[,L1CA][,L1P][,L2P][,L2C][,G1][,G2][,E1BC][,B1][,B2][,B3]
[,E5B][,QZSL1CA][,QZSL2C]
Changed Command Format to read:
•Specify the signal(s) to be used
$JSIGNAL,INCLUDE[,L1CA][,L1P][,L2P][,L2C][,G1][,G2][,E1BC][,B1][,B2][,B3]
[,E5B][,QZSL1CA][,QZSL2C][,ALL]
Specify the signal(s) NOT to be used

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 507

Change History

$JSIGNAL,EXCLUDE[,L1CA][,L1P][,L2P][,L2C][,G1][,G2][,E1BC][,B1][,B2][,B3]
[,E5B][,QZSL1CA][,QZSL2C][,ALL]

L-Band to Atlas

Changed L-Band to Atlas throughout the document (excluding commands)

L-Band

Removed:
•high-precision, and high precision with GLONASS services”
•4.L-band (DGPS)
Replaced: “DGPS” with “Atlas”

NMEA 0183
Message

Format

Updated to:

XX
NMEA 0183 talker field (GP = GPS, GL = GLONASS, GA = GALILEO, GB = BEIDOU,
GN = All constellations)

Post-Processing

Added:
the following messages, which must be logged in a binary file:
Observations: Bin 76 (GPS), Bin 66 (GLONASS), Bin 36 (BEIDOU)
Or
Bin 16 (All constellations; required for GALILEO)
Ephemeris: Bin 95 (GPS), Bin 65 (GLONASS), Bin 35 (BEIDOU), Bin 45 (GALILEO)
Time conversion: Bin 94 (GPS), Bin 34 (BEIDOU), Bin 44 (GALILEO)
Changed:
(Crescent receivers must log Bin 94, 95, and 96 messages for GPS). Depending on the
application, the binary data can be logged to a file and then translated to RINEX at a later time on
a PC.

QZSS Commands
and Messages

Section added

Using RIGHTARM
to Load Firmware

Re-numbered list for accuracy

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 508

Change History

Change History v1.06

Binary Message

added the Bin3 and Bin209 message to the table.

Bin3

new topic

Bin209

new topic

Data Messages

Added the PSAT,ATTSTAT message

JASC Overview

Added the following command to the table:
JASC,PSAT,ATTSTAT
JASC,PSAT,BLV
JASC,PSAT,FVI
JASC,PSAT,SMARTBASE
JASC,PSAT,VCT:

JASC,PSAT,ATTSTAT

new topic

JASC,PSAT,BLV

new topic

JASC,PSAT,FVI

new topic

JASC,PSAT,SMARTBASE

new topic

JASC.PSAT,VCT

new topic

JATT

Added the JATT,MOVEBASE command

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 509

Change History

JATT,MOVEBASE

new topic

JK,SHOW

new topic

JEPHOUT

new topic

JMODE Overview

Added the following command to the table:
JMODE,BDSOFF
JMODE,GLOOFF
JMODE,GPSOFF
JMODE,SURVEY
JMODE,STRICKTRTK

JMODE,BDSOFF

new topic

JMODE,GLOOFF

new topic

JMODE,GPSOFF

new topic

JPPS

new topic,
including JPPS,WIDTH command and JPPS,FREQ command

JPPS,WIDTH

new topic

JPPS,FREQ

new topic

JQUERY,TEMPERATURE

new topic

JRAD Overview

add the JRAD,10command

JRAD,10

new topic

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 510

Change History

JRTCM,INCLUDE

Updated Command format section

JRTCM,EXCLUDE

Updated Command format section

JSIGNAL

new topic

PSAT,RTKSTAT

Updated description for ‘SYS' value in Message Format t to the following:
SYS Systems in use:

•

GPS: L1, L2, L5

•

GLONASS: G1, G2

•

BDS: B1,B2 B3

•

Galileo: E5a, E5b, E5a+b, E6

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 511

Change History

Change History v1.04
Beacon Receiver
Commands and
Messages

Merged topic with 'NMEA 0183 SBX Queries' topic

Bin1

Updated 'VEast' description to say "m/s" and not 'n/s"

Bin94

Updated description for 'r' value in Command Format to Request Message section to
the following:
'r' = 1 (on) or 0 (off) When set to on the message is sent once and then sent again
whenever satellite information changes

Bin95

Updated description for 'r' value in Command Format to Request Message section to
the following:
'r' = 1 (on) or 0 (off) When set to on the message is sent once (one message for each
tracked satellite at 1 second intervals) and then sent again whenever satellite
information changes

Data Messages

Added the PSAT,RTKPROG message

General Operation and
Configuration Commands

Added the following commands:

GLMLA

•

JDIFF,AVAILABLE

•

JFORCEAPP

•

JMODE,BASE

•

JMODE,FIXLOC

•

JMODE,GLOFIX

•

JMODE,SBASNORTK

•

JMODE,SURETRACK

•

JPRN,EXCLUDE

•

JSHOW,ASC

•

JSHOW,BIN

•

JSHOW,CONF

•

JSHOW,GP

Removed 'JASC' from beginning of response (just after '$') in Message Format
section

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 512

Change History
GPALM

Updated Message format section

GPCRQ,MSK

Changed Command Type to Beacon Receiver

GPCRQ,MSS

Changed Command Type to Beacon Receiver

GPDTM

Updated Message format table for consistency

GPGGA

Updated Message format table for consistency

GPGNS

Updated Message format table for consistency and added "NS" field (navigational
status)

GPGRS

Added "GSID" field (GNSS system ID) and "SID" field (signal ID) to Message Format
section; also changed max output rate to 1 (so in the Command Format to Request
Message section, instead of "20, 10, 2, 1, 0 or .2" it now says "1, 0 or .2")

GPGSA

Added "GSID" field (GNSS system ID) to Message Format section

GPGSV

Added "SID" field (signal ID) to Message Format section

GPRMC

Added "M" field (mode indicator) and "NS" field (navigational status) to Message
Format section

JASC,GN

Corrected "MSG" column entries to begin with "GN" instead of "GP"

JASC,GP

Changed max output rate for GPGRS to 1 (so in the Command Format to Request
Message section, instead of "20, 10, 2, 1, 0 or .2" it now says "1, 0 or .2")

JASC,PSAT,RTKPROG

New topic

JASC,PSAT,RTKSTAT

In Additional Information section removed incorrect text stating "To query the receiver
for the current setting, issue the JSHOW command."

JATT,COGTAU

Added following paragraph in Description section:
"COG is computed using only the primary GPS antenna (when using a multi-antenna
system) and its accuracy depends upon the speed of the vessel (noise is proportional
to 1/speed). This value is invalid when the vessel is stationary, as tiny movements
due to calculation inaccuracies are not representative of a vessel’s movement."

JATT,HRTAU

Changed heading rate time constant to rate of turn (ROT) time constant

JATT,HTAU

Updated Description section

JATT,PBIAS

In Additional Information section added text after first sentence

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 513

Change History

JATT,PTAU

Updated Description section

JDIFF

Updated Receiver Response section to show SOURCE and TYPE

JDIFF,AVAILABLE

New topic

JDIFFX,EXCLUDE

Added information for querying current setting

JDIFFX,GNSSOUT

Throughout topic replaced "GNSS output in correction formats" with "GNSS systems
to be output in the differential"

JDIFFX,INCLUDE

Added information for querying current setting

JDIFFX,TYPE

Updated 'type' options in Receiver Response section

JFORCEAPP

New topic

JFREQ

UpdatedAtlas satellite table

JMODE Overview

Added the following commands:

•

JMODE,BASE

•

JMODE,FIXLOC

•

JMODE,GLOFIX

•

JMODE,SBASNORTK

•

JMODE,SURETRACK

JMODE

Added receiver responses for BASE, FIXLOC, GLOFIX, SBASNORTK, and
SURETRACK

JMODE,BASE

New topic

JMODE,FIXLOC

New topic

JMODE,GLOFIX

New topic

JMODE,MIXED

Corrected query responses:

•

$>JMODE,MIXED,ON changed to $>JMODE,MIXED,YES

•

$>JMODE,MIXED,OFF changed to $>JMODE,MIXED,NO

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 514

Change History
JMODE,SBASNORTK

New topic

JMODE,SBASR

Corrected query responses:

•

$>JMODE,SBASR,ON changed to $>JMODE,SBASR,YES

•

$>JMODE,SBASR,OFF changed to $>JMODE,SBASR,NO

JMODE,SURETRACK

New topic

JMODE,TIMEKEEP

Corrected query responses:

JMODE,TUNNEL

•

$>JMODE,TIMEKEEP,ON changed to $>JMODE,TIMEKEEP,YES

•

$>JMODE,TIMEKEEP,OFF changed to $>JMODE,TIMEKEEP,NO

Corrected query responses:

•

$>JMODE,TIMEKEEP,ON changed to $>JMODE,TIMEKEEP,YES

•

$>JMODE,TIMEKEEP,OFF changed to $>JMODE,TIMEKEEP,NO

JNMEA,PRECISION

Added GPGNS to list of messages (in Description section) for which you can set the
decimal places output

JNP

Added GPGNS to list of messages (in Description section) for which you can set the
decimal places output

JPRN,EXCLUDE

New topic

JQUERY,RTKPROG

New topic

JRAD,7

Updated Receiver Response from $> to $>JRAD,7,OK

JRAD,9

New name of previous JRAD,9,1,1 command.
Added information on "JRAD,9,0" that turns base mode off

JRAD,9,1,1

Changed command name to JRAD,9

JSHOW,ASC

New topic

JSHOW,BIN

New topic

JSHOW,CONF

New topic (some of the information in this topic appeared in the previous JSHOW
topic)

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 515

Change History
JSHOW,GP

New topic (some of the information in this topic appeared in the previous JSHOW
topic)

JSMOOTH

Added 'DEFAULT' to Command Format section and moved response text (regarding
SHORT and LONG) from Command Format section to Receiver Response section

Local Differential and
RTK Commands

Added the following commands and message:

•

JASC,PSAT,RTKPROG

•

JQUERY,RTKPROG

PSAT,RTKPROG

NMEA 0183 SBX
Queries

Merged topic with Beacon Receiver Commands and Messages

PCSI,0

Changed Command Type to link to Beacon Receiver topic

PCSI,1

Changed Command Type to link to Beacon Receiver topic

PCSI,1,1

Moved example from Receiver Response section to new Example section

PCSI,2

Added Example section and changed Command Type to link to Beacon Receiver
topic

PCSI,3,1

Changed Command Type to link to Beacon Receiver topic

PCSI,3,2

Added $PCSI,ACK,3,2 as first line of receiver response

PCSI,3,3

Added $PCSI,ACK,3,3 as first line of receiver response

PCSI,4

New topic

PCSI,5

New topic

PCSI,6

New topic

PCSI,7

New topic

PSAT,GBS

Added "GSID" field (GNSS system ID) and "SID" field (signal ID) to Message Format
section

PSAT,RTKPROG

New topic

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 516

Change History
PSAT,RTKSTAT

Updated "ACCSTAT" field (accuracy status), added "SNT" field (ionospheric
scintillation) field, and removed CMR+ from TYP (will show as CMR) in Message
Format section; also added text regarding JSAVE in Additional Information section

Topic Last Updated: v1.04 / May 29, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 517

Change History

Change History v1.03
Bin66

Updated description to refer to GLONASS L1/L2 instead of just
GLONASS L1

Bin69

Updated description to refer to GLONASS L1/L2 instead of just
GLONASS L1

Bin76

Fixed spelling error:

•
▪

In Description section under "To determine L1P or L2P", changed "buts" to
"bits" in step 1 to read "Use the lower 16 bits provided in the message."
In Message format section corrected spelling errors:(1) changed "port" to
"part" for Carrier Phase (High part) in both instances of P7_Doppler_FL row,
and (2) changed "Cide" to "Code" in both instances of CodeAndPhase row

Bin98

Added "GPS" to description

Binary Messages

Updated descriptions for the following in the message table:
▪
Bin66 - changed GLONASS L1 to GLONASS L1/L2
▪
Bin69 - changed GLONASS L1 to GLONASS L1/L2
▪
Bin98 - added "GPS" to description

Eclipse II Subscription Codes

Fixed spelling errors:

•
•
•
•

Removed redundant column on far right of table
Changed "eDiff" to "e-Dif"
Changed "Raw Ou" to "Raw Out"
Updated table formatting

General Operation and
Configuration Commands

Added JSHOW,THISPORT command

GPGNS

Updated description of "mm" field (mode indicator) in Message Format
section

Hardware Platforms Overview

New topic

Interpreting the $JK

Changed shading at bottom of topic to only shade '3000', not '01/01/3000'

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 518

Change History
'Date'/Subscription Codes

JALT

Updated Command Format, Receiver Response, and Example sections to
more clearly define 'h' value.

JASC,PTSS1

Removed checksum; added units for Heave, Pitch, and Roll; changed
"gyrocompass settle time" in 'h' description from "several hours" to
"approximately five minutes" (see similar change in TSS1message)

JBIN

Updated descriptions for the following in the message table:
• Bin66 - changed GLONASS L1 to GLONASS L1/L2
• Bin69 - changed GLONASS L1 to GLONASS L1/L2
• Bin98 - added "GPS" to description

JDIFFX,TYPE

Corrected Receiver Response from $>JDIFF,type to
$>JDIFFX,TYPE,type and added 'type' list

JHP,MODE,AUTOSEED

Added the following Note at top of topic: "The autoseeding function is
available on the Eclipse II and miniEclipse with LX2 platforms. Autoseed is
not compatible with the original Eclipse’s memory structure."

JHP,MODE,IGNORECONV

Added the following Note at top of topic: "The autoseeding function is
available on the Eclipse II and miniEclipse with LX2 platforms. Autoseed is
not compatible with the original Eclipse’s memory structure."

JHP,POS,LAT,LON,HGT,,,,OTHER

Added the following Note at top of topic: "The autoseeding function is
available on the Eclipse II and miniEclipse with LX2 platforms. Autoseed is
not compatible with the original Eclipse’s memory structure."

JHP,POS,OTHER

Added the following Note at top of topic: "The autoseeding function is
available on the Eclipse II and miniEclipse with LX2 platforms. Autoseed is
not compatible with the original Eclipse’s memorystructure."

JHP,STATUS,AUTOSEED

Added the following Note at top of topic: "The autoseeding function is
available on the Eclipse II and miniEclipse with LX2 platforms. Autoseed is
not compatible with the original Eclipse’s memory structure."
Added definitions for 'status' field in Receiver Response section

JK

Added 'DowngradeCode' field to Receiver Response section and updated
response descriptions and Example section accordingly

JMODE,NULLNMEA

Corrected responses (in Receiver Response and Example sections):

• Changed $>JMODE,NULLNMEA,ON
to $>JMODE,NULLNMEA,YES
•

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Changed $>JMODE,NULLNMEA,OFF

Page 519

Change History
to $>JMODE,NULLNMEA,NO

JRTK Overview

Added JRTK,18,BEARING and JRTK,18,NEU topics

JRTK,18,BEARING

New topic

JRTK,18,NEU

New topic

JSHOW

Updated JFREQ (line 15 in table) to add information on bit rate and AUTO

JSHOW,THISPORT

New topic

JT

Added Receiver Response information for miniEclipse

Local Differential and RTK
Commands

Added JRTK,18,BEARING and JRTK,18,NEU commands

Quick Start

New topic

PCSI,3,2

Updated Receiver Response format and table to include time and date

PSAT,RTKSTAT

Added description for ACCSTAT (accuracy status) parameter in message
response

RD1

Removed checksum (*CC) from message format

TSS1

Removed checksum; added units for Heave, Pitch, and Roll; changed
"gyrocompass settle time" in 'h' description from "several hours" to
"approximately five minutes" (see similar change in JASC,TSS1 command)

Understanding Additive Codes

Updated examples at bottom oftopic

Universal Development Kit

New topic

Topic Last Updated: v1.03 / January 11, 2012

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 520

Change History

Change History v1.02
Beacon Messages

Removed topic; information now part of Beacon Receiver Commandsand
Messages

Beacon Receiver Commands and
Messages

Added information from now-removed Beacon Messages topic

Bin62

New topic

Bin65

New topic

Bin66

New topic

Bin69

New topic

Bin89

New topic

Bin98

AlmanData[8] is now a single row in the Message Format table with a link to
SSVAlmanData that provides detailed information

Bin99

sChannelData[CHANNELS_12] is now a single row in the Message Format
table with a link to SChannelData that provides detailed information

Binary Messages

Added information on new messages (Bin62, Bin65, Bin66, Bin69, Bin89)

Binary Messages Code

Updated to current version of code

COAST Technology

Added Note regarding Crescent and Eclipse boards

Commands and Messages
Overview

Added link for GLONASS Commands and Messages and removed link for
Beacon Messages since that information is now part of Beacon Receiver
Commands and Messages

Configuring the Data Message
Output

Added Note regarding specifying Port T when writing to a USB flash drive

Crescent Vector Commands and
Messages

Added PASHR and TSS1 to Crescent Vector messages table

Data Messages

Added the GPALM message

Determining the Receiver Type
and Current Application

Updated both tables

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 521

Change History
DGPS Base Station Commands

Updated definitions of commands

e- Dif Commands

Updated definitions of commands

EGNOS

Changed reference to "three satellites" to now read "multiple geostationary
satellites and a network of ground stations"

General Operation and
Configuration Commands

Added the following messages to the table:
JDIFFX,EXCLUDE
JDIFFX,GNSSOUT
JDIFFX,INCLUDE
JDIFFX,SOURCE
JDIFFX,TYPE
JFLASH,DIR
JFLASH,FILE,CLOSE
JFLASH,FILE,NAME
JFLASH,FILE,OPEN
JFLASH,FREESPACE
JFLASH,NOTIFY,CONNECT
JFLASH,QUERYCONNECT
JMODE
JMODE,FOREST
JMODE,GPSONLY
JMODE,L1ONLY
JMODE,MIXED
JMODE,NULLNMEA
JMODE,SBASR
JMODE,TIMEKEEP
JMODE,TUNNEL
JRELAY

GLMLA

New topic

GLONASS Commands and
Messages

New topic

GPALM

New topic

GPCRQ,MSK

Added Example section

GPCRQ,MSS

Added Example section

GPGGA

Added Note at top of topic, updated Command Format to Request Message
section to add "5" and "4" to list of message rates, added Example section,
and updated Additional Information and Related Commandssections

GPGLL

Added Note at top of topic and updated Additional Information and Related

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 522

Change History
Commands sections

GPGNS

Added Note at top of topic and updated Additional Information and Related
Commands sections

GPGSA

Added Note at top of topic and updated Additional Information and Related
Commands sections

GPGSV

Added Note at top of topic and updated Additional Information and Related
Commands sections

GPHDM

Corrected alternate format in Message Formats ection from
$HCHDM,x.x,M*CCto
$HEHDM,x.x,M*CC

GPMSK

Updated Receiver Response section and added Example section

JAGE

Added Example section and updated Additional Information section

JAIR

Added query code to Command Format section and added Example
section

JALT

Added "SATS" as a "c" value in the Command Format section, added
Example section, and updated Additional Informationsection

JAPP

Categorized Command Format section by receiver type, moved receiver
response text from Command Format section to Receiver Response
section, and added Example section

JASC Overview

Added the following messages to the table:
JASC,CMR
JASC,GL
JASC,GN
JASC,GP
JASC,PASHR
JASC,PSAT,RTKSTAT
JASC,PTSS1
JASC,RTCM3

JASC,CMR

New topic

JASC,D1 (RD1)

Added Example section and updated Additional Informationsection

JASC,DFX

Added Example section and updated Additional Information section

JASC,GL

New topic

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 523

Change History
JASC,GN

New topic

JASC,GP

New topic

JASC,PASHR

New topic

JASC,PSAT,RTKSTAT

New topic

JASC,PTSS1

New topic

JASC,ROX

Added Example section and updated Additional Information section

JASC,RTCM

Added Example section and updated Additional Information section

JASC,RTCM3

New topic

JASC,VIRTUAL

Added "Example" section

JATT,COGTAU

Corrected "Command Format" section:

•

Changed $JTAU,COG,tau to
$JATT,COGTAU,cogtau

•

Changed $JTAU,COG to
$JATT,COGTAU
JATT,SPDTAU

Corrected "Command Format" section:

•

Changed $JTAU,SPEED,tau to
$JATT,SPDTAU,spdtau

• Changed $JTAU,SPEED to
$JATT,SPDTAU
JATT,SUMMARY

Combined "Hex Code" table with "Response Components" table in
Command Format section and added Example section

JATT,TILTAID

Updated Receiver Response section

JBAUD

Added query information to Command Format section, updated Receiver
Response and Additional Information sections, and added Example section

JBIN

Switched first two columns of table in Command Format section, added
Bin62, Bin65, Bin66, Bin69, Bin89 messages to table in Command Format
section, and added Example section

JBOOT,OMNI

New topic

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 524

Change History
JCONN

Restructured "connect" command and added query command in Command
Format section, and updated Additional Informationsection

JDIFF

Added "LBand" to table in Command Format section, updated Receiver
Response and Additional Information sections, and added Example section

JDIFFX,EXCLUDE

New topic

JDIFFX,GNSSOUT

New topic

JDIFFX,INCLUDE

New topic

JDIFFX,SOURCE

New topic

JDIFFX,TYPE

New topic

JFLASH Overview

New topic

JFLASH,DIR

New topic

JFLASH,FILE,CLOSE

New topic

JFLASH,FILE,NAME

New topic

JFLASH,FILE,OPEN

New topic

JFLASH,FREESPACE

New topic

JFLASH,NOTIFY,CONNECT

New topic

JFLASH,QUERYCONNECT

New topic

JFREQ

Updated Command Format and Receiver Response sections and added
Example section

JGEO

Added "[,ALL]" to command in Command Format section, added Example
section, and moved text from Additional Information section to Example
section

JHP Overview

New topic

JHP,LIMIT

New topic

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 525

Change History
JHP,MODE,AUTOSEED

New topic

JHP,MODE,IGNORECONV

New topic

JHP,POS

New topic

JHP,POS,LAT,LON,HGT

New topic

JHP,POS,LAT,LON,HGT,,,,OTHER

New topic

JHP,POS,OTHER

New topic

JHP,POS,PRESENT

New topic

JHP,RESET,ACCURACY

New topic

JHP,RESET,ENGINE

New topic

JHP,SEED

New topic

JHP,SEED,LAT,LON,HGT

New topic

JHP,STATIC

New topic

JHP,STATUS,AUTOSEED

New topic

JI

Shortened fields in Receiver Response section format and table and added
Example section (moved text from Receiver Response section to Example
section)

JK

Moved response text from Command Format section to Receiver Response
section and added Example section

JLIMIT

Added query information to Command Format and Receiver Response
sections, added Example section, and updated Additional Information
section

JLXBEAM

Updated format and table in Receiver Response section (added lonrad,
latrad, beamrot,*) and added Example section (moved text from Receiver
Response section to Example section)

JMASK

Added Example section and updated Additional Information section

JMODE

New topic

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 526

Change History
JMODE Overview

New topic

JMODE,FOREST

New topic

JMODE,GPSONLY

New topic

JMODE,L1ONLY

New topic

JMODE,MIXED

New topic

JMODE,NULLNMEA

New topic

JMODE,SBASR

New topic

JMODE,TIMEKEEP

New topic

JMODE,TUNNEL

New topic

JMSG99

New topic

JNMEA,GGAALLGNSS

New topic

JNMEA,PRECISION

New topic

JNP

Added query information to Command Format and Receiver Response
sections and updated Additional Informationsection

JOFF

Added $JOFF,PORTC command to turn off all messages
on Port C and updated Additional Informationsection

JOFF,ALL

New topic

JOMS

Shortened fields in Receiver Response format and table and added
Example section

JPOS

Added query information to Command Format and Receiver Response
sections

JQUERY,RTKSTAT

New topic

JRAD_Overview

Updated descriptions in table

JRAD,1

Updated Receiver Response section and added Example section

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 527

Change History
JRAIM

Added query information to Command Format and Receiver Response
sections and added Example section

JRELAY

New topic

JRTK Overview

Added JRTK,28 to table

JRTK,1

Updated Receiver Response section and added Example section

JRTK,1,LAT,LON,HEIGHT

Updated Description section

JRTK,1,P

Updated all information in topic

JRTK,12

Added Warning at top of topic and updated Description, Receiver
Response, and Additional Information sections

JRTK,17

Updated Command Format, Receiver Response, and Additional Information
sections and added Example section

JRTK,18

Updated Command Format and Receiver Response sections

JRTK,28

New topic

JRTK,5

Updated Description, Command Format, and Receiver Response sections

JRTK,5,Transmit

Updated Description, Command Format, and Receiver Response sections

JRTK,6

Updated Command Format section and added Example section

JSHOW

Added "PORT" to optional ',SUBSET' data field in Receiver Response
section and added Example section

JSMOOTH

Updated Command Format, Receiver Response, and Additional Information
sections and added Example section

JT

Updated table in Receiver Response section

JTAU,COG

Added query response and example

JTAU,SPEED

Added query response and example

JWAASPRN

Updated all information in topic

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 528

Change History
Local Differential and RTK
Commands

Added the following commands:
JASC,CMR
JASC,RTCM3
JASC,PSAT,RTKSTAT
JQUERY,RTKSTAT
JRTK,28

L-Band Automatic Tracking

Reworded for clarity and added link to JFREQ command

L-B and Commands

Added JBOOT,OMNI command and JHP commands

PASHR

New topic

PCSI,1

Updated Additional Information section to describe different responses
depending on whether or not you are connected directly to theSBX-4

PCSI,3

Renamed to PCSI,3,1

PCSI,3,1

Renamed from PCSI,3 command and updated Receiver Response section
to include field descriptions

PCSI,3,2

•
•

Made the following changes:
Added "beacon" to Description; now reads "Display the ten closest beacon stations"
Removed "time" and "date" from Receiver Response format and table (see updated description for
"name" in table)

•

Expanded definition of "name" in Receiver Response table

•

Formatted Example to align response components

PCSI,3,3

Updated command description

PSAT,RTKSTAT

New topic

RD1

Revised message component names (for consistency compared to other
commands) and descriptions (to provide moreinformation)

Reference Documents

Updated contact information

RTCM SC-104 Protocol

Clarified message support information

SChannelData

New topic (related to Bin89 and Bin99 messages)

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 529

Change History
SGLONASS_String

New topic (related to Bin62 and Bin65 messages)

SGLONASSChanData

New topic (related to Bin69message)

SObsPacket

New topic (related to Bin66 message)

SSVAlmanData

New topic (related to Bin98message)

Subscribing to an Application

Corrected grammatical errors and added link to Hemisphere GPSwebsite

Troubleshooting

Changed from table to list (with drop-down text that appears when you click
any item in the list)

TSS1

New topic

Understanding Additive Codes

Updated examples at bottom oftopic

Using RightArm to Load Firmware

Updated procedure

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 530

Change History

Change History v1.01
GPGRS

Message Format section: changed format of message components mode and range
residuals (also added links in Description column of table)

GPGST

Message Format section: In Message Component column, changed HHMMSS.SSS
to HHMMSS.SS to match format of message

GPRMC

Message Format section: Updated decimal minutes portion of latitude and longitude
components in format and table so both are five decimal places (latitude =
DDMM.MMMMM, longitude = DDDMM.MMMMM)

PCSI,2

Receiver Response and Additional Information sections: Split format of response into
two lines and changed Word Error Rate from "Q" to "WER"

Topic Last Updated: v1.01 / September 23, 2010

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 531

Change History

Change History All Topics Alphabetical
Atlas Commands

`
v.1.08
Removed content. “ When the Hemisphere GNSS Atlas receiver demodulates the
proprietary signal it converts it into a local-area format for input to the GNSS
receiver (standard RTCM SC-104, message Type 1). The Atlas receiver
interpolates corrections from the wide-area signal, specific to the location using
Atlas service processing algorithms. The resulting RTCM corrections are those
that would be calculated if a reference station were set up at the present location.
This type of solution ensures a consistent level of accuracy across the entire
coverage area. The GNSS receiver provides position information to the Atlas
receiver for Atlas service calculations. Atlas high precision services are also
available. Atlas high precision services require a dual frequency receiver such as
the Eclipse to function properly and are approximately three to seven times more
accurate than standard Atlas service.”
v.1.07
New topic

Beacon Messages

v1.02
Removed topic; information now part of Beacon Receiver Commands and
Messages

Beacon Receiver Commands and
Messages

v1.02

Bin1

v.1.08

Added information from now-removed Beacon Messages topic

Changed “GPSWeek” Values to “0 to 65535
Added:

When $JDISNAVMODE,PHOENIX enabled
7 = RTK float (SureFix enabled)
8 = RTK integer fixed (SureFix enabled)
9 = RTK SureFixed
10 = aRTK integer fixed
11 = aRTK float
12 = aRTK Atlas converged
13 = aRTK Atlas un-converged
14 = Atlas converged
15 = Atlas un-converged

v1.04
Updated 'VEast' description to say "m/s" and not 'n/s"
Bin16

v. 1.07
New topic

Bin19

v.1.08
Added NavMode Value “0-255”

Bin44

v.1.07
New topic

Bin62

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

v1.02
New topic

Page 532

Change History
Bin65

v1.02
New topic

Bin66

v1.02
New topic
v1.03
Updated description to refer to GLONASS L1/L2 instead of just GLONASS
L1

Bin69

v1.03
Updated description to refer to GLONASS L1/L2 instead of just GLONASS
L1
v1.02
New topic

v1.03

Bin76

Fixed spelling error:

•
•

In Description section under "To determine L1P or L2P", changed "buts" to "bits" in step 1 to read
"Use the lower 16 bits provided in the message."
In Message format section corrected spelling errors:(1) changed "port" to "part" for Carrier Phase
(High part) in both instances of P7_Doppler_FL row, and (2) changed "Cide" to "Code" in both
instances of CodeAndPhase row

Bin89

v1.02
New topic

Bin94

v1.04
Updated description for 'r' value in Command Format to Request Message

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 533

Change History
section to the following:
'r' = 1 (on) or 0 (off) When set to on the message is sent once and then sent
again whenever satellite information changes

Bin95

v1.04
Updated description for 'r' value in Command Format to Request Message
section to the following:
'r' = 1 (on) or 0 (off) When set to on the message is sent once (one
message for each tracked satellite at 1 second intervals) and then sent
again whenever satellite information changes

Bin98

v1.03
Added "GPS" to description
v1.02
AlmanData[8] is now a single row in the Message Format table with a link to
SSVAlmanData that provides detailed information

Bin99

Bin100

Binary Messages

v1.02
sChannelData[CHANNELS_12] is now a single row in the Message Format
table with a link to SChannelData that provides detailed information

v1.08
Changed “GPSWeek” values to “0 to 65535
v1.03
Updated descriptions for the following in the message table:
• Bin66 - changed GLONASS L1 to GLONASS L1/L2
• Bin69 - changed GLONASS L1 to GLONASS L1/L2
• Bin98 - added "GPS" to description
• v1.02
Added information on new messages (Bin62, Bin65, Bin66, Bin69, Bin89)

Binary Messages Code

v1.02
Updated to current version of code

COAST Technology

v1.02
Added Note regarding Crescent and Eclipse boards

Commands and Messages
Overview

v1.02

Configuring the Data Message
Output

v1.02

Crescent Vector Commands and
Messages

v1.02
Added PASHR and TSS1 to Crescent Vector messages table

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Added link for GLONASS Commands and Messages and removed link for
"Beacon Messages" since that information is now part of Beacon Receiver
Commands and Messages

Added Note regarding specifying Port T when writing to a USB flash drive

Page 534

Change History
Data Messages

v1.04
Added the PSAT,RTKPROG message
v1.02
Added the GPALM message

Determining the Receiver Type
and Current Application

v1.02

DGPS Base Station Commands

v1.02

Updated both tables

Updated definitions of commands

e-Dif Commands

v1.02
Updated definitions of commands

Eclipse II Subscription Codes

v1.03
Fixed spelling errors:

•
•
•

Ethernet Configuration

Removed redundant column on far right of table
Changed "eDiff" to "e-Dif"
Changed "Raw Ou" to "Raw Out"
v1.07
New topic

EGNOS

v1.02
Changed reference to "three satellites" to now read "multiple geostationary
satellites and a network of ground stations"

Galileo Commands

v1.07
Added note:
*Note: For observations in tracking status, see GNSS, Bin 16 & Bin 19.
Added:
“Commands and Messages”

v1.04
Added the following commands:
General Operation and
Configuration Commands

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

•

JDIFF,AVAILABLE

•

JFORCEAPP

•

JMODE,BASE

•

JMODE,FIXLOC

•

JMODE,GLOFIX

•

JMODE,SBASNORTK

•

JMODE,SURETRACK

Page 535

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Change History

•

JPRN,EXCLUDE

•

JSHOW,ASC

•

JSHOW,BIN

Page 536

Change History
•

JSHOW,CONF

•

JSHOW,GP

v1.03
Added JSHOW,THISPORT command
v1.02
Added the following commands to the table:

GLMLA

•

JDIFFX,EXCLUDE

•

JDIFFX,GNSSOUT

•

JDIFFX,INCLUDE

•

JDIFFX,SOURCE

•

JDIFFX,TYPE

•

JFLASH,DIR

•

JFLASH,FILE,CLOSE

•

JFLASH,FILE,NAME

•

JFLASH,FILE,OPEN

•

JFLASH,FREESPACE

•

JFLASH,NOTIFY,CONNECT

•

JFLASH,QUERYCONNECT

•

JMODE

•

JMODE,FOREST

•

JMODE,GPSONLY

•

JMODE,L1ONLY

•

JMODE,MIXED

•

JMODE,NULLNMEA

•

JMODE,SBASR

•

JMODE,TIMEKEEP

•

JMODE,TUNNEL

•

JRELAY

v1.04
Removed 'JASC' from beginning of response (just after '$') in Message
Format section

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 537

Change History
v1.02
New topic
GLONASS Commands and
Messages

v1.02

GNGSA

v1.07

New topic

Document system ID 6
GPALM

v1.04
Updated Message format section
v1.02
New topic

GPCRQ,MSK

v1.02
Added Example section

GPCRQ,MSS

v1.02
Added Example section

GPDTM

v1.04
Updated Message format table for consistency

GPGGA

v1.04
Updated Message format table for consistency
v1.02
Added Note at top of topic, updated Command Format to Request Message
section to add "5" and "4" to list of message rates, added Example section,
and updated Additional Information and Related Commandssections

GPGLL

v1.02
Added Note at top of topic and updated Additional Information and Related
Commands sections

GPGNS

v1.04
Updated Message format table for consistency and added "NS"
field (navigational status)
v1.03
Updated description of "mm" field (Mode indicator) in Message Format
section
v1.02
Added Note at top of topic and updated Additional Information and Related
Commands sections

GPGRS

v1.04
Added "GSID" field (GNSS system ID) and "SID" field (signal ID) to
Message Format section; also changed max output rate to 1 (so in the
Command Format to Request Message section, instead of "20, 10, 2, 1, 0
or .2" it now says "1, 0 or .2")
v1.01
Message Format section: changed format of message components mode
and range residuals (also added links in Description column of table)

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 538

Change History
GPGSA

v1.07
Changed to “GNGSA” (where applicable)
v1.04
Added "GSID" field (GNSS system ID) to Message Format section
v1.02
Added Note at top of topic and updated Additional Information and Related
Commands sections

GPGST

v1.01
Message Format section: In Message Component column, changed
HHMMSS.SSS to HHMMSS.SS to match format of message

GPGSV

v1.04
Added "SID" field (signal ID) to Message Format section
v1.02
Added Note at top of topic and updated Additional Information and Related
Commands sections

GPHDM

v1.02
Corrected alternate format in Message Format section from
$HCHDM,x.x,M*CC to

$HEHDM,x.x,M*CC
GPMSK

v1.02
Updated Receiver Response section and added Example section

GQGSV

v1.07
Section added

GPRMC

v1.04
Added "M" field (mode indicator) and "NS" field (navigational status) to
Message Format section
v1.01
Message Format section: Updated decimal minutes portion of latitude and
longitude components in format and table so both are five decimal places
(latitude = DDMM.MMMMM, longitude = DDDMM.MMMMM)

Hardware Platforms Overview

v1.03
New topic

Interpreting the $JK
'Date'/Subscription Codes

v1.03

JAGE

v1.02

Changed shading at bottom of topic to only shade '3000', not'01/01/3000'

Added Example section and updated Additional Information section
JAIR

v1.02
Added query code to Command Format section and added Example
section

JALT

v1.03
Updated Command Format, Receiver Response, and Example sections to
more clearly define 'h' value

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 539

Change History
v1.02
Added "SATS" as a "c" value in the Command Format section, added
Example section, and updated Additional Information section

JAPP

v1.02
Categorized Command Format section by receiver type, moved receiver
response text from Command Format section to Receiver Response
section, and added Example section

JASC Overview

v1.07
Removed:
JASC, PSAT,SMARTBASE
Added:
JASC< PSAT< VCT,1
JASC, GG
Command section added
Replaced JASC, GP to JASC GN
v1.02
Added the following messages to the table:
JASC,CMR
JASC,GL
JASC,GN
JASC,GP
JASC,PASHR
JASC,PSAT,RTKSTAT
JASC,PTSS1
JASC,RTCM3

JASC,CMR

v1.02
New topic

JASC,D1 (RD1)

v1.02
Added Example section and updated Additional Information section

JASC,DFX

v1.02
Added Example section and updated Additional Information section

JASC,GL

v1.02
New topic

JASC,GN

v1.04
Corrected "MSG" column entries to begin with "GN" instead of "GP"
v1.02
New topic

JASC,GP

v1.04
Changed max output rate for GPGRS to 1 (so in the Command Format to
Request Message section, instead of "20, 10, 2, 1, 0 or .2" it now says "1, 0
or .2")
v1.02
New topic

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 540

Change History
JASC,PASHR

v1.02
New topic

JASC,PSAT,RTKPROG

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

v1.04

Page 541

Change History
New topic

JASC,PSAT,RTKSTAT

v1.04
In Additional Information section removed incorrect text stating "To query
the receiver for the current setting, issue the JSHOW command."
v1.02
New topic

JASC,PTSS1

v1.03
Removed checksum; added units for Heave, Pitch, and Roll; changed
"gyrocompass settle time" in 'h' description from "several hours" to
"approximately five minutes"
v1.02
New topic

JASC,ROX

v1.02
Added Example section and updated Additional Information section

JASC,RTCM

v1.02
Added Example section and updated Additional Information section

JASC,RTCM3

v1.02
New topic

JASC,VIRTUAL

v1.02
Added "Example" section

JATT,COGTAU

v1.04
Added following paragraph in Description section:
"COG is computed using only the primary GPS antenna (when using a
multi-antenna system) and its accuracy depends upon the speed of the
vessel (noise is proportional to 1/speed). This value is invalid when the
vessel is stationary, as tiny movements due to calculation inaccuracies are
not representative of a vessel’s movement."
v1.02
Corrected "Command Format" section:

• Changed $JTAU,COG,tau to
$JATT,COGTAU,cogtau
• Changed $JTAU,COG to
$JATT,COGTAU
JATT,HRTAU

v1.04
Changed heading rate time constant to rate of turn (ROT) time constant

JATT,HTAU

v1.04
Updated Description section

JATT,PBIAS

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

v1.04

Page 542

Change History
In Additional Information section added text after first sentence

JATT,PTAU

v1.04
Updated Description section

JATT,SPDTAU

v1.02
Corrected "Command Format" section:

• Changed $JTAU,SPEED,tau to
$JATT,SPDTAU,spdtau
• Changed $JTAU,SPEED to
$JATT,SPDTAU
JATT,SUMMARY

v1.02
Combined "Hex Code" table with "Response Components" table in
Command Format section and added Example section

JATT,TILTAID

v1.02
Updated Receiver Response section

JBAUD

v1.02
Added query information to Command Format section, updated Receiver
Response and Additional Information sections, and added Example section

JBIN

v1.07
Added Bin16, Bin44
v1.03

•
•
•
•

JBOOT,OMNI

Updated descriptions for the following in the message table:
Bin66 - changed GLONASS L1 to GLONASS L1/L2
Bin69 - changed GLONASS L1 to GLONASS L1/L2
Bin98 - added "GPS" to description
v1.02
Switched first two columns of table in Command Format section, added
Bin62, Bin65, Bin66, Bin69, Bin89 messages to table in Command Format
section, and added Example section

v1.07
Removed:
”Omni”, Added “L-Band”. Removed from description “It also allows you to reset
the L-band high precision services resolution algorithm.”
v1.02
New topic

JCONN

v1.02
Restructured "connect" command and added query command in Command
Format section, and updated Additional Information section

JDISNAVMODE

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

v1.08
New topic added

Page 543

Change History
JDIFF

v1.04
Updated Receiver Response section to show SOURCE and TYPE
v1.02
Added "LBand" to table in Command Format section, updated Receiver
Response and Additional Information sections, and added Example section

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 544

Change History
JDIFF,AVAILABLE

v1.04
New topic

JDIFFX,EXCLUDE

v1.04
Added information for querying current setting
v1.02
New topic

JDIFFX,GNSSOUT

v1.07
Added:
BEIDOU, GALILEO to Command Format.
Replaced “both” GPOS and GLONASS with
“all”GPS and GLONASS

v1.04
Throughout topic replaced "GNSS output in correction formats" with "GNSS
systems to be output in the differential"
v1.02
New topic

JDIFFX,INCLUDE

v1.07
Added:
[, ATLAS] to Command Format
v1.04
Added information for querying current setting
v1.02
New topic

JDIFFX,SOURCE

v1.02
New topic

JDIFFX,TYPE

v1.04
Updated 'type' options in Receiver Response section
v1.03
Corrected Receiver Response from $>JDIFF,type to
$>JDIFFX,TYPE,type and added 'type' list
v1.02
New topic

JETHERNET

v1.07
New topic

JETHERNET MODE

v1.07
New topic

JETHERNET PORT1

v1.07
New topic

JFLASH Overview

v1.02
New topic

JFLASH,DIR

v1.02
New topic

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 545

Change History
JFLASH,FILE,CLOSE

v1.02
New topic

JFLASH,FILE,NAME

v1.02
New topic

JFLASH,FILE,OPEN

v1.02
New topic

JFLASH,FREESPACE

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

v1.02

Page 546

Change History
New topic

JFLASH,NOTIFY,CONNECT

v1.02
New topic

JFLASH,QUERYCONNECT

v1.02
New topic

JFORCEAPP

v1.04
New topic

JFREQ

v1.04
UpdatedAtlas satellite table
v1.02
Updated Command Format and Receiver Response sections and added
Example section

JGEO

v1.02
Added "[,ALL]" to command in Command Format section, added Example
section, and moved text from Additional Information section to Example
section

JHP Overview
v1.07
Removed topic
v1.02
New topic

JHP,LIMIT

v1.07
Removed topic
v1.02
New topic

JHP,MODE,AUTOSEED

v1.07
Removed topic
v1.03
Added the following Note at top of topic: "The autoseeding function is
available on the Eclipse II and miniEclipse with LX2 platforms. Autoseed is
not compatible with the original Eclipse’s memory structure."
v1.02
New topic

JHP,MODE,IGNORECONV
v1.07
Removed topic
v1.03
Added the following Note at top of topic: "The autoseeding function is
available on the Eclipse II and miniEclipse with LX2 platforms. Autoseed is
not compatible with the original Eclipse’s memory structure."
v1.02
New topic

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 547

Change History
JHP,POS

v1.07
Removed topic
v1.02
New topic

JHP,POS,LAT,LON,HGT

v1.07
Removed topic
v1.02
New topic

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 548

Change History
JHP,POS,LAT,LON,HGT,,,,OTHER

v1.07
Removed topic
v1.03
Added the following Note at top of topic: "The autoseeding function is
available on the Eclipse II and miniEclipse with LX2 platforms. Autoseed is
not compatible with the original Eclipse’s memory structure."
v1.02
New topic

JHP,POS,OTHER

v1.07
Removed topic
v1.03
Added the following Note at top of topic: "The autoseeding function is
available on the Eclipse II and miniEclipse with LX2 platforms. Autoseed is
not compatible with the original Eclipse’s memory structure."
v1.02
New topic

JHP,POS,PRESENT

v1.07
Removed topic
v1.02
New topic

JHP,RESET,ACCURACY

v1.07
Removed topic
v1.02
New topic

JHP,RESET,ENGINE

v1.07
Removed topic
v1.02
New topic

JHP,SEED

v1.07
Removed topic
v1.02
New topic

JHP,SEED,LAT,LON,HGT

v1.07
Removed topic
v1.02
New topic

JHP,STATIC

v1.07
Removed topic
v1.02
New topic

JHP,STATUS,AUTOSEED

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

v1.07
Removed topic

Page 549

Change History
v1.03
Added the following Note at top of topic: "The autoseeding function is available on the
Eclipse II and miniEclipse with LX2 platforms. Autoseed is not compatible with the original
Eclipse’s memory structure."
Added definitions for 'status' field in Receiver Response section
v1.02
New topic

JI

v1.02
Shortened fields in Receiver Response section format and table and added
Example section (moved text from Receiver Response section to Example
section)

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 550

Change History
JK

v1.03
Added 'DowngradeCode' field to Receiver Response section and updated
response descriptions and Example section accordingly
v1.02
Moved response text from Command Format section to Receiver Response
section and added Example section

JLIMIT

v1.02
Added query information to Command Format and Receiver Response
sections, added Example section, and updated Additional Information
section

JLXBEAM

v1.07
Added:”Receiver Response” commands

v1.02
Updated format and table in Receiver Response section (added lonrad,
latrad, beamrot,*) and added Example section (moved text from Receiver
Response section to Example section)

JMASK

v1.02
Added Example section and updated Additional Information section

JMODE

v1.04
Added receiver responses for BASE, FIXLOC, GLOFIX, SBASNORTK, and
SURETRACK
v1.02
New topic

JMODE Overview

v1.04
Added the following commands:

•

JMODE,BASE

•

JMODE,FIXLOC

•

JMODE,GLOFIX

•

JMODE,SBASNORTK

•

JMODE,SURETRACK

v1.02
New topic

JMODE,BASE

v1.04
New topic

JMODE,FIXLOC

v1.04
New topic

JMODE,FOREST

v1.02
New topic

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 551

Change History
JMODE,GLOFIX

v1.04
New topic

JMODE,GPSONLY

v1.02
New topic

JMODE,L1ONLY

v1.02
New topic

JMODE,MIXED

v1.04
Corrected query responses:

•

$>JMODE,MIXED,ON changed to $>JMODE,MIXED,YES

•

$>JMODE,MIXED,OFF changed to $>JMODE,MIXED,NO

v1.02
New topic

JMODE,NULLNMEA

v1.03
Corrected responses (in Receiver Response and Example sections):

• Changed $>JMODE,NULLNMEA,ON
to $>JMODE,NULLNMEA,YES
• Changed $>JMODE,NULLNMEA,OFF
to $>JMODE,NULLNMEA,NO
v1.02
New topic

JMODE,SBASNORTK

v1.04
New topic

JMODE,SBASR

v1.04
Corrected query responses:

•

$>JMODE,SBASR,ON changed to
$>JMODE,SBASR,YES

•

$>JMODE,SBASR,OFF changed to
$>JMODE,SBASR,NO

v1.02
New topic

JMODE,SURETRACK

v1.04
New topic

JMODE,TIMEKEEP

v1.04
Corrected query responses:

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 552

Change History
•

$>JMODE,TIMEKEEP,ON changed to
$>JMODE,TIMEKEEP,YES

•

$>JMODE,TIMEKEEP,OFF changed to
$>JMODE,TIMEKEEP,NO

v1.02
New topic
JMODE,TUNNEL

v1.04
Corrected query responses:

•

$>JMODE,TIMEKEEP,ON changed to
$>JMODE,TIMEKEEP,YES

•

$>JMODE,TIMEKEEP,OFF changed to
$>JMODE,TIMEKEEP,NO

v1.02
New topic

JMSG99

v1.02
New topic

JNMEA,GGAALLGNSS

v1.02
New topic

JNMEA,PRECISION

v1.04
Added GPGNS to list of messages (in Description section) for which you
can set the decimal places output
v1.02
New topic

JNP

v1.04
Added GPGNS to list of messages (in Description section) for which you
can set the decimal places output
v1.02
Added query information to Command Format and Receiver Response
sections and updated Additional Information section

JOFF

v1.02
Added $JOFF,PORTC command to turn off all messages
on Port C and updated Additional Information section

JOFF,ALL

v1.02
New topic

JOMS

v1.07
Removed topic
v1.02
Shortened fields in Receiver Response format and table and added
Example section

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 553

Change History
JPOS

v1.02
Added query information to Command Format and Receiver Response
sections

JPRN,EXCLUDE
v1.07
Added:
: ‘z,z,z…’ represents the GALILEO PRNs you
want to exclude”, “Exclude no GALILEO
PRNs:
$JPRN,EXCLUDE,GAL,NONE”
v1.04
New topic

JQUERY,RTKPROG

v1.04
New topic

JQUERY,RTKSTAT

v1.02
New topic

JRAD_Overview

v1.02
Updated descriptions in table

JRAD,1

v1.02
Updated Receiver Response section and added Example section

JRAD,7

v1.04
Updated Receiver Response from

JRAD,9

$> to $>JRAD,7,OK

v1.04
New name of previous JRAD,9,1,1 command.
Added information on "JRAD,9,0" that turns base mode off

JRAD,9,1,1

v1.04
Changed command name to JRAD,9

JRAIM

v1.02
Added query information to Command Format and Receiver Response
sections and added Example section

JRELAY

v1.02
New topic

JRTK Overview

v1.03
Added JRTK,18,BEARING and JRTK,18,NEU
v1.02
Added JRTK,28

JRTK,1

v1.02
Updated Receiver Response section and added Example section

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 554

Change History
JRTK,1,LAT,LON,HEIGHT

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

v1.02

Page 555

Change History
Updated Description section

JRTK,1,P

v1.02
Updated all information in topic

JRTK,12

v1.02
Added Warning at top of topic and updated Description, Receiver
Response, and Additional Information sections

JRTK,17

v1.02
Updated Command Format, Receiver Response, and Additional Information
sections and added Example section

JRTK,18

v1.02
Updated Command Format and Receiver Response sections

JRTK,18,BEARING

v1.03
New topic

JRTK,18,NEU

v1.03
New topic

JRTK,28

v1.02
New topic

JRTK,5

v1.02
Updated Description, Command Format, and Receiver Response sections

JRTK,5,Transmit

v1.02
Updated Description, Command Format, and Receiver Response sections

JRTK,6

v1.02
Updated Command Format section and added Example section

JSHOW

v1.03
Updated JFREQ (line 15 in table) to add information on bit rate and AUTO
v1.02
Added "PORT" to optional ',SUBSET' data field in Receiver Response
section and added Example section

JSHOW,ASC

v1.04
New topic

JSHOW,BIN

v1.04
New topic

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 556

Change History
JSHOW,CONF

v1.04
New topic (some of the information in this topic appeared in the previous
JSHOW topic)

JSHOW,GP

v1.04
New topic (some of the information in this topic appeared in the previous
JSHOW topic)

JSHOW,THISPORT

v1.03
New topic

JSIGNAL Command

1.07

New topic
Description rewritten to read: “Set the receiver to use the specify signal:
GNSS signals that the receiver will attempt to track. Specific signals shown
here are only valid for receivers supporting the signal in question.”
Added:
•$>JSIGNAL,INCLUDE[,L1CA][,L1P][,L2P][,L2C][,G1][,G2][,E1BC][,B1][,B2][
,B3]
[,E5B][,QZSL1CA][,QZSL2C]
Changed Command Format to read:
•Specify the signal(s) to be used
$JSIGNAL,INCLUDE[,L1CA][,L1P][,L2P][,L2C][,G1][,G2][,E1BC][,B1][,B2][,B
3] [,E5B][,QZSL1CA][,QZSL2C][,ALL]
Specify the signal(s) NOT to be used
$JSIGNAL,EXCLUDE[,L1CA][,L1P][,L2P][,L2C][,G1][,G2][,E1BC][,B1][,B2][,
B3] [,E5B][,QZSL1CA][,QZSL2C][,ALL]

JSMOOTH

v1.04
Added 'DEFAULT' to Command Format section and moved response text
(regarding SHORT and LONG) from Command Format section to Receiver
Response section
v1.02
Updated Command Format, Receiver Response, and Additional Information
sections and added Example section

JT

v1.03
Added Receiver Response information for miniEclipse
v1.02
Updated table in Receiver Response section

JTAU,COG

v1.02
Added query response and example

JTAU,SPEED

v1.02
Added query response and example

JWAASPRN

v1.02
Updated all information in topic

Local Differential and RTK
Commands

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

v1.04
Added the following commands and message:

•

JASC,PSAT,RTKPROG

•

JQUERY,RTKPROG

Page 557

•

Change History
PSAT,RTKPROG

v1.03
Added the following commands:

•

JRTK,18,BEARING

•

JRTK,18,NEU

v1.02
Added the following commands:

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 558

L-Band Automatic Tracking

Change History

•

JASC,CMR

•

JASC,RTCM3

•

JASC,PSAT,RTKSTAT

•

JQUERY,RTKSTAT

•

JRTK,28

v1.07
Removed:
high-precision, and high precision with GLONASS services”
4.L-band (DGPS)
Replaced: “DGPS” with “Atlas
v1.02
Reworded for clarity and added link to JFREQ command

L-Band Commands

v1.02
Added JBOOT,OMNI command and JHP commands

NMEA 0183 Message

v1.07
XX
NMEA 0183 talker field (GP = GPS, GL = GLONASS, GA = GALILEO, GB
= BEIDOU, GN = All constellations)

PASHR

v1.02
New topic

PCSI,0

v1.04
Changed Command Type to link to Beacon Receiver topic

PCSI,1

v1.04
Changed Command Type to link to Beacon Receiver topic
v1.02
Updated Additional Information section to describe different responses depending
on whether or not you are connected directly to the SBX-4

PCSI,1,1

v1.04
Moved example from Receiver Response section to new Example section

PCSI,2

v1.04
Added Example section and changed Command Type to link to Beacon
Receiver topic
v1.01
Receiver Response and Additional Information sections: Split format of
response into two lines and changed Word Error Rate from "Q" to "WER"

PCSI,3

v1.02
Renamed to PCSI,3,1

PCSI,3,1

v1.04
Added Example section and changed Command Type to link to Beacon
Receiver topic
v1.02

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 559

Change History
Renamed from PCSI,3 command and updated Receiver Response section
to include field descriptions

PCSI,3,2

v1.04
Added $PCSI,ACK,3,2as first line of receiver response
v1.03
Added 'time' and 'date' back to Receiver Response format and table
v1.02
Made the following changes:

PCSI,3,3

•

Added 'beacon' to Description; now reads "Display the ten
closest beacon stations"

•

Removed 'time' and 'date' from Receiver Response format
and table (see updated description for "name" in table)

•

Expanded definition of 'name' in Receiver Response table

•

Formatted Example to align response components

v1.04
Added $PCSI,ACK,3,3as first line of receiver response
v1.02
Updated command description

PCSI,4

v1.04
New topic

PCSI,5

v1.04
New topic

PCSI,6

v1.04
New topic

PCSI,7

v1.04
New topic

Post-Processing

v1.07
Added:
the following messages, which must be logged in a binary file:
Observations: Bin 76 (GPS), Bin 66 (GLONASS), Bin 36 (BEIDOU)
Or
Bin 16 (All constellations; required for GALILEO)
Ephemeris: Bin 95 (GPS), Bin 65 (GLONASS), Bin 35 (BEIDOU), Bin 45
(GALILEO)
Time conversion: Bin 94 (GPS), Bin 34 (BEIDOU), Bin 44 (GALILEO)
Changed:
(Crescent receivers must log Bin 94, 95, and 96 messages for GPS). Depending
on the application, the binary data can be logged to a file and then translated to
RINEX at a later time on a PC.

PSAT, BLV

v1.08
Added “BLV” to Message Format

PSAT,GBS

v1.04
Added "GSID" field (GNSS system ID) and "SID" field (signal ID) to

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 560

Change History
Message Format section

PSAT,RTKPROG

v1.04
New topic

PSAT,RTKSTAT

v1.04
Updated "ACCSTAT" field (accuracy status), added "SNT" field
(ionospheric scintillation) field, and removed CMR+ from TYP (will show as
CMR) in Message Format section; also added text regarding JSAVE in
Additional Information section
v1.03
Added description for ACCSTAT (accuracy status) parameter in message
response
v1.02
New topic

Quick Start

v1.03
New topic

QZSS Commands
and Messages

RD1

v1.07
Section added

v1.03
Removed checksum (*CC) from message format
v1.02
Revised message component names (for consistency compared to other
commands) and descriptions (to provide more information)

Reference Documents

v1.02
Updated contact information

RTCM SC-104 Protocol

v1.02
Clarified message support information

SChannelData

v1.02
New topic (related to Bin89 and Bin99 messages)

SGLONASS_String

v1.02
New topic (related to Bin62 and Bin65 messages)

SGLONASSChanData

v1.02
New topic (related to Bin69 message)

SObsPacket

v1.02
New topic (related to Bin66 message)

SSVAlmanData

v1.02
New topic (related to Bin98 message)

Subscribing to an Application

v1.02
Corrected grammatical errors and added link to Hemisphere GPS website

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 561

Change History
Troubleshooting

v1.02
Changed from table to list (with drop-down text that appears when you click
any item in the list)

TSS1

v1.03
Removed checksum; added units for Heave, Pitch, and Roll; changed
"gyrocompass settle time" in 'h' description from "several hours" to
"approximately five minutes"
v1.02
New topic

Understanding Additive Codes

v1.03
Updated examples at bottom of topic
v1.02
Added link for Eclipse II codes, added Table 3 (additive code components),
and moved example text to end of topic

Universal Development Kit

v1.03
New topic

Using RightArm to Load Firmware

v1.07
Re-numbered list for accuracy
v1.02
Updated procedure

Topic Last Updated: v1.08 June 21, 2017

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 562

Change History

Troubleshooting
Use the following checklist to troubleshoot anomalous receiver system operation.
Receiver fails to power No
data from receiver
Random data from receiver No
GPS lock
No SBAS lock
No DGPS position in external RTCM mode
Non-differential GPS output
Multipath signals
Intermittent GPS Lock

Topic Last Updated: v1.02 / January 25, 2011

GNSS Technical Reference Manual
Current Version: v1.09/January 8, 2018

Page 563



Source Exif Data:
File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.7
Linearized                      : No
Page Count                      : 586
Language                        : en-US
Tagged PDF                      : Yes
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-701
Producer                        : Microsoft® Word 2016
Creator                         : Matt Steele
Creator Tool                    : Microsoft® Word 2016
Create Date                     : 2018:01:10 13:19:11-07:00
Modify Date                     : 2018:01:10 13:19:11-07:00
Document ID                     : uuid:8C35A6F5-1D98-4E62-8EBB-500BF7394D62
Instance ID                     : uuid:8C35A6F5-1D98-4E62-8EBB-500BF7394D62
Author                          : Matt Steele
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Navigation menu